LIBRARY OF CONGRESS, 
RV4/ 



i m? 



Shell* Dx £ 



UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. 



IMPROVED THEORY 

Practice of Medicine, 

BY A. H. DAVIS, M. D. 

This new Medical Work has been recently published by the author, 
and is one that bids fair to furnish a new era for this age, in point of 
effecting a unity of ideas in the medical world in relation to the causes of 
diseases and indications of cure. 

The authors undertaking for this work, aspired to solve the many sys- 
temic laws that govern each department that contributes to the divinely 
designed work of chemically perfecting elements in the ganglionic and 
circulatory transit elaboratories indispensible to the perpetuity of life. 

How well he has succeeded in this undertaking, a perusal of the work 
will reveal. The most important discoveries, leading to a better solusion of 
the causes of the various systemic derangements, are— a full and satisfactory 
solution of the functional uses of the nervous system in supporting nutri- 
tion. Secondly the transfer of the blood from the arterial to the venous 
capillaries is found to be depend ent upon the chemical evolutions support- 
ing Nutrition. The cause of the periodicity of chills and fever.— The uses 
of the spleen and supra-renal capsules of the Kidneys ; and that of the Arac- 
noid membrane of the Brain. The philosoply of Eespiration, Haermatiza- 
■ tion of the discs of the globules of the arterial blood.— Peristaltic motion in 
the small intestines,— Chyliferous absorption,— Of sleep and conscious re- 
action ; Of the systemic effort used to resume suspended Nutrition, etc. 

The treatises upon the various diseases are philosophical and interesting, 
based as they are, upon these important discoveries which furnish much 
valuable light upon the causes of disease and indications of cure. 

In this work it is clearly shown that arterial plethora, congestion and 
inflammation to be dependent upon a suspension of Nutrition. Conges- 
tion may be general or local ;— when it is general it is due to the blood be- 
coming too impure to support the chemical combustion required in Nutri- 



tion ; when local the defective nutrition that induces the congestion, is 
due to obstructed circulation in the ner yes at their spinal transits. Henct 
in the general suspension of Nutrition we tind the direct cause of conges- 
tive fevers; in the local, Pneumonia, and all the diseases that arise from] 
spinal congestion. From deficient Nutrition comes arterial plethora that 
induces an enlargement of the spleen, congestion of the membranes of the 
Heart, Dropsy of the chest, Bleeding of the Lungs, Consumptive decline,] 
Neuralgia, etc. There are many other discoveries contained in the work, of | 
much interest, too numerous to be described in this short notice. From the 
aid of these discoveries we are able to define the causes of fevers and a ma- 
jority of other systemic derangements, and advise their successful mode 
of treatment so clearly as to enable any intelligent person to treat their 
families scccesfully. 

The work contains a minute and full description of every organ and part of 
the system, and is written in as plain English language as possible, it being 
designed to be used as a reliable G-uide to Health. The work contains a full 
catologue of diseases the symptomes of which are plainly described, also 
their causes and successful mode of treatment. Botanical remedies only 
advised;— it also contains an extensive Botanical Materia Medica, each arti- 
cle of which is historically described, medical properties, uses, and quantity 
of doses given. 

The work will not fail to receive from intelligent physicians the merit 
properly due to its interesting discoveries; while persons possesing a copy 
will find in its teachings the means of preserving health and prompt relief 
from attacks of disease by the use of the simple but efficient remedies ad- 
vised. No person can afford to be without a copy. Call for Dr. A. H. 
DAVIS' Improved Theory and Practice of Medicine. Octavo, bound in 
cloth, and sent to any address, postage free, upon the receipt of a Postal or- 
der for $2.50. 

Address A. H. DAVIS, M. D., 

POST OFFICE BOX 1474, JANESVILLE, WISCONSIN. 

Office North Main-st., by the Gazette Office. Consultations personal or 
by letter free. 



i im: if ir, ovb id 



Theory and Practice 



OF 



MEDICINE, 



DEDUCED FROM 



.dforfg ||cars j|»ticccssj|al ^pijactic^, 



. O BY 

A. H. DAVIS, M.D., 

Prof, of Clinical Medicine in the New York Central Eclectic Medical College 
now Located in Philadelphia, 



CHICAGO: 

Published by the Author. 

1880. 




Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year i 
BY H. A. DAVIS, 
In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at 



Washington. 



INDEX. 



Pa-e. 

Ancient Medical History 13 

Alcemocon 23 

Acron 23 

Asclepidae School 24 

Arachnoidea 31 

Air-cells of the Lungs 53 

Abdominal Viscera 64 

Anasarcal Dropsy 131 

Atrophied Kidney 125 

Asthma . 202 

Ascites 225 

Apoplexy 22S 

Acute Inflammation 236 

Acute Inflammatory Rheumatism. 252 

Acute Sciatic Rheumatism 254 

Axilla Abcess 263 

Aconite 295 

Aloes 296 

American Valerian 296 

Angelica 297 

Arbor Vitas 295 

Arnica 299 

Anodyne 363 

Basic Nerves of the Brain 40 

Bronchium 50 

Bladder Urinary 88 

Bright's Disease 124 

Bilious Fever 154 

Bronchitis, Acute and Chronic . . 176 
Breaking Down by Suppuration .238 

Boils and Carbuncles 259 

Burns and Scalds 269 

Bilous Colic 269 

Balsamic Diuretic 360 

Balmony 299 

Barberry 300 

Bayberry Bark 300 

Belladonna 301 



Page. 

Bitter Root 302 

Bitter. Sweet 303 

Bitter Sweet, False 304 

Black Alder 304 

Blackberry Root 305 

Blood Root 306 

Blue Flag 306 

Box Wood Bark 307 

Broom Top 307 

Buchu . 308 

Buck Horn 308 

Buck Thorn Bark 309 

Bugle Weed 309 

Butternut Bark 310 

Chiron 17 

Coction and Crises 25 

Cerebrum 40 

Corpus Calosum 42 

Cerebellum 39 

Cerebral Nerves 41 

Cervical Plexus 47 

Caecum 86 

Calyces, Pelvis and Ureters .... 87 

Capillary Circulation 90 

Cystitis, Acute and Chronic ... 127 

Chorea (St. Vitus' Dance) 211 

Cholera Morbus 215 

Chronic Southern Diarrhoea. . . .216 

Chronic Inflammation 234 

Catarrh 246 

Cancer 240 

Chilblains 365 

Corns 262 

Canabis Indica 311 

Caraway 312 

Cascarilla 312 

Catmint 313 

Cayenne Pepper 213 



INDEX. 



Page. 

Checkerberry (Wintcrgreen) . ... 314 

Cherry Bark 314 

Cinchona 315 

Cleavers 316 

Cohosh, Black 317 

Colocynth 317 

Columbo 318 

Camfrey 319 

Cramp Bark 319 

Cranesbill 320 

Crawley Root 320 

Cubebs.. 321 

Culver's Root 321 

Camphor 358 

Cholera Infantum Powders 362 

Cholera Specific 362 

Cholera Mixture (two formulas). 363 

Cough, with Hoarseness 364 

Cough 3°4 

Cough Candy 364 

Chyliferous Absorption 94 

Dura Mater Membrane 31 

Diaphragm 60 

Diaphragm Motion 63 

Divisions of the Abdomen 65 

Divisions of the Intestines 81 

Duodenum 82-137 

Dermoid Tissue (the skin) 88 

Delirium Tremens 1 16 

Dermoid Depuration 130 

Duodenitis 14° 

Dysentery 147 

Diptheria, or Scarlatina Maligna. 75 

Dyspepsia 201 

Diabetes 229 

Dismenorrhoea 227 

Dandelion Root 322 

Dragon Root 322 

Dwarf Elder 323 

Diuretic (two formulas) 361 

Diaphoretic Powder 361 

Diuretic Formulas.. . 1 and 2, 363-364 

Disinfectant 365 

Dietetics 366 

Dilute Alcohol 372 



Pare. 
Diarrhoea (for) 363 

Drowning, Suffocation, Poison- 
ing, &c 373 

Esculapius 18 

Empidocles 23 

Emulgent Artery 49 

Endo Enteritis 144 

Erysipelas 242 

Elder Flowers 323 

Elecampane 323 

Ear-Ache 271 

Fluxions (Ancient theory of) ... 26 
Four Elements and four Humors. 25 

Falx 33 

Function of the Nutritive Nerves 91 
Functions of the Mental Organs . 103 

Felon, or Whitlow 258 

Fistulas 238 

Female Organs (Functions and 

Derangements) 271 

Fever Bush 324 

Fluid Extracts 372 

For Coughs and Soreness of the 
Lungs 364 

Gymnasia Practice 23 

Great Sympathetic Nerves 47 

Great Intestines (Colon) 85 

Ganglionic Nerve Offices 95 

Golden Seal 324 

Gold Thread 324 

Gravel Plant 325 

Guaiacum 325 

Hippocratic Works. 25 

Hepatic Plexus 48 

Hypogastric Plexus 50 

Hsematosine 62 

Hepatitis, Acute and Chronic. . . 131 

Hemorrhoids, or Piles 149 

Hectic Fever and Abscess 151 

Haemoptysis (Bleeding Lung). . .182 
Hectic Fever, its treatment .... 236 

Hydrocele 265 

Hernia 266 

Hellebore (White) 326 



INDEX. 



Hemlock 327 

Henbane (Hyoscyamus) 327 

Hops 328 

Hoarhound , 32S 

Hydrangia 329 

Hamlin's Cholera Mixture, 1 & 2. 363 

Intestines 80 

Insanity 114 

Irritable Throat 135 

Inflammation of the Caecum 146 

Inflammatory Fever 153 

Intermittent Fever 156 

Inflammation, its philosophy. . ..230 

Inflammation of the Groin 263 

Inflamed Eyes 244 

Inflamed Palmer Fascia .259 

Indian Hemp (Black) 329 

Ipecac 329 

Jostaliptes 24 

Jejunum and Ileum 83 

Jalap 330 

Juniper Berries 331 

Jaundice (Yellow and Black). ... 171 
Jockey Club (Perfume) 366 

Kidneys, their organic structure . . 86 

Kousso 331 

Liver 68 

Laryngitis 196 

Licorice 332 

Lobelia Seed 332 

Lovage 33S 

Liniment for Burns and Scalds. . 364 
Liniment for Sprains, Bruises, 

Pains and Aches 365 

Liniment (Spinal) 365 

Lily of the Valley (Perfume) . . . 366 

Medical History (Ancient) 9 

Medicine of the Hebrews 15 

Medicine of the Greeks 16 

Machaon 19 

Medical Teachings in the Temples 19 

Mesenteric Plexus 49 

Mesentery 84 

Mind 112 



Page. 

Muscular Motion 97 

Membranes, Serous 129 

Membranes of the Intestines, 

Mucous 140 

Measles 212 

Mumps 214 

Menses 273 

Menorrhagia 275 

Midwifery 280 

Materia Medica 2S8 

Madder 339 

Male Fern 339 

Marsh Rosemary 339 

Mandrake 340 

Motherwort 341 

Marjoram 342 

Mother's Relief 355 

Natural Labor 280 

Nutrition 91-231 

Nerve Functions 130 

Neuralgia 134 

Nervous System 45 

Nunquah 360 

Nitrate of Potassa 359 

Obstructed Menstruation 274 

GEsophagus 77 

Opium, Aqueous 342 

Orange Peel 343 

Oil of Sweet Almonds 359 

Pythagoras 21 

Praxagoras 27 

Pia Mater Membrane 32 

Processes of the Dura Mater .... 33 

Pons Varolii 41 

Pericardium 54 

Pancreas 73 

Peristaltic Motion 94 

Pylorus e . . , . . . 139 

Pyloric Inflammation 142 

Peritoneal Inflammation of In- 
testines 151 

Pneumonia, or Lung Fever 178 

Prairie Itch 247 

Pericarditis 248 

Pruritus 279 



VI INI 

Page. 

Parturition 280 

Pennyroyal 343 

Peppermint 343 

Pipsissewa 344 

Pleurisy Root 344 

Poke Root 345 

Pomegranate 345 

Poplar Bark 346 

Periodic Vomiting 270 

Phthisis Pulmonalis 186 

Prickly Ash 346 

Pulsatilla . 347 

Plaster (Gutta Percha) 365 

Perfumes 366 

Queen of the Meadow 358 

Quassia 347 

Renal Plexus 49 

Renal Organs 120 

Rectum 86 

Renal or Kidney Diseases 123 

Rickets 258 

Runaround 264 

Rheumatism, Acute and Chronic 250 

Retension of the Menses 274 

Rhubarb 348 

Road Nettle 342 

Red Raspberry 347 

Rue 348 

Sinuses 34- 2 38 

Spinal Marrow 43 

Spinal Nerves 46 

Splanchnic Nerves 48 

Solar Plexus 48 

Semilunar Ganglia 48 

Spermatic Plexus 49 

Spleen 74 

Stomach 78 

Small Intestines 82 

Systemic Nervous Rally 96 

Sleep and Consciousness 101 

Strangury 128 

Scarlatina Simplex. 171 

Scarlatina Anginosa 173 

Scarlatina Maligna (Diphtheria). 175 

Sciatica ... 208 

Small-pox 218 

Sympathetic Infantile Fever .... 235 

Scrofula 239 

Salt Rheum, or Tet er 241 

Scabies, or Itch 247 

Spleen, Enlargement of 249 

Stone Bruise 260 

Saffron 349 

Sage 350 

Sarsaparilla 350 

Sarsaparilla (American) 350 

Sassafras Bark 351 



P*ge. 

Skull-cap 351 

Sea-wrack 351 

Seneca Snakeroot 352 

Senna 352 

Skunk's Cabbage 353 

Snakeroot, Virginia 353 

Spearmint 354 

Spikenai-d 354 

Squaw Vine 355 

Sweet Fern 333 

Sweet Flag 334 

Sponge 358 

Sudorific, or Fever Drops 364 

Sudorific, or Fever Powder .... 361 

Simple Syrup 372 

Sweet Spirits of Niter 359 

The Solids 28 

The Brain 30 

Tentorium 39 

Trachea 50 

The Lungs 52 

The Heart 55 

Tartar on the Teeth 117 

The Senses 99 

Taking a Cold 118 

Typhoid Fever 160 

Typhus Fever 162 

Tetanus 210 

Turn of Life 278 

Toe-nail, Inverted 261 

The Process of Natural Labor. .281 

Tansy 334 

Tag Alder 334 

Thimble Weed 335 

Thoroughwort 335 

Tooth-ache 365 

Tooth-ache Drops 365 

Table of Signs and Measures 379-380 

Uterine Hemorrhage 276 

Uva Ursi 337 

Vis Medicatrix Naturae 9 

Ventricles 36 

White Swelling . . . , 250 

Wetting Bed at Night 271 

Wahoo 337 

Water Eringo 338 

White Willow (Salix Alba) 357 

Worm Seed 355 

Wounds 268 

Warts 264 

White Percipitate Ointment . . . 366 

Xanthoxylum 346 

Yellow Fever 166 

Yellow Dock 356 

Yellow Dock Ointment 356 

Yellow Jessamine 35° 

Yellow Parilla 357 



INTRODUCTION. 




HIS medical work embraces important discov- 
eries of systemic laws that have not been 
brought out by any previous author. For the 
want of this important knowledge, many of the 
derangements of the human system have been incom" 
prehensible and left to conjecture; hence the great 
variety of opinions of the causes of disease, and modes of 
treatment, that have divided the profession into many pathies. 
But with the full elucidation furnished by this work of the offi- 
ces the nervous system subserves in supporting nutrition, and 
the functional work of the vital organs, also the causes of con- 
gestion, inflammation, and febrile action, the various system- 
ic derangements are thus rendered satisfactorily clear to 
every intelligent mind. These abnormal conditions of the 
system when thus comprehended, suggest the remedial agents 
and the proper course of treatment to pursue to furnish relief. 
By these discoveries in the pathology of disease — pneumonia, 
scarlet fever, diptheria, cerebro-spinal meningitis, congestive, 
typhus, and yellow fevers, lose all their formidable character, 
and become simple diseases that readily yield to this mode, of 
treatment. So generally successful has been this treatment in 
these diseases, that the author has not failed to treat them suc- 
cessfully for over thirty-three years. This medical work has 
been carefully written and systematically compiled in order to 
educate a person in the order of procedure of every systemic 

7 



8 INTRODUCTION. 

law, so as to render a person competent for careful family 
treatment. The author, in preparing this work, has condensed 
it so as to place it within the reach of all, and offers it to the 
public with a sanguine assurance of its valuable contribution 
to medical science, and means of securing health and longev- 
ity to the family circle; also a saving of much wealth that may 
be used for educational culture and family aggrandizement. 
Health is not only the source of wealth, but it inspires confi- 
dence to undertake in great enterprises. • 



ANCIENT MEDICAL HISTORY. 



VIS MEDICATRIX NATURAE; OR, THE RECUPERATIVE LAWS OF 

LIFE. 

In the state of health the various functions are executed in 
a regular and harmonious manner, and are intimately connected 
by consent or sympathy; but, if a morbific cause impresses the 
organism, this harmonious condition is disturbed; a fresh 
series of actions results; and disorder supervenes. Physiolo- 
gists have noticed in every living body an instinctive action — 
an action of the living principle, manifestly directing its opera- 
tions to the health, preservation, or reproduction of a living 
frame, or of any part of it. This applies to the plant as well 
as to the animal. It is the vis medicatrix natures for and against 
which so much has been said; but which, if restricted to the 
operation we have mentioned, can no more be denied than the 
existence of life, of which we know nothing except by its 
results. It is strikingly witnessed in the reparatory power 
exerted by living bodies after the receipt of an injury. If we 
tear a branch from a tree, we find that the injury done to the 
parent trunk is repaired by an action analogous to that set up 
by the animal whenever a wound is inflicted upon it. 

In some vegetables the reparatory power is so energetically 
exerted that the lost parts are restored; and it is upon this 
plan that the utility of certain garden vegetables — spinach, 
parsley, cress, etc., reposes. Such a reparatory power is occa- 
sionly, but rarely, met with in the animal kingdom. We see it 
in the lobster, deprived of its claw, and in the serpent that has 
lost its tail. The nails and hair, too, regain their accustomed 
length when cut; and the same thing happens to the teeth of 
the Rodentia or gnawers. But few animals, however, possess 
to any extent the power of restoring lost parts; but all are 
capable of repairing injuries and removing disease, when it is 



IO DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

within certain limits. In cases of wounds and broken bones, 
the efforts of the surgeon are chiefly restricted to keeping the 
parts in apposition, and to preventing the intrusion of internal 
and extraneous irritants, while his reliance is placed on those 
sanitive powers that reside within the system to perpetuate 
the living frame in times of health, to recuperate the injured 
parts. No longer ago than the seventeenth century, the recu- 
perative powers of the system were so poorly understood as to 
ascribe the restoration of wounds to the unguents applied to 
the sword or instrument that inflicted the wound. This doc- 
trine was advocated by the Rosicrucians, and it obtained 
universal credence in that age. It was first employed at Flor- 
ence, in the commencement of the seventeenth century, by a 
Carmelite monk, who had just returned from India. The 
Grand Duke, hearing of the monk's marvelous cures, asked 
him for his secret, which he refused, fearing that the Duke 
might divulge it. Some time afterwards Sir Kenelm having 
rendered an important service to the monk, the latter, out of 
gratitude, communicated to him the composition of the pow- 
der, and Sir Kenelm took the secret with him to England. An 
opportunity soon occurred for testing its efficacy. A Mr. 
Howell, having been wounded in attempting to separate two 
of his friends who were engaged in a duel, was subjected to its 
employment. Four days after the infliction of the wound, Sir 
Kenelm dipped one of Mr. Howell's garters in a solution of 
the powder, and immediately, it is asserted, the wound, which 
was particularly painful, became easy; but as the garter grew 
dry, the pains returned, and were relieved by a fresh immer- 
sion of the garter in the solution. In five or six days the wound 
healed. James the First, his son — afterwards Charles the 
Second — the Duke of Buckingham, and all the principal per- 
sonages about the court, were acquainted with the circum- 
stances of the case; and James, whose enthusiasm was not 
counter-balanced by much judgment, and who was, withal, 
superstitious in the highest degree, obtained the secret from 
Sir Kenelm, and performed most astonishing cures. In no 
great length of time the composition transpired, and, as in all 
like cases, the charm evaporated with the disclosure. The 
powder employed by Sir Kenelm is asserted to have been sul_ 



MEDICAL HISTORY. II 

phate of copper prepared in a particular manner. Some affirm 
it to have been the ordinary green vitriol of commerce (sul- 
phate of iron.) 

Drvden alludes to the superstition more than once in his 
** T-Hpest, or Etichanted Isla?id" Thus Ariel: 

" When I was chicled by my mighty lord, 

For my neglect of young Hippolito, 

I went to view his body, and soon found 

His soul was but retired, not sallied out ; 

Then I collected 

The best of simples underneath the moon, 

The best of balms, and to the wound applied 

The healing juice of vulnerary. 

His only danger was his loss of blood ; 

And now he's waked, my lord, and just this hour 

He must be dressed again as I have done it ; 

Anoint the sword, which pierced him with this weapon salve, and 
wrap it close from air, till I have time to visit him again" 

[Act V, Scene 2d.] 
[And Miranda, when she enters with Hippolito's sword wrapped up.] 
Hippolito. — O, my wounds pain me. 

Miranda. — [She unwraps the sword.] I am come to ease you. 
Hip. — Alas ! I feel the cold air come to me. My wound shoots worse 
than ever. 
MlR. — [She wipes and anoints the sword.] Does it still grieve you? 
Hip. — Now methinks there's something laid just upon it. 
Mir. — Do you find no ease? 

Hip. — Yes, yes ; uporv a sudden all this pain is leaving me. Sweet 
Heaven! how I am eased. [Act V, Scene 2d.] 

It is likewise referred to in the third canto of the " Lay of 
the Last Minstrel," of Sir Walter Scott. 

The sympathetic ointments applied to the weapon, or the 
"armatory unguents," as they were termed, are of various 
characters, containing the absurd, disgusting, and often inert 
ingredients. The following extract from the " Sylva Sylvarum," 
or " Natural History," of Lord Bacon, strikingly exhibits this. 
The mode of managing the wound sufficiently accounts for the 
good effects ascribed to the cure by sympathy : 

" It is constantly avouched and received that the anointing 
of the weapon that maketh the wound will heal the wound 
itself. In this experiment, upon the relation of men of credit, 
though myself, as yet, am not fully inclined to believe to it, 



12 DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

you shall note the points following; first, the ointment, with 
which it is done, is made of divers ingredients, whereof the 
strangest and hardest to come by are the moss upon the skull 
of a dead man unburied, and the fats of a boar and a bear 
killed in the act of generation. These two last I could easily 
suspect to be prescribed as a startling hole, that, if the experi- 
ment proved not, it might be pretended that the beasts were 
not killed in the due time; as for the moss, it is certain that 
there is a great quantity of it in Ireland, upon slain bodies, 
laid in heaps unburied. The other ingredients are the blood 
stone in powder, and some other things, which seem to have a 
virtue to staunch blood, as also the moss hath. And the 
description of the whole ointment is to be found in the clinical 
dispensatory of Crollius; secondly, the same kind of ointment, 
applied to the part itself, worketh not the effect, but only when 
applied to the weapon; thirdly, which I like well, they do not 
observe the confecting of the ointment under any certain con- 
stellation, which commonly is the excuse of magical medi- 
cines when they fail, that they were not made under a fit figure 
of heaven; fourthly, it seemeth that the imagination of the 
party to be cured is not needful to concur, for it may be done 
without the knowledge of the party wounded; and thus much 
has been tried, that the ointment, for experiment's sake, hath 
been wiped off the weapon without the knowledge of the 
party hurt, and, presently, the party hurt has been in great 
rage of pain till the weapon was re-anointed; sixthly, it is 
affirmed that if you cannot get the weapon, yet if you put an 
instrument of iron or wood resembling the weapon into the 
wound, whereby it bleedeth, the anointing of that instrument 
will serve and work the effect. This, I doubt, should be a 
device to keep this strange form of cure in request and use, 
because many times you cannot come by the weapon itself; 
seventhly, the wound must be at first washed clean with white 
wine, or the party's own water;* and then bound up close in 
fine linen, and no more dressing be renewed till it be whole ; 
eighthly, the sword itself must be wrapped up close, as far as 
the ointment goeth, that it take no wind; ninthly, the oint- 
ment, if you wipe it off from the sword and keep it, will serve 
again, and rather increase in virtue than diminish; tenthly, 
it will cure in far shorter time than ointments for wounds com- 
monly do; lastly, it will cure a beast as well as a man, which I 
like the best of all the rest, because it subjecteth the matter to 
an easy trial." 

The lines in the above quotation marked in italics are the 
key to the solution of the whole mystery. Indeed, it is the 

*This wash is poisonous to the wound and discarded by surgeons. 



MEDICAL HISTORY. 13 

practice adopted at the present day in the treatment of 
incised wounds; and to this, not to the influence of the sympa- 
thetic powder or armatory unguent, must the main curative 
agency be ascribed, while a portion may be assigned to the 
mental revulsion produced on the sufferer, through his faith 
in the virtues ascribed to the application. The wound was 
carefully defended from the irritation of extraneous substances, 
and given up to that instinctive principle, which we have seen 
repairs the injuries to which organized bodies are liable. And 
it has been suggested that the results furnished the first hints 
that led surgeons to the improved practice of healing wounds 
by what is technally called the " first intention." The exist- 
ence, then, of such an instinctive power, can neither be denied 
nor lost sight of in the treatment of disease. (The error has 
been that undue weight has been attached to it, so that the 
practitioner was altogether guided by its manifestations— or 
fancied manifestations — in laying down his indications of cure.) 

MEDICAL HISTORY. 

TJie history of medicine from its origin to the beginning of the 
nineteenth century. Abridged from Renouard 's History of 
Medicine. 

At the death of the patriarch, Jacob, 1700 years before the 
birth of Christ, Egypt possessed men who practiced the art of 
medicine. This passage in the writings of Moses, is the most 
ancient authentic monument that we possess of the Healing 
Art. All that is more remote in the history of Egypt and of 
other nations, is envelbped in uncertainty and obscurity so far 
as medicine is concerned. We read in the Books of the He- 
brews that when Abraham was constrained by famine to leave 
the land of Canaan, he entered Egypt, where he found an 
abundance of everything to nourish his household and his 
flocks. At this epoch, which preceded the death of Jacob 230 
years, Egypt rejoiced in a very advanced state of civilization. 
Agriculture, geometry, architecture and metalurgy, had all 
then made a remarkable progress. I shall pass rapidly over 
the medical mythology of these early ages, and only state what 
is necessary to convey the early ideas they had of disease, the 
methods used by them in the healing art, and to show how 



14 DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

hard these pioneers in medicine had to struggle without the 
light of science to advance the art of healing. In the most 
ancient library of Egypt that treated upon all subjects, which 
was dedicated to Thermes, six volumes treated of medi- 
cine, which embrace a body of doctrines complete and 
well arranged. The first treated of anatomy, the second of 
diseases, the third of instruments, the fourth of remedies, the 
fifth of diseases of the eye, and the last on diseases of women- 
It must be agreed that this distribution was very methodic 
These writings are doubted as being the work of the ancient 
Egyptian priests; some think they were the work of a writei 
of the Alexandrian school, for it was about the epoch of the 
founding of that city that anatomical researches and medical 
philosophy began to flourish. Nevertheless, the description 
that M. Houdart gives of the progressive march of the science 
in Egypt, and, in particular, the method followed by the priests 
in the practice of medicine, is both interesting and instruc- 
tive. It is not necessary, he adds, to suppose that medicine 
reached suddenly in Egypt this degree of perfection. As was 
common among other people of high antiquity, they com- 
menced in the first place, as we learn, from Strabo, by expos- 
ing the sick in public, so that any of those who passed by, 
who had been similarly attacked and cured, might give their 
advice for the benefit of the sufferers. According to Herodo- 
tus and Strabo, the same usage appears to have existed among 
the Babylonians and Lusitanians. At a later period, this plan 
was much better calculated to accelerate the progress of the 
art; for all who were cured of disease were required to go and 
make an inscription in the temples, of the symptoms of their 
disease, and the curative agents which had been beneficial to 
them. The temples Canopus and Vulcan at Memphis, became 
the principal depots of these registers, and they were kept 
with the same care as the archives of the nation. For a long 
time every one had the privilege of going to consult them, and 
of choosing for his sickness or that of his neighbors the 
medicament of which experience had confirmed the value. 
This method was very good, notwithstanding its inconveni- 
ences, to advance science, because it rested entirely upon ob- 
servation. In this way, must have been collected a prodigious 



MEDICAL HISTORY. 15 

quantity of facts, from which might be deduced correct princi- 
ples in the practice of medicine, and indeed was brought 
about. The priests who were charged with the study of these 
observations, did not hesitate to seize upon the exclusive prac- 
tice of the art, and when they had collected a great mass of 
facts, they formed a medical code — the fruit of the experience 
of ages — which is call by Diodorus of Sicily, the Sacred Book, 
from the directions of which they were never permitted to vary. 
It was doubtless this code that was afterwards attributed to 
Thermes that made up the collection spoken of by Clement, of 
Alexandria, and which the Pastophoses followed in the prac- 
tice of medicine. If, in following the rules there laid down, 
they could not save their patient, they were not held responsi- 
ble; but, according to Diadorus of Sicily, they were pun- 
ished with death if, after departing from them, the result did 
not justify their course. 

MEDICINE OF THE HEBREWS. 

The sacred writings of the Jews furnishes us with the state of 
intelligence acquired by them and the surrounding nations, 
at the time in which they were written, more perfectly than 
can be derived from profane history. The sacred history 
states positively, that Moses, having been rescued from the 
river by one of the daughters of Pharaoh, was reared in the 
court of that prince and instructed in all the knowledge of the 
Egyptian priesthood, in which he became a proficient. On 
this account, when he presented himself before his sovereign, 
to demand in the name of the God of Israel the freedom of 
his people, who had been reduced to a cruel servitude for 
nearly 200 years, he was not at all embarrassed by the pres- 
tiges of the magicians and savans so frequently summoned by 
Pharaoh to meet him in his palace, for he was able to con- 
found them all with his superior abilities. Moses found a 
demand for all this knowledge in governing and looking after 
the health and comfort of his people, and in all the hygienic 
rules instituted, his sagacity was not directed to, nor made 
mention of, physiological laws or the pathology of disease, or 
any remedial agents to relieve the sick. It appears that all 
classes of disease were considered to be a punishment at the 



1 6 DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

hands of God for the breach of some moral law; and Moses 
directed that a specific article corresponding to the derange- 
ment be given to the priest for a sin offering, for which they 
expected to receive a forgiveness of the sin, and thereby find 
relief. This idea obtained among the Jews in the days of 
Jesus, which may be inferred from his remark: "Thy sins are 
forgiven; take up thy bed and walk." From Moses' writings 
we may infer that the Egyptians at that time were as ignorant 
of the laws of the human system, the pathology of disease 
and medicinal remedies, as was Moses, and at this time Egypt 
was more advanced in science and art than any of the sur- 
rounding nations. 

THE GREEKS. 

Medicine among the Greeks during the primitive period. 
Greece, which will hereafter furnish us the most interesting 
and best preserved debris of the healing art of the ancients, 
does not give us, in regard to the history of this science dur- 
ing the ages that precede the Trojan war, anything more than 
dim lights and tradition stamped with a fabulous character, 
and often borrowed from other nations. The learned and 
modest Daniel Leclerc, details s.t great length her medical 
mythology; he names more than thirty gods or goddesses, he- 
roes or heroines, who were supposed to have invented or cul- 
tivated with distinction, some of the branches of medicine. 
He interrogates successively, history, poetry, chronicles and 
inscriptions; he neglects nothing in the hope of shedding 
some light on the chaos of improbable or contradictory tra- 
ditions; but his praiseworthy though unfruitful efforts have not 
drawn from them any valuable truths nor well-established 
facts. Sprengel, who undertook the same task 200 years later, 
with Germanic patience, has only succeeded in displaying a 
vast and confused erudition. It would then be temerity on 
my part to enter into a labyrinth where men of such great 
wisdom have lost themselves. I shall content myself by 
extracting from some of these fabulous legends a few anec- 
dotes, and some of the best credited names, that have become 
common knowledge, and which a physician ought to know, or 
suffer the imputation of ignorance, of the history of his pro- 
fession. 



THE GREEKS. 1 7 

Melampus is the first of the Greeks, following the chrono- 
logical order, who immortalized himself by extraordinary- 
cures, and to whom, from gratitude, altars were erected. He 
lived in the time of Prcetus, King of Argos, nearly two hun- 
dred years before the Trojan war. The most famous of the 
cures attributed to Melampus were those of the daughters of 
Prcetus. These princesses, who had taken vows of celibacy, 
became subject to fits of hysteria or monomania, during 
which time they imagined themselves transformed into cows, 
and would leave the palace to run wild in the forest, lowing 
like those animals. This nervous affection was communi- 
cated sympathetically to other women of Argos, who followed 
their practices, imitating their deranged conduct. The shep- 
herd Melampus, having observed that his goats purged them- 
selves with white hellebore, gave his young patients milk in 
which this plant was infused, then caused some robust young 
boys to chase them over the fields until they were thoroughly 
fatigued. Then he dressed one of his boys in the shape of a 
varmint, and enchanted them in the belief that it had come to 
take their malady and carry it away, never to return, then made 
them bathe in a fountain in Arcadia called Clitorian, which com- 
pleted their cure. In pay for so great a service Prcetus offered 
to Melampus the hand of one of his daughters with the third 
of his kingdom. The shepherd showed on this occasion as 
much fraternal affection as medical perspicacity, for he would 
not accept the offer except on the condition that his brother 
Bias should have a reward equal to his own. 

Chiron is less illustrious in the great acts that he performed 
than in the pupils he reared. He held his school in a grotto 
in Thessaly, and, if the chronicle may be believed, no philo- 
sopher of antiquity, no professor in modern times, could count 
in his audience as many celebrities as the Centaur saw in his 
cave. A majority of the heroes who distinguished themselves 
at the capture of the fleece of gold, or in the Trojan war, 
boasted of having been his disciples. Among these are enu- 
merated Hercules, Jason, Castor, and Pollux, the subtle Ulys- 
sis, the fiery Diomedes, the prolix Nestor, the pious ^Eneas, and 
the invincible Achilles. The hermit, it is said, taught them 
philosophy, music, astronomy, the military art, polkical 



1 8 DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

science, and medicine. He cured Amyntor of a blindness 
supposed to be incurable, and his renown for the treatment of 
ulcers was so great that the name of Chironians was given to 
those which resisted all curative means, and presented a ma- 
lignant appearance. Finally, it is said, this hero or demigod, 
so skillful in dressing wounds of all kinds, met his death from 
the wound of an arrow poisoned by the blood of the hydra of 
Lerna. Esculapius, of all the disciples of Chiron, was the 
most eminent in a medical point of view. He passed for the 
son of Apollo, by the nymph Coronis. Several cities of 
Greece have contended for the honor of his birthplace; but 
the general opinion is, that he was born at Epidaurus, a city 
of Argolis, where he had a temple and a famous oracle. The 
twins, Castor and Pollux, were anxious that he should accom- 
pany the Argonautic expedition, which shows that he was 
famous at that epoch as a physician, or rather as a surgeon. 

The Esculapius of the Hellenists, being of a date posterior 
to the Hermes of the Egyptians, and these two characters 
having between them many traits of resemblance, certain au- 
thors have thought that the latter might probably only be a 
copy of the former. However this may be, Esculapius ob- 
tained in antiquity nearly a universal veneration. His wor- 
ship, which passed from the Greeks to the Romans, extended 
to all countries penetrated by the arms of these two nations. 
We shall speak elsewhere of the principal temples erected to 
his honor, of the priests which were connected with them, 
and the progress they made in medical science. 

It is said that he brought from death to life Hyppolytus, 
son of Theseus, Capaneus, a Lycurgus, an Eryphile, and 
many others. In regard to the method which Esculapius 
followed in the treatment of diseases, as well as all else in re- 
lation to this deified personage, we possess no documents en- 
titled to much credit. The poet, Pindar, who lived seven 01 
eight hundred years later, is the first to describe it in the fol- 
lowing terms: "Esculapius cured the ulcers, wounds, fevers 
and pains of all who applied to him, by enchantments, charm- 
ing potions, incisions, and by external applications. The 
greatest number of writers after the Beotian poet, such as 
Galen, Plutarch, Pausanias, Pliny and others, have reiterated 



MEDICAL TEACHINGS IN THE TEMPLES. 19 

the same views. Plato, comparing the practice of Esculapius 
with that of his cotemporaries, gives the preference to the 
former. 

Machaon and Podalirius touch the limits that separate my- 
thology from history. Their existence cannot be considered 
doubtful, for the Homeric songs and other ancient writings 
agree in representing them as valiant captains and skillful 
physicians, who took an active part in the siege of Troy. 
They are said to be the sons of Esculapius, but this term is 
often used to designate men who devote themselves to the 
medical profession. 

Machaon was regarded the elder of these two brothers. He 
treated Menelaus when that prince was treacherously wounded 
by Pindar. He cured Philoctetes, who was lame from a 
wound which he inflicted upon himself by letting fail upon his 
foot one of the arrows of Hercules. This illustrious surgeon 
met his death in a singular combat under the walls of Troy. 

Podalirius survived him and assisted in the ruin of the king- 
dom of Priam, but on his return he was cast by a. tempest on 
the shore of Caria. A shepherd rescued him, and learning 
that he was a physician, he conducted him to Dametus, the 
king of the country, whose daughter had lately accidentally 
fallen from the top of the house. She was insensible and 
motionless, and the attendants already supposed her dead, but 
this skillful surgeon bled her from both arms, and had the hap- 
piness of restoring her to life. 

Here is the first example of bleeding practiced for the pur- 
pose of a cure; unhappily it is not very authentic. Stephen, 
of Byzance, who reports it nearly 1600 years after the event, 
wrote in the fifth century, and he does not indicate the source 
from whence he obtained it. However, the habit of blood 
letting goes back far beyond the era of Hippocrates, for he 
speaks of it in several places as a common practice in his 
time. 

MEDICAL TEACHINGS IN THE TEMPLES. 

The priests of Esculapius formed a separate caste, trans- 
mitting from one to another their medical knowledge as a 
family heritage. In the remotest times, no layman, says 
Galen, was admitted to participate in the sacred science, but 



20 DAVIS THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

at a later period this severe secrecy was relaxed. They con- 
sented to reveal their secrets to strangers, provided they would 
fulfill the tests of initiation. There was then, according to 
every probability, some sort of medical instruction given in 
each temple. History has preserved three schools that have 
great reputation, viz: that of Rhodes, the most ancient of all, 
which had already ceased to exist at the time of Hippocrates, 
and of its doctrines we have no account whatever; that of 
Cnidus, which was the first to publish a small repertory, with 
the title of the Cnidian sentences; finally, that of Cos, the 
most celebrated of all, and which has given birth to a great 
number of illustrious physicians, whose writings constitute the 
most valuable memorials of antique medicine. Among the 
means of instruction offered by the priests of Esculapius, were 
the native tablets which it was customary to fasten to the 
walls and columns of the temples, after the examples of the 
Egyptians. Those tablets generally showed the name of the 
patient, the kind of disease with which he was attacked, and 
the manner of his cure. One of these tablets found at Rome, 
on the island in the Tiber, the site of the ancient Esculapian 
temple, bears the following inscription in Greek characters: 

" Lately a certain Caius, who was blind, came to consult the 
oracle. The god required that he approach the sacred altar 
to perform adorations; at once he passed from the right to the 
left, and having rested his fingers on the altai, he raised his 
hands and applied them to his eyes. He recovered his sight 
immediately, in the presence of the people, who rejoiced to 
see such marvels accomplished under the reign of our august 
Antonius. Lucius was attacked with a pleurisy, and every one 
despaired of his life. The god ordered that the ashes of the 
altar be taken, mingled with wine and applied to his side. He 
was saved, and gave thanks to God before the people who 
congratulated him." 

During the space of about 700 years, medicine in Greece 
underwent a first transformation; from having been domestic 
and popular it became sacerdotal, and wrapt itself in a mys- 
terious habit. Until that time the world had princes — captains 
and shepherds even acquiring reputation for their skill in the 
art; but after the Trojan war, we only hear of consultations 
given in the name of the divinity in temples, or in some cele- 
brated caves, such as those of Trophanius and Chironium. 



MEDICAL TEACHINGS IN THE TEMPLES. 21 

The practice of medicine in the temples of Esculapius, may- 
be divided into two epochs: in the first, which extends down 
to Hippocrates, the Asclepiadae, though employing for the most 
part superstitious means, have rendered service to the science 
by the taste developed among some of them for observation; 
in the second epoch, which extends from Hippocrates to 
Christianity, medicine in the temples gradually declined, and 
was more frequently a gross jugglery. Until this time, in fact, 
no medical edifice had been formed of materials taken at haz- 
ard and gathered generally without taste or method; no har- 
monious thought or premeditated design directed the researches 
of the men who made the first discoveries; but afterward, rea- 
son and genius unite to extend and improve what accident 
and instinct had suggested; and the scientific monument of 
this difficult art begins to rise, grand and majestic, gradually 
harmonizing all its parts. Gradually science unrobed herself 
of the grave and mysterious forms of which she had always 
been clothed in the east, to assume a dress less severe and 
more transparent, that stimulated the philosophers of Greece 
to become more communicative. The vestiges of this antique 
Egypto-Indian civilization which had served as a model for 
that of Greece, were insensibly disappearing. Soon the sages 
of Greece ceased their journeys in search of light in foreign 
countries, for their own country became in its turn a center of 
illumination for all nations. 

Pythagoras affords us the last example of peregrinations in 
search of wisdom. He is also the last of the sages who have 
transmitted their doctrines in an unusual language, and who 
made use of hieroglyphical writing. He was born at Samos, 
and flourished five centuries before the birth of Christ. He 
was at first an athlete, but having heard one day Pherecydes 
lecture on the immortality of the soul, he was so charmed that 
he renounced every other occupation to devote himself exclu- 
sively to philosophy. After having followed the course of this 
eminent master for some time, he felt desirous of knowing for 
himself the customs and names of other nations. He traveled 
in Egypt, in Phoenicia and in Chaldea, and it is said that he 
pushed his travels as far as India, where he commenced with 
the Brahmins and Magi, and was initiated into the secrets of 



22 DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

their worship, laws and doctrines. After a great number of 
years employed in schooling his mind by the practice of vir- 
tue, and enriching it with the most varied knowledge, he 
returned to his own country, and was honorably received by 
the tyrant Polycrates. His discourses had such success, that 
in a little time he drew around him a great number of disciples. 
He required of them a very severe novitiate of five or six 
years. They ate in common, using a very frugal diet, and 
assisted him in his lessons, and lived a modest, temperate life. 
Those only were admitted to participate in the mysteries of 
the order, but those who persevered. The veneration of his dis- 
ciples for him was so great that many sold their property and 
gave the proceeds to him for the general good. He did not 
limit his teachings to the city of Crotona, but visited the princi- 
pal cities of great Greece, among others, Terentum, Metapon- 
tum, and established communities in each of them, subject to 
the common rules. The Pythagoreans gained the esteem of the 
magistrates and the people; they were consulted on all difficult 
matters, and the superiority of their knowledge drew upon 
them the public confidence for a long time, but eventually the 
people took exceptions to their simplicity of costume, their 
symbolical language, their habitual silence, their avoidance of 
pleasure parties, and every thing, even to the purity of their 
lives; and the priests launched their anathemas at them 
because they did not share the superstitious prejudices of the 
multitude; mobs were excited against them; they were men- 
aced by the populace in every city; and because they had to 
seek concealment to save their lives, the greater number with- 
drew from the society. In this way the society was broken up, 
and scattered in different parts of Greece, and many of them 
revealed the secrets of their doctrine. 

A great number of the disciples of Pythagoras became illus- 
trious in different causes, but we can only speak in this work 
of those who followed the practice of medicine. History 
states that these physicians first introduced the custom of visit- 
ing their patients at their own houses; that they went from 
city and from house to house, fulfilling the office of physicians, 
as is done at present. On this account they were called 
periodic physicians, in opposition to the Asclepiadae, who were 



MEDICAL TEACHINGS IN THE TEMPLES. 23 

consulted, and treated the sick only in the temples. As to 
the Charlatans, who retailed drugs in shops, or at market, it 
appears that they never had a rank in the medical hierarchy, 
however numerous they may have been at certain epochs. 

Among the Pythagoreans who cultivated medicine, is Alcmo- 
con, of Crotona, who is said to have written on Anatomy and 
Physics. Empidocles, of Agrigentum, was more famous than 
Alcmocon. Many remarkable cases are ascribed to him, 
which attest his sagacity. Among many instances that prove 
this, we select the following : From time immemorial, pesti- 
lential fevers ravaged periodically his native city. He observed 
that the appearance of these fevers coincided with the return 
of a wind named Sirocco, which blows in Sicily from the east 
and south. He therefore advised to close by a wall the nanow 
gorge which gave passage to this wind, when it blew on Agri- 
gentum. His counsel was followed, and from that time the 
pest ceased to make its appearance in the city. Some mod- 
ern travelers have confirmed this remark; among others, Doctor 
Brayer has alluded to it in his excellent work, entitled, " Nine 
Years of Residence in Constantinople." The inhabitants of 
Selinus were a prey to an epidemic disease. A stream, by its 
sluggish course, filled the city with stagnant waters, from 
which were evaporated mephitic vapors. Empedocles saw 
this, and caused two small creeks to be conducted into it. 
This gave a new impulse to the waters, which ceased to be 
stagnant, and to exhale the noxious effluvia, and the scourge 
disappeared. 

Agrigentum saw flourish about the same time another physi- 
cian named Acron, who was not of the sect of the Pythagore- 
ans. He rejected every thing in medical practice, every 
species of physiological theory, and insisted upon the value of 
pure experience only. On this account he is regarded by 
some as the chief of the Empirists. All that can be said in 
regard to that, is that the separation of physicians into several 
sects, each one having principles, rules, and, in some sort, 
distinct symbols, did not take place for two centuries later, 
until the establishment of the Alexandrian school. 

THE PRACTICE OF MEDICINE IN THE GYMNASIA. 

It is an incontestible fact that medicine was practiced and 



24 DAVIS THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

taught in the gymnasiae of Greece, a long time before the 
Asclepiadse had divulged the secret of their doctrines. There 
were, in these establishments, three orders of physicians. A 
director, termed the Gymnasiarch, whose duties consisted in 
regulating the diet of the athletae, and of the young men who 
frequented these schools, a sub-director or Gytnnast, who 
directed the pharmaceutic treatment of the sick; lastly, sub- 
alterns, named Jatraliptes, who put up prescriptions, anointed, 
frictioned, bled, dressed wounds and ulcers, reduced luxations, 
fractures, etc. History has transmitted to us the names of two 
gymnasiarchs, cotemporaries of Hippocrates, but slightly older 
than he. The first was Iccos, of Tarentum, celebrated for his 
sobriety and continence. The second was Herodicus, of Syl- 
embria. Plato gives him the credit of being the first who 
employed gymnastics in the cure of disease, and congratulates 
him on his success in prolonging the lives of valetudinarians; 
at the same time accused him of killing his fever patients with 
excessive fatigue. It is said that he obliged his patients to 
run without stopping the distance from Athens to Megara, and 
back again, equal to nine French leagues. Such exercise, 
fatigue, though useful in some slight chronic disorders, must 
have been fatal in acute diseases. 

SCHOOLS OF THE ASCLEPIADSE. 

We have said that nearly everywhere the temples of Escula- 
pius were dispensaries in which advice was given and remedies 
administered, and that the young sacerdotal aspirants were 
there trained in the practice of medicine. 

The Asclepiadas had preserved until that epoch the tradi- 
tion of the Egypto-Indian school, which only allowed them to 
transmit their doctrines to the members of their caste, and to 
such strangers as fulfilled satisfactorily the initiatory tests. But 
when Pythagoras had revealed the secret of their mysteries, 
and the philosophers had dared to teach and discuss publicly 
the principles of morals, physics and theology, and the itiner- 
ant physicians and the professors of the gymnasiae had acquired 
the confidence of the public, the priests of Esculapius could 
no longer keep silence, under the penalty of seeing the scepter 
of medicine, which they had held until then, fall from their 



SCHOOL OF THE ASCLEPIADAE. 25 

hands. They were constrained to bring to the light of dis- 
cussion the principles and rules of their medical practice. In 
this way the science, the aim of which is the preservation and 
re-establishment of health, came forth at last from the shadow 
of the sanctuary, and, vivified by public discussion, made in a 
short time extraordinary progress. The priests who served in 
the temples at Cnidus, were the first to follow the impulse of 
the age. They published the little collection of Cnidian sen- 
tences before mentioned. 

The Asclepiadae, of Cos, did not hesitate to follow their 
example. They published a series of treatises, that were col- 
lected at a later period, under the title of the " Hippocratic 
Works." This collection, which over-shadowed all the medi- 
cal publications of that period, constitutes one of the precious 
monuments of ancient medicine. But before speaking of the 
matter which it contains, we shall say a word or two about the 
personage whose name it bears. 

Hippocrates was born in the Isle of Cos, of a family in 
which the practice of medicine was hereditary. They pre- 
tended to trace their ancestry to Esculapius. They count as 
many as seven of its members that had borne the name of 
Hippocrates; but the second in this range was the most cele- 
brated in the range, and was born about 460 years before Christ. 
As the theories on which Hippocrates based his practice are of 
the most importance in this history, I will give them as con- 
densed as possible. First, theory of coction and crisis. 
The theory which most universally prevails in the Hippocratic 
works, is that of coction and crisis. It is met with at every 
step, sometimes isolated, sometimes combined with others; but 
especially is it united to the system of four elements and four 
humors. It forms an integral part, and is the most character- 
istic trait of the ancient dogmatism, much of which is retained 
in our time, while all its cotemporaneous doctrines are aban- 
doned. The Asclepiadae, of the Isle of Cos, regarded disease 
as an association of phenomena, resulting from the efforts 
made by the conservative principle of life, to effect a coction 
of the morbific matter in the economy. They thought that it 
could not be advantageously expelled until it was properly pre- 
pared; that is, until after its elements were separated and united 
b 



26 DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

with the natural humors of the body, so as to form an excre- 
mentitious material. When the morbid substance approaches 
the period of maturity, nature seems to redouble her efforts, 
the fever augments, the patient is overwhelmed or delirious, 
all the symptoms are aggravated and announce the approach 
of a revolution; this was the moment of the crisis or judgment 
of the disease. The day on which it was accomplished, the 
signs which preceded or accompanied it were termed critical, 
and required the special observation of the physician. Second, 

THE THEORY OF THE FOUR ELEMENTS AND THE FOUR HUMORS. Af- 
ter the theory of coction and crisis, that which prevails the most 
in the Hippocratic books, is the doctrine of four elements or 
the four elementary qualities — heat, cold, dryness and moisture; 
and the four cardinal humors — blood, bile, atrabile and phlegm. 
This doctrine was supposed to be the invention of the father 
of Greek medicine, Esculapius. Such is the opinion of all 
the commentators, and among others Galen, who extended it 
and perfected it in his manner; and it reigned exclusively after 
him. The theory of four elements and four humors harmo- 
nizes very well with that of coction and crisis, of which it 
appears to be the complement. He assumed that the phlegm 
augments during the winter; in the spring blood augments; the 
bile increases in the summer, and the atrabile or black bile in 
autumn. Hippocrates then explains how diseases are engen- 
dered, namely, by the influence of the seasons, regimen, the 
temperament and the air that is breathed. Finally, he estab- 
lishes a general rule for their cure by inducing action in the 
system contrary to that induced by the cause of the diseases. 
These two theories united constitute the ancient dogmatism, 
originally of the school of Cos; it had the support of Plato 
and Aristotle. This doctrine, when Hippocrates appeared, 
had all the force and attraction of freshness, and it is not aston- 
ishing that he should make it the basis and model of his medi- 
cal theory. 

THEORY OF FLUXIONS. 

Hippocrates taught that "fluxions are caused by cold, 
which causes the condensation of the tissues and veins of the 
head, if the cold strikes them when heated; then, by their 



THEORY OF FLUXIONS. 27 

contraction, the humors contained in them are expelled. All 
the tissues are obliged to pour out their fluids when they con- 
tract. The liquids thus compressed are diffused in every 
possible direction. Fluxions are also caused by heat, because 
the tissues become rarified when they are heated, the pores 
enlarge, and the humor they contain is attenuated so that it 
flows easily when compressed." 

It would be difficult to exhibit, in so few words, more ignor- 
ance on the conformation of our tissues and the laws of physi- 
ology and physics. The reigning theory in the school of Cos, 
as we have before said, was that which made the health depend 
on the exact proportion of the elements of the body, and the 
perfect combination of the cardinal humors — the blood, bile, 
phlegm and atrabile. According to it, all diseases proceed 
from one of these four elements — heat, cold, dryness or 
moisture, the excess of which engendered some humor badly 
concocted, or too abundant, which, by extravasation from its 
natural reservoirs, passes into parts not habituated to its pres- 
ence. The equilibrium is established by the coction and 
evacuation of the piccant humor. This doctrine, which was 
taught almost exclusively until the foundation of the school at 
Alexandria, constituted the ancient dogmatism, so named, 
doubtless, because it embraces the most anciently professed 
dogmas in medicine. 

Praxagoras was the first to observe the close connection 
between the changes in the pulse and the dynamic state of the 
economy. Yet it did not lead him to any conceptions of the 
circulation of the blood. The ancient theory was that the 
soul or immortal spirit resided in the left side of the heart, and 
it had access to all parts of the system through the arteries. 
They reasoned upon it as follows: During life the spirit is con- 
stantly heard at work in the chest, and upon examining the 
dead subject, they found the left side of the heart and arteries 
empty; it appeared clear to them that the spirit had flown 
from that citadel; hence the ancient saying, " the thoughts of 
the heart," and like expressions. 



THE SOLIDS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 



A solid is a body, the particles of which adhere together so 
that they will not separate by their own weight, but require 
the agency of some extraneous force to separate them. 

Anatomists reduce all the solids in the human body to thir- 
teen varieties: enamel, bone, cartilage, muscle, ligament, vessel, 
nerve, ganglion, follicle, gland, membrane, and viscus. 

Enamel is the hardest of the solids. It covers the bony 
portion of the tooth, and qualifies it for the hard work of 
grinding the food. It also preserves the tooth by protecting 
the bony portion from the corrosive effects of oxygen and acid- 
ulous food upon it. 

Bone is the next hardest of the solids. It forms the skele- 
ton — the levers for the various muscles to act upon, and serves 
for the protection of important organs. The bones are pro- 
tected by an external membrane called the periosteum. 

Cartilage is of a white color formed of very elastic tissue, 
covering the articular extremities of bone to facilitate their 
their movements; sometimes added to bones to prolong them, 
as the ribs; at others placed within the articulations to act as 
elastic cushions to provide against serious concussions, and in 
the foetus it forms a substitute for bones. Hence, cartilages are 
divided into articular and inter-articular, of prolongation and 
ossification. 

The Muscles constitute the flesh of animals. They consist 
of fasciculi of red contractile fibres extending from one bone 
to another, and are the agents of all the movements. They are 
encased within a strong fibrous membrane called aponeuroses, 
from which the tendons are continuous. 

The Ligaments are very tough, difficult to rend, and, under 
the form of cords or membranes, serve to connect different 
parts with each other, particularly the bones and muscles; 
hence their division into ligaments of the joints, that surround 
the joints to keep them in position, ligaments of muscles, as the 
tendonous aponeuroses, and the vaginal ligaments, as those 
in the hand and feet, that serve as lacing pulleys to keep the 
tendons in position while flexing the phalanges. 

The Vessels are solids having the form of canals in which 
the fluids circulate. They are called according to the fluid 



THE SOLIDS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 29 

they convey: sanguineous (arterial and venous), chylife7-ous 
lymphatic and the excretory ducts. 

The Nerves are dense cords consisting of numerous fasciculi. 
These are connected with brain, spinal marrow, and the great 
sympathetic or ganglionic. They are the organs through which 
motion, vital assimilation and sensation are effected in the 
system, and the organs enabled to perform their functional 
labors. They are divided into those of special sense, those 
that preside over muscular motion, over vital assimilation, over 
sensation, and the great sympathetic that governs the func- 
tional labors of the internal organs. 

A Ganglion is a knot formed by the union of several nerves 
into one body; they perform the office of forming additional 
combinations of nervous elements. They are designed to 
contribute the element needed for the functional work of the 
organs. 

Follicles or Crypts are secretory organs shaped like ampullar 
or vesicles, always seated in the substance of outer membranes 
of the body — the skin on one of the mucous surfaces — and 
secreting a fluid to lubricate them. They are often divided 
into the simple or isolated, the conglomerate and the com- 
pound, according to the size or the number in which they are 
grouped and united together. 

A Gland is also a secretory organ, but differing from the last. 
The fluid secreted by it is of greater or less importance. Its 
organization is more complex than that of the follicle; and the 
secreted fluid is poured out by means of one or more excre- 
tory ducts. 

Membrane. This is one of the most extensive and import- 
ant textures of the body. It is spread out in the form of a 
web, and in man it serves to line the cavities and reservoirs, 
and to form, support and envelope all the organs. They are 
divided into two kinds: the simple and the compound, accord- 
ing as they are formed by one or more layers. The simple 
membranes are of three kinds: ist. The serous are those that 
form all the sacks or shut cavities of the body, as those of the 
cranium, chest and abdomen. 2d. The mucous, or those that 
line all the outlets of the whole body: the air passages, ali- 
mentary canal, urinary and genital organs, etc. 3d. The fibrous 
membranes are those which form the tendons, aponeuroses, lig- 
aments, etc. 

The Compound Membranes are formed by the union of the 
simple, and are divided into the fibro-serous, as the pericard- 
ium; sero-mucous, as the gall-bladder at its lower part; and 
fibro-mucous, as the ureter. 

The Cellular or Laminated Tissue is an elastic areolar struc 
ture that underlies all the membranes proper, and forms an 



30 DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

elastic, movable separatix between them and the body they 
envelope. It also serves as a depository for the adipose or 
fatty substance. 

The Viscus is the most complex solid of the system, not 
only as regards intimate organization, but use. This name is 
given to organs contained in the splanchnic cavities: cranium, 
thorax and abdomen, hence called cerebral, thoracic and ab- 
dominal viscera. 

The Brain and its prolongation, the spinal marrow, is com- 
posed of the most subtle elements contained in the human 
organism. The cerebrum in its structure is composed of 
the organs of all the intellectual faculties. These organs are 
designed for the most acute perception and refined sensibility, 
and are endowed with ability when brought into use to com- 
prehend all the principles that uphold the physical universe. 
The cerebellum is generally conceded to preside over repro- 
duction, and the spinal marrow is connected with the whole 
system through the agency of thirty- one pairs of motor and 
vital nerves. 

OF THE BRAIN. 

The whole of the soft mass which fills the cavity of the 
cranium, is called the brain. This mass is covered by these 
membranes, two of which were called meninges or matres by 
the ancient anatomists, who believed that all the other mem- 
branes of the body originated from them. 

These membranes are denominated the dura mater, tunica 
aracnoidea, and pia mater. 

OF THE MEMBRANES OF THE BRAIN AND THE SINUSES OF THE 
DURA MATER. 

The Dura Mater encloses the brain and all its membranes, 
and lines the cranium. It is the thickest and finest membrane 
of the body; it is very smooth and shining on its inner sur- 
face. It adheres to and serves as a periosteum to the internal 
surface of the cranium, but it is more firmly connected at the 
sutures and foramina than elsewhere. Its inner surface, which 
is very smooth and lubricated by a fluid which it exhales, is 
only connected to the brain when the veins go into the sinuses. 
The proper blood vessels of the dura mater are not very nu- 
merous. Its arteries are derived from the external and inter- 
nal carotids and vertebral arteries. Corresponding veins ac- 
company these arteries, but the dura mater, by the separation 
of its two lamina, forms also reservoirs that contain the venous 
blood that is brought from the substance of the brain. These 
are called sinuses, and are very different from common veins. 

Nervous fibrils have been traced into the dura mater de- 



THE SOLIDS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 3 1 

rived from the sympathetic in the neck; also branches of the 
fourth pair and several from the fifth pair have been traced 
into it. 

The dura mater sends a cylindrical prolongation through 
the basilar foramen, to the margin of which it is closely ad- 
herent, and down the vertebral canal to enclose the medulla 
spinalis. It sends also tubicular prolongations over each of the 
nerves as it passes out of the foramina of the cranium and 
spine to assist in forming their neurilemma or sheath. 

OF THE TUNICA ARACNOIDEA. 

The Tunica Arac?widea is an exceedingly thin, tender and 
transparent membrane, in which no vessels have been hitherto 
observed. 

It is spread uniformly over the surface of the brain, enclos- 
ing all its convolutions, without insinuating itself between any 
of them. 

At the upper part of the brain it adheres so closely to the 
subjacent coat by fine cellular substance, that it can scarcely 
be separated from it; but in different parts of the base of 
the brain, particularly about the tuber annular and medulla 
oblongata, it is merely in contact with the membrane under it, 
and may be readily raised from it by the assistance of the 
blow-pipe. 

The tunica aracnoidea belongs to the class of serous mem- 
branes and forms a double sac; one covering the pia mater 
and the other giving an internal polished facing to the dura 
mater. A loose cellular tissue serves to connect it to the pia 
mater. 

This membrane serves to insulate the brain from contact 
with the dura mater. It also serves to protect the mental or- 
gans from being arbitrarily controlled by the will of another 
person. 

OF THE PIA MATER. 

The Pia Mater, which signifies tender mother, is a very vas- 
cular membrane, made up exclusively of vessels and a deli- 
cate cellular tissue which unites it to the phrenological con- 
volutions of the brain. It enters double between all the con- 
volutions of the brain, and lines the different cavities called 
ventricles. It serves to connect and support the vessels of the 
brain, and allows them to divide into such minute parts as to 
prevent the blood from entering the tender substance of this 
viscus with too great force. 

The arteries of the pia mater are divided from the internal 
carotids and vertebrals. The veins differ in no respect from 
other viscera, excepting in this, that they do not accompany 
the arteries. 



32 DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

It gets its nerves from the branches of the sympathetic, 
which attend the arteries. Both the pia mater and the tunica 
aracnoidea send cylindrical prolongations down the vertebral 
canal, which surround the medulla spinalis. 

The pia mater is changed in character so as to become a 
fibrous membrane, as it passes down over the crura cerebri, 
the pons varolii, and the spinal medulla, which latter it closely 
embraces. 

PROCESSES OF THE DURA MATER. 

From the dura mater certain membranous processes go off, 
forming incomplete partitions, which partially divide the cav- 
ity of the cranium; and in the same partial manner, separate 
the parts of the brain from each other, thus preventing them 
from pressing upon each other, and keeping them steady. 
They are formed of the internal lamina or layer of the dura 
mater, like a plait; and, therefore, each of them consists of a 
double membrane. 

The most conspicuous of these is denominated the falx, 
which extends from the anterior to the posterior part of the 
cranium, and divides the upper part of the brain into two 
hemispheres; but it is not sufficiently deep to divide the whole 
of the brain; for, between the under edge of it and the base of 
the cranium, there is a large space occupied by a portion of 
the brain, which is undivided; and, therefore, common to 
both hemispheres. The falx begins at the middle of the sphe- 
noid bone, and, continuing its origin from the crista galli of the 
ethmoid bone, runs along the upper and middle part of the 
head; adhering first to the frontal, then to the joining of the 
parietal, and afterwards to the middle of the occipital bone. 

In its passage it becomes broader, and terminates behind in 
the middle of the tentorium. It runs from before backwards 
in a straight direction, and has some resemblance in shape to 
a sickle placed with its edge downwards; hence the name of 
falx given to it. After extending backward as far as the cen- 
ter of the crucial ridge, on the internal surface of the occipital 
bone, it extends to each side and forms a horizontal partition, 
which partially divides the lower part of the cavity from the 
upper; but it does not extend so far forward as to separate 
completely the mass which is under it, or the cerebellum 
from the cerebrum. 

This horizontal membrane is called the tentorum, and also 
he transverse septum. It is connected behind to the inner 
transverse ridges and grooves of the occipital bone, and, at the 
fore and outer edges, to the ridges and great angles of the 
temporal bones, and terminates at the posterior clinoid pro- 
cess of the sphenoid bone. 

Between the inner edge of the tentorium and the posterior 



THE SOLIDS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 33 

clinoid process of the sphenoid bone, there is a large notch or 
oval foramen, where the brain and cerebellum are united, or 
where the tuber annulare is chiefly situated, which unites them. 
The tentorium keeps the falx tense, and forms a floor or 
vault over the cerebellum, which prevents the cerebrum from 
pressing upon it. The falx minor or septum cerebelli is placed 
between the lobes of the cerebellum. It descends from the 
under and back part of the falx, in the middle of the tentorium, 
adheres to the inferior longitudinal spine of the os occipitis, and 
terminates insensibly at the edge of the foramen magnum of 
that bone. Besides these processes of the dura mater, already 
described, there are four of lesser consideration, two of which 
are situated at the sides of the sella turcica, and two at the 
edges of the foramina lacera. 

SINUSES OF THE DURA MATER. 

As these partitions arise like plaits from the internal surface 
of the dura mater, there must necessarily be a cavity, larger or 
smaller, between the external layer of the dura mater, which 
lines the internal surface of the cranium, and the basis of the 
partition or process which arises from it. This cavity must con- 
tinue along the whole basis of the whole partition, and a sec- 
tion of it will be triangular. This cavity is of considerable 
size at the upper edge of the falx, where it rises from the dura 
mater, and also where it forms the tentorium; and at the pos- 
terior edges of the tentorium where it adheres to the occipital 
bone. The cavity at the upper edge of the falx is called the 
longitudinal sinus; that at the posterior edge of the tentorium 
forms two cavities, called the lateral sinuses; and that which 
is at the junction of the falx and tentorium has the name of 
the torcular or press of Herophilas; so named from a supposi- 
tion entertained by the older anatomists that the columns of 
blood coming in from different directions compressed each 
other at this point. 

The veins of the brain open into these sinuses, and the 
blood flows through them into the internal jugular veins. They 
differ from veins principally in this, that they are triangular, 
and, by the tension of the dura mater, are protected from 
pressure. The principal sinuses are: first, the longitudinal 
sinus, which begins at the crista galli, and, running along the 
upper edge of the falx until it arrives at the tentorium, in- 
creases gradually in size, and terminates in the two lateral sinu- 
ses; second, the two lateral sinuses run in depressions of the oc- 
cipital and temporal bones until they terminate in the internal 
jugular veins at the foramen lacerum; third, the torcular 
Herophili, which receives a large vein from the interior of the 
brain, formed by the union of the two vena galeni, and is situa- 



34 DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

ted at the junction of the falx and tentorium, opening into the 
longitudinal sinus, where it divides into the lateral sinuses. 
These are the largest sinuses of the dura mater; but, in addition 
to these, there are several small sinuses unimportant in a work 
like this. 

OF THE CEREBRUM. 

The Cerebrum completely fills the upper part of the cavity of 
the cranium. It is composed of two equal parts, which are sep- 
arated vertically from each other by the falx. This vertical 
separation does not extend through the center of the cere- 
brum, although it divides it completely before and behind. 
A portion of the central part of the cerebrum, which is situa- 
ted deeper than the under edge of the falx, is not divided. 

The upper surface of the two hemispheres is convex; the 
under surface is rather irregular. It is divided in each hemi- 
sphere into three lobes: the anterior, the middle and the pos- 
terior. The anteroir lobes of the brain are situated on the 
front part of the base of the cranium, principally on the orbital 
processes of the os frontis. The middle lobes are lodged in 
the fossae formed by the temporal and sphenoid bones. The 
posterior lobes rest chiefly upon the tentorium, over the cere- 
bellum. Between the anterior and middle lobes is a deep 
furrow corresponding to the base of the cranium on which 
they rest, which is called the fossa sylvii. 

The surface of the brain is convoluted, and, by the fissures 
that divide them, the various intellectual organs are separated 
from each other. These fissures that separate them do not 
extend very deep into the substance of the brain. The whole 
substance of the brain thus convoluted is covered by the pia 
mater, which closely adheres to it. 

The mass of the brain consists of two substances of different 
colors; one of which is, for the most part, exterior to the 
other. The exterior substance is of a light brown color, and 
is therefore called cineritious, or cortical, from its situation. 
The internal substance is white, called the medullary. The 
proportion of the medullary part is much greater than that of 
the cortical. The cortical, however, surrounds it so as to 
form the whole of the surface of the cerebrum that can be 
strictly said to be exterior. The medullary portion is 
universally white. The internal part of the bottom part, 
which is not cleft by the two hemispheres, is also medullary, 
it being a continuation of the medulla from both hemispheres. 
.This undivided medullary part is equal to one-half of the length 
of the hemispheres; the fissures extending inward one-fourth 
of their length. On each side of it, a fissure, equal to it in 
length, extends horizontally into the medullary matter in each 
hemisphere about half an inch. The whole of this unconnected 



THE SOLIDS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 35 

surface, the middle of which is at the bottom of the great fis- 
sure, is termed corpus collosum. 

When the hemispheres are cut away to the level of this sur- 
face, and the corpus collosum is examined, two raised lines 
appear in the middle, which extend from one end of it to the 
other; and between them is a small groove of the same length. 
This groove is raphe or suture of the corpus collosum. From 
the raised lines or bands on each side of the raphe, small lines 
less elevated pass across the corpus collosum, and are lost in 
the medullary matter. The hemispheres being thus cut off at 
the level of the corpus collosum, on the cut surface is to be 
seen the interior mass of medullary matter, with the cortical 
part exterior, its edge exhibiting the convoluted surface of the 
brain, and the pia mater following the convolutions. The 
medullary surface, thus exhibited, with the corpus collosum in 
the center, is denominated the centrum ovale, 

THE VENTRICLES. 

In the brain there are four cavities called ventricles; three 
of these are formed in the substance of the cerebrum, the 
fourth is situated between the cerebellum, the pons varolii, 
and oblongata. The two largest are called the lateral ventri- 
cles, from their situations. The others are named from the 
order in which they occur — the third and fourth ventricles. 

Another ventricle has more lately been discovered, called 
the fifth. It is very small, and situated between the two layers 
of the septum lucidum. It communicates downward between the 
anterior crura of the fornix with the cavity of the third ventricle. 

The lateral ventricles are cavities of an extremely irregular 
figure. They are situated in each hemisphere a little below 
the level of the corpus collosum, and, with the exception of 
the partition which separates them, are directly under it. 
They commence anteriorly, nearly on a line with the termina- 
tion of the fissure that separates the two hemispheres anteri- 
orly, and continue backward almost as far as the commence- 
ment of the fissure that separates them posteriorly. When 
they have attained this length posteriorly, they form a consid- 
erable curve, first outward, then downward, and afterwards 
forward, so that they terminate almost as far forward as they 
commenced, but much deeper. At the posterior part of their 
curve, when they incline outward, previous to their turn down- 
ward, a process or continuation of the cavity extends back- 
ward almost as far as the cerebrum does itself. These elonga- 
tions are called the posterior cornua or si?iuses, or digital cavi- 
ties. Each of these two ventricles may, therefore, be divided 
into three parts, viz : the portion under the corpus collosum; 
the portion which continues outward and downward and ter- 



36 DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

minates below it; and the posterior portion. It has been 
compared to a ram's horn by some who have contemplated 
particularly the upper and lower portions of the cavity; and 
by others, who have had the whole extent in view, it has been 
called tricornis. The bottom or lower surface of these cavities 
is varied in almost every part of its extent. The front part of 
the bottom of each ventricle is a broad and convex eminence, 
which becomes narrower as it proceeds backward, so that it 
resembles a portion of a pear. It inclines outward as well as 
backward, so that the narrow posterior extremities of the 
bodies are farther from each other than the anterior broad 
extremities. The color of these bodies is cineritious exter- 
nally; but they are striated with medullary matter within, and 
therefore are called corpora striata. 

Between their posterior extremities are two other eminences 
which incline to the oval form, and have a white or medullary 
color. Although their substance, when cut into, is slightly stri- 
ated, they are called thalami nervorum opticorum. .These 
bodies are very near each other, and, being convex in form, 
are in contact at the center. They adhere slightly to each 
other, and this adhesion is called the soft commissure — com- 
missura mollis. 

The corpora striata and the thalami nervorum opticorum 
join each other at the exterior sides of the thalami. Where they 
are in contact there is the appearance of a narrow medullary 
band, which continues during the whole extent of their connec- 
tion. It has been called by some tenia semicircularis, from its 
form; by others, centrum geminum semicirculare, and tenia stri- 
ata. A vein of considerable size runs along the upper surface 
of the tenia, formed from the veins which emerge from the cor- 
pus striatum and thalamus, and it empties into the vena galeni 
of the same side. A yellowish band, called the tenia tarini, 
or horny band, formed by a thickening of the lining membrane 
of the ventricle, overlays this vein. These surfaces constitute 
the bottom or floor of the first portion of the ventricles, which 
is under the corpus callosum. Upon this floor is laid a thin 
lamen of the medullary matter, of a triangular form, called the 
fornix, which covers the thalami nervorum opticorum, and is 
attached to them by a membrane, so that when the ventricles 
are opened the bottom appears to consist of the corpora stri- 
ata and the fornix. The upper surface or roof of the ventri- 
cles is concave. From the middle of it, immediately under the 
raphe of the corpus callosum, then proceeds downward a 
portion of the medullary matter, which separates the two ven- 
tricles from each other. This is called the septum lucidum, 
from its being nearly transparent; below, it adheres to the 
fornix; and, anteriorly, it is continued into the medullary 



THE SOLIDS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 37 

matter, between the corpora striata. This septum lucidum is 
formed of two lamina or plates, which are separated from each 
other, in the anterior portion of the septum, and thus form a 
small cavity, which has communication with the third ventricle 
of the brain. 

The fornix is not perfectly flat, but accommodated to the 
surface of the thalami nervorum opticorum ; its under surface 
is rather concave and its upper surface convex. The anterior 
angle passes down between the most anterior parts of the thala- 
mi nervorum opticorum, and is divided into two small portions 
called its crura, which can be traced some distance in that part 
of the brain. 

The body of the fornix is attached to the surfaces of the 
thalami nervorum opticorum (on which it rests) by a very vas- 
cular membrane, that is spread over the thalami, and called 
tela choroidea and velum interpositum. At the edges of the for- 
nix, there are many blood-vessels in the membrane, arranged 
close to each other, which are called the plexus choroides. 

The posterior side or edge of the triangular fornix termin- 
ates in the corpus callosum or the medullary matter which is 
above it at that place ; but the under surface is attached 
throughout to the parts on which it lies, by the aforesaid 
membrane. The two posterior angles of the fornix form 
what are called the crura, and they terminate in the following 
way : 

The surfaces of the inferior portions of the lateral ventricles 
are not uniformly concave ; but at the bottom of each there is 
a prominent body, which begins where this portion of the cav- 
ity winds outward and forward, and continues its whole extent. 
This prominence has a curved form, and is marked by trans- 
verse indentations toward its extremity ; hence it has been 
termed the hippocampus or cornu atmnonis. A similar promi- 
nence, but smaller and without the transverse indentations, is 
to be found in the posterior portion of the ventricle. This has 
been also called hippocampus ; but the terms major and minor 
are applied to distinguish them. 

The posterior angles of the fornix terminate in the large hip- 
pocampi, and the margin or thin edge of the two anterior sides 
of the fornix is continued to form an edge to the hippocampus, 
and is called the tcenia hippocampi or corpus fimbriatum. 

The word fornix was the ancient name of an arch to a vault, 
and, from its supposed resemblance to an arch, this part has 
been called by that name. 

When the fornix is raised up, which must be done by divid- 
ing it at the anterior angle and detaching it from the thalami 
nervorum opticorum, the thalami, by dissecting off the velum 
interpositum, are brought fairly into view, and appear like oval 



38 DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

bodies placed parallel to each other. They adhere slightly to 
each other at their upper surfaces, and, when separated, a fis- 
sure appears between them, which is the third ventricle. At 
the upper and front part of this ventricle, near its commence- 
ment, before the anterior crura of the fornix and very near 
them, is a white cord like a nerve, which passes across the ven- 
tricle, and can be traced to some distance on each side of the 
medullary matter of the brain. This cord is called the anterior 
commissure of the brain. 

The thalami nervorum opticorum being of an oval form and 
touching each other in the middle, there must be a vacuity be- 
tween them at their extremities. This vacuity is behind the 
anterior crura of the fornix, and has been called vulva iter ad 
infundibulum, and iter ad tertium ventriculum. It leads, of 
course, into the third ventricle ; but a passage continues from 
it downward and rather forward to the infundibulum, which is 
a process somewhat resembling a funnel that is composed 
principally of cineritious substance, and passes from the lower 
and front part of the third ventricle toward the sella turcica, in 
which is situated the small body called the pituitary gland. 

The infundibulum is hollow at its commencement and solid 
at its extremity near the gland. 

The adhesion of the thalami nervo. optic, to each other at 
the upper part of the third ventricle has been denominated the 
commissura mollis. The recession from each other at their 
posterior extremities, in consequence of their oval figure, forms 
another opening into the third ventricle when the fornix and 
tela choroidea is raised, but which is closed when they are in 
their natural situations upon it. In the back part of the third 
ventricle is another medullary cord, called the posterior com- 
missure, which, appears much like the anterior commissure, but 
does not extend into the substance of the brain in the same 
way. Under this cord or posterior commissure is a passage 
which leads to the fourth ventricle, called iter ad quartum ven- 
triculum or aqueduct of Sylvius. Behind the third ventricle and 
terminating it posteriorly are four convex bodies, called tuber- 
cular quadrigemina, or nates and testes. The nates are upper- 
most and most convex ; the testes are immediately below and 
somewhat oval transversely. 

The nates and testes are situated so far backward that they 
are near the anterior part of the upper surface of the cerebel- 
lum and the anterior edge of the middle of the tentorium. 
The posterior part of the fornix is directly over them, but it 
unites with the medullary matter of the cerebrum above it. 
There would, therefore, be a passage into the lateral ventricles 
from behind, between the back of the fornix, which is above, 
and the nates and testes, which are below ; but the velum in- 



THE SOLIDS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 39 

terpositum passes in from behind and attaches the lower sur- 
face of the fornix to all the parts on which it lies, and thus 
closes the ventricles at this place. In this membrane, imme- 
diately over the posterior end of the fissure called the third 
ventricle, and in contact with the nates, is the pineal gland. 
This body is not so large as a pea, and is formed like a pine- 
apple or the cone of a pine tree. 

When the fornix is raised by dissecting the membrane, it 
may be elevated with the membrane and fornix. It resembles 
a small gland in its appearance, but it is very soft, and parti- 
cles of matter like sand are often found in it. There is a small 
cord on each edge of the third ventricle, which appears to pro- 
ceed from the pineal gland, and continues on the edge of the 
ventricle to the anterior crura of the fornix, to which it 
unites. These cords join each other under the pineal gland. 
They are called the pedunculi or foot-stalks of the pineal 
gland. 

The membrane connected with the pineal gland, it has been 
said, is the tela choroidea or velum interpositum, in which the 
plexus choroides is placed, at the edges of the fornix. This 
membrane is extended, somewhat thinner and less vascular, so 
as to line the surface of the ventricles. The plexus choroides 
appears to begin at the end of each of the inferior portions of 
the ventricles, where the pia mater penetrates from the basis 
of the brain. It proceeds into the upper portions of the ven- 
tricles, and, continuing along the edge of the fornix, passes un- 
der that body at its inferior angle and meets the plexus of the 
opposite side. Between this meeting of the plexus and the 
crura of the fornix is a vacuity of an oval figure, which forms 
a communication between the ventricles of the brain. Under 
this vacuity or foramen the thalami nerv. optic, recede from 
each other and form the anterior passage into the third ventri- 
cle. From the plexus choroides of each side, where it has 
passed under the fornix at the anterior angle, a large vein is 
turned backward so as to run nearly over the figure of the 
third ventricle toward the pineal gland. Several veins from 
the surface of the ventricle join this vein near its commence- 
ment ; thus formed, it passes along with the corresponding 
vein from the opposite, sometimes in contact and sometimes 
separated from it a small distance. Near the pineal gland these 
veins unite into one trunk, the great internal vein of the brain, 
called the vena galeni, which terminates soon after in the tor- 
cular herophili. 

OF THE CEREBELLUM. 

The cerebellum is situated in the lower and posterior part 
of the cavity of the cranium, in contact with that portion of 



40 DAVIS' THEORY AND PRAGTICE. 

the os occipitis which is below the groove for the lateral sinus- 
es. It is, of course, much less than the brain. 

It is covered above by the tentorium, and is divided below 
into two lobes by the falx minor. 

The surface of the cerebellum differs in some respects from 
that of the cerebrum. Instead of the convolutions, these are 
small superficial depressions, which are nearly horizontal, tend- 
ing to divide the cerebellum into strata. The pia mater ex- 
tends into these depressions, and the tunica arachnoidea passes 
over them, as in the cerebrum. The exterior part of the cere- 
bellum is composed of cineritious or cortical and the interior 
of medullary matter, as is the case with the cerebrum ; but the 
proportions of these substances in the cerebellum are the re- 
verse of what they are in the cerebrum. 

If sections be made in the cerebellum, the medullary matter 
is so arranged that it appears like the stem or trunk of a plant, 
with ramifications extending from it. This appearance has 
been called arbor vitcz. 

On the basis of the brain is a part called tuber annulare or 
pons varolii, which is formed by processes from the cerebrum 
and cerebellum. It is in contact with the anterior and inferior 
portion of the cerebellum in the middle. From this part the 
medulla oblongata proceeds downward and backward under 
the cerebellum, and between the cerebellum, the medulla ob- 
longata, and the pons varolii, is the vacuity called the fourth 
ventricle of the brain. 

When the brain is in its natural situation, this cavity is below 
and behind the nates and testes, and from the cerebellum there 
passes up to the testes a lamen of medullary matter, which 
closes it above. This lamen is called the valve of Vieussens or 
the valve of the brain. Below, the ventricle is closed by a 
membrane which connects the medulla oblongata to the cere- 
bellum. There is a passage into this cavity from the third ven- 
tricle, which passes under the posterior commissure, the nates 
9 and testes, entering the fourth ventricle below the testes. 

OF THE BASE OF THE BRAIN AND THE NERVES WHICH PRO- 
CEED FROM IT. 

When the brain is detached from the basis of the cranium 
and inverted, the tunica arachnoidea appears more conspicuous 
on the basis than on the upper part ; the pia mater is disposed 
round the convolutions in the same manner that it is above, 
but the nerves and vessels connected with the surface of the 
brain are so much involved with these membranes that consid- 
erable dissection is required to expose them properly. 

The anterior and middle lobes of the brain are very con- 
spicuous on the inverted surface. The anterior lobes appear 



THE SOLIDS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 41 

separated from each other by the extension of the great fissure 
which forms the two hemispheres. 

The middle lobes appear at some distance from each 
other in the center, and the cerebellum forms the poste- 
rior and most prominent part of the surface. When the brain 
has been carefully detached from the cranium and the nerves 
adhering to it are preserved, the olfactory ox first pair of nerves 
appear on the anterior lobes, running nearly parallel to each 
other at a small distance from the great fissure. They are flat, 
thin, and soft in their texture ; their breadth is rather more 
than one-sixth of an inch. They pass in three divisions from 
between the anterior and middle lobes of the cerebrum, which 
soon unite and run to the cribriform plate of the ethmoid, 
where they expand into soft bulbous lobes, from which proceed 
the fibres that perforate the cribiform plate, and are spread 
upon the schneiderian membrane. Behind the olfactory nerves 
are the optic, each of which comes out between the anterior 
and middle lobes of the cerebrum, and, after blending so as to 
meet its fellow, turns off and passes through the optic foramen 
in the sphenoid bone. These nerves can be traced in the brain 
to the thalami nervorum opticorum. 

In the angles formed by the optic nerves posteriorly is a 
mass of softish cineritious matter (pons tarini), and also the 
infundibulum which passes to the sella turcica. 

In this soft cineritious matter are two round white bodies 
that resemble peas. They are called the corpora albica?itia of 
Willis or the eminential mammillaries. Behind these bodies 
are two large medullary processes called the crura cerebri, 
which are best seen if some of the cortical part of the adjoin- 
ing middle lobes is dissected away. They come from the me- 
dulla of the opposite sides of the brain, and gradually approach 
each other until they arrive at the tuber annulare or pons var- 
olii. 

The pons varolii is a mass of considerable size which has a 
medullary appearance externally, but is striated within. It is 
formed by the union of the two above-mentioned crura cere- 
bri and of two similar processes derived from the cerebellum, 
called also its crura. It lies over a part of the body of the 
sphenoid bone and of the cuneiform process of the occipital 
bone, and under a portion of the middle lobes of the cere- 
brum and of the cerebellum. There is a longitudinal depres- 
sion on its surface, made by the basilar artery, and there are 
also many transverse streaks on it. 

The crura of the cerebellum, which runs into this substance, 
are evidently continued from the arbor vitae or medulla of the 
cerebellum. The anterior edge of the cerebellum, part of 
which is in contact with the pons varolii, is remarkably prom- 



42 DAVIS* THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

inent on each side of it. These prominences are called the 
vermes of the cerebellum. The medulla oblongata is continued 
backward from the posterior side of the tuber, and somewhat 
resembles a truncated cone inverted. It lies on the cuneiform 
process of the occipital bone, and extends to the foramen mag- 
num. It is indented lengthwise, both anteriorly and posterior- 
ly, by fissures which are very evident. It is composed of me- 
dullary matter externally and cineritious matter within. 

On each side of the anterior fissure, which is in view when 
the brain is inverted, are two oblong convex bodies ; those 
which are next to the fissure are called corpora pyramidalia, 
and are the longest. The two exterior are called corpora oli- 
varia, and are not so long. 

The third pair of nerves come from between the crura of the 
cerebellum, and pass forward, diverging from each other. They 
proceed by the cavernous sinus, and, after penetrating the du- 
ra mater, go out of the cranium at the foramen lacerum. 

The fourth pair, the smallest nerves of the brain, resemble 
sewing thread in their size and appearance. They come out 
between the cerebellum and pons varolii, but can be traced 
backward as far as the testes. They proceed forward by the 
sides of the pons varolii, and, after penetrating the dura mater 
near the clinora apophysis, pass through the foramen lacerum 
to the trochlearis muscles of the eye. 

The fifth pair, the largest of the brain, arise from the crura 
of the cerebellum, where they unite with the pons varolii. 
They pass forward and penetrate the dura mater near the point 
of the petrous portion of the temporal bone. This nerve ap- 
pears like a bundle of fibres, and, under the dura mater, forms 
a plexus, from which its three great branches proceed to their 
destination. 

. The sixth pair arise from the medulla oblongata, where it 
joins the pons varolii. It is often composed of two cords on 
each side, one of which is very small. They pass under the 
pons varolii and through the cavernous sinus with the carotid 
artery. After emerging from this sinus they proceed through 
the foramen lacerum to the abductor muscles of the eye. In 
this course a small twig passes from it, which accompanies the 
carotid artery through the canal in the petrous portion of the 
temporal bone, and, with a twig from the. fifth pair, is the origin 
of the intercostal nerve. 

The seventh pair appear at the sides of the medulla oblong- 
ata, near the pons varolii. It is composed on each side of 
two cords called portio dura and portio mollis, and one or more 
small fibers between them, called portio media. The portio 
mollis can be traced to the fourth ventricle. The portio dura 
seems to arise from the place of union of the pons varolii with 



THE SOLIDS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 43 

the medulla oblongata and the crura cerebelli. The portio 
media appears to originate in the same neighborhood and may- 
be considered as an appurtenance of the portio dura. They 
all proceed to the meatus auditorious internus, as it has been 
called, in the temporal bone. 

The eighth pair of nerves arise from the corpora olivaria on 
the side of the medulla oblongata. They are composed, in 
each, of one cord called the glosso-pharyngeal, and of a con- 
siderable number of small filaments, which unite and form an- 
other cord called par vagum. 

With these nerves is associated a third cord, called the spi- 
nal accessory nerve of Willis, which passes up the spinal cavity, 
being composed of twigs from the posterior and anterior por- 
tions of almost all the cervical nerves. 

The par vagum, with this nerve and the glosso-pharyngeal, 
proceeds from its origin to the foramen lacerum formed by the 
occipital and temporal bones, where they all pass out of the 
cranium, separated from each other, and from the internal jugu- 
lar vein, by small processes of the dura mater. Their destin- 
ation is extremely different. The glosso-pharyngeal is spent 
upon the tongue and pharynx, the par vagum upon the con- 
tents of the thorax and abdomen, while the accessory branch, 
which seems to have no connection with them, perforates the 
sterno-mastoid muscles, and is distributed among the muscles 
of the shoulders and arms. Its ofhce is to give precision and 
agility to the movement of the hands. 

The ninth pair arise from the corpora pyramidalia by many 
filaments that are united on each side into three or four fasci- 
culi, which perforate the dura mater separately and then unite 
to pass out of the anterior foramen of the occipital bone. 
This pair is spent upon the muscles of the tongue. Its office 
is to strengthen the organ and thereby give agility to speech. 

OF THE SPINAL MARROW. 

The medulla oblongata is continued from the cavity of the 
cranium, through the great foramen of the occipital bone, into 
the great canal of the spine, when it takes the name of medulla 
spinalis or spinal marrow. 

The dura mater passes with it through the great foramen and 
encloses the whole of it. At the commencement of the spinal 
canal this membrane is attached to the surrounding bones, viz: 
to the margin of the great occipital foramen and to the atlas \ 
but below this it is loosely connected by a membrane which 
sometimes appears to contain a little adipose. The tunica 
arachnoidea appears unconnected with the dura mater, and il 
can be easily removed from the pia mater. The pia mater ad- 
heres rather firmly to the substance it encloses. The spinal 



44 DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

marrow consists of medullary matter externally and cineritious 
or cortical matter internally. 

The fissures which are observable, anteriorly and posteriorly, 
in the medulla oblongata, are continued down the spinal mar- 
row, dividing it partially into two lateral portions. These fis- 
sures penetrate to a considerable depth. Each of the lateral 
portions is marked on its external surface by a more superficial 
fissure, which partially divides it into an anterior and posterior 
part, so that a transverse section of the spine has a cruciform 
appearance. 

The nerves go off in fasciculi from the anterior and posterior 
surfaces of each lateral portion of the spinal marrow, so that 
each nerve is formed of two fasciculi, one from before and the 
other from behind. The fasciculi are of different sizes in dif- 
ferent parts of the spine. The lowermost of the neck are 
large and broad ; those of the back are slender ; and those of 
the loins and upper part of the sacrum are very large. 

The uppermost of the fasciculi of the spine proceed almost 
at right angles with the medulla spinalis to the fcramina through 
which they pass. Those which are lower pass off in a direc- 
tion obliquely downward, and the lowermost are almost per- 
pendicular. Between the anterior and posterior fosciculi, a 
fine ligamentous cord paises, which is attached to the dura 
mater as it passes through the foramen magnum, and continues 
to the os coccygis. It passes between the tunica arachnoidea 
and the pia mater, and is attached to the pia mater by cellular 
membrane. It sends off a small process in a lateral direction, 
to be attached to the dura mater, and nearly in the middle of 
the upper and lower fasciculi. 

The spinal marrow terminates in a point near the uppermost 
lumbar vertebra.. The ligamenta denticulata of the opposite 
sides join together at this point and form a small cord, which, 
continuing downward, is inserted into the os coccygis. 

These ligaments help to support and keep fixed the medulla 
and the nerves as they originate from it. As the spinal mar- 
row terminates at the lumbar vertebra, the lumbar and sacral 
go off above. They pass down like a bunch of straight twigs, 
and are called cauda equina, from a fancied resemblance to the 
tail of a horse. The sheath formed by the dura mater for the 
spinal marrow continues of its original size, and encloses them 
in one cavity. 

The posterior and anterior fasciculi pass out separately from 
the dura mater. After they are out, the posterior fasciculus 
forms a ganglion, from which one nerve passes that joins the 
anterior fasciculus, and thus forms the spinal nerves. 

When the nerves go off, either from the spinal canal or the 
cavity of the cranium, the external lamen of the dura mater, 



THE SOLIDS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 45 

where they pass out, attaches itself to the bone or periosteum, 
while an internal lamen, together with the pia mater and, per- 
haps, the tunica arachnoidea, is continued with the nerve. 

This process from the dura mater becomes so much changed 
that it has been considered as cellular membrane. 

The pia mater and tunica arachnoidea seem also to in '/est not 
only the nerve in general, but the fibers of which it is composed. 
On this account, probably, the nerves are larger after passing 
through the dura mater than they are when they leave the brain 
and spinal marrow. 

The arteries of the spinal marrow proceed from the head, 
and, with several additions, continue downward to the lumbar 
vertebrae. 

There is generally one artery on the front surface of the me- 
dulla, which is formed by the union of two branches that arise 
from the vertebral arteries within the cranium. This artery 
proceeds downward and communicates with those of the neck 
with the intercostal arteries by the intervertebral foramina, so 
that it preserves its size. 

It terminates with the spinal marrow, and the cauda equina 
below it is supplied by branches from the internal iliac, which 
enter through the foramina of the sacrum. There are gener- 
ally two arteries on the posterior surface of the medulla spi- 
nalis, which also pass out from the cranium, arising from the 
vertebral arteries or inferior arteries of the cerebellum. They 
have a serpentine arrangement, and communicate with each 
other and with the ramifications of the anterior spinal artery. 
All of these arteries are dispersed upon the spinal marrow and 
its membrane and the parts immediately contiguous. The veins 
correspond with the ramifications of the arteries, but they are 
collected into large branches, called sinus venose, which are sit- 
uated exterior to the dura mater, on the front and lateral sides 
of the spinal canal. They extend the whole length of the ca- 
nal, and, entering the great occipital foramen, communicate 
with the lateral and occipital sinuses. 

OF THE NERVES. 

The brain, spinal marrow and their nervous appendages, 
make up the nervous system. 

This great system of nerves constitutes the man proper ; for 
it is this constructing and upholding genius that the elements 
so promptly obey in combining to contribute to the constitu- 
tional structure under its charge. By it the chemical powers 
are directed j it directs all involuntary motion ; it maintains 
the equilibrium of action between the organs ; it directs and 
maintains the balances of health \ it places the muscles, the 
servants of the mind, efficiently under the control of the will: 



46 DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

it provides for all the perceptive faculties, and, through the 
medium of sensation, the circle of protectorates are rendered 
competent to regulate the conditions and supervise the depen- 
dencies expected of mind to sustain life. 

If these offices are intelligently performed the powers of the 
system will be preserved, health maintained and life rendered 
secure. In order to secure these ends, it is important to have 
some rational ideas of the laws and habits of the system, its 
capabilities and the many causes that derange the nervous sys- 
tem and disqualify it for performing the high offices assigned 
to it. 

The first pair, or olfactory nerves, are distributed to the or- 
gans of smell ; the second pair, or optic, the expansion of which 
forms the retina ; the third pair, motores oculi, or common oculo- 
muscular, which send filaments to most of the muscles of the 
eye ; the fourth pair, trochleares pathetici, or internal oculo-mus- 
cular, distributed to the greater oblique muscle of the eye ; the 
fifth pair, trifacial, trigemini, or symmetrical nerve of the head, 
which send their branches to the eye, nose and tongue ; the 
sixth pair, abducentes, or oculo-muscular, which are distributed 
to the abductor or rectus exturnus oculi ; the facial nerve, por- 
tio dura of the seventh pair, nervus communicans faciei, or re- 
spiratory nerve of the face, distributed to the muscles of the 
face ; the accoustic nerve, auditory nerve, or portio mollis of the 
seventh pair, which passes to the organ of hearing ; the eighth, 
pneumo gastric, par vagum, or middle sympathetic, which is dis- 
persed particularly to the larynx, lungs, heart and stomach ; 
the glossopharyngeal, often considered as a part of the last, 
which, as its name indicates, is distributed to the tongue and 
pharynx ; the great hypoglossal, ninth pair,- or lingual nerve, 
distributed to the tongue ; and the spinal accessory of Willis, 
which arises from the spinal cord in the cervical region, as- 
cends into the cranium and issues by one of the foramina, to 
be distributed to the muscles of the neck and shoulders, to 
give a finer sense of tact to the fingers, and to give agility and 
precision to the movements of the hands. 

The spinal nerves are thirty-one in number on each side. 
They make their exit by the intervertebral foramina, and are 
divided into eight cervical, twelve dorsal, five lumbar, and six 
sacral. 

The encephalic nerves are irregular in their formation, and, 
with the exception of the fifth, pair, originate from one root. 

Each of the spinal nerves arise from two fasciculi, the one 
anterior and the other posterior. These are separated from 
each other by the ligamentum denticulare, but they unite be- 
yond the ligament, and, near the intervertebral foramina, pre- 
sent one of those knots known as ganglion or ganglia, in 



THE SOLIDS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 47 

the formation of which the posterior root is alone concerned. 

When the nerves have passed out from the cranium and 
spine, they go directly to the organs and parts they were de- 
signed to construct. The quality of the nerves is as dissimilar 
as the texture of the organ or part they compose, the organs 
of special sense and parts assigned for acute sensibility requir- 
ing a much finer texture than other parts of the system. 

The spinal nerves, at their exit from their intervertebral for- 
amina, divide into two branches, an anterior and a posterior, 
one being sent to each aspect of the body. The anterior 
branches of the four superior cervical pairs form the cervical 
plexus, from which all the nerves of the neck arise ; the four 
last cervical pairs and the first dorsal form the brachial plexus, 
whence proceed the nerves of the upper extremities ; while 
the branches of the five lumbar nerves and the six sacral form 
the lumbar and sciatic plexuses, the foramen of which gives 
rise to the nerves distributed to the parts within the pelvis, and 
the second to those of the lower limbs. The anterior branch- 
es, moreover, at a little distance from the exit of the nerve 
from the vertebral canal, communicates with the great sympa- 
thetic or ganglionic trunks that supply the functional nerves for 
all the vital organs. 

This branch of the nervous system is constituted of a series 
of ganglions, joined to each other by a nervous trunk that ex- 
tends down the side of the spine, from the base of the cranium 
to the os coccygis or lower bone of the spine. It communi- 
cates with each of the spinal nerves and with several of the 
encephalic ; and from the ganglions formed by such communi- 
cation it sends off nerves to the vital organs to preside over 
their functional labors. At its upper part it is situated in the 
carotid canal, where it appears under the form of a ganglionic 
plexus, two filaments of which proceed to join the sixth pair 
of encephalic nerves, and another to meet the vidian twig of 
the fifth pair, which communicates with the ophthalmic gangli- 
on, which evidently belongs to this series of ganglia. On issu- 
ing from the carotid canal, the nerve passes downward along 
the side of the spine to the sacrum, presenting a series of gan- 
glia — three in the neck, the superior, middle, and inferior cervi- 
cal — twelve in the back, the thoracic — five in the loins, the lum- 
bar — and three or four in the sacrum, the sacral. When it 
reaches the coccyx, it terminates by a small ganglion, called 
coccygeal, or by uniting with the great sympathetic of the oppo- 
site side. 

The ganglia are of an irregular but generally roundish shape. 
They consist of nervous filaments, surrounded by a reddish 
gray, pulpy, albuminous or gelatinous substance, which differs 
from the gray matter of the brain. 



48 DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

The heart receives its functional nerves from the three cer- 
vical plexuses. They enter the descending vena cava near the 
heart, and are reflected over the right auricle and ventricle, 
and are extended in the pulmonic arteries to their termina at 
the points of the hsematosis, and officiate to give that sensitive 
condition to the inner membranes of the heart by which its 
contractile force is dependent in the work of circulating the 
blood. It also furnishes the chemical element by which haem- 
atosis is effected. 

From the ganglia near the heads of the fifth and sixth ribs, 
and from four or five ganglia which succeed them, small nerves 
arise, which proceed downward on the sides of the bodies of 
the vertebrae, and unite into one trunk that is denominated the 
splanchnic nerve, because it is distributed to the viscera of the 
abdomen. A second and smaller nerve, of the same destina- 
tion, called the lesser splanchnic nerve, arises lower down, from 
two or three of the lowermost dorsal ganglia, and penetrates 
separately into the cavity of the abdomen. It then divides in- 
to two branches, one of which unites to the great splanchnic 
nerve and the other proceeds to the renal plexus, soon to be 
described. 

As soon as the great splanchnic nerve has entered the abdo- 
men, it divides into many branches, which form small ganglia 
on each side of the coeliac artery, but above it. These ganglia 
are generally contiguous, but sometimes they are a small dis- 
tance from each other and united by nerves. They are, how- 
ever, commonly spoken of as one, and called the semilunar 
ganglion. They are of irregular form, and very different from 
each other in size as well as form. From this assemblage of 
ganglia proceed many small nerves, which connect with each 
other and form what is called the solar plexus. 

This plexus is anterior to the spine and crura of the dia- 
phragm, behind the stomach and above the pancreas. 

The diaphragm is supplied with nerves from the semilunar 
ganglia, through which the involuntary motion of the diaphragm 
is effected in respiration. 

The lower part of the solar plexus, which surrounds more 
immediately the coeliac artery, is termed the coeliac plexus. 
From it networks of nerves extend upon the great branches of 
the artery to the organ to which they go. 

They extend to the stomach (although it is supplied by the 
par vagum) along the superior coronary, or gastric branch of 
the cceliac ; and the fibres in their composition being spread 
upon the coats of the stomach, unite with the branches of the 
par vagum, which are also spread upon them. 

A similar net-work, denominated the hepatic plexus, extends 
upon the hepatic artery, and from it to the vena portarum, and 

3-B 



THE SOLIDS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 49 

accompanies those vessels into the substance of the liver. It 
also sends branches to the biliary duct and gall-bladder ; to 
the stomach by the arteria gastrica dextra ; and to the omen- 
tum. 

The sple?iic artery is invested by a similar but smaller ar- 
rangement of nerves, denominated the sple?iic plexus. In its 
course to the spleen, this plexus sends some nerves to the 
pancreas ; and also to the stomach and omentum with the left 
gastric artery. 

The superior mesenteric artery is surrounded by a net-work, 
which extends to it directly from the solar plexus, and is the 
largest of all which proceed from that plexus. 

The mesenteric plexus at first nearly surrounds the artery, 
and proceeds with it between the lamina of the mesentery. In 
this course it sends branches, with the arteria colica dextra, to 
the transverse portion of the colon. Between the lamina of 
the mesentery it sends ramifications with all the branches of 
the artery to the small intestines generally ; to the coecum, and 
the right portion of the colon, as well as to the mesenteric 
glands. 

From the lower part of the solar plexus a net-work proceeds 
on to the front of the aorta, to the inferior mesenteric artery, 
and surrounds it. Nerves from this plexus accompany the 
artery to the left portion of the colon and the rectum. Some 
of their ramifications combine with those of the hypogastric 
plexus. 

The emulgent artery is attended by nerves, which are ar- 
ranged like a net-work on its anterior and posterior surfaces, 
and are denominated the re?ial plexus. They are derived from 
the solar plexus, and frequently contain small ganglia. They 
proceed with the artery to the fissure of the kidney, and are 
distributed with its different ramifications, in the substance of 
the organ. Some branches pass from them to the renal gland, 
with the capsular artery. Before the renal plexus arrives at 
the kidney, it sends off, from its inferior part, some new fibers, 
which, after joining some others from one of the lumbar nerves, 
accompany the spermatic arteries, and are therefore called the 
spermatic plexus. In the male, these fibres proceed through 
the abdominal ring, and many of them go to the testis, but 
they are followed with great difficulty, on account of their 
small size. In the female, they go to the ovary and the fal- 
lopian tubes. 

From the great plexuses above, a small net-work continues 
downward on the aorta, receiving fibres from the intercostals 
on each side. At the great bifurcation of the aorta it divides, 
and is joined on each side by the many ramifications from the 
third lumbar nerves, which thus form a plexus of considerable 



50 DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

extent, that sends nerves to the bladder, rectum, and vesiculae 
seminales in males, and to the uterus and vagina, as well as 
the bladder and rectum, in females. This is called the 
hypogastric plexus. 

The plexuses above-mentioned are derived from the splanch- 
nic nerve, which comes off from the sympathetic in the thorax. 

The sympathetic, after giving off the larger splanchnic, is 
diminished in size, and approaches nearer to the bodies of the 
vertebrae. It passes through the crura of the diaphragm, and 
then proceeds forwards and downwards upon the spine, be- 
tween the tendinous crura of the diaphragm and the psoas 
muscles near the vena cava on the right side, and the aorta 
on the left. In this course, it receives one or two small cords 
from the anterior branch of each of the lumbar nerves ; the 
cords proceed downwards and fowards, between the bodies of 
the vertebrae and the psoas muscle, and a ganglion is generally 
formed at the place where they join the nerve. In its descent 
on the lumbar vertebrae, the sympathetic sends off several 
nerves that unite to the net-work, which descends on the aorta 
from the plexus above. After passing over the lumbar verte- 
brae, it descends into the pelvis, close to the sacrum, on the 
inner side of the great foramina : here it also forms ganglia 
and communicates with the sacral nerves, and likewise with 
the hypogastric plexus. It terminates on the os coccygis, 
where its minute fibres join those of the opposite side. 

OF THE TRACHEA AND THE LUNGS. 

Although the principal part of the windpipe is situated in the 
neck above the cavity of the thorax, it is so intimately con- 
nected with the lungs that it is necessary to describe them to- 
gether. 

OF THE TRACHEA. 

Trachea is the technical name for the windpipe, or the tube 
which passes from the larynx to the lungs. This tube begins 
at the lower edge of the cricoid cartilage, and passes down the 
neck in front of the aesophagus as low as the third dorsal ver- 
tebrae, where it divides into two branches called bronchia, one 
of which goes to the right and the other to the left lung, in 
which they ramify very minutely. 

The right bronchium is larger than the left, in proportion to 
the great size of the right lung. It is also shorter and placed 
more anterior and more horizontal than the left, in consequence 
of the right lung being shorter in its vertical diameter, and 
longer in its antero-posterior than the lung of the left side. It 
enters near the center of the root of the lung, opposite to the 
fourth dorsal vertebrae. 



THE SOLIDS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 5 1 

The left bronchium terminates, or enters the root of the left 
lung, opposite the fifth dorsal vertebrae. The right bronchium 
is embraced at its upper part by the vena azygos, the left by the 
arch of the aorta. 

There is in the structure of each, a number of flat cartilagin- 
ous rings, placed at small distances from each other, the edges 
of which are connected by membrane, so that they compose a 
tube. These cartilaginous rings are not complete, for they do 
not form more than three-fourths or four-fifths of a circle ; but 
their ends are connected by a membrane which forms the pos- 
terior portion of the tube. They are not alike in their size or 
form ; some of them are rendered broader than others, by the 
union of two or three rings with each other, as the uppermost. 
The lowermost is also broad, and has a form which is accom- 
modated to the bifurcation of the tub%\ Their number varies 
from fifteen to twenty in different persons. 

These rings may be considered as forming a part of the first 
proper coat of the trachea, which is composed of them, and of 
an elastic membrane that occupies all the interstices between 
them ; so that the cartilages may be regarded as fixed in this 
membrane. A similar arrangement of rings exists in the great 
branches of the bronchia ; but after they ramify in the lungs, 
the cartilages are no longer in the form of rings ; they are ir- 
regular in their figures, and are so arranged in the membrane 
that they keep the tube completely open. These portions of 
cartilage do not continue throughout the whole of the ramifi- 
cations ; for they become smaller, and finally disappear, while 
the membranous tube-continues without them, ramifying minute- 
ly, and form the air-cells of the lungs. 

At the orifices of the bronchial ramifications, the existence 
of a semilunar cartilage has been pointed out by Prof. Horner, 
forming rather more than half of their circumference, and hav- 
ing its concave edge turned upward. These cartilages appear 
to be intended to keep the orifices open. The membranous 
portion is very elastic. The elasticity of the lungs is accom- 
modated by this membrane. On the inside of this coat of the 
trachea is an arrangement of muscular fibres, which may be 
called a muscular coat. It is best seen by pealing off or re- 
moving the internal coat, to be next described. On the mem- 
branous part of the trachea, where the cartilaginous rings are 
deficient, these muscular fibres run evidently in a transverse 
direction ; in the spaces between the cartilages their direction 
is longitudinal. 

The internal coat of the trachea is a thin and delicate mem- 
brane, perforated with an immense number of small mucous 
ducts. 

At the bifurcation of the trachea and on the bronchea are a 



52 DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

number of black colored bodies, which resemble the lym- 
phatic glands in form and texture. They continue on the ram- 
ifications of the bronchia some distance into the substance of 
the lungs. There is often a very considerable number of them, 
and they vary in size from three to four lines in diameter. 

As lymphatic vessels have been traced to and from them in 
their course to the thoracic duct, these at the bifurcations are 
glands for depurating the chyle of its acidulous properties, 
when they are present. 

OF THE LUNGS. 

There are two of these organs, each of which occupies one 
of the great cavities of the thorax. 

When placed together in their natural position they resem- 
ble the hoof of the ox, with its back part forward ; but they 
are at such a distance from each other, and of such a figure, 
that they allow the mediastinum and heart to intervene, and 
they cover every part of the heart anteriorly, except a small 
portion at the apex. 

Each lung completely fills the cavity in which it is placed, 
and every part of its external surface is in contact with some 
part of the internal surface of the cavity ; but when in a nat- 
ural and healthy state it is not connected with any part except 
the lamina of the mediastinum. 

The lower extremity or base of each lung rests upon the 
the pleural lining of the diaphragm, and fills up the angle be- 
tween the diaphragm and the ribs. The superior projects up- 
wards and backwards along the first rib and above the level of 
the clavicle, so as to be separated from the scalenus-anticus 
muscle only by the pleura. In laborious respiration, the ele- 
vation of the apex of the lung is increased, and the motion it 
produces becomes visible at the root of the neck. The exter- 
nal face of the lung is convex, to suit the contour of the tho- 
racic parietes. The internal, and especially that of the left 
is concave to accommodate the heart and pericardium. The 
anterior edge is thin and sinuous, and presents on the left side 
a deep notch fitted to the shape of the heart, and a sort of a 
lobular projection, which in part covers that organ during 
deep inspiration. 

One great branch of the trachea and the pulmonary artery 
passes from the mediastinum to each of the lungs, and enters 
it at a place which is rather nearer to the upper rib than to the 
diaphragm, and much nearer to the spine than the sternum. 
At this place the pulmonary veins return from the lungs to the 
vena cava. 

These vessels are enclosed in a membrane, which is contin- 
ued over them from the mediastinum, and extended from them 



THE SOLIDS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 53 

to the lung. Thus covered, they constitute what has been 
called the root of the lung. 

When their covering, derived from the mediastinum, is re- 
moved, the situation of these vessels appears to be such that 
the bronchia are posterior; the branches of the pulmonary 
artery are rather above and before, and the veins below are 
before them. Each of these vessels ramifies before it enters 
into the substance of the lungs ; the bronchia and branches 
of the pulmonary artery send each a large branch downward to 
the inferior part of the lungs, from which the lower pulmonary 
veins pass in a direction nearly horizontal. In general, each 
of the smaller ramifications of the bronchia in the lungs is at- 
tended by an artery and a vein. 

Each lung is divided by very deep fissures into portions 
called lobes. The right lung is composed of three of these 
lobes, and the left lung of two. Each of these lobes is sub- 
divided into many smaller parts called lobules, which are 
marked out on the surface of the lungs by various angular 
lines. Each bronchium divides into two principal branches 
for the lobes of the left lung, and into three for the right ; 
after which, a still further subdivision takes place, so that a 
terminal bronchial branch is sent to each lobule. 

The lungs are covered, as has been already stated, with the 
reflected portion of the pleura continued from the mediasti- 
num, which is very delicate and almost transparent. They 
have, therefore, a very smooth surface. 

The color of the lungs is different in different subjects. In 
children they are of a light red color ; in adults they are often 
of a light gray, owing to the deposition of a black pigment in 
the substance immediately under the membranes which form 
their external surface. Their color is often formed by a mix- 
ture of red and black. In this case they are more loaded with 
blood, and the vessels of the internal membranes being dis- 
tended with it, the red color is derived from them. The black 
pigment often appears in round spots of three or four lines in 
diameter ; under the external membrane it is often in much 
smaller portions, and is sometimes arranged in lines in the in- 
terstices of the lobuli, to be hereafter mentioned. 

The lungs are of a soft, spongy texture, and, in animals that 
have breathed, they have always a considerable quantity of air 
in them. They consist of cells which communicate with the 
branches of the trachea, that ramify through them in every 
part. These cells are extremely small, and the membranes 
which compose them are so thin and delicate that, if they are 
all filled by an injection of wax, thrown in through the trachea, 
the whole cellular part of the lung will appear like a mass of 
wax. These injections prove that the membranes of which the 



54 DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

cells are formed are very thin. These cells are, in fact, but the 
ultimate termination of the last branches of the bronchia in 
small, dilated sacs, called the bronchial or pulmonary air cells. 

If the lungs of the human subject, or of animals of similar 
construction, be examined when they are inflated, their cellu- 
lar structure will be very obvious, although their cells are so 
small that they cannot commonly be distinguished by the na- 
ked eye. Each of the extreme ramifications of the bronchia 
appears to be surrounded by a portion of this cellular sub- 
stance, which is gradually distended when air is blown into the 
ramification. 

The cellular substance is formed into small portions of vari- 
ous angular figures called lobuli. These can be separated to a 
considerable extent from each other. They are covered by 
the proper coat of the lungs, which is extremely delicate, and 
closely connected to the general covering derived from the 
pleurae. Between the lobuli, where they are in contact with 
each other, there is a portion of common cellular substance, 
which is easily distinguished through the membrane covering 
the lungs. This is very distinct from the cellular structure 
which communicates with the ramifications of the bronchia 
that contain air, for it has no communication with the air un- 
less the proper coat of the lungs be ruptured. 

Physiologists and chemists agree that the great object of res- 
piration is to effect a chemical process between the inhaled at- 
mospheric air and the blood that circulates through the lungs 
in the pulmonary arteries and veins, or from the right to the 
left side of the heart. The vital arteries that support the lungs 
arise from the aorta, and traverse the bronchia and ramify the 
substance of the lungs and all their vessels. The vital nerves 
arise from the eighth pair or par vagum, and pass in the coats 
of these arteries to their termina. The great elasticity of the 
lungs expels the air from them when the diaphragm relaxes, 
and they are filled by the contractile power of the diaphragm 
in opposition to their collapsing force. 

OF THE PERICARDIUM. 

The heart is enclosed by a membranous sac, which, upon a 
superficial view, seems only connected with its great vessels. 
The whole of the organ lies unattached in the cavity of the 
sac, except by the arteries and veins connected with its base. 
The sac is, in fact, composed of two layers, one external and 
fibrous and one internal and serous. The latter of these not 
only lines the inner face of the outer membrane, but is reflect- 
ed, like other serous membranes, over the roots of the vessels 
placed in the pericardium, and over the whole outer surface of 
the heart itself. This internal serous lining is very thin and 



THE SOLIDS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 55 

delicate, and can only be raised in small shreds, either from 
the outer layer of the pericardium, or from the heart. If it 
were dissected from the heart, without laceration or wounding, 
it would be an entire sac. 

The pericaridum, thus arranged, is placed between the two 
lamina of the mediastinum, and adheres firmly to them where 
they are contiguous to it ; it also adheres firmly to the dia- 
phragm below, and thus preserves the heart in its proper position. 

The figure of the pericardium when it is distended is some- 
what conical ; its apex being on the diaphragm. The cavity 
formed by it is larger than the heart after death, but it is prob- 
able that the heart nearly fills it during life, for when this 
organ is distended by injection, it often occupies the whole of 
the pericardium. 

The attachment of the pericardium to the diaphragm is ex- 
actly over the cordiform tendon of the latter. The sides of 
the pericardium are covered in part by the pleura, which gives 
the sac the appearance of being formed by these tunics. 

Underneath the pleural lining is found the phrenic nerve, 
and, in fat subjects, much adipose matter. 

The pericardium is composed of two lamina, the internal of 
which covers the heart, as has been already described; while 
the external merely extends over the loose portion of the other, 
and blends with the mediastinum, where that membrane in- 
vests the great vessels. Its principal attachment or termina- 
tion above, is upon the arteries and veins entering the heart, 
(except the vena cava inferior) over which it sends tubular pro- 
longations, which gradually blend with their external coats. 
Between these prolongations, on the inside of the sac, hollow 
pouches are necessarily left, which are called the cornua of the 
pericardium. 

The fibrous layer of the pericardium resembles in structure 
and appearance the dura mater of the brain. The arteries of 
the pericaridium are very small ; they are derived from the 
phrenic, bronchial and cesophagal, and from the aorta. Its 
veins terminate in the vena azygos. Its nerves are few and 
small, and originate from the cardiac plexus. The internal 
surface of the pericardium is very smooth and polished ; and 
in the living subject is constantly moistened by a fluid which is 
exhaled from its serous surface. The quantity of this fluid 
does not commonly exceed two drachms \ but in cases of dis- 
ease it sometimes amounts to many ounces. It is nearly trans- 
parent, but slightly tinged with red in children, and yellow in 
old persons. It is often slightly tinged with red in persons 
who have died by violence. 

OF THE HEART. 

The great organ of the circulation consists of muscular 



56 DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

fibres, which are so arranged that they give it a conical form, 
and compose four distinct cavities within it. 

Two of these cavities, which are called Auricles, receive the 
contents of the veins; the other two communicate with the 
arteries, and are called Ventricles. The auricles form the base 
of the cone ; the ventricles the body and apex. 

The structure of the auricles is much less firm than that of 
the ventricles, and consists of a smaller proportion of muscu- 
lar fibres. They appear like appendages of the heart, while 
the ventricles compose the body of the viscus. 

The ventricles are very thick, and are composed of muscular 
fibres, closely compacted. 

The figure of the heart is not regularly conical ; for a por- 
tion of it, extending from the apex to the base, is flattened ; 
and, in its natural position, this flat part of the surface is down- 
wards. It is placed obliquely inclined in the body, so that its 
base presents backward and to the right, and its apex down- 
ward, forward, and to the left. That portion called the right 
side of the heart, and that receives the blood from the vense 
cavae, is nearly anterior, while the left, that receives the blood 
from the lungs, is nearly posterior. The two great veins called 
the ascending and descending venae cavae, which bring back 
the blood from every part of the body, and also the chyle, 
open into the right auricle from above and below ; the right 
auricle opens into the right ventricle; and from this ventricle 
arises the artery, denominated pulmonary, which passes the 
blood to the lungs. 

The pulmonary veins, which bring back the blood from the 
lungs, open into the left auricle; this auricle opens into the 
left ventricle ; and from this ventricle proceeds the aorta, ox 
great artery which carries blood to every part of the body. 

The heart is preserved in its position, first, by the venae 
cavae, which are connected to all the parts with which they 
are contiguous in their course; second, by the vessels which 
pass between it and the lungs, which are retained in a particu- 
lar position by the mediastinum ; third, by the aorta, which is 
attached to the mediastinum in its course downwards, after 
making its great curve ; and fourth, by the pericardium, which 
is attached to the great vessels and to the mediastinum. By 
these different modes the basis of the heart is fixed, while its 
body and apex are perfectly free from attachment, and only 
contiguous to the pericardium. The external surface of the 
heart, being in contact with the serous layer of the pericardium, 
is very smooth. 

The two auricles are contiguous to each other at the base, 
and are separated by a partition which is common to both. 

The right auricle originates from the junction of the two 



THE SOLIDS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 57 

venae cavse. These veins are united at some distance behind 
the right ventricle, and are dilated anteriorly into a sac or 
pouch, which is called the sinus, and extends to the right ven- 
tricle, to which it is united. 

The upper part of this pouch, or sinus, forms a point with 
indented edges, which is detached from the ventricle, but lies 
loose on the right side of the aorta. This point has some re- 
semblance to the ear of a dog, from which circumstance the 
whole cavity has been called auricle ; but by many anatomists 
the cavity is considered as consisting of two portions: the 
auricle, strictly speaking, and the sinus venosus above described. 
They, however, form but one cavity. This portion of the 
heart, or right auricle, is of an irregular oblong figure. In its 
posterior surface it is indented ; for the direction of the two 
cavae, at their junction, is not precisely the same ; but they 
form an angle which causes this indentation. The anterior 
portion of the auricles, or that which appears like a pouch be- 
tween the ventricle and the veins, is different in its structure 
from the posterior part, which is strictly a portion of the veins. 
It consists simply of muscular fibres, which are .arranged in 
fasciculi that cover the whole of the internal surface. This is 
also the case with the point, or that part which is strictly 
called auricle. These fasciculi are denominated musculi pec- 
tinati, from their resemblance to the teeth of a comb. 

That part of the internal surface which is formed by the 
septum is smooth, and the whole is covered by a delicate 
membrane. 

On the surface of the septum below the middle, is an oval 
depression, which has a thick edge, or margin ; this is called 
the fossa ovalis. In the fcetal heart, it was the foramen ovale, 
or aperture which forms the communication between the two 
auricles. 

Near this fossa is a large semilunar plait, or valve, with its 
points and concave edge uppermost, and convex edge down- 
wards. It was described by Eustachius, and therefore is called 
the valve of Eustachius. It commences at the lower surface of 
the opening of the interior vena cava, and runs forward to 
terminate below the fossa ovalis. It served in the foetus to 
obstruct the passage of the venous blood from the right auricle 
into the right ventricle, and to direct it, in a great measure, 
through the foramen ovale. 

Anterior to this valve, and near the union of the auricle and 
ventricle, is the orifice of the proper vein of the heart, or the 
coronary vein. This orifice is covered by another semilunar 
valve, which is sometimes reticulated. The aperture, which 
forms the communication between the right auricle and the 
right ventricle, is about an inch in diameter, and is called 



58 DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

ostium venosum. From its whole margin arises a valvular ring, 
or duplicative of the membrane lining the surface. This circu- 
lar valve is divided into three angular portions, which are 
called valvules tricuspides. From their margins proceed a 
great number of fine tendinous threads, which are connected 
to a number of distinct portions of muscular substance, which 
arise from the ventricle. 

The right ventricle, when examined separately from the 
other parts of the heart, is rather triangular in its figure. It 
is composed entirely of muscular fibres closely compacted, and 
is much thicker than the auricle, although not so thick as the 
ventricle. Its internal surface is composed of bundles, or 
columns of fleshy fibres, which are of various thickness and 
length. Some of these columns (columnce carnce) arise from 
the ventricle, and are connected with the tendinous threads, 
(chordce-tendinece^) which are attached to the margin of the 
tricuspid valves. The direction of them is from the apex of 
the heart toward the base. Others of the columns arise from one 
part of the surface of the ventricle, and are inserted into an- 
other part, A third species are attached to the ventricle 
throughout their whole length, forming ridges or eminences on 
it. The columns of the two last described species are very 
numerous. They present an elegant reticulated surface when 
the ventricle is laid open, and appear also to occupy a con- 
siderable portion of the cavity of the heart, some of which 
run across near the apex of the heart in every direction. They 
are all covered by a membrane continued from the auricle and 
tricuspid valves ; but this membrane appears more transparent 
in the ventricle than it is in the auricle. 

This is called the internal serous, or endocardial lining 
membrane of the heart. On the right side it is contiguous 
with that of the veins and pulmonary artery ; on the left with 
the aorta and pulmonary veins. It is extremely thin, smooth, 
and transparent, covers all the interior surface of the cavities 
of the heart, and, by being thrown into folds, with some fibrous 
matter interposed between the layers to increase their strength, 
constitutes the valves. 

A portion of the internal surface of the ventricle, which is 
to the left, is much smoother and less fasciculated: it leads to 
the orifice of the pulmonary artery, which arises from it near 
the basis of the ventricle. This artery is very conspicuous, 
externally, at the base of the heart. It is very evident, upon 
the first inspection of the heart, that the valvulae tricuspides 
will permit the blood to flow from the auricle to the ventricle ; 
but must rise and close the orifice, and thereby prevent its 
passage back again when the ventricle contracts. 

The use of the tendinous threads, which connect the valves 



THE SOLIDS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 59 

to the fleshy columns, is also very evident. The valve is sup- 
ported by this connection, and prevented from yielding to the 
pressure that tends to open a passage into the auricle. The 
blood, therefore, upon the contraction of the ventricle, is ne- 
cessarily forced into the pulmonary artery, the passage to 
which is now perfectly free. In this artery the membrane 
lining the ventricle seems continued ; but immediately within 
the orifice of the artery it is formed into three semi-circular 
folds, each of which adheres to the surface of the artery by its 
circumference, while the edge constituting its central diameter 
is loose. In the middle of the loose edge is a small, firm 
tubercle, called corpusculum arantii, which adds to the strength 
of the valve. Each of these valves, by its connection with 
the artery, forms a sac, or pocket, the orifice of which opens 
forward towards the course of the artery, and the bottom of it 
presents towards the ventricle. Blood will, therefore, pass 
from the ventricle into the artery, and along it without filling 
these sacs ; and, on the contrary, in this course will compress 
them and keep them empty. If it moves in the artery towards 
the heart, it will necessarily fill these sacs, and press the semi- 
circular portions from the sides of the artery, against each 
other. By this means a partition or septum consisting of three 
portions, will be formed between the artery and the heart, 
which will always exist when the artery acts upon its contents. 
These valves are concave towards the artery and convex to- 
wards the heart, and this convexity is composed of three 
parts, each of which is convex. 

At the place where these valves are fixed, the artery bulges 
out when extended by a retrograde injection. The enlarge- 
ments thus produced are called the sinuses of Valsalva. The 
valves are called semilunar, and, although they are formed by a 
very thin membrane, they are very strong. The left auricle is 
situated on the left side of the base of the heart. It originates 
from the junction of the four pulmonary veins, two of which 
come from each side of the thorax and appear to form a large 
part of it. It is nearly of a cubic form, but has also an angu- 
lar portion which constitutes the proper auricle, that proceeds 
from the upper and left part of the cavity, and is situated on 
the left side of the pulmonary artery. This auricle is lined by 
a small membrane, from which the valves between it and the 
ventricle originate ; but it has no fleshy columns, or musculi 
pectinati, except in the angular process properly called 
auricle. 

These valves, and the orifice communicating with the ventri- 
cle, resemble those which have been already between the right 
auricle and the ventricle; but with this difference, that the 
valvular ring is divided into two parts only, instead of three 



60 DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

which are called valvules mitrales. The tendinous threads, 
which are connected to the muscular columns, are also attach- 
ed to these valves, as in the case of the right auricle. 

These valves admit the passage of the blood from the auri- 
cal into the ventricle, but completely prevent its return when 
the ventricle contracts. One of them is so situated that it covers 
the mouth of the aorta while the blood is flowing into the 
ventricle, and leaves that orifice open when the ventricle con- 
tracts, and the passage to the auricle is closed. The left ven- 
tricle is situated posteriorly and to the left of the right ventri- 
cle. Its figure is different, for it is rather conical, and it is 
also longer. The internal surface of this ventricle resembles 
that of the right ventricle ; but the columnar carnese are 
stronger and larger. On the right side of this ventricle is the 
mouth of the aorta. 

The functional nerves of the heart are derived from the 
superior cardiac plexus. It receives its vital nerves from the 
eighth pair that ramify with the arteries that arise from the 
aorta immediately outside of the heart, and ramify from the 
base to the apex, the returning veins of which empty into tha 
lower part of the right ventricle. 

OF THE DIAPHRAGM. 

This great respiratory power is a compound muscle that 
forms a complete separation between the thorax and abdomen. 
It is convex above and concave below; the middle of it 
reaching as high within the thorax as the fourth rib. It is com- 
monly divided into two portions for description: the superior 
or great muscle and the inferior or lesser muscle. 

The great muscle of the diaphragm arises by distinct fleshy 
fibres, from the cartilago-ensiformis, from the cartilages of the 
seventh, and of all the inferior ribs on both sides. The fibres 
from the cartilago-ensiformis, and from the seventh and eighth 
ribs, run obliquely upwards and backwards; from the ninth and 
tenth transversely inwards and upwards, and from the eleventh 
and twelfth obliquely upwards. From these different origins 
the diaphragmatic muscular fibres run like radii from the cir- 
cumference to the centre of a circle, and are inserted into a 
cordiform tendon, of a considerable breadth, which is situated 
in the middle of the diaphragm, and in which, therefore, the 
fibres from opposite sides are interlaced. Towards the right 
side the tendon is perforated by a triangular hole for the pas- 
sage of the vena cava inferior; and to the upper convex part 
the pericardium and mediastinum are attached to it. The in- 
ferior lesser muscle, or the appendix of the diaphragm, arises 
from the second, third and fourth lumbar vertebrae, by eight 
heads, of which two in the middle, commonly called its crura, 



THE SOLIDS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 6 1 

are the longest, and begin tendinous. Between these crura 
the aorta and thoracic duct passes; and on the outside of these, 
the great sympathic nerves and branches of the vena azygos 
perforate the shorter heads; and at this point the sympathetic 
nerves send out their branches of involuntary motion to rami- 
fy this organ. The muscular fibres run obliquely upwards and 
forwards, and form in the middle two fleshy columns, which 
decussate and leave an open space between them for the pas- 
sage of the oesophagus and eighth pair of nerves. Two bow- 
shaped ligaments are formed on either side at the lower border 
of this muscle, which are inserted by strong fleshy fibres into 
the posterior part of the middle tendon. 

The diaphragm is the organ designed in its contracting and 
relaxing movements to do one-half of the work of respiration. 
The contractile force of this muscle enlarges the cavity of the 
thorax, and as that is a short sac in which no air can enter 
between it and the lungs, and as the lungs are elastic and per- 
forated for atmospheric inhalation, their elasticity is over- 
powered and the lungs filled with air. This is called inspir- 
ation; and the relaxation of the diaphragm gives to the lungs 
the work of contracting by their elastic force and expelling 
the air from the lungs. This is called expiration. Consequently 
the work of respiration is divided between these two contrac- 
tile forces; — the greater contractile force of the diaphragm for 
inflating the lungs, and the lesser contractile force of the lungs 
for expelling the air. 

The diaphragm is constantly under the control of the nerves 
of involuntary motion; it is also under the control of volition 
to a certain extent through the agency of the phrenic nerves. 

Since the time when the immortal Harvey first discovered 
the circulation of the blood, the modus operandi by which 
the blood is transferred in the lungs from the pulmonary arte- 
rial capillaries to those of the venous, has been a matter that 
has elicited much attention by anatomists and physiologists; 
and as these vessels are too minute to be observable in the 
cadaver, many theories have been suggested by which this 
process might be effected; and the one most generally received 
presumes that the two capillary systems ramify in the outer 
coat of the air cells, and at the points of their union the work 
of hematosis is effected, through the medium of the internal 
membrane of the air cells that lies between these capillary 
vesels and the air in the cells. 

This supposition is predicated upon and strengthened by 
the fact that these capillary vessels ramify to the air cells, and 
that the blood is kept securely in its circulating vessels, with- 
out any escape into the air cells. 

Beginning the subject of the capillary transfer of the blood 



62 DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

through the lungs, we first find the blood forced into the pul- 
monary artery by the contracting force of the right ventricle 
of the heart. Secondly, we find the pulmonary artery rami- 
fying in the lungs in their passage to the air cells. These 
ramifications diminish in calibre in proportion to their multi- 
plication, until their calibre is reduced to 1-1200 of an inch. 
The size of the blood globules is estimated to be 1-2300 of 
an inch, and that of the air cells 1-100 of an inch, when 
dilated. The object of selecting a fine material for construct- 
ing the globules in a definite symmetrical die is achieved in 
these capillary arteries near their termina at the air cells. 
Other molecules join with those furnished by the functional 
nerve to form the coats of these globules preparatory to re- 
ceiving the hsematine. In this chemical work of depositing the 
haematine, we find caloric and electricity evolved. The caloric 
is used for raising arid keeping up the thermal standard of the 
system; the latter goes to furnish the electric deposit in the 
brain, called neurine. 

The texture of the membrane of the air cell is composed of 
the finest fibre extended from the mucous membrane of the 
bronchia. The texture of its tissuary fibre is too fine to 
permit the escape of the blood globules through its meshes, 
but not too fine for the ingress of oxygen gas or the escape of 
carbonic acid gas when distended by this species of combus- 
tion that is controlled and extinguished by the carbonic acid 
gas generated in the chemical transaction that transpires in it. 
This pulmonary transit centre receives the afferent blood from 
the pulmonary capillary artery when the cell is collapsing; and 
at each inflation of the cell it is arterialized and transferred to 
the efferent circulation in the capillary veins. Just when the 
lung reaches its normally full inflation, the functional nerve 
ignites the combustible material in this transit vessel, and in 
the act it furnishes the element to chemically charge the blood 
globules with their red sanguineous element. In this formula, 
the intermitting charge of electric element sent to the trans- 
ferring vehicle ignites the carbon in it, and the combustion is 
supported by the oxygen contained in the air that fills the cell, 
and the control of the thermal temperature is divided between 
the exhausting oxygen and the extinguishing effects of the ac- 
cumulating carbonic acid gas being generated by the combus- 
tion, and that derived from nutrition. 

In this chemical work two compositions are effected: one 
from the combination of oxygen with the electric molecules, 
called the red-pigment or hcematine, and the other by the union 
of oxygen with carbon forming carbonic acid gas. The blood 
globules retain the hcematine, and the carbonic acid gas is ex- 
haled in the outward breath. 



THE SOLIDS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 6$ 

When these small blood globules traverse the capillaries they 
are arranged in rows. The contracting force of the right 
ventricle of the heart sends the blood to this transit in the 
lungs, and the expansive force of the left ventricle draws it 
from this point of transfer through the pulmonary veins into 
its ventricle, from whence it is sent through the vital arterial 
system to nourish all parts of the system. 

Security is taken to prevent a retrograde motion of the cir- 
culation by placing valves betwen the auricles and the 
ventricles. 

Security is also taken in the arrangement of the heart into a 
double viscus to control a concert of movement of the two 
dynamic forces resident in the two ventricles, by putting them 
under the control of one nervous arrangement for contraction. 
This concert of action secures a uniform circulation through 
the lungs, as well as keeps the balance of the circulation be- 
tween the venous and arterial systems in all parts of the body. 

DIAPHRAGMATIC MOTION. 

The involuntary motion of this muscle has been a hidden 
mystery in regard to the cause of its alternate uniform con- 
tractions and relaxations; it is one that has hitherto been too 
subtle for our most talented physiologists ; it is one that re- 
quires as much scrutiny to detect its hidden power as that of 
haematosis. 

The great sympathetic nerves have charge over the func- 
tional work of all the organs in the chest. The superior car- 
diac branches direct the involuntary motion of the heart. The 
middle cardiacs direct the chemical work of haematosis in the 
lungs; and where these two sympathic trunks perforate the 
diaphragm they send off the involuntary nerves to this muscle 
that governs its muscular action in doing its share of the work 
of respiration. The nerves that furnish the electricity for 
haematosis in the lungs and those which operate to contract 
the diaphragm are in sympathy with each other, and perform 
an intermitting work with both the lungs and diaphragm, that 
alternate with each other in action, and in expending the elec- 
tric element derived from the same source. Consequently 
these three organs — the lungs, heart and diaphragm, are under 
the control of the genius of this sympathetic nervous system, 
to circulate the blood, and vitalize it in its passage through the 
lungs. While the heart controls the circulation alone, the 
work of haematosis is divided between the lungs and the dia- 
phragm, in the following way: 

The contraction of the diaphragm inflates the lungs with 
vital air, at the moment when the lungs are inflated to their 
normal maximum (as in sleep, when volition does not inter- 



64 DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

fere.) The pulmonary nerves contribute their electric charge 
to ignite the carbon in the transit vessels to vitalize the blood; 
and as there are not less than four millions of air cells in each 
cubic inch of the lungs, the exhaustion of the nervous electri- 
city is complete for the time. This nervous expenditure relieves 
the contractile force of the diaphragm, and relaxes and leaves 
the elastic contractile force of the lungs to expel the air. 
During the subsidence of the lungs the nervous supply is re- 
cuperating, and very soon after the lungs have reached a com- 
plete state of collapse, the diaphragm begins gently to contract, 
and when it is at its maximum it is again relieved by exhaustion 
from the pulmonary nerves. 

The intermittent action of the pulmonary nerves is depen- 
dent upon the following circumstances: 

The air cells have fine tubes that lead to them, which com- 
prise the most elastic portion of the lungs, and is the part in which 
the vacuum first exerts its inflating force under the power of 
the muscular contraction of the diaphragm ; consequently its 
dilating force first expands the air cells and the fine elastic tubes 
that lead to them, and by this expanding force the air rushes 
in to fill the vacuum ; and as the air cells are thus constituted 
the magazines of the vacuum they are the last parts to be 
filled with air ; consequently the air cells are not filled until 
the lungs receive their full inflation. Consequently the appear- 
ance of the oxygen in the air cells furnishes the moment for 
the nervous expenditure when all the elements are present to 
elicit it for combustion. 

The presence of the oxygen contained in the air upon the 
tensely distended air cells induces the nervous emission, which 
transaction is not very dissimilar to that which transpires in 
the heart that commands the contractile force of that viscus 
for the circulation of the blood. 

From the provisional structure of the heart comes its fine 
sensibility ; and this provisional principle not only pertains to 
the heart and pulmonary air cells, but to every part of the 
living being. 

THE ABDOMEN AND ITS VISCERA. 

This great cavity occupies more than half of the space en- 
closed by the ribs, and all the interior of the trunk of the body 
below the thorax. 

It is bounded above by the diaphragm, which is supported 
by the lower ribs; by a portion of the spine and its adjoining 
muscles, behind ; and on the front and sides by the various 
muscles which occur between the lower margin of the thorax 
and the upper margin of the ossa innominata. These bones 
contribute, by means of the costal of the ossa ilia, to form the 



THE SOLIDS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 65 

lateral walls. The pelvis forms the lower boundary. The ab- 
domen contains: 

1 st. The stomach and the whole intestinal tube, consisting of 
the small and great intestines. 

2nd. The assisting chylopoietic viscera — the liver, pancreas, 
and the spleen. 

3rd. The renal organs — the kidneys, the ureters, and the 
bladder. 

4th. The organs of generative import ; those of the female 
sex, being almost wholly included in the pelvis ; and those of 
the male, being situated partly within and partly without it. 

5th. The peritoneum and its various processes — the mesen- 
tery, omentum, etc. 

6th. A portion of the aorta, and almost the whole of the 
inferior vena cava and their branches, as are appropriated to 
the viscera of the abdomen and pelvis. 

7th. Those portions of the par vagum and intercostal 
nerves which are appropriated to the cavity ; and portions of 
some of the nerves destined to the lower extremities. 

8th. The lower part of the thoracic duct, or the great trunk 
of the absorbent system, with the large branches that compose 
it, and the glands connected with them — the lacteals and the 
mesenteric glands. 

DIVISIONS OF THE ABDOMEN. 

As the cavity of the abdomen has no natural division, ana- 
tomists have divided it by imaginary lines into various 
regions, with a view to precision in their accounts of the 
situation of the different contained parts. 

Thus they have very generally agreed to draw two transverse 
lines across the abdomen, to form three great divisions, viz: 
the upper, middle and lower ; and they have also divided each 
of these into three regions. The three regions of the upper- 
most division are defined with precision, those on each side 
of which are called the right and left hypochondriac regions, 
occupy the space immediately within the lower ribs and their 
cartilages, while the middle space, included within the mar- 
gins of these cartilages and a line drawn from the lower ribs 
on one side to that on the other side, is denominated the epi- 
gastric region. 

The lower tranverse line is drawn from the top of one ilium 
or hip to the other. 

These two lines will mark the three great divisions. If, 
then, two parallel lines are drawn directly upwards, one from 
each of the superior anterior spinous processes of the ilium, 
(or from the inside of each hip) until it touched the lower 
margin of the ribs, they will divide each of the two lower di- 



66 DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

visions of the abdomen into three regions. The centre of the 
middle division is the umbilical, and on each side is the right 
and left iliac region. 

There are therefore nine of these regions. And I will here 
remark that the space around the end of the sternum is some- 
times called the scrobiculus cordis ; and the space immediately 
within and above the os pubis — the regio pubis. 

These different regions are occupied in the following 
manner: 

The liver fills the right hypochondriac region, and extends 
through the upper part of the epigastric region into the left 
hypochondriac. The stomach occupies the principal part of 
the epigastric region and a considerable portion of the left 
hypochondriac. 

The spleen is also situated in the left hypochondriac region. 

That portion of the intestinal tube which is composed of 
the small intestines is generally found in the umbilical, the 
hypogastric and the iliac regions, and when the bladder is 
empty in the pelvis. But the duodenum, or first of the small 
intestines, which proceeds immediately from the stomach, is 
situated in the epigastric and umbilical regions. 

The great intestines commence in or near the right iliac 
region, and ascend through the right lumbar to the right hypo- 
chondriac region. It then crosses the abdomen, passing through 
the lower part of the epigastric or upper part of the umbilical 
to the left lumbar region; from thence it descends into the left 
iliac region ; it then curves abruptly backward and to the 
right in the form of the letter s, producing what is called the 
sigmoid flexure of the colon, when it descends into the pelvis, 
and continues to form the rectum, and terminates at the lower 
end of the spine. 

At the back part of the epigastric region, and very low down 
in it, is situated the pancreas. The kidneys lie in the most 
posterior parts of the lumbar regions, and from each of them 
is continued a tube or duct called ureter, that passes into the 
pelvis to carry the urine into the bladder. This viscus in 
males is in contact with the last portion of the great intestine 
called the rectum, and with it occupies almost all of the cavity 
of the pelvis, while in females the uterus and its appendages 
are situated between this intestine andthe bladder. 

In the posterior part of the abdomen, in contact with the 
spine, is the aorta. This great blood vessel passes from the 
thorax between the crura of the diaphragm, and continues 
down the spine until it approaches the margin of the pelvis, 
when it divides into two great branches called the iliac arteries. 
Each of these great branches divides again on the side of the 
pelvis into two: namely, the external iliac, which passes under 



THE SOLIDS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 67 

the crural arch to the thigh, and the internal iliac or hypogas- 
tric, which descends into the cavity of the pelvis. 

Soon after the arrival of the aorta in the abdomen, it gives 
off two large branches. The first, which is the cceliac, is dis- 
tributed to the liver, the stomach and the spleen ; the second, 
called the superior mesenteric, is spent upon the intestines. 
Lower down in the abdomen it also sends off a small branch 
for the intestines, called the inferior mesenteric. Besides these 
vessels for the chylopoietic viscera, the aorta sends off a large 
branch called emulgent, to each kidney. 

The inferior or ascending vena cava is situated on the right 
of the aorta in front of the spine. It is formed below by the 
union of the iliac veins, and on its passage upwards it receives 
the emulgent veins from the kidneys ; but it receives in its 
course no veins which correspond directly with the coeliac and 
mesenteric arteries. The small veins, that answer to the 
branches of these arteries, unite and form one large vein which 
goes to the liver; it is called the vena portarum. 

From the liver the large veins pass into the vena cava and 
there deposit the blood of the vena portarum after it has 
furnished materials for the secretion of bile. The vena cava, 
in its passage upwards, is in close contact with the posterior 
thick edge of the liver. It often passes along a deep groove in 
its edges, and sometimes it is completely surrounded by the 
liver in its course. The veins of the liver enter the vena cava 
at this place, and of course they are not to be seen without 
dissection. Immediately after leaving the liver, the vena cava 
passes through an aperture in the tendinous centre of the 
diaphragm to unite itself to the right auricle of the heart. 

The peritoneum lines the walls of the abdomen, and it is re- 
flected over nearly all of the organs therein contained. In its 
character it is a simple membrane, white in appearance and of 
a firm texture, and belongs to the order of serous membranes. 
It furnishes the serous fluid to lubricate the surface of all the 
organs in the abdomen that move upon each other, thereby 
preventing any injury by friction. 

It supports the viscera of the abdomen in their proper posi- 
tion. The cellular substance by which the peritoneum is con- 
nected to the contiguous parts is very different in different 
places. It is very short, indeed, between this membrane and 
the stomach, and intestines, and between it and the tendinous 
centre of the diaphragm. Between the peritoneum and the 
muscles generally it is much longer. Where it covers the kid- 
neys and the psoas muscles it is very lax and yielding. About 
the kidneys a larger quantity of adeps or fat very commonly 
collects in it. On the psoas muscles it yields with but little 
resistance to the passage of pus or any other effused fluid, as 



68 DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

in the case of psoas abscess. The peritoneum abounds with 
absorbent vessels, and therefore possesses the power of absorp- 
tion to a great degree. 

This power may be inferred, not only from the spontaneous 
removal of the fluid of ascites, but if milk and water be intro- 
duced into the abdomen of a living animal, through a puncture, 
it will also disappear. It receives its blood vessels from the 
neighboring parts, and in a healthy state it has little or no 
sensibility. 

Some of the viscera are much more completely invested 
with the peritoneum than others. The stomach, liver and 
spleen are almost completely surrounded by it. That portion 
of the smaller intestinal tubes which is called jejunuin and 
ileum, and the transverse portions of the large intestines, 
called the arch of the colon, are invested with it in the same 
way. But a considerable portion of the duodenum and the 
pancreas is behind it. The lateral portions of the colon are 
in close contact with the posterior surface of the abdomen, 
and the peritoneum only covers that portion of their surfaces 
which looks anteriorly towards the cavity of the abdomen, and 
is not in contact with their posterior surface. 

The urinary organs are not much connected with the peri- 
toneum. The kidneys and ureters appear exterior to it and 
behind it. The urinary bladder is below it, and has only a 
partial covering from it on its upper portion. 

The peritoneum which covers the stomach is extended from 
the great curvature of that organ so as to form a large mem- 
brane, which descends like an apron before the intestines. 
This process of peritoneum is composed of two lamina, so 
thin and delicate as to resemble cellular membranes, which 
after extending downwards to the lower part of the abdomen, 
are turned backwards and upwards, and proceed in that direc- 
tion until they arrive at the colon, which they enclose, and 
continue to the back of the abdomen, forming the mesocolon. 
The part of this process which is between the stomach and 
the colon is called the epiploon or onientum. 

OF THE LIVER. 

This largest viscus of the abdomen, when in a healthy state, 
is of a reddish brown color. If it is taken out of the subject, 
and laid on a flat surface, it is flat, but in the abdomen it is 
convex above and concave beneath. It is situated in the right 
hypochondriac region, which it occupies entirely, and extends 
through the upper portion of the epigastric into the left hypo- 
chondriac region. Being placed immediately under the dia- 
phragm, and in close contact with it, it partakes of its form. 
When thus situated it is of an irregular figure, between the 



THE SOLIDS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 69 

circular and the oval, but is broader at the right extremity 
than at the left, and very irregular in thickness. The edge or 
margin which is in contact with the posterior part of the right 
hypochondriac region, is very thick. It generally becomes 
thinner towards the left, and also towards the front ; so that 
the right margin is very thick, while the left and anterior mar- 
gin is thin. 

The upper convex surface of the liver is smooth ; the lower 
concave surface is marked by several grooves or fissures, and 
eminences. One of these, called umbilical, or the great 
fissure, commences in the notch of the anterior edge of the 
liver, to the left of the middle, and continues to the posterior 
edge. At the commencement of this fissure the umbilical liga- 
ment enters, and at the termination, or near it, the vena cava 
is situated. Opposite to this fissure, on the upper convex 
surface, is a ligament passing from the diaphragm to the liver, 
which is called the falciform. The fissure and the ligament 
divide the liver into its two great lobes — the right and left. 
Another great fissure called the transverse or principal, com- 
mences on the right lobe and extends to the left, crossing the 
first mentioned fissure at right angles, and extending a very 
short distance beyond it. It is rather deep, and rather nearer 
to the posterior than the anterior edge of the liver. In this 
fissure, near to its right extremity, the great vein, called the 
venaportarum, and the hepatic artery enter, and the excretory 
duct of the liver, commonly called the hepatic duct, comes out. 
About the middle of the fissure are two prominences, one on 
each side. These were called the portse or gates of the liver, 
and hence the great vein that enters the liver was called vena 
portarum. This vein has two very large rectangular branches, 
which constitute what is called the sinus of the vena portarum. 
They occupy the principal extent of the fissures. The liver is 
in close contact with the vena cava behind, and there is either 
a groove in it for the passage of the vein, or this great vessel 
is completely enclosed by it. There is also an excavation on 
the lower surface of the liver, which is occupied by a portion 
of the gall bladder. 

Besides the great lobes above mentioned, there are also two 
or three prominent parts in the concave surface, which are 
denominated lobes. One of these, called lobulus Spigelii, is 
oblong with two sides, and an angle continued along its whole 
length, which extends from the transverse fissure on the pos- 
terior margin of the liver. It is situated between the posterior 
part of the transverse fissure, or ductus venosus, and the vena 
cava. 

The anterior extremity of this lobe, which forms one of the 
margins of the transverse fissure, is somewhat bifurcated, and 



70 DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

has been called lobulus caudatus. The largest portion of the 
bifurcated end forms a process like a papillae, and is one of 
the portae. 

Between the umbilical fissure and the depression for the gall 
bladder is a protuberant space, which varies from an inch and 
one-quarter to two inches in breadth. This has been called a 
lobe — lobulus quartus or anonymous. Its posterior point, op- 
posite the papillae of the lobulus Spigelii, forms the other 
portae of the liver. 

The peritoneum is extended from the surface of the abdo- 
men to the surface of the liver, in such manner as to cover it, 
and to form ligaments, which have a great effect in retaining 
it in its proper situation. The whole posterior edge of the 
liver is in contact with the back part of the abdomen. The 
peritoneum above the liver is reflected to the upper surface of 
it, and the peritoneum below it to its lower surface; so that 
two lamina of the peritoneum pass from the lower part of the 
diaphragm at the back of the abdomen to the posterior edge 
of the liver. 

These processes of the peritoneum are considered as form- 
ing two ligaments which are called the right and left lateral 
ligaments. A portion of the posterior surface of the liver un- 
covered by the peritoneum is often in contact with a portion 
of the tendon of the diaphragm, which is also uncovered by 
the peritoneum around this place of contact; the peritoneum 
is extended from the diaphragm to the liver, and thus forms 
what has been called the coronary ligament of the liver. 

The peritoneum of the right side of the diaphragm, and of 
the abdominal muscles as far down as the umbilicus, is extend- 
ed to the liver, and joins it on the convex surface immediately 
opposite to the umbilical fissure. The peritoneum from the 
left side of these parts does the same, and as these reflections of 
the peritoneum are continued from so low a part as the um- 
bilicus, they are not only extended to the convex surface, but 
to the great notch and along the umbilical fissure. From the 
umbilicus proceeds a round cord-like ligament, which in the 
foetal state was a vein that passes to the great fissure of the 
liver and along it. The process of the peritoneum above 
mentioned is so connected with this cord that it encloses it in 
its lower edge, and the whole is called the falciform ligament 
of the liver. The cord, when named separately, is the um- 
bilical, or round ligament ; and the membrane or lamina of 
the peritoneum form the suspensory ligament. Besides these 
the peritoneum on the lower side of the liver is so arranged 
that it not only extends to the stomach but to the duodenum 
and the colon. 

By these ligaments the position of the liver must be fixed to 



THE SOLIDS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 7 1 

a degree. There is one additional connection which must 
have a great effect in retaining it in its proper situation. The 
vena cava receives two or three great veins from the liver 
{vena cava hepaticd) at the place where it is in contact with 
the posterior edge of that viscus. These veins of course pass 
directly from the substance of the liver into the cava, and con- 
nect it to that vessel. As the cava is supported by the heart 
and also by the diaphragm, it must afford a considerable sup- 
port to the liver. 

When the stomach and intestines are distended, they must 
also contribute in a considerable degree to the support of the 
liver. As it is in contact with the diaphragm, it is obvious 
that it must be influenced by the motions of that muscle, and 
it must descend when the diaphragm contracts. 

The liver is composed of a substance which has some firm- 
ness of consistency although it is yielding, and somewhat brittle 
or friable. When cut into it, the sections of many tubes, or ves- 
sels of different diameters, appear on the cut surface. When the 
texture of this substance is more closely examined, it appears 
somewhat granulated, or composed of very small bodies, which 
were called acini by the anatomist who first discovered them. 

The liver holds the first place for the size among the glands 
of the body; it is still more remarkable for some other circum- 
stances in its economy. In addition to the artery, which 
passes to it as arteries do to other glands, there is a large vein 
{vena portaruni) which also enters it as an artery; and after 
ramifying through the liver, communicates, as does the artery, 
with other veins which carry the blood from this gland into 
the vena cava and the general circulation. There are there- 
fore three species of blood vessels in the liver, and with these 
are found the vessels which carry out the secreted bile. 

The artery of the liver is denominated the hepatic artery. 
The vein which goes to the liver is called the vena portarum, 
from the place where it enters. The veins which carry to the 
vena cava the blood brought to the liver by the hepatic artery 
and the vena portaruni are called the hepatic veins. And the 
duct through which the bile flows out of the liver is called the 
hepatic duct. 

Three of these vessels — the. hepatic artery, the vena portarum 
and the hepatic duct — enter the liver at the great fissure at the 
place where the prominence exists, called the porta; hence 
the name vena portarum was applied to the veins. 

These vessels ramify in the manner presently to be describ- 
ed. It is ascertained by minute anatomical investigations, that 
the liver is entirely composed of the ramifications of these 
described vessels and nerves, which are connected together by 
cellular membranes. 



?2 DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

It has been already observed that the first great branch sent 
off by the artery into the abdomen, the cceliac, divides into 
three branches, which go respectively to the stomach, liver 
and spleen. The hepatic is the largest of these branches. In 
its passage towards the liver it sends off an artery to the 
stomach, called the gastrica dextra. At the great fissure it 
divides into two branches. The right branch which supplies 
the right lobe of the liver is of course the largest. This branch 
sends off one to the gall bladder which is called the cystic ar- 
tery, and also some small branches. It passes under the hepa- 
tic duct and ramifies through the great lobe of the liver. The 
left branch ramifies through the left lobe of the viscus. It can 
be proved by injections that the hepatic artery communicates 
not only with the hepatic veins but with the biliary duct and 
the vena portarum also, or at least that they center upon the 
same point where the work of nutrition and biliary secretion is 
effected. At these terminal points very minute granule, 
called acini, appear under microscopic observation. In them, 
two systems of nerves and three systems of blood vessels meet 
to sustain the organ and to perform the vital work assigned to 
this viscus. 

The arterial blood contributes to the sustentation of the 
vessels, nerves, membranes and ligaments, of which the liver 
is composed, aided by the pneumogastric, or eighth pair of 
nerves. The portal circulation contributes the element from 
which the bile is secreted, aided by the ganglionic functional 
nerves. Two systems of circulating vessels enter the liver and 
ramify it with their minute capillary branches — the arterial and 
the portal. Each of these systems have their corresponding 
capillary veins. These veins which arise from their two sepa- 
rate circulating systems, in their course to the vena cava, anas- 
tamose with each other, and form the hepatic veins which dis- 
charge these two kinds of hepatic venous blood in a mixed 
state into the vena cava ascendens. 

Capillary ducts also arise from the termina of the portal cir- 
culation to carry forward the secreted bile into the great bili- 
ary duct or sinus. 

From this duct the cystic duct arises that connects with the 
gall bladder, and through which the bile sets back from this 
great duct into it. After uniting with the- cystic duct it is called 
ductus communis choledochus. 

The great biliary duct or sinus in its physiological habits 
needs an explanation to account for the reason why the bile 
passes into the cyst at any time rather than into the duodenum. 
I will here remark that this great duct is a biliary sinus designed 
to retain the secreted bile to be given off into the duodenum 
when it is filled with food. By distending the stomach and 



THE SOLIDS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 73 

the duodenum with food, more pressure is made upon the liver 
and gall bladder than when they are empty and in their col- 
lapsed condition. During the process of digestion this duct is 
carrying the bile into the duodenum by means of the mouth 
or orifice of this duct, which is opened by a provision in the 
erectile state of the duodenum when chyme enters it from the 
stomach. 

This sinus and gall bladder not only furnish a reservoir for 
the bile but for the pancreatic juice; also when these ducts 
unite. 

THE PANCREAS. 

The pancreas, or sweet bread, is a glandular organ that 
secretes a juice called succus pancreaticus or pancreatic juice. 
Its average length is about seven inches, and it is irregularly 
oblong in its form. Its largest extremity is in contact with the 
duodenum, and it extends from this intestine in a transverse 
direction behind the stomach to the spleen, to which it is con- 
nected by the omentum and by blood vessels. It is not in- 
vested by the peritoneum, but is situated in the space which 
exists between the two lamina of the mesocolon, as they pro- 
ceed from the back of the abdomen, before they come in con- 
tact with each other. It is anterior to the aorta and vena cava 
and to the mesenteric vein or main branch of the vena portarum, 
being connected to these parts by cellular membrane. At the 
right extremity, which is connected with the duodenum, is a 
process of the gland that extends downward in close contact 
with the intestine. This is called the head of the pancreas, 
its lower edge inclining forward and its upper edge backward, 
is much thicker than the lower edge, and has in it a groove or 
excavation which is occupied by the splenic blood vessels. 
The arterial blood of this gland is partly supplied by the 
splenic artery, which, in its course from the main trunk of the 
cceliac to the spleen, while it is in the groove at the edge of 
the pancreas, sends off into the gland one considerable branch 
called the great pancreatic, and a number of small branches 
which go off in succession. In addition to these the pancreas 
receives vessels from one of the branches of the hepatic ar- 
tery before it sends off its great ramifications. It also receives 
some small twigs from several other contiguous arteries. The 
veins correspond with the arteries, but they are ultimately dis- 
charged into the vena portarum. 

The pancreas is of a dull, white color, with a tinge of red. 
Its weight is from three to four ounces. Its breadth at the 
body and splenic extremity is sixteen lines, at the neck twelve 
lines, at the head two inches and three lines. Its thickness at 
the body, neck and splenic extremity is four lines ; at the 
head eight lines. 

D 



74 DAVIS THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

It appears to consist of small bodies of a granulated form, 
which are so arranged as to compose small masses or lobes, 
united to each other by cellular membrane. Each of these 
granulated bodies receives one or more arterial twigs, and 
from it proceeds not only a vein but a small excretory duct, 
which, uniting with similar ducts, form the adjoining granula or 
acini, forms a larger duct in each lobe or mass. These open 
into the great duct of the gland, which proceeds through it 
lengthwise, from the left extremity in which it commences to 
the right. This duct is situated in the body of the gland, 
which must be dissected to bring it into view. It is thin and 
transparent, and rather larger in diameter than a crow's quill. 
In its progress towards the right extremity of the gland it 
gradually enlarges, and commonly receives a branch from the 
part called the head or lesser pancreas. It most commonly 
unites with the biliary duct or sinus before it opens into the 
duodenum. Sometimes these ducts open separately, but very 
near to each other. They penetrate the coat of the duodenum 
rather obliquely, and between four and five inches from the 
pylorus. 

The pancreas has an irregular surface destitute of a peri- 
toneal coat, but it is invested by a cellular membrane which 
also connects its different lobes to each other. The head or 
lesser pancreas adheres to the duodenum, and when it is en- 
larged by disease, the passage of the aliment through that 
portion of intestine is much impeded and sometimes com- 
pletely obstructed. 

The use of the pancreatic juice is to induce the peristaltic 
motion of the bowels and in carrying forward the aliment from 
the duodenum into the small intestines in due time. 

OF THE SPLEEN. 

The spleen is a viscus of considerable size, situated in the 
left hypochondriac region beneath the diaphragm and the 
eighth rib, and to the left of the stomach, which it is immedi- 
ately connected with. Its medium length is about four and 
one-half inches, and its width three or four inches, and its 
thickness two and one-half inches, and it weighs about eight 
ounces. It is of a soft texture, somewhat spongy to the feel, 
and easily torn. In a very recent subject it is of a grayish 
blue color, which in a few hours changes to a purple, so that it 
resembles a mass of clotted blood. At its inner surface, or 
that which faces the kidneys, a fissure exists, by which the 
vessels and nerves enter and issue from the organ. 

The spleen is invested by the peritoneum, one process of 
which is often extended from the diaphragm above and behind 
it, in the form of a ligament. Another process of the same 



THE SOLIDS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 75 

membrane is extended to it from the great extremity of the 
stomach. The peritoneum is continued from the spleen in 
the form of omentum (gastro splenic?) Within these peritoneal 
coverings is the proper coat of the spleen, which is so closely- 
connected to it as to appear to be one membrane. They are, 
however, very distinct at the great fissure, but the external 
coat is very thin. The proper coat of the spleen is not very 
thick; it is dense and firm and somewhat elastic, but not much 
so. It is partly transparent. 

The spleen has a large artery, which is one of three great 
branches of the cceliac. This vessel runs in an undulating 
manner in a groove in the upper edge of the pancreas, and in 
this course sends off many small branches to supply the gland. 
The splenic artery, before it arrives at this spleen, divides into 
five or six branches, which are also undulating in their course, 
and penetrate into the viscus at the above-mentioned fissure. 
These branches ramify minutely to every part of the viscus. 

From these branches, or from the main trunk before it rami- 
fies, three or four small branches proceed to the left extremity 
of the stomach. They are called vasa brevea or arterial 
breves. 

The splenic artery is very large in proportion to the size of 
the viscus to which it is sent, and the vein is unusually large 
in proportion to the artery, by reason of the excretory ducts 
of the organ having anastomosed with the veins before they 
emanate from it. 

The splenic vein in its course receives into it the venous 
blood that emanates from the stomach and pancreas, and forms 
one of the principal branches of the vena portarum. 

The nerves of the spleen are derived from the solar plexus. 
They form a plexus around the vessels and accompany them 
through the viscus. The absorbent vessels of the spleen are 
very numerous. Those of the deep-seated parts unite to the 
superficial at the fissure where the blood vessels enter. They 
terminate in the thoracic duct, after passing through several 
lymphatic glands. 

The physiological work assigned to this organ has been a 
subject of interesting inquiry from the earliest to the present 
time. It has received the closest anatomical dissection from 
many eminent anatomists and physiologists, in order to ascer- 
tain by its structure the functional work assigned to it, yet 
without being able to arrive at any definite conclusion in re- 
gard to its offices. The confounding argument that has been 
successfully hurled against every suggestion of its use is that 
which is derived from the fact that man and animals have been 
able to live after it had been wholly extirpated. Yet, as all are 
willing to admit that everything that God has made in the ani- 



76 DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

mal economy subserves important ends, and that he forms 
nothing in vain, some protecting care for the system is assign- 
ed to this organ, and to me it seems to lend its aid in various 
ways. 

First, more arterial blood is assigned to its use than any 
other organ, is manifest by the undue size of the arteries as- 
signed it; and as the emanating veins are unduly large and 
out of proportion with even these large arteries, evinces an 
argument in favor of the idea that a large quantity of element 
is elaborated by this gland, and that its excretory ducts unite 
with the emanating veins before they leave the viscus. If this 
be so, may not this recrementitial element subserve the end of 
more perfectly finishing the chyle in arming it with greater 
chemical affinities than it would possess were this organ ex- 
tirpated or disqualified to perform its functional work in dis- 
ease? 

Secondly, one of the fundamental laws of chemistry is that 
at every chemical change matter undergoes, caloric and elec- 
tricity are evolved. As a large quantity of arterial blood is 
sent to this organ for conversion, an unusual amount of caloric 
and electricity must be evolved by this organ; and, as it lies in 
contact with the stomach, may not this caloric aid the stomach 
in digestion and protect it from being chilled below the stand- 
ard of assimilation when large drafts of cold water are taken. 
Again, the high temperature of the venous blood sent from the 
spleen may serve to keep up the temperature in the portal cir- 
culation to a proper degree for its functional work of secret- 
ing the bile, and the electricity evolved return to the great 
nervous centres and contribute to the capital stock of the 
cineritious element, or ganglionic nervous capital. 

Thirdly, the spleen seems to attract much attention, and 
perhaps deserves high consideration, for the aid it renders in 
resuscitating the system from the state of chill in ague and 
fever. In this disease prostration of the nervous system is the 
first appreciable derangement. When this enervation is car- 
ried to the extent that the ganglionic nerves cannot render the 
organs of the digestive apparatus sufficient aid to perfect the 
chyle, assimilation is imperfectly effected, until a collapse en- 
sues, and a chill sets in. 

The spleen being the most sensitive organ in the group, that 
derive their neives from the solar plexus, is thrown into a state 
of tormina by the congested state, during the arterial plethora, 
induced by the chill. This pain commands a nervous rally 
that has to pass through the solar plexus to reach the spleen. 
This nervous rally resuscitates the power of the solar plexus, 
and enables it to contribute renewed energy of action to all of 
the organs of the digestive apparatus, and thereby induces a re- 



THE SOLIDS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 77 

action from the cold stage to a febrile state ; thereby the sys- 
tem is saved from perishing in the chill. In cases of severe 
congestive chills and fever, wherein the patient dies in the 
third or fourth chill, the spleen is capable of effecting a suf- 
ficient rally at first, but by the intensity of the congestion it be- 
comes more and more disenabled to command the due amount 
of sympathy to induce an efficient nervous influx to effect a re- 
action, and the chill continues until the lamp of life is extin- 
guished. Each of the congested organs contribute to induce 
this nervous rally in proportion to their sensitiveness, but lack 
ability to play the most conspicuous part. Therefore it is very 
doubtful .whether the system when deprived of this organ could 
survive a congestive chill. 

Fourthly, this organ also serves as a sensitive media to 
check the young and indiscreet mind from persisting in long 
continued exhausting muscular effort, as in running or in hurried 
labor. By this undue effort the spleen becomes unendurably 
painful, thereby they are compelled to rest until the nervous 
system shall recuperate sufficient to relieve the pain. It there- 
by admonishes such minds to use moderate effort in muscular 
action. Were the system deprived of this monitor, fatal con- 
gestion of the nervous centers might result from such indiscreet 
exhaustions of the nervous system. 

OF THE CeSOPHAGUS. 

The oesophagus is a flexible elastic tube which when distended 
is nearly cylindrical. It consists of a muscular coat externally, 
and an internal tunic, evidently continued from that of the 
pharynx. Those two coats &jp connected by a cellular sub- 
stance called the nervous ^aSwhich receives the nerves and 
blood vessels before they ramify the other membranes. This 
coat is loose and allows the two membranes to move consid- 
erably on each other. There is no sphincter at the junction 
of the oesophagus with the stomach, as has been asserted by 
some anatomists. The mucous membrane of this tube, like that 
of the rectum (and unlike any other portion of the alimentary 
canal), is united by a very loose cellular tissue to the inner 
face of the circular stratum of fibers, so that it may be with- 
drawn as a cylindrical tube from the muscular sheath in which 
it is contained. The blood vessels of the oesophagus come 
from the aorta and those which are in the vicinity. 

The nerves are derived from the eighth pair. The lympha- 
tic vessels are very abundant. In the neck the oesophagus in- 
clines rather to the left of the middle line. It lies behind the 
trachea, and as it enters the chest and proceeds down the back 
between the lumina of the mediastinum, it preserves the same 
course to the fourth dorsal vertebra, when it assumes the mid- 



78 DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

die portion and proceeds downwards, with the aorta tp its left 
and the pericardium before it. At about the ninth dorsal 
vertebra it inclines again rather to the left and somewhat for- 
ward, to arrive at the aperture in the diaphragm through 
which it passes. Through this course it is connected by cellu- 
lar membranes to the contiguous parts ; and this investiture of 
the cellular membrane has been called its external coat. 

OF THE STOMACH. 

This organ is a large sac that receives the aliment from the 
oesophagus. Its left or largest part lies in the left hypochon- 
drium and extends to the right a little past the sternum in the 
epigastric region. The orifice which connects it with the 
oesophagus is called the cardiac orifice, and at its right or lower 
extremity ,where it empties into the duodenum, is denominated 
its pyloric orifice. It lies directly in contact with the left lobe 
of the liver. As the oesophagus terminates in the stomach 
immediately after it passes through the diaphragm, to which it 
is finally united, it is evident that the stomach must be thus fixed 
at that point ; but it is more movable at its other orifices, for 
the extremity of the duodenum into which it is continued is 
movable. 

The stomach is connected with the concave surface of the 
liver by the reflection or continuation of the peritoneum, which 
forms the lesser omentum. This membrane, after extending 
over each surface of the stomach, continues from its great curve 
in the form of the large omentum, and connects it to different 
parts, especially to the colon. There are likewise folds of the 
peritoneum, as it passes from the diaphragm and from the 
spleen to the stomach, which appear like ligaments. 

The stomach is composed of four distinct lamina. There is 
an external covering continued from the peritoneum. Within 
this and connected to it by delicate cellular substance, is a 
coat or stratum of muscular fibres, contiguous to these fasciae 
internally is a layer of dense cellular substance called a ner- 
vous coat, and lastly is the internal villous coat. The stomach 
is closely invested by the peritoneum on every part of its sur- 
face excepting two strips, one at the lesser and the other at 
the greater curvature. These strips or uncovered places are 
formed by the separation of the lamina above mentioned, 
which includes all triangular space bounded by the stomach 
and these two lamina. In these triangular spaces at each cur- 
vature of the stomach, are situated the blood vessels which 
run along the stomach in those directions, and also the glands 
which belong to the absorbent vessels of this viscus. The pe- 
culiar arrangement of the lamina at this place is particularly 
calculated to permit the dilatation of the stomach. When it is 



THE SOLIDS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 79 

dilated, the lamina are in close contact with the surface, and 
the blood vessels, being in the angle formed by the adhesion of 
the two lamina to each other, are so likewise ; when it contracts 
the blood vessels appear to recede from it, and the lamina are 
then applied to each other. 

The internal coat of the stomach is generally found covered 
or spread over with mucous, which is exhaled from its internal 
or mucous membrane in its normal condition. 

The pylorus separates the stomach from the duodenum. Cir- 
cular muscular fibres surround the pylorus, forming a depres- 
sion, by which means this orifice is closed. 

The arteries of the stomach are derived from the cceliac — 
the first branch which the aorta sends off to the abdomen. 
This great artery, immediately after it leaves the aorta, is di- 
vided into three branches, which are distributed to the stomach, 
the liver and the spleen, and are called the superior coronary or 
gastric, the hepatic and the splenic. Besides the first mentioned 
branch, which is distributed principally in the neighborhood of 
the cardia and the lesser curvature, the stomach receives a 
considerable branch from the hepatic, which passes along the 
right portion of its great curvature, and has been called the 
right gastro epiploic, and another from the spleen, which passes 
along the left portion of the great curvature, called the left gas- 
tro epiploic. In addition to these branches, the splenic artery, 
before it enters the spleen sends off several small arteries to 
the great extremity of the stomach, which are called vasa brevia. 
These vasa brevia generally arise from the main trunk of the 
splenic artery, but sometimes from the branches. 

The veins which receive the blood from these arteries have 
similar names, and pursue corresponding courses backwards; 
but they terminate in the vena portarum. 

The absorbent vessels of the stomach are very numerous 
and large. They pass to the glands, which are on the two curva- 
tures, and from thence to the thoracic duct. 

The nerves of the stomach are derived from the two great 
branches of the par vagum, which accompany the oesophagus 
and are mostly spent upon this organ, and from branches from 
several plexuses, which are derived from the ganglionic or in- 
tercostal nerves. The par vagum nerves form a plexus around 
the cardiac orifice, and are distributed, to the left on the anter- 
ior, and the right on the posterior face of the stomach. These 
nerves can be traced into the muscular coat of the stomach, 
and some of them as far as the duodenum. The section of 
these nerves paralyzes the muscular coat of the stomach. 

Chymification of the food has been supposed to be effected 
by a solvent called the gastric juice, an imaginary element that 
has had many supporters, yet none of whom have as yet been 



So DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

able to demonstrate the truthfulness of this supposition. Yet 
many favorable opportunities have obtained for satisfactory 
observation, as in the case of an opening in the stomach, when 
it could be duly inspected, which is cited by Dr. Belmont. 

OF THE INTESTINES. 

The intestines form a continued canal from the pylorus to 
the anus, which is generally six times as long as the subject to 
which they belong. Although the different parts of this tube 
appear somewhat different from each other, they agree in their 
general structure. The coats or laminae of which they are 
composed are much like those of the stomach, but the peri- 
toneum, which forms their external coat, does not approach 
them in the same manner, nor is it continued in the form of 
omentum from the whole tube, there being only a certain por- 
tion of the intestine, viz: the colon, from which such a process 
of peritoneum is continued. The second or muscular coat, 
like that of the stomach, consists of two strata, the exterior of 
which is composed of longitudinal fibres which adhere to the 
external coat, and do not appear very strong. The other 
stratum, consisting of circular or transverse fibres, is stronger, 
as the fibres are more numerous. It is observable that 
they adhere to the longitudinal fibres, and they seldom, if ever, 
form complete circles. 

The cellular substance beneath the muscular fibres resembles 
the nervous coat of the stomach in its firmness and density. 
It is likewise so arranged as to form many circular ridges on 
its internal surface, which support, to a certain degree, the per- 
manent circular plaits of the internal coat, called valvules 
conniventes. 

The inner surface of the internal coat has been commonly 
compared to velvet, and the coat is therefore called villous. 
On this surface, between the villi, there are many orifices of 
mucous follicles and of exhaling vessels. Exterior to the 
villous coat many very small glandular bodies are sometimes 
formed, which are called after their discoverers the glands of 
Brunner and Peyer. 

The internal coat of the upper portion of the intestinal tube 
is arranged so as to form a great number of transverse or cir- 
cular folds or plaits, called valvules conniventes, which do not 
extend around the intestine, but are segments of circles. They 
are so near each other that their internal edges, which are very 
movable, may be laid upon the folds next to them, like tiles 
or shingles. It is evident that this arrangement of the internal 
coat must add greatly to its length. This coat is externally 
vascular; in the dead subject it can be uniformly colored by a 
successful injection. The minute structure of this membrane 



THE SOLIDS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 8 1 

has been the subject of very diligent inquiry, as an immense 
number of exhaling and absorbent vessels open upon it, and 
all agree that the orifices which communicate with the lacteals 
are in the villi, and that these villi also contain very fine rami- 
fications of blood vessels. They have also agreed that the 
intestines in the intervals between these villi seem occupied 
with the orifices of ducts or exhalent vessels. 

DIVISION OF THE INTESTINES. 

Although there is a considerable degree of uniformity in the 
structure of the intestinal canal, different parts of it are very 
distinguished from each other by their external appearance, 
by their size, their investments, and their position. The first 
division is into two great portions, which are very different 
from each other in their diameter and length, as well as their 
situation, the first portion being much smaller in diameter, and 
nearly four times the length of the other. 

These portions are therefore known as the great and small 
intestines, and the line of separation between them is very 
strongly marked, for they do not gradually change into each 
other, but the alteration in size and in exterior appearance is 
very abrupt, and their communication is not perfectly direct. 
A considerable portion of the great intestine is immovably 
fixed in the abdomen, while a large part of the small intestine 
is very movable. 

Each of these great portions of the intestinal tube is subdi- 
vided into three parts: 

Thus in the small intestine there is a piece at the commence- 
ment called duodenum, a great part of which has no coat from 
the peritoneum, and is immovably fixed in one situation, while 
all the remainder of the small intestine has a uniform covering 
from the peritoneum, and is very movable. This last piece, 
notwithstanding its exterior uniformity, is considered as form- 
ing two parts. The uppermost two-fifths form one part, which 
is called jejunum, and the remainder of the small intestine is 
called ileum. 

The great intestine commences in the lower part of the right 
side of the abdomen, and after proceeding up that side, crosses 
over to the left, along which it descends to the lower part 
again, when, by a peculiar flexure, it proceeds to the centre of 
of the posterior margin of the pelvis, from which it passes 
down to the anus. A short portion of this intestine, which is 
below its junction with the ileum, is called ccecum. The part 
which proceeds from this around the abdomen is called colon, 
and the portion which is in the pelvis is called rectum. 

OF THE SMALL INTESTINES. 

Previous to the description of the small intestines, it is 



82 DAVIS* THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

necessary to observe that the mesocolon, or process of the 
peritoneum connected to the transverse portion of the colon, 
forms a kind of immovable and incomplete septum which di- 
vides the abdomen into an upper and lower apartment. Above 
this septum are the stomach, the commencement of the duo- 
denum, the liver and the spleen; below it that portion of the 
small intestine which is called jejunum and ileum makes its ap- 
pearance. The portion of the intestine which passes from the 
stomach to the jejunum is called duodenum, which is so much 
involved by the mesocolon that the greatest part of it cannot 
be seen without dissecting the mesocolon from its connection 
with the back of the abdomen. For the duodenum proceeds 
backwards from the pylorus, and down behind the peritoneum, 
entering a vacant space between the lamina of the mesocolon. 
It proceeds for some distance ,in this space, and then emerges 
on the lower side of the mesocolon. There the duodenum 
terminates, and the small intestine then is invested by the peri- 
toneum in such a manner as to form the mesentery, which con- 
tinues with it through its whole course to the great intestine. 
This portion of the intestine, though very uniform in its ex- 
terior appearance, as has been observed before, is divided into 
jejunum and ileum, the jejunum being the upper portion which 
begins at the mesocolon, and the ileum the lower portion 
which opens into the great intestine. 

OF THE DUODENUM. 

The length of this intestine is equal to the breadth of twelve 
fingers, hence its name. It is very different from the rest of 
the small intestines, not only as respects its position and lack 
of peritoneal investment, but on account of its connection 
with the liver and pancreas by means of their excretory ducts 
which open into it. From this with these glands, all the pecu- 
liarities of its position are to be deduced. 

When the stomach is in its natural situation, the pylorus is at 
some distance from the back of the abdomen. The duodenum 
proceeds backwards from this point, and passes near the neck 
of the gall bladder, being here connected with the small 
omentum. It then curves downwards, and descends before the 
right kidney, sometimes at the lower part of it; then it curves 
again and passes over to the left. After it has arrived at the 
left side of the spine at the second or third lumbar vertebra, 
it projects forwards and downwards to form the jejunum. The 
only portion of the intestine which is movable is that which 
is in sight, as it proceeds immediately from the pylorus, being 
about an inch and a half or two inches in length. 

The remainder is connected to the back of the abdomen, 
and lies between the two lamina of the mesocolon. In its 



THE SOLIDS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 83 

progress it passes before the aorta and vena cava, but the 
principal branch of the vena portarum is before it. The duo- 
denum is larger in diameter than any other part of the small 
intestines, and has a stronger muscular coat. Its general situa- 
tion admits of great dilatation, and has been called the second 
stomach. Its internal coat is strictly villous, in the anatomical 
sense of the word, and its folds, the valvulae conniventes, begin 
at a small distance from the pylorus. The orifices of many 
mucous ducts are to be seen on its surface. It is supposed 
that some of these are the terminations of ducts from the 
glands of Brunner, which sometimes appear in the villous coat, 
or very close to it exteriorly, being small, flat bodies, with a 
depression in the centre, and a foramen in the depression. 
They are sometimes very numerous at the upper extremity of 
this intestine, and diminish gradually towards the other ex- 
tremity. 

The biliary and pancreatic ducts open posteriorly into the 
duodenum, rather above the middle of it. The orifice of these 
ducts is generally surrounded by a small tubercle, which is 
oblong, somewhat rounded at one extremity and pointed at 
the other. Sometimes this orifice is in a plait, like one of the 
valvulae conniventes. Most commonly the two ducts unite be- 
fore they perforate the coat, so as to form but one orifice, and 
sometimes they open separately, but always very near to each 
other. Absorbent vessels, which contain chyle, are found in 
the duodenum. 

THE JEJUNUM AND ILEUM 

Are situated in the abdomen very differently from the duode- 
num. When the cavity is opened and the omentum raised, 
they are in full view, and every portion of them except the 
two extremities and the parts near them can readily be moved. 
This freedom of motion is owing to the manner in which they 
are invested by the peritoneum, or, in the technical language of 
anatomy, to the length of their mesentery. They agree in 
their structure with the general description of the small intes- 
tines, but their muscular coat is rather weaker than that of the 
duodenum. The valvulae conniventes are very numerous and 
large in the upper portion of the tube, or jejunum, and gradu- 
ally diminish in number until they finally disappear in the 
lower part of the ileum. The villous coat is in perfection in 
the jejunum, the villi being more conspicuous there than in 
any other part of the intestinal tube. 

There are frequently found exterior to this coat, but imme- 
diately connected with it, many small glandular bodies of a 
roundish form, which are often clustered together at that part 
of the intestine which corresponds with the intestine of the 



84 DAVIS' THEORY AND PRACTICE. 

lamina of the mesentery. They are called Peyer's Glands, after 
the anatomist who first discovered them, and are supposed, 
like the glands of Brunner, to secrete mucus. If a portion of 
the jejunum be inverted and moderately distended with air, 
these bodies appear very distinctly in it, dispersed at small 
distances from each other. In the ileum they appear in small 
clusters, which often have the appearance of disease. 

THE MESENTERY 

is a portion of the peritoneum which is formed in the manner 
of a ruffle, and of course consists of two lamina. The lamina 
proceed from the back part of the abdomen, and are so near 
of each other that they compose one substantial process, hav- 
ing cellular and adipose substance, blood vessels and nerves, 
with absorbent or lacteal vessels and their glands between 
them. 

The form of this process, when it is separated from the back 
and the intestines or detached from it, is somewhat semicir- 
cular. That portion of its margin or edge which corresponds 
to the diameter of the semicircle is attached to the back of the 
abdomen, and is called the root of the mesentery. The intes- 
tine is connected to its circular edge. The edge connected 
with the back of the abdomen is commonly five or six inches 
in length. The semicircular edge, instead of extending fifteen 
or eighteen inches in length, is attached to a portion of intes- 
tine sometimes twenty-four feet in length. 

The mesentery, on account of this great difference between 
its diameter and circumference, has been compared to the ruf- 
fle of a shirt-sleeve. 

The root of the mesentery commences with the jejunum, on 
the lower side of the mesocolon, at the left of the spine, and 
extends downwards near to the right iliac region, crossing the 
spine obliquely. When it is examined in its natural situation, 
the peritoneum is found continued from the back of the abdo- 
men to the intestine. It then surrounds the intestine, and con- 
tinues from it to the back of the abdomen again. 

There must, therefore, be two lamina of the peritoneum in 
the mesentery, and there must be a small portion of intestine 
answering to the interstice between these lamina which is not 
covered by the peritoneum. The blood vessels and absorbents, 
or lacteals, that receive the chyle from the intestine, pass most 
commodiously to the intestines between these lamina ; for they 
are connected with large trunks that lie on or near the spine, 
and the root of the mesentery commences there. 

The glands connected with the lacteals or absorbents are 
very conspicuous in the mesentery, and are called mesenteric 
glands. They are of different size, from more than half an inch 



THE SOLIDS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 85 

K> one or two lines in diameter. They are very numerous, and 
scattered irregularly, but are seldom observed very near to the 
intestine. They are often enlarged in consequence of disease. 
The nerves of the small intestines, which are derived principally 
from the superior mesenteric plexus, are also to be found here. 
The adipose, or fat, between the lamina of the mesentery, is 
very often in large quantity, but varies in proportion to the 
quantity of adeps in the subject. 

OF THE GREAT INTESTINES. 

The ccecum and colon are very different from the small intes- 
tines in many respects. They are much larger in diameter. 
Their external surface is marked by these longitudinal bands of 
light color, which extend the greater part of their length, and 
are placed nearly at equal distance from each other. The spa- 
ces between these bands are marked by transverse indentations, 
which pass from one band to the other at short but unequal 
distances. At these indentations, the coats of the intestine are 
passed inward, as if a fine thread had been drawn around it 
externally, while the spaces between them are full and tumid, 
and on this account are called cells. 

The great intestine, with these appearances, begins, as has 
been already observed, in the right iliac region, by a rounded 
end which rests on the fossa or concave surface formed by the 
costa of the ileum. From this it continues upwards, in the right 
lumbar region, anterior to the kidney, called ascending colon 
until it arrives near the liver, when it forms a curve called the 
arch of the colon, and passes directly across the abdomen to the 
left side. In this course it approaches so near to the under 
side of the liver, that it is often in contact with it, and with 
the gall bladder, which after death tinges it with a yellow color. 
On the left side it passes down the lumbar region, forming the 
descending colon, before the kidney, to the left iliac region, 
where it is curved so as to form the Roman letter S, inverted, 
forming the sigmoid flexure. This curve generally carries it to 
the right side of the spine, and then brings it back to the center 
of the sacrum. There the intestine changes its course, and 
passes into the pelvis, continues downward, in contact with the 
sacrum and coccyx, and partaking of the curvature of those 
bones, until it terminates at the anus, where it is connected 
with the sphincter levator ani muscle. 

About two inches from the commencement of the great in- 
testine, the ileum opens into it laterally, and all that portion 
which is between its commencement and the insertion of the 
ileum is termed Ccecum, or the blind intestine. That part of the 
great tube which is included in its course from the insertion of 
the ileum to the posterior brim of the pelvis is called Colon, and 



86 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

that part which is contained in the pelvis is termed Rectum. 

The Ccecum is nearly as wide as it is long ; it is fixed in the 
right iliac fossa by the peritoneum, which invests it so that the 
great body of the intestine projects from the surface of the 
fossa covered by the peritoneum, but a portion is in close con- 
tact with the surface, and connected to it by cellular membrane. 

At the round end of the Ccecum, situated anteriorly and in- 
ternally, is a small process resembling an earth worm in form 
and size: this is called Appendicula Verjniformis. It is hollow, 
and communicates with the cavity of the caecum, but has its 
other cavity closed up. Its length is from two to four inches. 

After the stomach, the caecum may be considered the largest 
portion of the intestinal canal. In the foetus its diameter ap- 
pears to be nearly the same as that of the adjoining colon, and 
its subsequent increase in diameter over that of the colon, ap- 
pears to be mainly due to the stagnation of the fcecal matter, in 
consequence of the dependent position of this part of the large in- 
testines, and the transverse direction by which the contents 
of the ileum are discharged into it. 

Retention of fcecal matter often takes place in it, in cases of 
constipation, which have frequently led to inflammation of this 
bowel, and to swelling and abscess in the iliac fossa. 

THE KIDNEYS OR RENAL ORGANS. 

The kidneys are two glandular bodies, situated in the lum- 
bar regions, on the sides of the vertebral column, opposite the 
two last dorsal and two first lumbar vertebrae. The right kid- 
ney is placed at the under and back part of the large lobe of 
the liver, and is usually a little lower than the left kidney. The 
latter is placed under the back part of the spleen, and behind 
the left portions of the stomach, pancreas and colon. 

The kidney is four or five inches in length, and in shape re- 
sembles the kidney bean. It is enveloped in a mass of fat. 
This adipose tunic is extended likewise to the renal vessels, 
and is supposed to defend them from the pressure of the sur- 
rounding viscera. 

The right kidney is in contact with the liver, the left with 
the spleen, and both with the muscles on which they are placed, 
and connected to the suprarenal glands and colon by a cellu- 
lar tissue. The peritoneum is reflected from the liver and 
spleen to the kidneys. 

ORGANIZATION OF THE KIDNEYS. 

The surface of the kidney is usually smooth and uniform, 
though sometimes it is irregular, in consequence of the lobes 
which originally form it not being so completely incorporated. 
Each kidney receives from the aorta an artery of considerable 
diameter, and returns its blood by a l^rge vein into the vena 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 87 

cava. A very distinct nervous plexus surrounds these two 
vessels, and the lymphatics are very easily traced. 

The kidney appears to be formed of two distinct substances 
— an external cortical, and an internal tubular substance. 

The cortical substance of the kidneys forms the external 
layer of these organs, and internally it is prolonged into them 
in the form of septa, between which we find the conical fasci- 
culi of the tubular substance. When viewed with a microscope 
the cortical substance appears to be composed of solid granu- 
lations of a very small size, formed by the capillary extremities 
of the renal arteries and veins. 

The tubular substance presents a number of fasciculi, sur- 
rounded on all sides, except at their summits, by the cortical 
substance. The base of each cone is directed towards the 
circumference of the kidney; and their summits, on the con- 
trary, are directed towards the pelvis, or fissure of the kidney. 

The color of this substance is a pale red. Its tissue is dense, 
and is formed of a multitude of very minute convergent canals, 
termed tubuli uriniferi, which derive their origin from the cor- 
tical substance, and, terminating in larger ducts at the summits 
of the cones, present so many papillae, at the points of which 
the urine oozes out. The number of papillae is twelve or 
fourteen. The orifices of the canals, called the ducts of Belli- 
ni of the tubular substance, are less numerous than the canals 
themselves, on which account it is to be presumed that several 
of these uriniferous tubes unite before they terminate. 

THE CALICES PELVIS AND URETER. 

The calices, or infundibula, are membranous tubes which 
embrace the papillae, and which receive the urine from them. 

The infundibula are commonly the same in number as the 
papillae. The number, however, varies in different subjects, two 
or more papillae sometimes opening into the same infundibulum. 

The pelvis is a membranous sac formed by the union of 
the infundibula. It is contracted at the inferior part to be 
continued into the ureter. 

The ureters descend in the loins obliquely inwards behind 
the peritoneum, and over the psoas and iliac muscles, and 
passing into the pelvis, terminate in the under, outer and back 
part of the bladder, by a narrow, oblique orifice. 

The infundibula, pelvis and ureters appear to have the 
same organization, being composed of two membranes, name- 
ly, an outer, thick, white, opaque membrane, which may be con- 
sidered as a prolongation of the fibrous capsule of the kidney; 
and an inner, mucous, transparent membrane, which is ex- 
tended from the infundibula over the papillae, and perhaps 
even introduced into the uriniferous tubes. 



88 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

When the ureters open into the bladder, some few pale, 
muscular fibres may in general be found. These have been 
named the muscles of the ureters by Sir Charles Bell, who 
describes each as arising from the vesical extremity of the 
ureter, and thence descending obliquely forwards and inwards 
to be inserted by a tendon, common to its fellow, into the 
tubercle or uvula of the urethra. The use which he assigns to 
them is, to restrain the termination of the ureters, and preserve 
the obliquity of the passage of these tubes through the coats 
of the bladder when it is contracted; for, without this provision, 
he remarks, the urine would be sent retrograde into the ureters, 
instead of forward into the urethra. 

THE BLADDER. 

The urinary bladder is a muscular membranous reservoir, 
whose office is to retain for some time the urine, which is 
afterwards to be ejected from it. The bladder is situated in 
the pelvis at the bottom of the hypogastric region. 

The superior part of the bladder is in contact with the in- 
ferior convolutions of the small intestines, and from its 
centre we observe a fibrous cord termed the urachus, which 
ascends between the linea alba and the peritoneum to the 
umbilicus, where it terminates in the abdominal aponeurosis. 

The inferior part of the fundus of the bladder in the male is 
connected by cellular tissue to the vesiculse seminalis, and the 
end of the vasa deferentia. That portion of the bladder which 
is between the vesiculae rests upon the rectum. In the female 
the bladder is connected with the levator ani and the vagina. 

The anterior part is situated behind the pubes, but when the 
organ is distended by urine, we find it in the hypogastric re- 
gion. There is a fasciculus of fibrous membrane which at- 
taches the inferior part of the bladder to the symphysis of the 
pubes, named the anterior ligament of the bladder. 

The posterior part is entirely covered by the peritoneum, 
and is contiguous in the male to the rectum, and in the female 
to the uterus. 

The internal surface of the bladder is formed by a mucous 
membrane, which, in its empty state, presents numerous ir- 
regular rugae, but those disappear when the bladder is full. It 
is named the trigonal space of the bladder. 

The neck of the bladder has a crescent-like form, the margin 
of which is very thick, and it embraces a small tubercle desig- 
nated by the name of the uvula vesicce. 

THE SKIN OR DERMOID TISSUE. 

The skin is composed of three very distinct layers: the 
dermis, the rete mucosum, and epidermis or cuticle. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 8y 

The dermis is the inner and thickest layer of the skin. It is 
formed of fibres interwoven in an inextricable manner, and is 
so plentifully supplied with blood vessels and nerves that the 
smallest puncture cannot be made in any part of it without 
inducing pain and a discharge of blood. It is the part of 
which leather is made. 

The outer part is very compact, the inner more loose, and it 
gradually degenerates into the common cellular tissue. 

Blood vessels twine in this subcutaneous cellular tissue, and 
project an infinitude of small branches which penetrate into 
the remotest areola of the dermis, unite in a variety of ways, 
cross the external surface, and finally give rise to that capillary 
net which I shall describe when speaking of the rete mucosum. 

The nerves are distributed with and accompany the arteries 
to their termina. There is a subcutaneous stratum of nerves 
from which pass all the filaments that penetrate the dermis. 

THE RETE MUCOSUM. 

This tissue lies immediately exterior to the dermis and in- 
terior to the epidermis. In different subjects it has a different 
hue forming the complexion. 

The rete mucosum may be conceived of as containing the 
capillary secretory apparatus of the cutaneous organ, interposed 
between the dermis and the epidermis. According to Gaul- 
tier, it is composed of four distinct layers. The first is formed 
of blood vessels arranged like granulations on the surface of 
the dermis. The second is whitish and applied upon the 
former. There are numerous prolongations of this layer 
which penetrate into the substance of the fourth layer, com- 
prising the exhalents. The third layer is composed of minute 
convex bodies, containing the coloring matter of the skin. 
The fourth layer is white, of extreme tenuity, perforated by 
the hairs, and adheres to the epidermis. 

THE EPIDERMIS. 

The epidermis or cuticle is the most superficial layer, which 
is separated from the dermis by the rete mucosum. It is thm 
and transparent and formed of numerous scales. The inner 
surface is very firmly attached to the exterior membiane of 
the rete mucosum, and to which it still adheres when a blister 
is formed. 

A great number of sebaceous follicles are seated under the 
skin, and open by small ducts on its surface. These follicles 
or glands secrete an oily fluid, which serves to lubricate the 
skin. 

The epidermis is devoid of nerves or blood vessels, and is 
being constantly recuperated from its adherent membrane. 



90 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

CAPILLARY CIRCULATION OF THE BLOOD. 

There are three transit capillary circulatory passages for the 
blood in the human system — the pulmonary, the systemic, and 
the biliary; each having the formula for its transit through 
the capillaries corresponding with the physiological work as- 
signed to it : that in the lungs for constructing and arm- 
ing blood globules for nutrition ; the systemic capillaries 
for nutrition ; and in the biliary for secreting the 
bile. Depuration is an object provided for in each of these 
transfers, also thermal elevation and the generating of electri- 
city. In order to comprehend the vital chemistry instituted in 
these transfers, it is important to first refer to the conspicuous 
part assigned to the functional nerves that preside over the 
organic chemistry of these departments. The functional 
nerves of the lungs are sent out with the pulmonary arteries, 
and ramify and terminate with them at the discs of the air cells. 
They furnish the specific element for exciting the combustion 
and combination of the hsematine of the blood globules which 
perfect them for detonation in the systemic nutritive transits, 
and in the combustion of each inspiration of air a fresh supply 
of caloric and systemic electricity is generated, and carbonic 
acid depurated. The means by which the functional nerves of 
each organ obtain their specific radical basical element for 
combining with elements in the circulating blood is provided 
for in the structure of their ganglia. 

Beginning the round of the circulating blood in the right 
ventricle, we first find the venous blood being forced into the 
pulmonary artery, by the contracting force of the right ventri- 
cle of the heart. Secondly, we find the pulmonary artery 
ramifying into capillaries that terminate upon the discs of the 
air cells. 

We find at all these transfer centres functional nerves armed 
with the element peculiar to govern the chemical production 
divinely intended for the work and needs of each department. 
In the work of hsematizing the coats of the globules at the air 
cells, we find the electric atoms governing the chemical formu- 
la for the composition of the hasmatine. In this chemical work, 
instituted in these air cells, we find caloric and electricity 
evolved ; one used for raising the thermal temperature of the 
system, and the other contributing to the structure of the sys- 
temic fibre. The precise formula of the chemical evolutions 
assigned to each of the transits we may never fully compre- 
hend, nor the subtility of the divine art of securing the element 
products for the perpetuity of the human form. Yet, from our 
knowledge of chemical law, and the elements brought into 
juxtaposition, and the use of the products made in sustaining 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 91 

the perpetuity of the system through this round of the cir- 
culating blood, we may gain from a close observation of the 
principles involved in these laws of health a better knowledge 
of the causes that make up the catalogue of diseases that 
afflict mankind. From a knowledge of the dependencies of 
health only are we enabled to derive correct conceptions of 
the pathology of disease. 

NUTRITION — -THE FUNCTION OF THE NUTRITIVE NERVES. 

In looking through the many chemical elaboratories in the 
human system, we find in the different ganglia of the nerves 
the subdivided work of transforming molecules into specific 
designs to be dispensed by their nerves to compose the dissim- 
ilar parts of the system. We also find the digestive elabora- 
tories engaged in refining and affinitizing aliment for chemical 
reception at the capillary points of nutrition. We likewise 
find a central circulatory propelling power, like a hydraulic 
engine, ever in motion propelling this aliment to all parts of 
the system, to keep constantly on hand the demanded aliment 
for the nutritive supply. In the construction of the ganglia, 
we find the most intricate provisions for the work of transform- 
ing electric molecules, by combining atoms in harmony with 
chemical ascending laws for bases, to govern the various com- 
positions of the dissimilar parts : like the intelligent chemist 
who obtains, through a certain routine of formulas, the direct 
affinities required for his artistic design that which could not 
be obtained in a more direct method. 

NUTRITION. 

Beginning with the principle that at every chemical inter- 
change of molecular affinities that occurs between elements in 
what is called a chemical evolution, caloric and electricity are 
evolved with the new-born chemical product. To this source 
must all free caloric and electricity be referable. Among the 
many elements that enter into the composition of the animal 
economy, these two elements contribute the most indispensable 
aid to the functional work of nutrition. The store of elements 
divinely capitalized for sustaining the perpetuity of animal 
life are found in atmospheric air, vegetable and animal food, 
and pure water. In the lungs are found all the elaboratorial 
devices for inhaling atmospheric air, and properly appropriat- 
ing its elements to use. So also in the digestive apparatus for 
properly elaborating the aliment received from time to time 
into chyle for keeping up a supply of nutritious circulating 
blood. 

The elaboratorial work of transforming aliment into arterial 
blood is completed in its transit through the lungs. When 



92 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

thus completed the arterial blood becomes a homogeneous 
aliment that is constantly being sent forward through the rami- 
fying arteries by the propelling force of the heart to every 
part of the system, to furnish its share of nutriment to contri- 
bute to the recuperative support of every systemic fibre. 

The systemic nutritive nervous system also branches into 
capillaries, one of which entwines in the coats of each of the 
capillary arteries, and terminate together at the point of nutri- 
tion. 

The electrical neurine dispensed to combine with the arterial 
blood in support of the fibre is not homogeneous throughout 
the system, but is a specific radical element elaborated in the 
ganglion of each nerve, suited to direct the form of the fibre 
over which each presides. By this provisional means all the 
dissimilarly composed fibres are constructed. 

In the systemic nutritive circulatory capillary transfer we 
find, directly at the point of transfer, all the vessels unite with 
the nerve and fibre to form a kind of minute ganglion in which 
the Chemical interchange occurs. In the process the blood 
globules are broken down, and their nutriment combines with 
the basic nerve element to renew the vitality of the fibre which 
is being constantly drawn upon for locomotive activity and 
systemic elaboratorial support. The residuum with the car- 
bonic acid generated is reduced to a thinner fluid that escapes 
through the transit into the vein. 

When the nerves fail to support this nutritive work the trans- 
fer is impeded, and the capillary artery becomes distended 
by the continual force of the heart, inducing congestion. A 
congested capillary artery encroaches upon the nervous coil 
that entwines around it. This encroachment upon these sen- 
sitive nerves of nutrition induces pain, which is designed in 
the systemic economy to call a sympathetic rallying aid to 
resuscitate the delinquent nerve, which, when effected within a 
proper time, terminates the congestion by renewed nutritive 
activity. This successful work is the routine by which "inflam- 
mation is terminated by resolution." 

Nutrition may become deficient from one or both of these 
sources of recuperative supply. The blood from several 
causes may be rendered too depraved to permit the nutritive 
chemical evolution; or it may only feebly support it. The 
first will induce congestion and inflammation, the latter chronic 
debility and systemic decline. One of the sources of impure 
blood is the inhalation of impure air, which is called malaria, 
of which there are two kinds: one is derived from vegetable 
decomposition in the form of hydrated carbonic acid gas, 
which we have great reason to believe to be the source of epi- 
demical congestive fevers. The other order of malaria is 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 93 

derived from carbonic acid gas exhaled from the lungs in over- 
crowded and unventilated rooms, as in prisons, hospitals and 
on board ship. This human malaria is claimed to be the 
source of the contagious typhus fever. There is still another 
very frequent cause of rendering the blood too poor for nutri- 
tion. It is an overflow of urine into the circulation, which 
occurs whenever the renal excretory ducts become obstructed 
by albumen or inflammatory congestion of the epithelial 
membranes of these columnar ducts. In this case the secreted 
urine overflows and is carried into the circulation in the renal 
emulgent vein, precisely after the manner of the overflowing 
bile, which is carried into the circulation in the emulgent 
portal veins. This renal obstruction and overflow of their 
secretion is always present in every case of intermittent fever," 
as an exciting cause of each exacerbation. 

The carbonic acid gas when inhaled into the lungs disap- 
points the system of the healthy molecular formula of elements 
present in the air cells for forming perfect haematine and for 
depurating the usual quantity of carbonic acid from the blood, 
each of which are disqualifying conditions of the blood for 
healthy nutrition. In such deficient chemical interchange in 
these air cells there must be a deficient quantity of caloric 
generated, and an imperfect quality of nerve electricity result, 
to lower the standard of the radical electrical elements furnish- 
ed by the nutritive nerves to combine with the blood in the 
work of nutrition. There is aline of minimum quantity of this 
gas in the atmosphere that the system can endure without much 
debility, and there is a maximum that will prevent combustion 
at the air cells in respiration that will immediately extinguish 
life. The dense accummulation of this gas in wells in some 
places is an example. 

The evolutionary chemical fires instituted in each of the 
circulatory transits officiate in the culmination of the primates 
for vitality, and in the combustion of adventitious elements 
detrimental to the purity of the blood. 

There is a minimum of possibility to sustain life in these 
departments under these embarrasments, and a maximum 
ability to maintain vigorous health midst favorable conditions, 
such as pure air, pure water, wholesome diet, suitable clothing 
and moderate exercise. While all the organs of the system 
are in a state of integrity to perform their functional work, the 
systemic powers will be very slow to yield to epidemical or 
contagious diseases. Except the system become first enervated 
by a redundance of carbonfc acid in the atmosphere, the 
chemical fires set in the capillary terminal crucibles in the pul- 
monary and systemic transits would fuse any molecules of 
typhus contagion that might find their way into the system. 



94 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

Typhus icterodes, or yellow fever, is dependent upon this mal- 
arial enervation of the systems of the people where it exists 
for its epidemical form. Further, it is disarmed of its conta- 
gion as soon as it passes out of the bounds of such malarial 
district. The proof in point is that as soon as the earth be- 
comes sufficiently chilled to suspend further alluvial exhalation 
of this malarial gas, no more cases occur. 

PERISTALTIC MOTION AND CHYLIFEROUS ABSORPTION. 

The involuntary movement in the small intestines by which 
chyme is carried forward is called peristaltic motion. Joining 
to the little valvulae conniventes of the small intestines are 
arrangements of muscular fibres longitudinal and transverse, 
the longitudinal most internal. At the approach of the fluid, 
contraction is induced. The object of this arrangement will 
be apparent when their uses are explained. 

This mucous membrane has a spongy villous coat that con- 
nects with the chyliferous ducts. This spongy coat being 
saturated with chyme, the compressing force used in the per- 
istaltic motion forces the chyme into the chyliferous ducts. 
By this contraction, as the motion advances, the excess of fluid 
not retained between the conniventes is moved forward to be 
forced into other chyliferous ducts. Continuous peristaltic 
waves are thus carrying forward these small measures of 
chyme, which are dealt out in small quantities in the labors of 
the pylorus, which is the passage gate between the stomach 
and the duodenum. At these cartilaginous rings called val- 
vulae conniventes, I find continuous breaks in the electric 
currents that are induced by the absence of Unas to make the 
connection between the afferent and efferent nerves connected 
with these valves to dispense the motor electricity to the 
muscles between the valves. Each group of muscular fibres 
that are dispensed between each successive valve are separate 
from the others, and have separate slips sent to them from the 
afferent and efferent motor trunks that preside over the peris- 
taltic motion in the intestines. These motor nerves are sent 
out with the vital nerves from the superior mesenteric plexus, 
with the mesenteric artery to dispense to the peristaltic motion 
and vitality of these small intestines. By the fine structure of 
this spongy coat and the peristaltic compression upon it, the 
chyle is separated and forced into the chyliferous ducts. 

In the large intestines absorption is carried on alone by the 
lymphatic process, where, as in the small intestines, the chyli- 
ferous and lymphatic obtain. After the chyle enters the chyli- 
ferous ducts, it is impelled forward into the vena cava by the 
expansive or diastolic force of the heart. 

A question arises in regard to the office the mesenteric 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 95 

glands subserve. The mesenteric glands are of two structures 
— the chyliferous and the lymphatic. In the passage of the 
chyle through the chyliferous glands, it undergoes a more 
thorough reduction to a fluid state and glandular culriination 
of properties suited for chyle to be forwarded into the circula- 
tion, while the rejected elements are returned to the intestinal 
canal through the exhalent vessels of this membrane. In this 
glandular elaboratory the chyle receives its first systemic affin- 
ity. They serve to prevent the chyle from being carried too 
rapidly forward by the diastolic force of the heart. A reflex 
waste of the chyle from its gravity might occur were it not for 
some such provisional prevention as these glands. 

Direct attention is called to corresponding principles to ex- 
plain the motions of the heart used in this article to account 
for the muscular contraction and relaxation used in peristaltic 
motion. 

OFFICES OF THE VERTEBRAL AND GANGLIONIC NERVOUS SYSTEMS. 

Centered in the brain and cerebro spinalis is the genius of 
the architectural design of the structural being. The cortical 
brain composes the architectural structure of the organs that 
constitute the entity of the mental faculties. The artistic 
work of the system proper is divided between thirty-two pairs 
of nutritive nerves that emanate from the spine, the functions 
of which are to dispense the precise radical basic element 
needed to compose from the arterial blood the order of fibre 
designed. In the ganglionic plexiform and nerves of sense 
are special arrangements for instituting the structure of the 
organs to harmonize with the functional labors assigned to 
them. These two ganglionic trunks form connections with 
every pair of vertebral nerves from the base of the cranium to 
the coccygis. It is evident that some of the organs derive 
from this connection their recuperative nervous element, and 
in case of spinal congestion at one point, all other connections 
are accessible to lend support to the vital organs while the 
congestion is subsiding. These two great nervous trunks 
officiate as nervous sinuses, and furnish the direct channel for 
a systemic nervous rallying nervous support to pass from one 
centre to another throughout the whole length of the spinal 
column. Some of the organs through these vertebral connec- 
tions derive their nutritive supply from the posterior branches, 
while they derive their slips of functional nerves from the 
anterior motors. Some are arranged to officiate as motors as 
with the heart, diaphragm and peristaltic motion in the small 
intestines, and devised so as to be placed beyond the interfer- 
ence of the will. Other functional nerves are furnished with 
chemical elements to compose the haematine in the lungs, the 



96 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

bile in the liver, and the urinary secretions in the renal organs. 
The muscular fibres are also supplied with two sets of nerves 
— the nutritive and functional voluntary motors. The eighth 
pair of nerves support nutrition in the lungs and the muscle of 
the heart, while the sympathetic support all the organs in the 
abdomen. 

A SYSTEMIC NERVOUS RALLY. 

In the entity of the living being all its complicated subdi- 
visions are but parts of one universal whole, animated by its 
living soul that is in sympathy with all its parts, having 
states of unconscious repose, and conscious observation and 
muscular activity, having three systems of nerves — the sensi- 
tive nutritive, the voluntary motors, and the great sympathetic. 
As the voluntary muscular system is directly under the control 
of the will force, for dispensing graduating power for continu- 
ous force and precision of motion, so are the involuntary nu- 
tritive nerves under the dominion of sensation for augmenta- 
tion of activity. When the air and blood are nominally pure, 
these nutritive nerves involuntarily furnish their quota of 
elements for nutrition, and keep pace with the rhythmic activity 
of the lungs and heart, and whether awake or asleep proceed alike 
unabated, normally the same. But when abnormal conditions 
come in to disturb this sympathetic rhythmic harmony, sensa- 
tion is aroused to officiate in its providential care for the health 
and longevity of the system. Then are the alternate recup- 
erative laws manifest by the phenomenal symptoms arising 
from the various deranged conditions of the system, which 
make up the catalogue of diseases. Whenever the fires of 
nutrition begin to burn so low as to cause a chill, arterial 
plethora begins to augment with the degree of suspended 
nutrition, and would thus proceed to certain death were it not 
for a provisional means of a systemic nervous rally instituted 
in the spleen, supra renal capsules, and systemic capillaries, for 
an increase of painful sensation that augments with the in- 
crease of the force of arterial plethora until the nutritive 
nerves are goaded to an increased activity adequate to supply 
a quantity of neurine to resume active nutrition with the im- 
poverished blood, that caused the suspension of nutrition 
while the system was in its normally passive state. 

The spleen is placed in a position to furnish protection to 
all the vital organs dependent upon the par vagum or the eighth 
pair of cerebral nerves for nutrition against fatal congestion 
during a chill by the quantity of caloric and electricity it 
generates, and the painful rallying force to maintain continued 
nutritive action in the lungs, heart, liver, stomach and pan- 
creas, as well as that of its own organ — the spleen. It also 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 97 

stimulates the sympathetic nervous system to keep up its 
usual support given to the functional nerves of these organs. 
The supra renal capsules fulfil a similar office to that of the 
spleen to save the kidneys and mesenteric vessels from a sus- 
pension of nutrition and fatal congestion, and furnishes a de- 
cided effort to overcome the renal obstruction that has been 
delinquent in their depurative work that contribute greatly to 
the cause of the chill. The spleen and the supra renal cap- 
sules are vascular glands that remain passive, except under 
arterial plethora, then they awake to fulfil these assigned offi- 
ces of protecting care. They are vascular glands without ex- 
cretory ducts ; they receive arteries unduly large for nutri- 
tion alone, ramify minutely, and have unduly large emulgent 
veins ; and as they are passive, except under this arterial 
plethora, we have evidence that the spleen furnishes primates 
to contribute to the perfection of the circulating blood, as a 
substitute for bile when the liver is obstructed. That they 
fuse in their combustion elements detrimental to nutrition, we 
have no doubt. The pain induced in the distended capillary 
arteries calls to the delinquent nerves a rallied nervous aid to 
furnish the quota of neurine needed to resume nutrition. In 
this effort, if successful, we find the mode by which inflamma- 
tion is said to terminate by resolution in locally inflamed 
parts. 

It is quite possible that the supra renal capsules, in their 
augmented action, furnish an element solvent for the concre- 
tions that obstruct the renal excretory ducts. 

MUSCULAR MOTION. 

The design of the muscles is for local and locomotive mo- 
tion. Quite a similar method is used to control muscular 
effort, that pertains to the arrangement for nutrition. The 
brain is many times larger than the medulla spinalis. Nervous 
fibrils arise from small lobules in the anterior halves of the 
two lobes of the cerebrum. These fibres are gathered into 
the two anterior bundles of the right and left hemispheral di- 
visions of the spinal cord, and constitute its motor portion. 
Those that arise in a similar way from the posterior halves of 
the cerebrum make up the two posterior bundles for the vito- 
sensitive nervous system. These fibrils are gathered into 
thirty-two pairs of lateral nerves. The motor, or anterior, and 
posterior send out pairs that unite and pass out of the verte- 
bral canal in the same neurilemma, and continue together 
thus to their points of destination. These nerves divide and 
subdivide into as many divisions as there are fibres under 
their charge. The motors send a fibril to every muscular 
fibre in the system, while the vito-sensitive sends one to every 



98 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

muscular and membranous fibre in the system not internal to 
the pleura and peritoneum. The motor nervous system dis- 
penses a homogeneous element to all the muscles, while the 
vito-sensitive dispenses dissimilar elements to each order of 
structure. 

The economical method used to insulate so great a num- 
ber of nervous filaments by gathering them into bundles to 
save insulating material, space and gravity, is worthy of ap- 
preciative observation. The nerves are insulated by carrying 
with them as they emanate from the spinal cord processes of 
the piamater and arachnoid membranes for the two inner insu- 
lating coats. The third and outer coat appears to be preced- 
ed by the arachnoid to supply the place of the dura mater, 
which is reflected over, and forms the peritoneum of the 
spinal canal and vertebral foramina. These three membranes 
envelope and insulate the nerves, and form their neurilemmas 
that incase the nerves in all their subdivisions to their points 
of destination. 

Having thus described their phenomena, I will next give the 
method of their use. This is effected by a sinew being fixed 
to the lever to be flexed at one end, and at its muscular end it 
expands into an aponeurotic sheath that envelopes the bundle 
of muscular fibres and is attached to a process of bone above 
the lever to be moved. Parallel fibres fill the muscle sheath 
that are attached at their ends, so that when these muscular 
fibres become electrified by the charge from the motor nerves, 
the fibres expand in diameter and shorten longitudinally. This 
moves the limb. In the arrangement of these muscular fibres 
each fibre is surrounded by a membranous sheath that con- 
tains a multitude of transverse layers, that, when stimulated, 
enlarge their transverse diameters and contract the longitud- 
inal. Inherent laws, as undefinable as the vital molecules 
that serve the ends of the nerves of nutrition, govern the ac- 
tion of the muscles. Muscular capacities are the servants of 
the mind; they become very profitable and able servants when 
they are trained to bring out the genius of their artistic skill 
and volume of power. Rapid, energetic and continued mus- 
cular effort induces a hurried respiration and rapid circulation, 
which respond to the drafts made upon them for muscular 
sustentation under exhausting application. If the muscles 
were not supported by the vascular and nervous circulation, 
they would very soon become exhausted. 

This recuperative capacity is adequate to this necessity only 
for a given length of time, after Which the muscular power 
begins to flag, and the person tires out; but not by the failure 
of the recuperative elements, but that of -the motor nervora. 
Sleep is given to recuperate afresh stock of this motor medium 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 99 

of muscular action. After a night's sleep, the person feels 
strong and resolute to resume the task. 

The danger of driving the system under exhaustion is 
greater than is generally apprehended. How many persons 
have thus lost their health by goading the muscles beyond 
endurance to gain a few more pennies! when, by judiciously 
dealing out graduated motion and power within the bounds of 
capacity, daily application can be endured and the greatest 
skill and muscular capacity achieved by this pruduntial 
economy. 

The morning of life is the time to lay out for a well-devel- 
oped and strong physical system, as demonstrated by the 
ancient Grecians in the development of their most powerful 
athletes. In the life of a man how much is lost in not demand- 
ing, in harmony with law, the skill and power in waiting to 
serve them. What has been achieved by one is accessible to 
all. Consequently, it is lamentable for such useful capacities 
to be allowed to slumber beneath the surface during one's life 
time, when they can be easily resurrected to serve and glorify 
the person by simply willing them forth with suitable energy 
and systematic training. 

m THE SENSES. 

Photographic sketches are truly wonderful to persons who 
know nothing of the philosophical arrangement of the apparatus 
provided to cause these artistic designs. Daguerreau discov- 
ered the practicability of this art from observing the provi- 
sional arrangements of the eye to qualify it for the visual work 
of sketching objects. 

If the sun is seen there must be a medium through which it 
can be revealed to the eye. This medium is light, which is as I 
understand it a thing to be divided between its designed quali- 
ties for appreciation and the artistic arrangements of the organ 
of vision to appreciate it. No other sense takes any cognizance 
of it. Sound is also divided between the arrangement of the 
auditory sense and the capacity of the atmosphere to report 
the movement of bodies in it. There is no light recognizable 
to any other sense but the eye; neither is there of sound but 
to that of the ear; each are dependent upon their specific media 
to report their work to the sensorium. The same holds true 
with all of the five senses; each having elemental media 
through which reports to the senses are effected. The offices 
of these senses are given to care for the animal as well as 
for the man. They in their care for man do not transcend their 
offices in the animal, but intelligence turns them to a far su- 
perior care. But these are not the senses that were provided 
for crowning man a being of immortal intelligence. The organs 



IOO A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

of intellect are human entire. The organic arrangements for 
each of the faculties of the mind are dissimilar as are the prov- 
inces of their sphere of action. They are all special senses de- 
signed to officiate in their phrenological spheres of mind. 

If the sense of sight can contribute so much to the intelli- 
gence of man, why does it not render the brute as much 
intelligent aid ? The reason is obvious, they being deprived of 
their reasoning faculties to turn sight to scientific and artistic 
use. If the universe can be comprehended by the intelligent 
mind of God sufficient to institute it and sustain it in its 
present state of harmony, it surely must be comprehendible by 
the provisional mind of man; reared as he is by the structural 
universe, he will live upon these God-given principles eternally. 

These divinely provided primates must surely illuminate the 
mind of man by the intelligence with which they are endowed 
to artistically construct and provide for all these special senses 
that render man so complicate and intelligent a being. Are not 
these intellectual faculties the living drapery of the spirit to 
furnish it divine care eternally? 

When the sight is lost, mind turns in the slow process of fur- 
nishing objects for contemplation through the other avenues 
of the mind. If a person deprived of sight has acquire^ a great 
store of scientific knowledge before losing the sight, this knowl- 
edge will furnish a pleasurable field of contemplation that not 
unfrequently brings out some of the most valuable suggestions 
as contributions to scientifical and philosophical truth that flows 
from their deep-lasting meditations. 

The half cannot be expressed of the loss of vision to the un- 
folding mind to the happenings of this life. It is better to 
crumble altogether and be emancipated from this darkness of 
perpetual night to bask in bright beams of celestial light. Turn 
to the loss of the sense of audition, and observe how much is 
shorn of the glory of this sense. First of all is the great loss 
of the enchanting sound of music and that of the sound of the 
human voice in language. The inspiration of music has its 
office in breaking up the monotony of gloomy associations, of 
troublesome reveries that tend to monopolize the mind to the 
injury of health. If the avenue of speech to the mind is per- 
petually closed, it is a greater loss than might be supposed 
without contemplating all its uses to mind. If the medium of 
speech, which is a written language, has not been acquired, 
surely all the world to the mute is dumb also. If the thoughts 
must arise from the sight of a dumb world only, what inspiring 
effect could it furnish upon a mind largely dependent upon in- 
terchange of thought for social happiness, or for a wider range 
of knowledge than that of vision, that reduces the world to a 
few square miles; having no anticipations of the arrivals of 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 10 1 

friends nor sympathy with the transpiring events that make up 
so large a portion of the enchantments of life, and that so 
largely contribute to our stock of knowledge. 

If the great danger of being overtaken in the dark tends to 
make life hazardous, my dependence is taken from me for se- 
curity when I can not hear the approach of dangerous objects. 
If it injure me, I must suffer alone, not being able to sound the 
alarm for help. If I have lost my way, I can not enquire of 
those who know, nor make my want known to strangers. It is 
truly distressing for one in trouble not to be able to make his 
wants known to even those who would cheerfully render aid. 

When this state of deprived sense befalls any one, it is but 
justice to have his lost sense substituted by education as 
much as possible. If this can not be effected, it is no charity 
to allow him to try to provide for himself, but he should be 
kindly cared for, if not by private, at public expense. 

The sense of olfaction has its guardian uses, which sense is 
designed to judge of the quality of food and drink before 
tasting, and to inform one of the presence of dangerous de- 
composing substances. It is also a source of'pleasure when 
inhaling delightful odors. When anything designed for food 
or drink disgusts this sense, it will endanger the system to in- 
dulge in its use, for the ever-watchful care of God thus admon- 
ishes through this sense to abstain from everything disgusting, 
and to fly with haste from every offensive odor. 

The senses of feeling and taste have important utilities, their 
pleasures and discomforts. 

SLEEP AND CONSCIOUSNESS. 

This interesting phenomenal state is given to recuperate ex- 
hausted muscular capital. 

The subject of sleep is one that philosophers have deeply 
contemplated, but hitherto failed to solve satisfactorily. Much 
effort has been made to find the hiding-place of consciousness 
when it retired within to repose. For the reason that sleep is 
common to the animal as well as the man, it has been inferred 
that they were all intelligent beings varying only in degrees. 
This error arises from the want of a correct knowledge of the 
boundary line that is drawn between the instinctive and 
reasoning faculties. 

The human is based upon the animal economy; and where 
the animal instinctive faculties terminate the human begin to 
put forth the moral and reasoning faculties. Some have sup- 
posed that by joining the intellectual to the animal to constitute 
man that all animals ought to be immortal beings, if it 
pertained to man. The animal part of man is separated from 
the immortal part at death, and wifch the immortality is retained 



102 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

the diadem of the moral and reasoning faculties. The animal is 
given with the vegetable kingdom, and must share the fate with 
it in supplying the food of man. 

The deeper the state of sleep the nearer the normal state of 
the vegetable kingdom is approximated by the animal. The pro- 
visional difference existing between the two kingdoms is that 
the vegetable kingdom is supported by being attached to the 
earth, and having no need of consciousness, it remains in its 
normal state of perpetual sleep. 

The animal, being detached from the earth, is dependent 
upon and provided with the faculties of locomotion, conscious- 
ness and the five instinctive senses to enable it to gather 
its food and drink and to care for its young. 

The human race are brought up from the vortex of primitive 
matter through the mineral, vegetable and animal kingdoms to 
prepare them for the reception of the moral and reasoning fac- 
ulties that crown the immortal beings. By this means man is 
enabled to occupy two states at the same time. The intel- 
lectual is the ynmortal part which is for a time attached to the 
physical plane of being, the object of which is to furnish an op- 
portunity to multiply the species and to enrich the mind with 
science to enable it to supply the world with the works of art. 

The opportunity that physical life affords man for gathering 
in the bright gems of scientific wisdom to guide reason in all 
investigations, and furnish food for immortal memory, is not 
only important for earthly care, but will furnish the incentive 
and ability for deeper research for the gems of wisdom in spirit 
life. 

The conscious and unconscious states have their uses. The 
conscious is the wide-awake state, wherein the mind takes the 
helm to guide in all the muscular activities and reasoning fac- 
ulties. The unconscious one is that of sleep, wherein the system 
recuperates from its expended muscular energy. The dermoid 
tissue or external skin is a network or garment of sensitive 
nerves, which is a medium of consciousness, dependent upon 
the vigor of the muscular system for its activity. But when 
the muscular power becomes exhausted, it loses its conscious 
power and relaxes into a state of repose. And why? The great 
venous sinuses that occupy the longitudinal and lateral fissures 
of the brain are composed of an extension of the dura mater or 
living membrane of the cranium that is in direct sympathy 
with the external dermoid tissue or membranes, to govern the 
tension of these cerebral venous reservoirs when the system is 
vigorous, and they yield the tension when it is laboring under 
fatigue. In this relaxed tension of these sinuses, which are 
called Faux, Major and Minor, they receive a much larger 
quantity of venous blood before imparting it, that presses on 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 103 

the corpus callosum, that lies directly above the pons varolii. 
This brooding gentle pressure induces the unconscious state 
called sleep, and, with the return of vigor to the exhausted 
system, the tentorium becomes more tort to free the sinuses of 
their excess of blood, pressure ceases, and spontaneous wake- 
ful consciousness returns. An alarm while sleeping given 
through the sense of audition, or hearing, or feeling, first in- 
duces a tension of the tentorium before the sleeper can awake. 
It is the author's opinion that the pons varolii is the direct 
central organ of consciousness that receives this impression 
from the pressed corpus callosum. Therefore the means for 
repose has its provisional arrangement in these Faux sinuses 
of the cerebrum under relaxation, and consciousness is restored 
b* the causes that induce their tension to relieve the oppressed 
organ of consciousness. That this organ occupies this central 
position in the brain, the author has had satisfactory proof 
from biological tests. 

THE FACULTIES OF THE MENTAL ORGANS. 

The human race have a vital interest in more than their 
physical body. The human system has far more resources 
for sustentation than the oldest philosophers have dreamed of. 
It is God's method to propose the elements for the constitution 
of man through the agency of the combined efforts of the whole 
universal structure. The first motion matter made to form the 
universe had in it the design of man ; and every department 
of it is doing its assigned share of transforming and improving 
the molecules that should construct and sustain the physical 
temple of man ■ — and the fruit of all its stupendous labor is 
man. This is the one object of the Supreme Being in organiz- 
ing universal spheres, solar systems, planets, oceans, atmos- 
phere, the vegetable and animal kingdoms, to culminate man 
an intellectual, moral and immortal being. Therefore, if man- 
kind will seek the elevated position they occupy in the scale of 
being, let them fully comprehend the many faithful servants 
that God has employed to serve them. The heavens have 
trained matter in its fiery furnaces to travel through space 
with the velocity of two hundred thousand miles per second on 
the beams of light ; to crystalize the great planetary arch to 
rear thereon all the kingdoms of nature as chemical elabora- 
tories in which to perfect the primate molecules on which the 
human species depend for their advent and sustentation in 
planetary life. The same march of matter is constantly travel- 
ing through the many departments of universal nature to 
secure the perpetuity of life. When the immortal crown of 
human intellect was thus rendered complete, it was placed on 
the brow of man. 



iC4 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AlsD 

This was the immortal part joined to the highest order of 
the animal kingdom. It was both wise and useful to place man 
erect, that the hands might be at his command to serve him 
in all his works of art The hand of the Divine is more per- 
fectly seen in the production of the intellectual faculties than 
in all his magnificent universal works. Store the mind with 
scientific research, and train and bring into use the artistic 
genius of the hand, and it will loosen the bonds of the servi- 
tude of the race by supplying mechanical power to take the 
place of muscle. This work will not be complete until 
all the elements are in various ways serving man as chemical 
or motor powers. The human race were the last to be ushered 
into being, and will be the only beings that will triumph over 
mortality, to preserve their scientific and artistic attainments. 
The aid that intellectual attainment is capable of rendering, to 
protect, support, elevate and refine man, ought to be a 
sufficient incentive to make it a first business, and one that is 
worth striving faithfully and diligently to attain. 

THE FACULTIES OF THE MENTAL ORGANS VENERATION. 

This organ is the archangel of the soul, and is the crowning 
wisdom faculty that knows how to go out after God ; and ever 
has a high worship for all that is high and holy and supremely 
good. 

When this organ is deficient, the person is unable to con- 
ceive of a Divine Being, and will feel no restraint in treating 
the name of God with disrespect. 

This faculty is the one that conceived the telescope by 
which to inspect the fields of space, the result of which is a 
comprehension of the principles by which the heavenly bodies 
are governed : this drove the myths of astrology from the 
human mind, and founded in its place the sublime science of 
astronomy. 

CONSCIENTIOUSNESS. 

This faculty treats upon the principles of justice, and in pro- 
portion to the size of its development will be the righteousness 
of the conduct of the individual. When it is large it becomes 
philanthropic, and will look after the rights, of others, and will 
use all laudable means to deliver the oppressed from the op- 
pressor. When it is small it does not hesitate to oppress when 
it will contribute to advantage. A luminous intellect is 
security for the righteous uses of this faculty. The happiness 
of man very much depends upon the obeyance of its dictations; 
for it will never cease to accuse the wrong nor to applaud the 
righteous. Character depends very much upon the state of 
this organ. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. I05 

BENEVOLENCE. 

Benevolence is the great benefactive principle of the universe. 
It is the Good Samaritan of the soul that is always charitably 
disposed when it is fairly developed. But when this faculty is 
small, it becomes selfish, and miserly mean, and very repulsive, 
and is thrown into spasms of clinched fingers when a penny is 
solicited for charitable purposes. Miserly feelings dwarf the 
soul and render one very unhappy. 

HUMAN NATURE. 

This is one of the sentinel organs designed to anticipate the 
designs of others. Much damage is sustained by imposition 
in business affairs when this organ is so deficient as not to 
furnish suitable protection. If it is wanting altogether, the 
person will be constantly tormented by confidence operators. 
The promises of others are accepted, but not being usually 
met. This will surely disqualify a person for extensive business. 

FIRMNESS, OR THE WILL. 

This is the executive organ that presides over muscular 
motion to help the person execute all of his designs. When it 
is large, the person will be vigorous and industrious; and just in 
proportion to the activity of this organ will be the energy in 
business and perseverance to complete designs. If this organ 
is small, the person will be indolent, and will be inclined to 
shun industrious pursuits, and will be ever looking for a streak 
of luck to set him up in the world. This tendency will ever 
keep him in low circumstances. The habits of industry de- 
velopes this faculty, and, through the activity given to it by 
enterprising ancestry, has produced the energetic minds that 
are pushing forward the useful enterprises of this age. The 
strength of the person will much depend upon the size of this 
organ. It will be a dangerous organ when so selfish as to 
become obstinate. 

THE GROUP OF THE PERCEPTIVE ORGANS 

are in order as follows : Individuality in the centre, form 
order, size, weight/ color, calculation : 

INDIVIDUALITY. 

This is the only faculty that enables persons to recognize 
each other when meeting unexpectedly ; to separately observe 
minute objects, and thus become conversant with the properties 
and qualities of objects. It is indispensable to an artist or 
chemist, and is the principal faculty needed to constitute a 
good detective. If it is excessively large, it is inquisitive and 



106 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

tattling, and makes a meddlesome neighbor. If it is small, the 
recognition of persons and objects is rendered difficult, and is 
a poor judge of qualities, and not given to a very close obser- 
vation of objects, or the doings of those around him. This 
faculty can be best cultivated by mingling in society. 

FORM. 

This faculty is designed to see every deformity and defect 
pertaining to objects. It is indispensable to the sculptor, the 
limner and perspective architect. Small form is deficient in 
taste and artistic criticism. 

ORDER. 

This faculty is the distributing office of the mind. This 
labor-saving faculty is not usually turned to its full account in 
one's life-time. If it was it would furnish the accessible means 
of data adequate to store the mind with all useful knowledge in 
very much less time than is now required to attain it. By the 
use of order in preserving acquired knowledge, all the abstruse 
sciences are to be perfected. By the neglect of order, nine- 
tenths of the wisdom that is laboriously gained is lost to the 
world. This faculty is able to divide forces, and thereby ac- 
complish many ends at the same time. In many ways its use 
may be turned to profit. The railway system compels the use 
of order to save collisions and to make it pay a dividend. 

SIZE. 

This faculty is given to help the judgment in determining 
the magnitude of objects, with the celeritv that they appear 
before the eye in the plane of vision. 

WEIGHT. 

This faculty presides over balance, and deals out the mus- 
cular energy to overcome the gravity of objects. Its judg- 
ment of weight is attained by lifting objects the weight of 
which are known. It gives grace to the movement of persons, 
when in a state of integrity ; but when deficient the person will 
appear awkward. It is the faculty that graduates the muscular 
energy that gives precision to the hand, and directs the force 
of the blow. It is the principle that keeps the planets in position 
and gives to them their orbicular motion. 

COLOR. 

This faculty is designed to enchant the mind with varieties 
and shades of colors. It is one of the faculties of the fine arts 
and good taste. When it is well developed its appreciative 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. I07 

faculty tends to refine the taste of the person. When this 
faculty is small, it is not a judge of color. Beautiful flowers 
will be unappreciated and their culture neglected. 

CALCULATION. 

This is a faculty of the mind designed to determine the end 
from the beginning. It is the grand thinker, and brings the 
principles of numbers to its aid in its castle building. It has 
measured the heavens, and given us the system of astronomy ; 
it has estimated the density of the heavenly bodies, and thereby 
determined their relative gravitating forces. It may yet deter- 
mine the relations of all things, for by it they have been 
instituted by the Infinite Mind. It is designed to be enter- 
prising and to secure success. By its diligent cultivation, a 
person may rise from a gypsy to a Newton. 

LANGUAGE. 

This faculty was given to preside over the symbolic work of 
conveying ideas to others through the organ of speech. 
Language is the means of intelligence, and ranks first in the 
fine arts. 

AGREEABLENESS. 

This faculty is used to make friends ; it is always disposed 
to agreeably entertain its associates. When it is deficient it is 
disagreeably contentious. It will neither pet nor be petted, and 
will make a very selfish companion. 

IMITATION. 

This faculty is the one that is used to copy the masters and 
stimulate one to excel in the fine arts. It is very susceptible 
of inspiration ; hence so many inspired artists. Persons who 
are endowed with the most marvelous artistic skill always have 
this organ very large. If it is small, it can be best improved by 
working in some mechanical business. 

MARVELOUSNESS. 

This faculty is inclined to believe all absurd statements 
without the proper evidence. It is noted for running after 
every show that comes along. It makes a great many endeavors 
to complete a perpetual motion before finding it impractical. 
It never exchanges property profitably. It will make a gifted 
exhorter. When it is small it is sceptical, is inclined to think 
every one a deceiver. It is not inclined to help the destitute. 
It makes an incompetent jurist. 



108 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 



HOPE. 



This is the faculty to encourage to enterprise. It proffers 
many times more than can be realized, and not unfrequently 
gets taken in with loss. Small hope gives no credit, and keeps 
its little bark near shore ; is fearful, and will never contract to 
perform as much as is practicable, and will make a penny 
operator. If it is deficient, it will break down under small 
trials, and will make a very disagreeable companion. It sees no 
flowers in the path of life, but full hope and large calculation 
makes a front-rank operator. 

SELF-ESTEEM. 

This faculty is designed to guard the character of the person. 
It stimulates to deeds of excellence, and is well calculated to 
urge the person forward to claim the first rank in society. It 
will work for self- elevation and distinction, and is apt to be in 
too much of a hurry for promotion. It is doing more to arouse 
genius and make worthy citizens than any of the others. It is a 
law of mind to concede the respect that the personal deportment 
claims. We must keep our armor bright to reflect the lucid 
light. 

APPROBATIVENESS. 

This faculty of the mind is the one that is desirous of flattery, 
and will take great pains to elicit it. It will do many favors to 
obtain the approbation due to them. When large, if it is dis- 
appointed of approbation, it will banish the offender for in- 
gratitude. When it is small, it renders one indifferent to com- 
pliments, and uncourteous. 

COMPARISON. 

This faculty is the one that judges of the quality and value 
of things by comparison ; and that reasons from the known to 
the unknown. It does not wish to decide in the absence of the 
proper evidence. It is ever comparing and classifying objects 
and principles to deduce therefrom sound data on which to 
base judgment. When it is small, it is a poor jurist and not 
a good judge of qualities, and will not make very rapid mental 
advancement. Is not a close observer, and is apt to be very 
bitter in denunciations. 

CAUSALITY. 

This is the thinking, comparing and reasoning faculty. This 
is the sensible faculty when the work of the perceptive faculties 
are inspected and edited ; and when the conversation of per- 
sons is received to find their intentions. This faculty, when 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. IO9 

large, adds profound reason and weighty judgment. This 
faculty is the one that culls our thoughts for composing. When 
large and well cultivated, it will compose rapidly enough for 
public speaking. It then is not easily decoyed from its collected 
reasoning balance, and gives great gravity to personal deport- 
ment in debate. When it is small, it will not reason profoundly 
nor compose sufficiently rapid for a public speaker. No person 
can become gifted in composing without this organ is full. 
When it is very large, the person will be inclined to become a 
voluminous author. 

MIRTHFULNESS. 

This faculty is the critic for statements and appearances, and 
can not refrain from laughing at the ridiculous. It is the pleas- 
ant scourge designed to drive mind from ridiculous inconsistency 
to dignified consistency. It is companionable, consistent, and 
courted in the social circle. When deficient the person is 
sedate and not pleased with a joke. 

IDEALITY. 

This faculty is- very desirous of discovering some thing new. 
It will bring a collection of ideas, and use them to elucidate the 
subject under consideration. If it is very large, it will make 
a lucid writer. If this faculty is brought out to its designed 
ability, it will be able to scale the heights of eloquence beyond 
that of Demosthenes or Cicero or any of the oriental masters. 
If this faculty is small, the person will not make a favorite 
writer, nor a good point. If this faculty is cultivated, it is but 
accomplished by continued efforts at composition on serious 
subjects. 

SUBLIMITY. 

This is the faculty of the mind designed to be inspired by 
stupendous objects, such as high mountains, tremendous 
cataracts, and tempestuous thunder storms. It is ever endeavor- 
ing to comprehend the Mind that controls these sublime 
objects. It is always contemplating some gigantic philan- 
thropic plan by which to benefit the whole race of man. It is 
awake to the sublime works of art, and has a high appreciation 
of the minds that produce them. It is the strong man in the 
household of mind, that thinks that everything can be done 
that is expected of finite mind. The person who has this 
faculty large will appear noble and manly, and make a splendid 
appearance in the world. When it is deficient, the person is 
not inspired by sublime objects, nor apt to engage in great 
enterprises. 

CAUTIOUSNESS. 

This faculty is the one that is always on the lookout for 
danger, and will plan in good time a splendid retreat. It will 



HO A. H. DAVIS THEORY AND 

always try to have every thing strong and sure, and a little to 
spare. It is good to provide, and when it purchases a bill 
it thinks it had better take a little larger pattern. It watches 
over all the operations of all the organs, and admonishes them 
to do well their work and leave nothing at loose ends. It can 
not enjoy happiness and be in debt. It is the sentinel of the 
mind that never sleeps, and ever has its hand on the bell-rope 
of alarm. When this faculty is small, it is fearless and 
indiscreet. 

EVENTUALITY. 

This faculty is abounding with past events, and is the 
keeper of the dates of their occurrence. It makes a good his- 
torian when in a state of integrity. When it is deficient, it 
finds it difficult to retain the dates of passing events, and has 
to depend upon record for their data. 

LOCALITY. 

This faculty is designed to preside over personal navigation. 
It is ever on the lookout for the four cardinal points, to enable 
it to keep its bearings correctly. It is the compass of the 
mind. When this faculty is deceived the person feels lost, even 
if he well knows his geographical position. Its greatest use is 
in navigating extensive prairies and broad wild oceans. 

TIME. 

Time is the faculty of the mind that conceives the rhythmic 
order of movement that gives taste to the varieties of musical 
discourse. It enables armies to mark time at the beat of the 
martial drum, and move together in close order as one man. 
If this faculty is wanting, it disqualifies one for a soldier, or the 
appreciation of the musical fine art. 

TUNE. 

This faculty comprehends the harmony of musical tones, and 
the value of the arrangements of musical composition. Time 
and tune, or rhythm and volume, are two principles used to di- 
rect the harmony of the universal movements of the heavenly 
bodies. 

CONSTRUCTIVENESS. 

This faculty is the inventive genius that is ever striving to 
harness every motive power to work for man. It is the parent 
of all the mighty engines and handicraft now in use in the 
world. It inspires man to become familiar with the science of 
mechanics and the mechanical arts, and thus it qualifies mind 
to complete the pending system of inventions that belong to 
the highest class now in use. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. Ill 

ACQUISITIVENESS. 

This faculty was given to man to lay up for the time of need, 
to perfect his taste, and bring out the great institutions of the age. 
This faculty is the savings bank of the individual, and it has 
secured abundance for self and those dependent upon it. It is 
a useful, laudable and commendable faculty when in loyal keep- 
ing. 

SECRETIVENESS. 

This faculty of the mind is the inner chamber where no one 
is ever permited to enter. The private counsels of the mind 
are recorded there. The rights of this personal citadel are 
divinely conceded and respected. Personal character sits 
there unmasked in its uncompanionable miserly hall. When 
this faculty is large, it requires a crafty detective to decoy it. 
When the person is governed by the principles of righteous- 
ness, it is a sanctorum of honor and the heaven of the soul. On 
the contrary, when the person is governed by unrightous strategy, 
it becomes a place of dishonor and the hell of the soul, where- 
in sometimes might.be found dead men's bones. 

DESTRUCTIVENESS. 

This hardy faculty was not given to destroy the world of liv- 
ing human beings ; it was given to pioneer the settlement of 
new countries ; to brave the dangers of a frontier life, and do 
the rugged work of encountering the wild beasts and destroy- 
ing the old forest, and thereby officiate as a sapper and miner 
for the car of civilization. It makes a brave soldier, one that 
will bear hardships and privations without murmuring. 

COMBATIVENESS. 

This faculty is given for personal and national defense ; to 
protect the family circle and the defenceless. When it is large, 
it is easily decoyed into an altercation, and wonders how other 
persons keep out of such troublesome melees. It is disposed 
to oppose other persons' propositions, and contributes to a 
quarrelsome disposition. By this bullying propensity wars are 
inaugurated. 

ADHESIVENESS. 

This faculty of the mind comprehends the elements that en- 
ter into the fabric of social happiness. It is pained when 
friends part and rejoices at their return. It has just claims up- 
on friends for kind sympathies and gentle courtesies bestowed, 
and when they are not recognized by a kind return, it holds 
them guilty of ingratitude. But this faculty will live to find all 
its lost jewels beyond the grave, and to receive the rewards due 



112 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

for all the kind offices bestowed in this world. If this faculty 
is deficient, no binding attachments will be formed, and the 
person becomes a deficient member in society, a rejected block 
in the temple of social happiness. 

UNION FOR LIFE. 

This faculty does not mature until the age of puberty ; then 
it is inclined to travel to find a suitable companion. It is very 
restless and unhappy until it finds one. When custom shall 
allow the female to perform her ordained work of choosing her 
beau ideal companion, the inspiration of her love and worship 
will ever unite their interests in life. 

AMATIVENESS. 

This faculty does not mature until the age of puberty. It 
is designed to attract the sexes and stimulate them to prolifi- 
cate the race. This faculty stimulates to self-culture and re- 
finement to merit the first position in society, as a means of 
selecting a companion of similar refinement and taste. It helps 
cement companions for life, and stimulates an ambition to sup- 
port a companion in good style. It renders one civil and cour- 
teous to the opposite sex. When this faculty is deficient, it 
renders one selfish, uncourteous and unattractive, and will neith- 
er pet nor be petted, nor be disposed to support a companion. 

PHILOPROGENITIVENESS, OR PARENTAL CARE. 

This is the wisdom faculty given to rear and train the off- 
spring. It is the Divine way of protecting and qualifying the 
young for self-support. It has ever a tender watch care over 
them, and is much surer to look after their welfare than their own. 
It is distressed by anything that militates against their health, 
reputation or prosperity. It has a great many vigilant out- 
posts to guard their interests. It sounds the condition of the 
outside world to find the evils that may harm them, and 
fraternizes societies, to regulate them. Hence come improved 
governments, and all the humanitarian societies in the world. 

INHABITIVENESS. 

This faculty is given to make man a local being, and to keep 
families together. When large it expends much for home com- 
forts, and has the endearments and comforts of home to attract 
a speedy return when away. When it is deficient, it makes a 
good itinerant that feels at home wherever night finds it. 



MIND. 
Intelligence seldom fails to emancipate the higher minds 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. II3 

from the necessity of braving the hardships of physical life. 
The Divine method of caring for man is through the cultivated 
reasoning faculty of the mind ; and if all will avail themselves 
of God's highest provisional means of personal protection and 
care, let them consult their highest mental susceptibilities, 
through the media of energetic culture of the mind ; then they 
will not fail to find in it an intelligence capable of warning 
against dangers and of pointing the way of the most available 
means of life. It has called to the aid of man the motive 
powers that be to turn the manufacturing wheel, to drive the 
ponderous train. It has harnessed an imponderable element 
to transmit intelligence over continents and through the depths 
of the ocean with infinite flight, through the darkness as swift 
as in the' light, yet this system of human service will not be 
complete until every available element known and unknown 
shall be rendering some service in their assigned place to bless 
the human race. Yet there are many lessons to be mastered by 
these pioneers of thought before all these inventions into use 
will be brought. This race of mind is open to all ; each 
principle gained is a unit of the whole ; the more of these 
principles are gained, the easier are the successive ones ob- 
tained. Being unknown they serve to make the delay that 
exists in the present age. Cannot this duty be more impressed 
on the minds that are now on the stage ? To kind Providence 
is our reason referable. Reason is given to serve humanity in 
the place of instinct; therefore, the first duty we owe to our- 
selves is to cultivate the faculties of the mind. It requires a 
long drill to become eminently skilled in music. Give the 
other faculties as thorough a drill, then the person would be 
accomplished in them all, and thereby carry out the Divine 
designs by which to develop and bring into use the highest 
possible capacities of intellect. Then persons thus mentally 
matured will not become subject to monomanias, nor be 
driven from their mental balance into insanity by them. 
Private life does not furnish the incentives to intellectual at- 
tainment that is stimulated by one more public. 

In making a choice of occupations we should always select 
the one most adapted to our taste and acquired abilities ; then 
the task will be a pleasant one, and stimulate us to excel in it. 

The boundary of the intellectual faculties can not be reached 
by the most industrious culture, in a single generation. It will 
require many of active culture and its acquired genius trans- 
mitted to posterity, before it can reach the Divinely designed 
capacities of the powers of intellect. Yet notwithstanding the 
great abilities mind may attain, its reasoning faculties are sub- 
ject to be rendered imbecile and incompetent bygreat physical 
debility, and dethroned by certain systemic derangements. 



114 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

INSANITY. 

By reason of the systemic derangements not being compre- 
hended on which insanity depends, benevolent lunatic asylums 
have been instituted at a very great public expense to furnish 
all possible means known to reclaim the lost balance of these 
reasoning faculties of the mind. This effort is well ; it is noble 
and generous, and manifests a sympathy for those who are suf- 
fering under this great calamity that mind is subject to. An 
asylum for the insane is designed to furnish a place of pleas- 
ant scenery, of quietude, rest and tender care. What aid these 
facilities can not furnish to recuperate the systemic derange- 
ments on which insanity depends, must be looked for in rational 
medication. The dependence of insanity being more upon 
systemic disease that congests the mental organs than mere 
mental hallucination, more aid can be expected from correct 
medication than from all these expensive facilities, and I think 
that we will be able to elucidate this point so clearly that it 
will eventually do away with the necessity for this great pub- 
lic outlay for the insane. 

Each group of the mental organs has an artery and a vital 
nerve accompanying it sent to ramify and support every fibre. 
This nerve is sent out from the upper portion of the superior 
cervical ganglia of the sympathetic nervous trunk. This 
ganglia is situated in the neck in front of the second vertebra. 
It is about one inch long, and is connected by twigs to the four 
first pairs of cervical nerves, and eighth and ninth pairs of the 
nerves of the brain. It sends off slips to the trachea, glottis and 
larynx; it entwines the coats of the carotid artery, and accom- 
panies it to its points of destination. In its ascent through the 
carotid canal, it forms connections with the fifth and sixth 
pairs of nerves, and helps form the superior carotid plexus that 
sends out small nerves to help form the balance of the system 
of cerebral sympathetic ganglia. 

The diseases most dangerous to fatal inflammation of the brain 
and that tend to stricture these ascending sympathetic nerves 
that support the two hemispheres of the cerebrum, are putrid 
sore throat and diptheria. 

In more than one-half of the cases that prove fatal in these dis- 
eases, death ensues from inflammation of the brain, which is 
simply due to a mechanical stricture of these nerves, rather 
than from the local ulceration, and wherein the pressure of the 
congested parts upon the neurilemma is by no means damag- 
ing to these nerves. Could this stricture be momentarily re- 
moved, they would be in good condition to resume their vital 
work. The diseases most common to induce partial paralysis 
of these nerves are, congestion of the spine in the periosteum 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 115 

in the passage of the nerves through the vertebral foramen suf- 
ficient to obstruct the passage of the neurine or vital molecules 
designed to pass through these nerves. This stricture is the 
most common one that is found in chronic insanity. Trachei- 
tis also results from this spinal stricture ; consequently chronic 
tracheitis is quite generally present in cases of lunacy. 

When the mind is blinded by derangement in its reasoning 
faculties, it is merely lost during the time that the organs are 
thus disqualified by disease. The organs of reason are depen- 
dent upon a state of health to be able to judge correctly of the 
properties, qualities and relations of objects, and of the mo- 
tives and rights of others. In all cases of lunacy the inability 
to reason is solely dependent upon congestion of the mental 
organs, which is mainly due to the disqualification of the 
ascending sympathetic nerves, either at the spine or by strict- 
ure in their transit, that obstructs the passage of the vital mole- 
cules on which the mental organs depend for sustentation. 

When the spine is congested at the seat of a sympathetic 
ganglia, the organs dependent upon the ganglia lose their most 
direct molecular supply, which induces a low standard of vi- 
tality, if not a more dangerous inflammation in the organs that 
these ganglia are designed to support. The trunk of this sympa- 
thetic nerve is supported by the medulla spinalis, by uniting 
with each pair of spinal nerves at or near their exit from the 
vertebral foramina. The organs derive a tardy support from 
the spine through these connections of the sympathetic trunk 
with the spine when congested at the roots of these ganglia. 
Why is this alternate provision ? It serves two purposes : first 
to furnish a greater supply of molecules for respiration and 
cardiac motion, and secondly to furnish access to the spine for 
a response to the splenic rallying supply for the spleen and the 
organs, when this support is cut off by spinal congestion at 
their direct nervous centers. By this means the organs are sup- 
ported during the time required for this local congestion in the 
spine to subside. 

When spinal congestion occurs at the seat of the superior 
cervical ganglia, to obstruct the direct supply for the ascending 
sympathetic cerebral nerve, support is sent to the brain from 
this sympathetic trunk in response to neuralgia of the brain 
that is induced by congestion from its direct support being cut 
off by this spinal obstruction. This feeble supply induces tardy 
intellect and a clouded memory. 

When this ascending sympathetic nerve is strictured perma- 
nently, both of these sources of cerebral assimilation are cut 
off and the patient soon dies with inflammation of the brain. It 
will then appear that insanity is dependent upon a partial 
stricture of this nerve either located in the ganglia or some- 



Il6 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

where in its transit to the mental organs sufficient to induce 
in them a state of chronic congestion. 

This derangement is generally consequent upon glandular 
obstruction that depraves the circulation and induces mem- 
branous congestion. 

In cases of insanity, if no cause of the stricture of this nerve 
can be found below the carotid canal, it is most likely to occur 
in its transit by one of three causes, viz : congestion of the 
periosteum, or of the neurilemma, or aneurism of the artery, 
so as to only partially and irregularly supply the mental organs. 

In such cases arterial excitement increases this obstruction ; 
and in most cases of insanity more or less intermittent symp- 
toms are present to induce periodic accelerated arterial excite- 
ment, that serves to increase the insanity during the exacerba- 
tion. 

The spinal vertebral arteries are sent to support the cerebel- 
lum and the domestic organs, that lie at the base and back of 
the brain ; and combinations of nerves from the ninth and 
tenth pairs, with the sympathetic, accompany these arteries in 
all their basilar combinations to their capillary points of desti- 
nation, and preside over the vitality of the organs to which 
they are sent. One principle governs the mode of recuperating 
and providing for all the mental organs ; and similar results ob- 
tain when in a state of congestion and inflammation. When con- 
gested, their faculties are too much driven for their sane use ; 
then comes confusion of ideas, every subject has to be turned 
into its tide of lost reasoning. Mind is dethroned when the 
circle of reasoning faculties has a disenabled member among 
them. When this state pertains to the cerebellum or any of the 
domestic organs of the back brain, the faculty of the diseased 
organ becomes unusually predominant. 

The danger of falling into a state of lunacy depends upon 
the derangements herein set forth. Therefore it is to be hoped 
that this knowledge will eventually save multitudes from lun- 
acy, and the States the necessity of supporting lunatic asylums. 



DELIRIUM TREMENS. 



This disease is a species of insanity peculiar to inebriates, 
and caused by a habitual use of alcoholic beverages carried to 
a state of intoxication and persisted in until this species of in- 
sanity called delirium tremens obtains to deprave the senses 
and cause fearful forebodings, such as being hunted by enemies, 
haunted by demoniac personages, serpents in their boots, and 
an interminable cavalcade of spectres filled with evil designs. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 117 

The motives of their best friends are challenged as enimical, and 
their acts f kindness are suspicioned as deceptive blinds, to 
prevent vigilant watch while they were preparing to spring 
their plot of destruction to person or property. With these de- 
praved imaginations to furnish motives for defensive action, it 
is very plain to be seen how dangerous a person a drunkard 
may become, when governed by these delirious hallucinations, 
and how irresponsible they thus become for the commission of 
acts that are criminal when committed by persons of sane 
minds, placing the motives to commit illegal acts beyond the 
possibility of comprehension. 

The following successful treatment was discovered by the 
author over twenty years ago, one that has not failed to furnish 
the desired relief in from twelve to twenty-four hours. 

3 Nitrate of Potassa grs. 20, Water 3 iv. Mix. Dose 3 ij 
every half hour until it is all taken. In one hour after begin- 
ning the use of this solution give Podophyllin grs.ij in a teaspoon- 
ful of cold water. Also from the beginning of the treatment 
use I£ Cypripedin grs. 48, Alcohol § i, mix to cut, Hyoscyamus 
extract grs. 32. Dissolve the Hyoscyamus extract in hot water. 
Wintergreen 3 ii, simple syrup 3 ii. Mix Cypripedin and all 
together. Dose one teaspoonful every hour until the patient 
sleeps; then extend the doses to two or three hours. After the 
urgent symptoms have subsided, by using a dose every six 
hours for a few days, will so well support the nervous system as 
to preclude the desire for spirits. 



TRIFLING WITH FIRST DEPARTURES FROM HEALTH. 

TARTAR ON THE TEETH AS A CAUSE OF DISEASE. 

By allowing tartar to accumulate on the teeth not unfre- 
quently becomes the primary cause that leads to many systemic 
derangements called disease. This tartar intercepts the gums 
from the teeth and inflames them. When this inflammation 
extends to the periosteum of the alveolar processes, it encroaches 
upon the dental nerves, causing- painful sensitiveness called 
teeth-ache, but more properly neuralgia of the dental nerves. 

If this tartar presses the gums from the teeth, they will lose 
their recuperative aid from the nerves ; then the teeth die and 
grind down easily or become carious. When the nerves are 
exposed to the air and the fluids taken into the mouth, they 
become perpetual causes of aggravating this neuralgia. The 
damage that this tormina does to the system is by injuring the 
distributive work of depositing the vital molecules uniformly 
at all points or parts of the system. When there is a rally at 



Il8 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

one point, it is at the expense of all other parts for the time 
being. If this rallying cause is continuous, it will bring on a 
seditious inflammation of the diseased part to remove the 
offending cause. If the teeth are carious, it is then said that 
the teeth ulcerate, and its frequent ulceration makes it an ulcer 
tooth. If every tartared tooth was more perfectly looked to 
and kept clean, this cause of disease would be avoided, which 
is very important, for this derangement not unfrequently dis- 
arms the system so much that it falls an easy prey to many 
other assailing diseases. If this derangement is allowed to 
disturb the sleep, it will bring on an asthenic state of the 
system that centres upon the organs of digestion, and impairs 
them for performing their functional labors with integrity. The 
appetite then fails, and brings on head-ache and bilious 
obstructions, constipation of the bowels and nervous irritability. 
When these derangements have -taken the system beyond the 
usual time for regaining its balance, then the derangement will 
become chronic, and early symptoms of lung disease will 
follow. In this stage it is time to ask the advice of a physician. 
It is now important to do as a preparatory measure : first, 
remove the carious ulcer teeth, then look after the liver and 
glandular obstructions ; also, treat the morbidly sensitive 
nervous system with anodynes to secure repose ; then use good 
spinal tonics to tone up the system. This course in a reason- 
able time will restore the lost balances of the system again. 

I bring forward this concatenation of causes as a fair speci- 
man of the many ways that the system loses its balance of 
health by neglecting to attend to what most people call trifling 
derangements. Neglect to attend seasonably to first departures 
of the system, and Bravery to stand pain, are two of the sons 
of ignorance that die out early. 

I do not suppose that a person can take too good care of 
this living temple that God has placed under their charge, and 
through which all the Divine bounties of this physical life must 
come to the individual. Secure health is the road to wealth 
and fame. 

TAKING COLD AS A PRIMARY CAUSE OF DISEASE. 

Every disease which is culminated by taking a cold is refer- 
able to strictured nerves in their passage from the oblongata 
or spine, by congestion of their investing membranes. Let us 
trace the concatenations of this slight and generally neglected 
derangement, to see the great amount of mischief that may 
result from it. What is a cold ? When a person is exposed to 
a cold current of air, or sits upon or leans against a cold body 
capable of extracting the caloric from the system faster than 
it can generate it, the thermal condition of the part will be 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 119 

sunk below the standard required for nutrition. Then congestion 
begins. If this exposure to cold is continued a sufficient 
length of time to induce congestion of the investing membranes 
of the cerebro-spinal axis, it will obstruct the nerves that arise 
therefrom, disqualifying them for the nutritive support of the 
organ or part dependent upon these nerves for vital support. 
Then a secondary congestion will ensue. The first congestion, 
which is located in the spinal axis, is the result of abstracted 
caloric ; the second is located in the organ or part dependent 
upon the obstructed nerves to furnish the nutritive support. 
When nutrition becomes suspended by reason of cold only 
long enough to fill the capillary arteries to their elastic 
capacity, no harm will result if the person speedily regains the 
warmth again from a warm apartment, or otherwise to resume 
nutrition before the serum begins to escape from the walls of 
the distended capillary arteries. But if the capillary arteries 
become crowded to a greater distension by the continued force 
of the heart, the serum of the blood will begin to escape 
through meshes of their over-distended walls into the cellular 
membranes : this is called effusion. This effusion induces a 
congestion in the part that requires febrile action and time to 
overcome. This makes up the phenomena of a cold. This 
first congestion in the spine must recuperate before the 
obstructed nerves can be fully restored to induce assimilation 
in the organs under their vital control. Therefore, in the 
organs time is also required to overcome this secondary con- 
gestion after the nerves are liberated before the effects of the 
cold fully subside. If this recuperation in the spine is tardy 
in relieving the nerves, the organs affected by it are jeopardized, 
lest fatally acute or chronic organic disease result. 

It is universally admitted that coryzal catarrhs and blenn- 
orrhoeal coughs arise from colds. It is also a frequent remark 
made by many persons, that they take a cold much more easily 
than they used to, and that when they get one it requires more 
time to recover from it. And so it is that in repetitions of any 
kind of disease, a growing chronic debility of an organ or part 
that induces a decline in its recuperative powers will obtain. 

When the back of the head is exposed to cold to a certain 
extent, it will induce congestion of the membranes of the 
medulla oblongata, and obstruct one or more of the three 
roots of the fifth pair of nerves. The Trigeminus, or fifth pair 
of nerves, arise from the crus cerebelli, and pass out the right 
and left sides of the pons varolii that caps the oblongata. They 
each, after uniting their three roots into a ganglion, divide into 
three great branches of nerves, the upper, the middle, and lower. 
When the upper one is thus obstructed, it induces congestion 
of the membranes of the superciliary sinuses, and the inner 



120 A. H. DAVIS THEORY AND 

membrane of the eye lids. When the middle nerve is obstructed 
it induces congestion of the membranes of the nose and 
palate and the obstruction of the lower branch induces con- 
gestion of the throat and fauces. Consequently, from the 
damaged state of the upper branch comes ophthalmia tarsi ; 
from the middle, catarrh ; and from the* lower comes inflamed 
throat, tonsilitis, diphtheria, putrid throat, etc., when the 
systemic bias and other derangements of the system come in 
to give it one of these types. 

When the cold induces congestion in the medulla spinalis, 
at the upper cervical nervous centre, it will induce laryngitis 
and tracheitis, which augment into croup, when complicated 
with severe glandular obstruction, and not unfrequently induces 
cerebro spinal meningitis. When the spine is congested at the 
cardiac nervous centre, and the eighth pair of nerves is 
impaired, it will induce bronchitis, which, when complicated 
with glandular obstructions and constitutional debility, will 
degenerate into tuberculosis, and the system sink then under 
phthisis pulmonalis, (or consumption) by a succession of these 
colds. When it congests the spine so as to involve the solar 
plexus, the liver and pancreas, which receive their functional 
nerves from this centre, will be congested, and their functional 
secretions suspended. When the congestion occurs at the 
renal plexus, the kidneys will become congested and obstructed, 
causing an overflow of their secretions into the circulation, 
inducing either fever or inflammatory rheumatism, the order of 
which will depend upon the disturbed state of other nervous 
centres and the condition of their dependent organs. When 
the cold congests the spermatic nervous centre, (at the small 
of the back), it will induce derangements of the reproductive 
organs. When the sacral centre is congested, it will induce 
piles, when complicated with portal obstruction, and dysentery 
when complicated with glandular overflow of the renal secre- 
tions. If congestion of this sacral centre is complicated with 
congestion of the sciatic centres, it will induce sciatic rheum- 
atism, the intensity of which will depend upon the number of 
the sciatic roots involved in the congestion, and the state of 
the glandular system at the time. 

These derangements are the most common ones that take 
their origin from taking a cold, which has thus made these 
great inroads into the health of the people. 



THE RENAL ORGANS, 

AND SOME OF THE SEQUENCES OF THEIR DERANGED CONDITION. 

The causes nor the manner by which the renal organs be- 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 121 

come injured have not been very well denned by medical 
writers. Neither have the sequences of their deranged condi- 
tions been properly traced to the systemic derangements aris- 
ing therefrom. 

The official work assigned to these organs in the systemic 
economy is directly that of depuration from the circulating 
arterial blood, its redundance of water not exhaled by perspi- 
ration, and every other element finding its way into the circu- 
lation detrimental to nutrition. Their normal work, when no 
errors are committed in diet, is the extraction in the secreted 
urine of the worn element of the systemic fibres exchanged 
for those of fresh vigor in the chemical work of nutrition. 
This state of systemic exchange exists in a state of health 
uniformly during life. The kidneys are competent to do this 
work without suffering any exhaustion in times of health. But 
to add to this labor the work of clearing the circulation of 
sour and rancid food is to worry the kidneys to exhaustion. 
Then comes congestion in the secretory vessels that receive 
the capillary arteries and send out capillary emulgent veins 
and renal ducts. The excretory ducts become obstructed with 
the serous effusion from these congested membranes. When 
these ducts become obstructed, the urine secreted sets back 
upon the venous capillaries, and forces its way into the circu- 
lation to interfere with nutrition. A notable point is, that 
after these ducts first become obstructed with serum, that in 
their effort to clear themselves they become solidly packed 
with concrete albumen. These long-continued obstructions 
furnish the opportunity, when in a habit of using limy water, 
to form lithic granular deposits, the phosphate of lime, and 
urea under electric action, combine to form the lithic granules 
which are slowly crowded through the ducts into the 
pelvis of the kidneys. These granules are micro- 
scopically small, with sharp angles and points. The 
sharp angles of these granules often wound the mem- 
branes of the pelvis of the kidneys, and induce hem- 
orrhage that passes with the urine. They also irritate and 
wound the mucous membranes of the bladder, when they are 
pressed between the folds of the collapsed organ, and thus 
become the source of cystitis of a very obstinate character. 
When this mucous membrane becomes so much congested by 
the injury of these lithic granules as to induce the exhalation 
of a serous mucous insoluble by the urine, and too tenacious 
to be passed, a quantity of these lithic granules becomes im- 
bedded in it, which is plastic at first, and moulded into a 
rounded form by motion while it is becoming electrically ce- 
mented and hardened. The nucleus of the stone thus formed 
will continue to attract the phosphate of lime, and being im- 



122 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

mersed in urea they chemically contrive to enlarge the same. 
This calculus is thus formed as a sequence of improper renal 
taxation by the habitual use of injurious beverages and articles 
of diet. This lithic derangement of the kidneys, when once 
formed, becomes habitual. The kidneys then cannot, without 
aid, freely clear these ducts. The state of these organs makes 
the largest number of the systemic derangements. In the au- 
thor's observation of the concatenating causes that make up 
the types of diseases, he has found that the various derange- 
ments of these renal organs play an important part to pro- 
long the disease, and especially so in chronic diseases. To 
only depurate a part of the accumulating impurities from the 
circulation, and less than are accumulating, will soon reduce 
nutrition to so low a standard as to induce general congestion 
throughout the systemic capillaries. Most of the fevers have 
this cause prominently connected with them. The depura- 
tion of these impure elements not being effected, they have to 
be consumed by the excessive combustion set up in the cap- 
illary system by nervous rally in response to capillary conges- 
tion. The excessive quantity of electrical elements furnished 
by this excitement effects the combustion of these elements 
that were incombustible under the normal quantity of neu- 
rine furnished by the nervous system. This excessive com- 
bustion thus induced for this object produces the excess of 
caloric that raises the temperature of the system to what is 
called fever heat. When, by systemic debility, the vital nerves 
are rendered obtuse to this systemic capillary congestion, the 
arterial plethora will call into action the spleen to goad the 
nervous system to perform this work more effectually. After 
the patient has been thus rendered sensitive to pain, the vital 
neurine is forwarded to the points of nutrition with that quan- 
tity needed to fuse this poor combustible material. Many 
persons never have more vitality than is required to support 
the system, without any for labor. 

Those persons whose circulation is depurated the most 
unsuccessfully require the greatest nervous expenditure, and 
the most rapid circulation. This is one of the most common 
causes of that general debility which induces the tubercular 
habit of the vital organs. 

Inflammation of the kidneys always causes a painful sensa- 
tion in the hypogastric region that causes the patient to bend 
forward, or curl up, as it is often described, to relieve the 
organs from the pressure of the abdominal viscera upon them. 
The one particular diagnostic symptom in this inflammation, 
is that of nausea and protracted vomiting, connected with this 
local pain, to relieve which, apply a towel wrung out of hot 
water, and lay over the painful part as hot as the patient can 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 1 23 

bear, and change every four or five minutes. Also give 15 
grains of nitrate of potassa in one-third tumbler of cold 
water. Give one-fourth of it every half hour; then give 1 grain 
of podophyllin. This treatment is reliable. 



RENAL, OR KIDNEY DISEASES. 

Every kidney disease has its deranging effect upon the 
quality of the blood. As is the health of these organs, so will 
be the state of the system, other combinations of causes being 
considered. They seem to hold the office of judging what 
elements should be ruled out as being unfit for the perpetuity 
of life. A large proportion of glandular derangements are 
derived from contaminated air. By lacking the judgment of 
the conditions of localities fruitful of contaminating gas, we 
fall an easy prey to renal congestion. Blood nominally is 
composed of water 90^ ; albumen 8 ; chlorides of sodium 
and potassium 6 ; lactate, soda and extractive matter 5 ; soda 
and phosphate of soda 4, in 100 parts, bearing in mind that 
every foreign article introduced serves to change this compo- 
sition, if not depurated from it ; entering into the blood by 
respiration, as vital supports are oxygen and nitrogen, and 
from a chemical interchange in the lungs is derived the 
haematine. When other gases enter the lungs with the oxygen 
and nitrogen, it is at the expense of a measure of these vital 
chemicals to produce the proper quality and quantity of these 
primates, designed to be produced in each chemical evolution 
following each inspiration of air. Again, if the gas intruding 
be that of carbonic acid, it lessens combustion, and also 
prevents the depuration from the circulation a quantity of 
carbonic acid equivalent to that inhaled. The accumulation 
of this carbonic acid in the system renders the blood less 
combustible to render nutrition more defective. When the 
functional work of the kidneys is taxed beyond endurance, 
remove this carbonic acid from the circulation, the ducts 
become obstructed with albuminous secretions. In this con- 
dition urea is turned through the emulgent veins into the 
circulation. Then these disturbing elements in the system 
have to seek an alternate means of disposal. A higher condi- 
tion of the system would here be very useful in this alternate 
effort, in order to make a complete success in expelling these 
impurities through the dermoid tissue. Yet, there is a united 
force culminating that keeps pace with this abnormal condition 
of the blood that eventuates, with this combination, in an 
intermittent febrile exacerbation. Pyelitis follows lithic accu- 



124 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

mulations that mechanically wound the membranes of the 
pelvis of the kidneys. Nephritis may be induced by the 
presence in the kidneys of strong diuretics, as the oil of 
juniper, turpentine, savine and tansy, which is of short dura- 
tion when the vital renal nerves are in a state of integrity. 
But the most common cause of nephritis, or inflammation of 
the kidney, is a direct suspension of the vital nervous support, 
whereby nutrition in the organ is suspended. Then follows the 
congestive pain in the organ. In the enlarged white kidney 
the cortical portion is enlarged from four or five ounces to 
ten or twelve ounces. The external membrane presents a 
whitish, mottled or marbled appearance. The pyramidal cones 
sometimes preserve their compact appearance and well-defined 
outline ; in other cases they are more or less obliterated, and 
the tubes separated from each other. The cortical portion 
generally, and sometimes the medullary portions, are devoid 
of the sanguineous portion of the blood. The surface is dotted 
with numerous white or greyish points, and, when the organ is 
bisected longitudinally, these points are observable on the 
incased surfaces. The organs are rather flaccid, and less 
resisting than in health, but not much softened. 

bright's disease. 

In reference to this senemic condition of the kidney, a con- 
tinued fever is often found resulting from its abnormal condition. 
In this continued fever we find the pulse at 90 to no per 
minute, and small. We also find hsematine deficient. A large 
proportion of the red globules are wanting to give a proper 
support to nutrition, and muscular and nervous power thereby 
diminish together. Much of the nutriment is derived from the 
adeps of the system, as a continuous draft upon the systemic 
capital while alimentation is suspended. The capillary arteries 
of the mucous membranes lose their wonted firm elastic tension 
that preserves them against capillary aneurism,under an undue 
force of the heart, and hemorrhagic passages of the bowels 
often occur. The kidneys are also subject to hsematuria. The 
skin is relaxed and humid. A succession of chilly sinking 
symptoms, that rally again ; but it will be noticeable that after 
each successive sinking symptom the rally is less complete, 
and with the breaking down of the pyramidal cones of the 
kidneys, death ensues. 

The coma that precedes the giving up of the ghost in pro- 
tracted fevers, instead of the coma being induced by uremic 
poisoning, as supposed by Dr. Flint, is directly due to a 
suspension of the vital nutritive support of the cerebral organs 
of consciousness. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 1 25 



ATROPHIED KIDNEY, OR, THE HARD, CONTRACTED KIDNEY. 

These organs, in well marked cases, are reduced in size and 
weight. In a case of extreme atrophy, cited by Wilks, weighed 
together only one and one-half ounce. The cortical portion 
is diminished, and in extreme cases the pyramidal cones 
extend to their exterior surface, and their sides may be nearly 
in contact. The organs are dense and resisting, The capsule 
is with difficulty detached, and when forcibly removed brings 
away a portion of the torn parenchyma. The surface is some- 
times smooth, in others lobulated, and sometimes roughened 
by irregular elevations, presenting a hob-nailed appearance. 
The microscope shows absence of epithelial structure within, 
in more or less of the uriniferous tubes, and an abundance of 
granules. The tubes are more or less shrunken or obliterated. 
Frequently numerous cysts are seen with the microscope, and 
frequently with the naked eye. The atrophied waste of the 
organs is mostly in the cortical portion. It is particularly this 
condition of the kidneys wherein we find haematuria, which 
escapes through this deranged secretory apparatus ; also, from 
the excessive burden they have to perform in so' prostrate a 
condition, while their vital support is kept from them. The 
nerve element being mostly missing, induces deficient nutritive 
support ; nor do the functional nerves render their wonted aid. 

A concise statement of phenomenal symptoms in this case 
is wanted in the medical treatises, therefore I offer to supply 
them, leaving them open to criticism. 

Finding half of the direct provisional means of nutrition 
with the vital nerves, which combines with the aliment in the 
circulation, to support the continuity of life in each fibre of 
the organs ; hence, a derangement in the renal vital nerves, 
which renders their supply inadequate to effect standard nutri- 
tion tends to aenemia. If this draft upon the renal vital nervous 
centre was properly honored, the vitality of the organs would 
be at standard, if no impediment existed in the circulating 
blood. Again, if the nervous system was in a state of integrity, 
and the blood at fault, this fluid, being homogeneous, all parts 
of the system mustnecessarily partake of this aenemic condition. 
But as the derangement is one of a local character, we are 
compelled to find the vital nerves of these organs deficient. 
This atrophy is not necessarily dual, for one hemisphere may 
be affected only, while the other may be in a state of integrity. 
When the impurities are not depurated with promptitude, a 
proxy is called to supply the deficit. In such a case resort is 
had to other glands, the dermoid and mucous membranes. If 



126 • A. H. DAVIS* THEORY AND 

the task to render the circulation assimilatable is great, these 
alternate agents will become exhausted, and form thereby the 
various membranous diseases corresponding with the character 
of the element thus depurated. A ruinous acrid element taken 
into the system may induce, primarily, this atrophy of the 
kidneys ; in such case both would be affected. Turpentine, 
juniper, savine and benzoin, when taken by mistake in greater 
than medicinal quantities, would tend to induce a condition of 
these organs tending to waste the albumen of the vital fluid. 
Rasped continuously with sharp granules of renal calculous 
concretions, is one of the causes of the destruction of the 
epithelial membranes of these urinary ducts. The inflammation 
thus induced in these ducts extends to the cortical portion, 
inducing congestion and albuminous effusion into the excretory 
ducts. Add the yellow hue to the skin, and you have evidence 
that the kidneys and liver are turning their glandular secretions 
through their emulgent veins into the circulation. 

When the columnar bundles of ducts in the kidneys are thus 
obstructed with albumen, the urinary secretions overflow and 
are carried into the circulation by the emulgent veins. A dif- 
ference of opinion exists in medical writers, in regard to the 
origin of urea. Some hold it to result from the worn debris of 
the system, and therefore is a constant element in the circula- 
tion. Others hold it to be a glandular secretion, and that it 
finds its way into the circulation, as above stated. When urea 
is turned into the circulation and phosphate or carbonate of 
lime exists therein, it unites therewith and forms lithic gran- 
ules called uric acid, which plays a conspicuous part in the cal- 
cifereous, precipitates in the lungs and other parts of the system. 
Urea being a common element in the renal passages, no pre- 
cipitates are formed with it, except these bases are secreted 
from the blood to be brought in contact with it. Consequently, 
when these basic elements are thus secreted, lithic granules are 
found in the pyramidal ducts to wound their epithelial mem- 
branes in their passage into the pelvis of the kidneys, and in- 
duce pyelitis or inflammation of the pelvis of the kidneys, anc. 
nephritic colic, when they obstruct the ureters in their passage 
into the bladder. When a nucleus is formed in the bladder too 
large to be voided, it augments into what is called a stone in 
the bladder. Were it the case that urea was a constant ele- 
ment in the circulation, disastrous results would follow the in- 
troduction of these basic elements into the system which would 
not be dissimilar to those obtained in the renal passages. Most 
of the kidney diseases of long standing are prevented from re- 
cuperating by a continued repetition of the cause that is refer- 
able to a calciferous element in the circulation that is imbibed 
in lime water. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 12; 



ACUTE CYSTITIS, 

OR INFLAMMATION OF THE URINARY BLADDER. 

This disease may be known by pain in the urethra, and an 
uncomfortable sensation in the bladder upon slight distension, 
causing a desire to urinate at very short intervals, with scant 
passages of urine, and a painful sensation is experienced, for a 
few minutes after each passage. 

The immediate cause is inflammation of the mucous mem- 
brane of the organ. The approximate cause is a lithic habit of 
the kidneys, wherein fine lithic sediment and acrid urine irri- 
tate this membrane. The remote cause is a habitual use of 
acids, such as vinegar and strong acidulous fruits, and the use 
of hard, limy water. The acute stage either terminates by res- 
olution, or it degenerates into ulceration of the mucous mem- 
brane of the urinary bladder, and becomes chronic. 

TREATMENT. 

5 Ex. Dandelion grs. 30, Nitrate of Potassa grs. 35, T. Opii 
gtt.35, Veratrum Globules (Homoeopathic) 15, Gelatine 3 i. 
Dissolve all in warm water 5 iii, dose 3 ij> give such a dose 
every 1^ hours until the inflammation subsides. Apply T. of 
Capsicum to the spine from the ribs to lower part once per day. 

CHRONIC CYSTITIS. 

This form of this disease results from the acute form, by reas- 
on of the perpetuation of the cause to prevent the recuperative 
efforts in the acute stage. The symptoms are similar to the 
acute form, only of less intensity, except in case of granulation 
of the membrane, wherein we find puriform passages in ad- 
dition to the symptoms present in the acute form. The dispo- 
sition of this membrane of the bladder to thicken is due to the 
elasticity of the organ. When this organ is empty, and in a 
complete state of contraction, it is very thick. When it becomes 
inflamed, it assumes this contracted state, by reason of its sen- 
sitiveness to expansion. The danger lies in the recuperative 
process being deferred until it granulates or forms a great num- 
ber of little fistulous abscesses. When it degenerates into this 
state of ulceration, it renders the urine turbid and difficult to 
pass. Then the case becomes more severe, requiring the use 
of the catheter and sometimes the exhausting pump, to draw off 
the water. 



128 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 



TREATMENT. 

B Solid extract Dandelion grs. 40, Solid extract Hyoscyamus 
grs. 25, Solid extract Licorice grs. 120, Fluid extract Queen of 
the Meadow 3 1. Dissolve the extracts in two ounces of warm 
decoction of hops, when cool mix and add Nitrate of Potassa 
30 grains and sugar syrup one ounce, Give one teaspoonful every 
three hours. 

When the water contains pus, use a decoction of Marsh Rose- 
mary root pulverized 3 2, boil it fifteen minutes and make 
when strained off § 2. Use one 3 at first, and send it blood 
warm with a p p syringe into the bladder, and increase the ene- 
mas of it to three drachms. The strength of this decoction for 
the enema may be increased to twice the above strength with 
safety and benefit. Use this enema once per day until the pa- 
tient recovers, or in case of severe granulation of the mem- 
branes, use an enema per urethra of a solution of Nitrate of 
Silver grs. 4, soft water § 1, use per each enema 3 iss. Use such 
an enema every second day, alternating it each day with the 
decoction of Marsh Rosemary. 

The bowels should be kept carefully open by the use of one- 
fourth grain Podophyllin sugar-coated pill taken at bed time, 
also at bedtime take three grains of Diaphoretic powder. Take 
such a dose often enough to keep the bowels from constipation. 
Apply the spinal liniment on the loins and sacrum once per 
day, and exclude from diet everything sour. 

STRANGURY. 

This is a complication of cystitis that prevents the discharge 
of the urine by preventing the usual effort. This stricture of 
the sphincter muscle of the urinary bladder retains the urine 
until its distension jeopardizes a fatal rupture of the organ. The 
severe pain this distension induces in this organ while in a 
state of inflammation frequently induces severe spasms of the 
most distressing character. The participation of the muscles 
in this pain becomes titanic, and an attempt to force a catheter 
past this strictured sphincter into the bladder, before the pain 
is subdued on which the stricture depends, must lacerate the 
membranes to accomplish it. The danger of rupturing the 
blood vessels in this forced effort is so great that no intelligent 
physician would hazard such an effort when he found this re- 
sistance to the passage of the catheter. This violence is not 
required, if the pain is subdued to relieve the stricture of this 
muscle before making a further attempt to pass the catheter. 
After this relief the catheter can be passed with the greatest ease. 
To secure the relaxation of this spasmodic stricture, give 
ex. hyoscyamus grs. 4. If this does not give the desired relief 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. I2Q 

in two hours, repeat the dose : also, at the same time, wring a 
towel out of hot water and lay over the part as hot as the 
patient can bear, changing them once in four or five minutes 
for a half hour. This must be treated more carefully than 
simple cystitis, by reason of the undue sensitiveness of these 
motor nerves involved, by sympathy to induce the stricture. 
To guard against a return of this dangerous symptom, the 
fol 1 owing prescription is advisable : P? Hyos. ex. grs. xxx ; 
ex. dandelion, grs. xxx ; fluid ex. burdock §j ; nitrate of 
potassa , grs. 40 ; tine, wintergreen, 3j ; tine. sang, can., 3ij ; 
dissolve the extracts in hot water, |i ; when cool add all and 
simp. syr. §ij. Dose, 3j ', give a dose every two hours for the 
first day, then in three hours. Also, use salicin grs. xx ; fluid 
ex. of rhubarb, ?ss ; water, §ij ; tine, wintergreen, 3j. Dissolve 
the salicin in the water first, then add all, and it will be ready 
for use. Dose, one teaspoonful in four of sweetened water. 
Take such a dose every three hours during the day-time. Use 
this treatment until the patient passes water freely without the 
use of the catheter. Then, as the case is one of chronic cys- 
titis, it should be cared for under that head. Avoid taking 
cold, use soft water, and reject everything sour from your 
food and drink. 



MEMBRANES. 

THEIR FUNCTIONS AND DERANGEMENTS. 

The internal cardiac membranes, like those of the arteries, 
secrete a serous fluid for lubrication, and to dislodge any 
viscid substance inclined to adhere. 

The serous membranes of the cavities, in a normal state, 
exhale the quantity of serum needed for lubrication, which is 
as constantly being taken up by the absorbents to prevent a 
dropsical accumulation. The quantity of this fluid needed is 
preserved by an equal balance of action maintained between 
the exhalents and the absorbents. 

When the serous membranes are laboring under a state of 
congestion, they effuse an abnormal fluid containing phosphate 
of lime: a fluid that the absorbents can not command to re- 
move; consequently it induces adhesion of the surfaces of the 
membranes in contact. 

Congestion of serous membranes is mostly due to concre- 
tions that lie at the precise entrance of the nerve through the 



130 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

inter-vertebral foramen, which interferes more or less with 
electric circulation. Altogether, I find the gravest cause of 
this paralysis due to deficient glandular depuration, inducing 
thereby phosphatic granulations of the membranes of the ver- 
tebral foramina. 

Depending upon the secretory vessels of the membranous 
system for disposing of the impurities in the circulation 
during time of glandular incapacity, is one of the systemic 
alternatives to preserve life. In forcing this work upon these 
membranes is like putting great tasks upon feeble workmen. 
At this juncture, thickening of membranes and cartilaginous 
granulation obtains. This abnormal condition being referable 
to glandular obstruction, this feeble aid has to be depended 
upon while the biliary and renal organs are removing their 
concretions by the breaking down process. Success in this 
effort will depend upon the vis medicatrix naturae to carry it 
safely through. 

NERVE FUNCTIONS. 

The nervous system holds the balances of the life-giving 
power, which is dispensed in force to suit the demands for 
recuperation in all its delinquent parts. In the work of con- 
structing the nervous fibrillae, the purer the elements fur- 
nished, the finer and nearer perfection will be these gossamer 
fibres; and in their degree of perfection will depend their 
genius for rendering perfect work in the temple of life. Life 
depends upon the ruling nervous supply of neurine to com- 
pose its structure. 

An obstructed nerve disappoints the part of an element to 
combine with the arterial blood, congestion follows, and its 
pain calls for a rally of nervous force to resuscitate the delin- 
quentnerve, or effusion must follow. 

The fibrous portion of the dermoid tissue is made up of two 
systems of nerves, and becomes a garment composed of nerves 
and circulatory vessels. 

DERMOID DEPURATION. 

During the capillary arterial congestion from a congestive 
chill, the most fluid portion of the serum and the impurities 
therein contained detrimental to assimilation, escape through 
the distended walls into the cellular tissue of the dermoid 
membrane, to be finally disposed of during the colliquative 
perspiration. The three stages that constitute an exacerba- 
tion of an intermittent fever have a direct course given to 
pursue, in this work of relieving the circulation of unassimila- 
tive elements. The fever has a small part of the work assigned 
to it, in the extra nervous rally, to chemically dispose of the 
residuum left in the circulation. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 131 

ANASARCAL DROPSY. 

In the dermoid tissue, we find the secretory vessels to be 
under the control of the functional nerves for freeing obnox- 
ious elements from the circulation. 

In case of dropsical accumulations, the fault must be refera- 
ble to the inefficacy of the functional nervous support of the 
absorbents to secrete the fluid as fast as it is produced, which 
admits of an accumulation in quantity. 

In a case of anasarcal dropsy, the question arises, "Why do 
not absorbents remove the fluid from the cellular tissue suffi- 
ciently rapid to prevent this dropsical accumulation ?" 

Between the functional nerves of the dermoid subcutaneous 
exhalents and those of the lymphatic absorbents, most proba- 
bly the solution of the question may be found — excessive ex- 
halation upon one hand and injured absorbents by the pres- 
ence of an acrid fluid to paralyze the absorbents on the other 
hand, is my solution of this question. 



HEPATITIS, 

OR, INFLAMMATION OF THE LIVER. 

There are two forms of this disease, the acute and the 
chronic. 

The acute form may be known by the following diagnostic 
symptoms, viz : Pain in that portion of the liver where the 
inflammation is located, which, in the majority of cases, is in 
the right side, affecting the coronary portion of the right lobe. 
The liver is enlarged by congestion, causing a short, painful 
and hurried respiration. Each inspiration is terminated so 
abruptly as to give an explosive or grunting sound: — pulse 
quick, frequent and full, and a correspondingly high fever ob- 
tains. These febrile symptoms are preceded by rigors and 
retching to vomit, that appears to be quite obstinate. The urine 
is scant and high-colored. 

The indications of cure are, to relieve the obstructions; to 
relieve the spinal congestion that obstructs the vital hepatic 
nerves; to stimulate the renal organs to perform their offices 
promptly; to support the general nervous system, and mod- 
erate the febrile symptoms. 



132 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

Begin the treatment by giving an infusion of hops, q. s., 
a short time after which give a lobelia emetic. Or proceed as 
follows : Nitrate of potassa grs. 15, water J iv. Give 3 iv. 
every half-hour until it is all taken. Also give diaphoretic 
powders, grs. 3, every three hours until the fever subsides. 
After taking solution two hours, give three half-gr. sugar-coated 
podophyllin pills. After the liver is well cleaned, give a solu- 
tion of salicin, 10 grs. in water, § iv. Dose, one tablespoonful 
every two hours. Repeat the dose of pills if the liver does 
not open in fourteen hours. Follow the use of the salicin 
tonic until the patient feels quite well. The author has never 
known this course of treatment to fail in giving prompt relief. 

CHRONIC HEPATITIS 

May supervene from the acute, or it may arise from a spinal 
derangement that, by its congestion, interferes with the insola- 
tion of the vital nerves of the liver, reducing their ability to 
assimilate the arterial blood as rapidly as it is sent to it, there- 
by keeping it in a partially congested or tumid state. 

Again, it may be and is frequently induced by the failure of 
the renal organs to properly depurate the circulation. The 
circulation being thus overcharged with impurities, which 
obstruct the biliary ducts with those sedimentary secretions 
that, if long retained, will result in the formation of hundreds 
of minute biliary concretions of the size of onion seeds. 
The author evacuated and preserved over five hundred of 
these calculi from the liver of a great sufferer from asthma for 
many years ; and after expending a great sum to no avail in 
going the rounds in America and Europe,, to find relief ; after 
which the case was referred to the author for a thorough ex- 
amination. These calculi were readily diagonised, and by treat- 
ment they were safely removed, after which recovery w'as rapid. 

The instances of these biliary obstructions from calculi are 
more frequent than has been discovered by physicians. To 
test the diagnosis, the excrement was washed, and two ounces of 
these concretions were saved. 

Albuminous and glutinous concretions are the elements that 
most frequently obstruct these ducts. This often induces feb- 
rile exacerbation of the type of remittens simplex, that wastes 
the system rapidly, and gives to the patient a very sallow ap- 
pearance. 

The treatment will necessarily be a gradual course to reclaim 
the activity of all the delinquent organs on which this derange- 
ment depends. 

The renal organs and liver should be stimulated to a uni- 
form state of competency. A course should be pursued to 
create more spinal energy and greater muscular power, for the 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 1 33 

organs depend upon the systemic power for all of their func- 
tional ability; and consequently, by increasing systemic power, 
these organs respond to its energy. Man was designed for an 
artistic being. The range of the mechanical arts, requiring 
different degrees of muscular power, consequently God laid in 
the background muscular capacities for all, suited to meet the 
demands of each one's chosen occupation. Consequently, 
nothing can contribute so much to health as prudential mus- 
cular industry; while, on the other hand, nothing contributes 
more to enervate the system than idleness and inactivity. By 
inactivity the fluids of the system become stagnant, swampy 
and sour, losing its chemical ability to recuperate the systemic 
powers; then it passes rapidly into decline. Consequently, for 
persons to enjoy good health, they must claim their muscles as 
promptly as they would their baggage at a railroad station. 

The following will make a good prescription for chronic in- 
flammation of the liver : 

I£ T. Sangcan, 3 iv., f. ex. Wahoo, § i., ex. Leon Tarax, gr. 
20, T. Xanthox, 3 iij., Jamaica Ginger, 3 ss., made in decoc- 
tion, 3 iv., and add s. syrup to make 5 iv- Dose, 3 j. five 
times per day, or enough to secure one passage of the bowels 
per day. If the bowels become very much obstructed at such 
times, give podophyllin, gr. j. at bedtime, preceded by nitrate 
of potassa, in solution grs. 15, aqua q. s. Apply the spinal lin- 
iment once per day for one week; then apply the spinal plaster, 
and let it be on as long as it adheres well. 

For a number of times podophyllin will have to be taken be- 
fore the prescription will control the liver and bowels without 
its repetition. 

Judgment is required in fixing the dose that shall be re- 
quired by the temperament and constitution of the patient. 

If the Wahoo shall be too driving for a weakly female, sub- 
stitute for the Wahoo, S. Niter, 3 ij-> Veratrum Globules, 80, 
dissolved in the syrup, and give the podophyllin in gr. ss., 
mixed with Diaphoretic powder, gr. ij. for a dose, when needed 
to keep the liver and bowels open. 

A dose of podophyllin once per week of two one-half grain 
sugar-coated pills will be a judicious way of keeping up the 
activity of the liver, preceded always by the use of a solution 
of Nitrate of Potassa, 10 to 15 grains, in half-tumbler full of 
cold water, to be taken in divided doses during the afternoon 
preceding the use of the liver pills at bedtime. 



134 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

NEURALGIA. 

Neuralgia is defined by Webster to be " an idiopathic pain 
of a nerve of sensation not occasioned by any other disease." 

The general health is protected by the nerves of sensation. 
They furnish an alarm for every affected fibre . in due time to 
save them from further injury. Were their language properly 
interpreted, and the abnormal conditions faithfully cared for, a 
higher standard of health would be maintained. 

When the electric circuit of a nerve is continuous, no sensa- 
tion is realized ; it is health. Crude electric elements have 
their molecules transformed in the different ganglia into all the 
various molecular formulas needed to compose all the dissim- 
ilar parts of the system. All the delicate atoms are thus 
inspired to fill the offices assigned to them in the living temple. 

Taking in all the broad range of elements, generally intro- 
duced into the system, it is under the necessity of selecting 
the congenial and disposing of the detrimental as best it can. 
The intemperate habits of a degenerate race must increase the 
systemic disability to do this work of culling and transforming 
for the systemic needs. 

One of the causes of neuralgia is brought on by inactivity 
in the sitting posture for a long time, by exposure to cold 
currents of air, by keeping the form clothed in fabrics too 
compact for the escape of the gases exhaling from the system. 
Hardened faeces in the bowels are usually the cause of neu- 
ralgia in the head. Pain in the bowels is caused by distension 
from over-eating and gas ; but these last are of but short 
duration. 

Broken insulation of a nerve is the cause of pain in the 
various parts of the external skin, that induces inflammation 
and abscess. Cuticular diseases are but formal introductions 
to the elementary causes for bringing out the hidden mysteries 
of other abstruse diseases. 

The antrum Highmorianum, being a large cavity in the cheek 
bone, the nerves of its interior periosteum are often painful. 
So likewise are those of the superciliary cavities. 

Lost continuity in a nervous current leaves a breach that 
requires juxtaposition to renew the circuit. To this end the 
supurative process is resorted to by the system. Half of the 
above cases are proven to be derived from severe colds, and 
belong to coryzeal blennorrhea, and many of the remainder are 
referable to mechanical disturbances rather than to any lesions. 

The indications of cure are to engage in moderate exercise, 
to keep the bowels gently open, to vitalize the system with 
gentle tonics. Cheerful company will be exhilarating, and 
gentle sleep refreshing. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 135 



TREATMENT. 



1$ Wahoo bark of the root, |iij ; Holland gin, |iv ; boil and 
strain off rviij ; mix. Dose, one tablespoonful, or 3ij four 
times per day. Use veratrum globules xv when the pain is 
most acute, once per day ; or, if after three hours the pain 
does not abate, repeat one more dose. 

Also, when the antrum or the frontal sinuses are affected 
and painful, inhale the gas from the oil of peppermint. Use 
hyoscyamus and colocynth pills. I£. Hyos. ex.,grs. x; colo- 
cynth, grs. 50. Make ten pills. Take one every ten hours 
until the bowels are cleared. Then use one often enough to 
prevent constipation. 

When the pain is very severe, take two grains of ex. of 
hyoscyamus every three hours until it subsides, after which a 
dose may be repeated only often enough to prevent its 
occurrence. 

Use for a diuretic, as a steady drink : I£. Crowd a teacup 
full of the petals of hops, fill the cup with boiling water, set it 
aside, and drink it in divided doses during the day. When the 
pain is internal and severe, foment the part, by applying to the 
part over the pain a towel wrung out of hot water as hot as 
can be borne, changing them every few minutes until the pain 
is relieved, or for fifteen or twenty minutes. If the case proves 
to be rather obstinate to the above treatment, give nitrate of 
potassa grs. 15, in solution of cold water j£ pint. Dose, one 
tablespoonful overy j4 hour until it is all taken, and begin its 
use early enough to have it all taken before bed-time. Then 
take at bed-time two j4 -grain sugar-coated podophyllin pills. 
After they open the liver the congestion which causes the pain 
will subside ; then the symptoms will yield more readily to the 
use of the hyoscyamus or other anodynes. After opening the 
liver, give 4 grains of salicin four times per day, in water y 2 oz. 



IRRITABLE THROAT. 



This is quite a common derangement, that usually arises 
from a weakness of the membranes, that has been induced by 
aperies of colds, each of which induced more or less conges- 
tion of this glosso-pharyngeal nervous centre, that sends out 
the vital nerves that preside over the work of assimilation in 



I36 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

the membranes of the throat, or fauces. More than two-fifths 
of the brain derangements are caused by this congestion of the 
membranes of the fauces, that endangers the stricture of the 
recurrent nerves that pass from the superior cervical ganglia 
up through the carotid canal, to vitalize the membranes of the 
brane. 

The damage incurred by this cause to the brain has contrib- 
uted more to fill the lunatic asylums than that which has 
proceeded from mental perplexities. 

When these nerves become partially obstructed, a corres- 
ponding low vitality of assimilation obtains in the organs of 
the brain, that leaves them in a state of congestion that renders 
the person irritable, peevish, fretful, and often so jealous of 
his best friends that it becomes very difficult to please him. 
Many insane cases of this kind can be rendered sane by treat- 
ment that will effectually cure this tendency to throat 
congestion. The danger of brain irritability from sore throat 
demands that prompt attention be given to this throat inflam- 
mation whenever it occurs. 

Why this chronic sore throat is not necessarily more acute 
is, that the paralysis on which it depends is not continuous. 
When the febrile symptoms remit, the congestion subsides, and 
the stricture is relieved until the next exacerbation of the fever 
arises. This mechanical stricture of these recurrent cerebral 
vital nerves is therefore one of very common occurrence, and 
is the one most disastrous to the mental organs. 

Chronic sore throats, when they do not induce decided 
insanity, they never fail to induce an irritable temper that is 
very trying to friends. It also causes great instability of mind 
in business. 

To effect a cure of this chronic derangement is not the work 
of a day ; it involves too many consecutive causes that have to 
be looked after effectually before this can be permanently 
reached. It therefore can only be secured by successfully 
treating the tangible causes that lie in this portion of the spine 
and glandular system. Public speakers should give the vocal 
organs a long time of rest while these ends are being accom- 
plished. 

Treatment will necessarily have to be continued for a great 
length of time before this debilitated state of the membranes 
can be overcome sufficient to be secure against congestion 
from slight causes that stricture the roots of the inferior branch 
of the trigeminus, or fifth pair of nerves, that have to preside 
over the membranes of the throat and lingual organs. 

The glandular obstructions that date back of this spinal 
derangement will require a great length of time before they can 
be made to properly depurate the impurities from the circula- 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. I37 

tion adequate to furnish aliment sufficiently pure to nourish 
these acutely organized nervous centres. 

The symptoms of this disease are a dry throat, that tends to 
be sensitive to swallowing towards evening, a husky voice, 
especially after talking briskly. A dull, heavy pain is felt in 
the back brain, that is augmented by close mental application 
to deep subjects. The neck becomes easily paralyzed, so as to 
feel stiffened and lame upon moving the head. The bowels 
become constipated, and the food does not digest well ; and 
severe paralysis is endangered in the back brain, neck and 
upper part of the chest, by sleeping too deeply and too long. 
When pain is experienced in the back brain, it is followed by a 
husky voice that proceeds from more congestion in these 
membranes. Treatment: ^t. sang, can., 3iij ; f. ex. wahoo, 
f. 3J ; wintergreen, t., 3iij ; seneca snake root, 3iv ; add s. 
syrup to make 3HJ. Dose, 3ss. four times per day. When the 
head begins to become painful, take hyos. ex., gr. j. every two 
hours until it subsides. Also, at the same time, give colocynth 
gr. v. every eight hours until it operates to clear the bowels, 
as a cathartic. 

If the patient shall also be dyspeptic, the dyspeptic treatment 
should be resorted to. 

To take a dose of the pulmonary balsam every time the 
throat became dry, or voice husky, will give present relief to 
speakers, and tend to relieve the local congestion. But to 
relieve the perpetuating cause, the kidneys and liver must be 
kept gently open. 



THE DUODENUM, 



As its name imports, is twelve fingers' breadth in length. It 
begins at the pyloric orifice, and is continuous with the jeju- 
num. The duodenum receives the bile and pancreatic juice in 
a mixed state. 

Were it not for some guardian solvent to keep the circula- 
ting elements in a fluid state, the vessels would become ob- 
structed; therefore, in looking for this solvent, we find the bile 
and pancreatic juice being secreted by the two largest glands 
in the system, and being mixed together before they enter the 
duodenum ; and these secretions being delivered at an ostensi- 
ble point where they can mix with every particle of chyle that 



138 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

traverses every vessel in. the system, to combine with albumin- 
ous and gelatinous concretions to resolve them into a fluid 
state. Some physiologists hold the peristaltic motion of the 
bowels, claims one or both of these agents to preside over it. 

If these two secretions have not separate offices assigned to 
them, they would not have need of separate organs to produce 
them. The only object for the union of the excretory ducts of 
these two glands before entering the duodenum appears to be 
the use of the gall bladder, in common as a reservoir in times 
when the duodenum passage becomes obstructed. In cases of 
yellow jaundice, this reservoir and the biliary ducts become 
filled, after which the bile is compelled to overflow into the 
venous circulation. 

The peristaltic motion of the bowels is perfectly dependent 
upon a stimulant to carry forward the chyle and compress the 
villi. (See peristaltic motion.) 

Separate offices are evidently assigned to the secretions of 
these two organs, for when either one is suppressed by disease 
or augmented by medicaments their separate offices are then 
manifest by the abnormal condition induced. 

The functional nerves of the duodenal mucous membranes 
have more offices to subserve than merely to receive these se- 
cretions and the chyme and mix them for the chyle. They are en- 
dowed with the fine sensibility for comprehending the chemi- 
cal quality of these biliary and pancreatic secretions, so that 
when they become dangerously depraved in quality, by impur- 
ities secreted from the circulation, this membrane becomes ex- 
cited thereby, and closes these ducts against its farther trans- 
mission to mix with the chyle, for the time being, as a safe- 
guard to the farther injuries 'the system might sustain from it. 

It also has to determine the quality of the aliment sent to it. 
It therefore ejects by enemas whatsoever it judges to be injur- 
ious to be sent into the circulation. But when the pylorus and 
duodenum have had their fine sensibilities violated and ren- 
dered obtuse by the intemperate use of poisonous beverages, 
they lose their ability to guard as well the health of the person 
and keep the chyle as pure as these guardian genii were or- 
dained to in their pristine temperate state. 

Where this is the case, chyme that has undergone vinous fer- 
mentation in the stomach, is allowed to be passed into the cir- 
culation to damage the brain and great nervous centers on 
which the organs depend for vitality and functional power. 
The instinctive laws that protect the animal from the use of 
improper articles of food, protect man. Offensive odor, dis- 
gusting taste, nausea and vomiting ensue when certain improper 
elements have been taken. An unintentional error in diet is 
corrected by emesis when these organs are in a state of.integrity. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. I39 

The oftener this fine duodenal sense is violated, the more in- 
competent it will become to comprehend the qualities of the 
obnoxious elements that may be sent to it. The way to save 
this duodenal faculty from incompetency, is to heed the ad- 
monitions of the olfactory and gustatory senses. These pre- 
monitory senses have not been so carefully instituted and loca- 
ted by Divine wisdom without their indispensable importance. 
By them ten thousands of dangers are warded off to save the 
physical temple from premature dissolution. 

Every case of the overflow of bile into the circulation is not 
induced by an obstruction of the choleduct passage into the 
duodenum. Concretions formed in the capillary ducts will 
turn the bile into the circulation. We are enabled to distin- 
guish between the two cases. The latter always has its symp- 
tomatic pain deep seated in the left hypochondriac region, be- 
tween the lobes of the liver. The fibrous membranes being con- 
gested by the same cause, induce this pain. 



THE PYLORUS. 



The pylorus is a guardian organ placed between the stomach 
and duodenum, in order to prevent any substance from passing 
from the former until it is prepared to be acted upon by the 
latter ; and so faithfully does this guardian perform this office, 
that it will retain in the stomach all the aliment until it is duly 
chymified, but readily allows the chyme to pass into the duo- 
denum as fast as it becomes thus duly prepared for the process 
of chylification in the duodenum and its circulating vessels. 
But, on the other hand, when food is taken into the stomach in 
so crude or unmasticated a state as to undergo a fermentation 
before it can be reduced to chyme, it will eject it to save the 
system from the damage that might occur from it. 

As soon as the pylorus begins to deal out the prepared chyme 
to the duodenum, a similar process to that of the pylorus takes 
place in the biliary and duodenal passage, of dealing out small 
quantities of bile and pancreatic juice in a mixed state to mix 
with the chyme and prepare it into chyle for circulation, which 
is carried forward as rapidly as it is received. 



140 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

THE MUCOUS MEMBRANE OF THE INTESTINAL 

CANAL. 

On the surface of the mucous membranes of the small intes- 
tines are found a great number of papillary projections spring- 
ing from the dermis of these membranes. In the small intes- 
tines they are so elongated and prominent as to resemble the 
pile on a piece of velvet, and have been called villi. The lac- 
teals or capillary chyle ducts arise in these villi. The spongy 
texture of these villi, by their capillary attraction, absorb the 
chyle, and by their great elasticity the chyle is forced into their 
ducts, by the pressure of the contraction of the peristaltic wave 
as it passes over them in the work of carrying the chyle for- 
ward. 

The chyle is then impelled forward by the diastolic force of 
the right ventricle of the heart, precisely after the mode of that 
which pertains to the venous circulation. 

The mesentery is expressly organized for, and admirably 
constructed in form with its immense convoluted capillary sur- 
face, to gather up the chyle ; and its radii of ducts conveying to 
its center by the union with larger ones, that empty the chyle 
into the thoracic duct, completes the arrangement. 



DUODENITIS. 



The duodenum is subject to become inflamed by impurities 
secreted from the circulation, and by poisonous articles taken 
into the stomach. It has to do the work of ejecting every 
poisonous substance sent to it, to prevent them from being car- 
ried into the circulation. Pungent matter is frequently sent 
into it from the liver, by which its mucous membranes become 
congested, inflamed, and its functional nerves paralyzed. The 
peristaltic motion becomes suspended thereby. The chyme then 
is not forwarded before it undergoes a kind of vinous fermen- 
tation very damaging to the system. 

Inconsiderate persons often bring on an inflammation of 
this organ by gormandizing, or by crowding down their food 
in a half-masticated state. It will then require less time with 
the invalid for it to acidify than to break it down into chyme. 
This is the most frequent cause of duodenal inflammation. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. I4I 

Such indifference to health appears surprising to physicians 
and persons familiar with the laws of health; for tormenting 
sick headache and neuralgia follow close in the wake of this 
sour chyle, when it is carried into the circulation. It irritates 
and more or less inflames all the vessels through which it 
passes. Many of the organic diseases are referable to this pri- 
mary cause, such as chronic inflammation of the kidneys and 
great spinal nervous centers, on which the functional power of 
the organs depend. Then follows that torpor of the vital or- 
gans that causes general debility. When the systemic powers 
have been thus supplanted, the sum of these derangements is 
called Dyspepsia. General debility in this case, centers its 
cause in this loss of chyle, and the mischief it does in this acid- 
ified state to the fine structure of the system. 

Persons in robust health can not realize the importance of 
being so careful of how and what they eat; but the sufferer will 
readily comprehend their importance. 

The poison secreted by the liver from the circulation, with 
the bile, inflames the mucous membranes of the duodenum 
more frequently than has hitherto been supposed. When this 
is the case, the congestion of the duodenal membranes closes 
the biliary passage into the duodenum. This induces Yellow 
Jaundice, when the liver is very active. A long continuation of 
this obstruction tends to culminate in Ascites, or abdominal 
dropsy, by the encroachment of the distended biliary ducts 
upon the portal circulation. The diseases in which duodenal 
incapacity is a prominent cause, are Renal, Spinal and Liver 
obstruction, constipation of the Bowels, Cystitis, Diabetes and 
Neuralgias. These causes have made more invalids than can 
be charged to hard labor. Intemperance in the use of alco- 
holic beverages is one of the most prolific causes of duodenal 
incapacity. Thousands annually descend to untimely graves 
by reason of its habitual use. The whole moral and intellectual 
man becomes depraved by it, while it is slowly but surely con- 
suming the physical temple. Such depraved minds become 
incompetent guardians of the rising generation under their 
charge, and mental incapacity and pauperism follow in its wake. 

The practice of using acids is a very common source of 
Dyspepsia, by reason of the damage they do to the duodenum. 
Acids, when taken, are subject to ferment the chyme. Then, 
what is not ejected by vomiting, is sent in the form of sour 
chyle into the circulation, to inflame the vessels through which 
it passes, and obstruct nutrition. In dyspeptic cases, about one 
in four have lost their health by the use of sour bread and 
pickles. If these faultily prepared articles of diet can be ob- 
viated, common judgment ought to be good for obviating the 
balance of these infringements upon health. 



142 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

In these injurious beverages and acidulous articles of diet, 
lies the danger of losing the power of perfect digestion, which 
must precede imperfect chylosis. Seasonable financiering, to 
provide wholesome and properly prepared articles of diet, will 
serve to ward off no small share of a dyspeptic's fate. 

The fine sensibility of the mucous membranes of the alimen- 
tary canal to the presence of an acid, in youngerly persons of 
sound health, will impinge and contract the mouths of the cap- 
illary chyliferous ducts to prevent the acidified chyme from 
being taken into the circulation, and by the hurried peristaltic 
motion it induces, it is rapidly carried through the bowels in 
the form of a diarrhoea, which, when intensely urgent, is called 
Cholera Morbus. But when the fine sensibility of these mem- 
branes becomes obtuse by age or constitutional debility, the 
sour chyme will pass into the chyliferous circulation, to the 
damage of the system, as above elucidated. 

TREATMENT FOR CHRONIC DUODENITIS. 

$ S. Niter, 3 iv., or Nitrate of Potassa, grs. 15 ; 
T. Caraway, 3 ij.; Hyoscyamus Ex., gr. xx; Leonte- 
don Tarax, gr. xx; simple syrup, § j. Dissolve the 
extracts in hot water, J ]•> and when cool mix. Dose, 3 j- 
Give four doses per day, one-half hour after each meal, and at 
bedtime. Also give Colocynth, gr. v., once per day in the 
morning. Then, if the bowels do not move by bedtime, take 
another dose, the design being to secure only one movement 
of the bowels per day. 

To treat this duodenal inflammation successfully, it requires 
much care in diet for a great length of time. Judgment is re- 
quired in selecting food slow to acidify, and to prepare it with 
that care necessary to speedy chymification, that it may pass 
the pylorus before it has time to acidify. 

Gentle labor in the open air (that does not much increase 
the rapidity of the circulation,) sufficient to keep up the pow- 
ers of the nervous system, facilitates digestion and a more 
active assimilation. 



INFLAMMATION OF THE PYLORUS. 

The damage that the system sustains by an acute or chronic 
inflammation of this organ, will be apparent when we remem- 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 1 43 

ber that its office is to prevent any food from passing into the 
duodenum in an unchymified state. It also serves to forward 
the perfected chyme sufficiently gradual to allow time for its 
being forwarded by the peristaltic motion, so that when the 
chyme becomes exhausted in the stomach, it has all been car- 
ried into the chyliferous circulation, which thereby gives all of 
the organs of the digestive apparatus time for a recuperative 
rest. When the pylorus is rendered unusually sensitive by 
acute inflammation, it will not allow the chyme to pass, but 
will retain it in the stomach until it degenerates into an acid; 
then, by its pungency, it will irritate the stomach and cause its 
ejection by emesis. 

The chronic debility that follows an acute inflammation of 
this organ, which is called a chronic inflammation, ranks nearer 
with that of partial paralysis than an inflammation. This fac- 
ulty is thereby rendered so obtuse as to disqualify it for pre- 
venting the passage of the aliment in an unchymified state into 
the duodenum. When this is the case, if the food is not thor- 
oughly masticated or taken in a state of chyme, it will tend to 
obstruct the small intestines, and induce a severe determina- 
tion to the brain until it is removed. I will here remark that 
I have not unfrequently found physicians treating patients in 
this case for inflammation of the brain. 

SYMPTOMS. 

When the pylorus is acutely inflamed, a pain will be located 
at or near the lower point of the sternum, and a little to the 
right of it. The chyme sours, and it is ejected by vomiting. 
In such case it contains no bile, except the vomiting be long 
continued. The use of poisonous beverages and over-eating 
is the most common cause of pyloric inflammation. When 
more food is taken than is needed to supply the demand of the 
system, the balance will be retained in the stomach. The 
chyliferous vessels being filled, there will be no further call for 
it to be sent forward. The residuum remains in the stomach 
to acidify and inflame its mucous membranes, which is called 
Gastritis by authors. But as the most mischievous point in 
gastric inflammation lies in the pyloric derangements, I prefer 
to call it pyloric inflammation. 

The indications of cure are : To relieve the irritability of 
the gastric mucous membranes; to support the nervous system, 
and secure a regular action of the glandular system. 

TREATMENT. 

Apply a mustard paste upon the epigastric region, (or at the 
pit of the stomach,) once per day, to induce a nervous rally in 
the vicinity of the inflamed part. In this case of pyloric ob- 



144 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

struction, the therapeutical indications must be fulfilled by the 
use of medicated enemas per ano. The kidneys must be stimu- 
lated by a solution of Nitrate of Potassa, gr. xv. Water, 3 iij.; 
use it tepid all at once ; use such an enema twice in the twenty- 
four hours. To open the liver, add podophyllin three-fourths 
of a grain, cut in alcohol 3ss, to one of the enemas, but not 
oftener than seven days apart. Take into the stomach a 
decoction made of marsh rosemary root 3iij, in decoction fiv. 
Dose, 3j every half-hour for four hours. Then take a dose 
once per hour until the gastric inflammation subsides. To 
support the nervous system under the febrile action, give 
aconite globules, xv, every hour for iv. doses, or until the fever 
begins to abate. To tone up the nervous system under relaxa- 
tion, after the determination to the brain and fever have, 
subsided, give a solution of salicin, gr. x.; nitrate of potassa, 
gr. x.; water, |iij. Dose, 3iv every two hours. Keep up an 
action in the spinal nerves by an application of a stimulating 
liniment once per day. If the patient is restless and wakeful, 
give cholera infantum powders, gr. vj, every two hours until 
sleep is effected. The diseases wherein pyloric inflammation 
becomes the most dangerously obstinate, are scarletina and 
diphtheria. 



ENDO-ENTERITIS, 

OR INFLAMMATION OF THE MUCOUS MEMBRANES OF THE SMALL 
INTESTINES. 

At the pyloric orifice is the beginning of the duodenum, 
which is continuous with the jejunum and ileum, which contin- 
uously compose the small intestines. The mucous membranes 
of the whole intestinal canal officiate in absorbing the chyle. 
The mucous exhalents compose small elevated tubercles called 
the glands of Peyer and Brunner. 

When these membranes become inflamed, these mucous 
exhalents become obstructed. Then the membranes are 
deprived of this lubricating fluid, which causes intense thirst, 
that demands frequent draughts of water to overcome. 

In making up a diagnosis of this case, the excessive thirst, 
obtuseness of pain, the absence of exquisite tenderness to 
pressure, and the hurried peristaltic motion of the bowels, will 
determine it from inflammation of the peritoneal coat. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 145 

Nature has been ever merciful in all the derangements to 
save unnecessary pain. Therefore, in this case, there is not 
much pain induced by the presence of fluids, or by the 
pressure of the peristaltic motion upon them. 

The solvent process is the one pursued in the stomach and 
intestinal canal for preparing the aliment for chyliferous 
absorption. Therefore, caloric and electricity are the qualified 
agents assigned to this work. To make the greatest amount of 
chyle out of the food, every process in digestion should be 
correctly executed. Selecting, preparing and masticating the 
food are under the dicta of the judgment. The balance of 
the process is governed by systemic law. So nature handles 
as best it can what the judgment sends to it. The dangers of 
introducing aliment in a state impossible to be converted into 
chyle are these : If the food is retained in the stomach too 
long, it will undergo fermentation. This acid inflames the 
mucous membranes ; the sour chyle inflames the lungs in its 
transit through them, and when it is carried into the arterial 
circulation it inflames the kidneys and obstructs nutrition, and 
induces capillary obstruction and arterial plethora throughout 
the system. But its mischief is most severely felt in chronically 
debilitated organs, or parts. 

In this recapitulation of the damage the system sustains by 
defective chylosis, the source of the following diseases is ren- 
dered apparent, viz : Simple bilious remittent fever, neuralgia, 
rheumatism, and the first departure of organic disease of the 
lungs and heart. 

This chyliferous apparatus is ::ot designed to fulfil the duties 
of the culinary art, nor to make chyle out of unmasticated 
food. Therefore, if these improper duties are forced upon it, 
it will become diseased under the effort. There is more to be 
gained by observing the laws of instinct, which are provided 
with more than human wisdom to save the person from the 
injuries of an improper diet, than to take the chances of eating 
what these senses condemn. 

The design of turning this article into a gossip about indiges- 
tion is to direct the mind to the many causes of this disease. 
Perfect financial care in this department for securing longevity 
is of the first importance. 

In treating cases of chronic endo-enteritis, if these laws of 
dietetics are not properly observed, it will be in vain to attempt 
to perfect a cure with remedial agents alone. Lost vitality is 
a thing not easily regained ; it will require the aid of every ac- 
cessible means that contributes to sustain it in times of health; 
therefore I have thus directed the mind to these surrounding 
aspects. 

I will give in this place a prescription for the acute form only, 



I46 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

as the treatment for the chronic form will be found under the 
head of chronic southern diarrhoea. 

First, give a good diuretic to depurate the circulation, to 
suspend the perpetuating cause. ^ Xanthoxilum Bark of the 
Root 3 iv, Cinnamon Pulvis 3 j> Tincture Opii m. xxx, Su- 
mach Bark of the Root 3 ij. 

Make a decoction of these barks f § iij, add the tincture of 
Opii. Dose 3j, every half-hour until the diarrhoea begins to abate; 
then begin to lessen the frequency of the doses, or use the fol- 
lowing : 5 Fluid Extract of Xanthoxilum § j, Tincture. Opii 
nk xx, Tincture Peppermint 3 ss, Tincture Camphor mi " x, 
Tannin grs. ij. Mix and add Simple Syrup \ j. Dose f. 3j every 
fifteen, twenty or thirty minutes, according with the urgency of 
the case, until relief is obtained. 



INFLAMMATION OF THE CECUM. 

This organ is located in the right iliac fossa. The inflam- 
mation of the mucous membrane of this organ may be 
determined from that of the peritoneal by the obtuse pain 
under pressure, and the frequency of the passages of the 
bowels ; whereas, in peritonitis it is tumid and exceedingly 
painful under pressure, and the bowels are unusually 
constipated. 

The danger in the case lies in the suppuration of the ilio-csecal 
valves, that are designed to prevent the return of the faecal 
matter into the ileum. It is also subject to gangrenous perfo- 
ration of the bowels. 

Sibella formed in the ileum so large and hard as to over- 
distend this passage, is one cause of this inflammation ; another 
is metalic substances accumulatingin the appendix vermiformis; 
but the most usual cause is the accumulation of concrete faecal 
matter in the organ. The diarrhoea therefore present in the 
case, is but augmented secretions designed to solve and dis- 
lodge these offending substances. If they are not soon 
dislodged, these secretions soon make a dangerous draft upon 
the serum of the blood, as is the case in Asiatic cholera and 
cholera morbus. The indications of cure are to quiet the 
irritability of the nervous system, and to arrest the diarrhoea ; 
and if the case shows undue obstinacy, suspicion may be 
entertained of foreign substances being in the appendix vermi- 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 147 

formis. In this case it will be well to invert the patient for a 
few moments in an attempt to dislodge them by their gravity. 
When hardened faeces are suspected as being the cause, they 
may be dislodged by the use of refined olive oil 3iv, every four 
hours for three doses. When the obstructions are removed, to 
check the diarrhoea, give the following : r> Xanthox. t., 3iij ; 
nitrate of potassa, gr. xx ; salicin, gr. x ; t. opii, m. xx ; t. tolu 
m. xv ; .t. carraway, 3j- Dissolve the salicin and nitrate of 
potassa in water 3V, mix. Dose, 3j, in two of water ; give 
such a dose every two, three, or four hours, as the emergency 
of the case seems to indicate. If the case proves obstinate, 
give oxide of bismuth gr. x, once in four hours for two or three 
hours. 



DYSENTERY, 

OR, INFLAMMATION OF THE MUCOUS MEMBRANES OF THE COLON 
AND RECTUM. 

This disease may be readily known by the frequent painful 
and small passages of bloody mucus. 

When this disease occurs epidemically, it must necessarily 
be derived from a cause foreign to that which may be chargeable 
to the use of any ordinary food taken. Yet unripe, acidulous 
fruits no doubt are pernicious agents in hastening or augment- 
ing the morbid condition affecting persons in times of this 
epidemic. Persons of delicate health, and those who greatly 
violate the laws of health, are the first to fall a prey to all 
malarious diseases. 

This epidemical cause is derived from some local miasma 
that affects the atmosphere in certain districts, the inhalation 
of which deranges the nervous system and induces partial 
paralysis of the vital nerves of these membranes, and conges- 
tion and inflammation results. 

The acridity of the secretions in the inflamed colon inflame 
the rectum, and bring on the painful tenesmus, which causes 
the disposition to strain to free the rectum of these poisonous 
secretions that are irritating it. The congestion of the rectum 
is augmented by this straining to the extent of sanguineous 
effusion. 

Dysentery is very seldom a disease of the rectum alone ; it 
is usually consecutive upon this colonic inflammation, and not 



148 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

unfrequently involves the ileum. When the inflammation 
extends up the ileum, it may be known by the small, compact 
circular wads of mucus that become streaked with blood 
while passing through the rectum. 

The danger in the case lies in the straining, that carries the 
congestion to that paralyzed state of the mucous membranes 
of the rectum, that results in their gangrenous sloughing to 
carry off the patient Consequently, it is of the first import- 
ance in the treatment of this disease to arrest the tenesmus 
and the straining as early as possible, to prevent the congestion 
from being carried to this dangerous extent. The indications 
of cure are : to rally the vital nervous action to the inflamed 
parts, to terminate the mucous colonic blennorrhcea that keeps 
up the diarrhoea and tenesmal inflammation in the rectum, and 
to prevent the tenesmal tormina and straining ; also, to ensure 
the purity of the circulation by increasing the action of the 
depurative organs 

Treatment. To effect the nervous rally to the inflamed parts, 
apply a large mustard paste over the whole abdomen. To 
relieve the diarrhoea, give the cholera infantum powders gr. vj, 
every two hours until it begins to subside ; then the time may 
be extended between the doses, yet they should be given often 
enough to control this symptom. To allay the excitement and 
congestion in the rectum, give an enema per ano. I£ t. opii. 
m. x; marsh rosemary, strong decoc, f3ij ; and in one hour 
and a quarter give : I£ t. Xanthox, m. xv ; t. opii., m. x ; t. 
capsicum, m. x ; olive oil, 3ss ; thin sol. of starch, 3ij ; mix. 
Make one enema, and repeat it as often as the tenesmus 
returns. Also, r^ Hyos. ex., gr. x; leontedon tarax ex., gr. x; 
nitrate of potassa, gr. xv ; s. syrup, ?ss ; t. podophyllin, m. xx. 
Dissolve the extracts in water f"3J,and mix all together. Dose, 
f3v. Repeat the dose every two hours until the patient is 
convalescent. 

The enemas should be administered very gently. Great 
care should be used in inserting the tube of the syringe into 
the inflamed rectum. The tube should be small and two inches 
long. The patient should dispense with drinking fluids as 
much as possible, and by all means abstain from .the use of 
acidulous drinks. 

Toast water makes a very good drink in this case. The 
patient should keep a recumbent position until the tenesmus 
subsides, and keep quiet for some time. The diet should be 
soda cracker toast, or something easily chymified. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. I49 

HEMORRHOIDS, OR PILES. 

Hemorrhoids are divided into internal and external, accord- 
ing to their situation, either above the sphincter muscle, and 
in the inferior part of the rectum, or below the sphincter, near 
the verge of the anus, under the delicately thin integuments by 
which this part is covered. But as the internal pile may 
protrude below the external sphincter, the best criterion is its 
texture, for it is always covered by the mucous membrane of 
the bowels ; while an external pile is invested by the delicate 
skin near the anus. Those internal ones, which resemble 
varices, lie under the mucous membrane, which is often adhe- 
rent to their surface, and so thin that their bluish color can be 
plainly distinguished through it. 

Internal hemorrhoids, of the spongy and cellular kinds, are 
always situated between the fleshy fibres and the mucous coat 
of the bowel under which they project. They are of different 
sizes, from that of a pea to that of a walnut, or even a small 
egg ; but occasionally there are so many that the affected part 
of the bowel is filled and distended with them. Sometimes 
only a small portion of them project into the bowel, the greater 
part of their mass being lodged in its cellular tissue. External 
hemorrhoids of this kind also sometimes form slight prominen- 
ces under the delicate skin near the anus ; but in other 
examples form considerable and permanent tumors. 

The primary cause of both internal and external piles is due 
to an obstruction in the portal circulation. When these vessels 
are thus weakened, the size of the piles are often augmented, 
and even hemorrhage induced by heavy lifting. 

The tumors are induced by the plethora of the portal sinus 
setting back upon the capillary veins of the rectum that arise 
in the dermoid tissue of the mucous membrane, which enlarge 
by the frequent repetition of this congestive cause, until the 
dermoid tissue becomes ruptured ; then the mucous coat easily 
distends before the pressure of portal congestion, and thus form 
the pile tumors, which are frequently ruptured by the straining 
used in passing hardened faeces, causing the hemorrhagical 
flux. When this congestion becomes chronic, a morbid thick- 
ening of the membranes of the rectum obtains, and often a 
constricted state of the anus, and great induration of the 
adjoining cellular tissue. Piles which have been repeatedly 
inflamed occasionally spasmodically stricture the sphincter, 
rendering the passages of the bowels exceedingly painful. 

Lastly, abcesses and fistulae may become complications of 
hemorrhoidal swellings. Inflamed piles occasionally suppurate 
in their centres, and the puriform matter which forms within 
them flows continuous from small fistulous canals. 



150 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 



INFLAMMATION AND STRANGULATION OF PILES. 

Another inconvenience from piles, and in some cases not 
less serious than that resulting from their magnitude, or the 
bleeding from them, is their inflammation, which, in its very- 
beginning, is usually subjoined with a protrusion, either of the 
hemorrhoidal swellings, or of a circular prominence of the 
rectum in a state of great turgescence. Nothing can exceed 
the sensitiveness which these parts acquire from distension and 
the pressure made on their base by the sphincter muscle. 
Violent nervous symptoms, extreme restlessness, severe febrile 
disturbance, and even subsultustendinum, may arise from the 
inflamed and strangulated state of hemorrhoidal swellings. 

Here the first indication is to push up the tumors completely 
beyond the grasp of the sphincter muscle. The patient is 
directed to rest on his knees and elbows, and the swellings, 
having been smeared with a little spermaceti ointment, are to 
be gradually pushed up by one of the surgeon's fingers, with 
the intervention of a fine napkin. Then, in order to prevent 
the protrusion from taking place again, a compress is to be 
made of fine-cut tobacco encased in fine muslin and moistened 
and applied to the anus, and supported by the T bandage, and 
the patient is requested to keep quiet for some time. 

Treatment. For internal piles use per ano: r> t. capsicum 
3ss, to 3j if it is not full strength ; t. opii, 3ss ; oil olives, 3j ; 
mix. Use it by wetting a little probang with it and insert it 
deep enough to stimulate the internal membrane of the rectum. 
Use it thus four times per day. 

To relieve the hepatic obstruction that induces the portal 
plethora and constipation of the bowels, give podophyllin ^ 
gr. every second night until the bowels become free enough. 
Also, take a solution of nitrate of potassa gr. x, in water giv. 
Dose, 3iv every hour and a half. Take such a solution every 
day, while taking the podophyllin every night. 

When a tobacco fomentation is applied to inflamed piles, it 
should be removed if it inclines the patient to vomit. How- 
ever, it seldom produces any nausea until after it has quieted 
the pain and sufficiently relaxed the tumidity of the parts. 

In chronic cases of puriform discharges, use small enemas 
of a decoction of marsh rosemary twice per day. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 151 

INFLAMMATION OF THE PERITONEAL MEMBRANE 
OF THE INTESTINES 

Is of very rare occurence, except when induced by some 
mechanical injury. In such cases the nature of the injury will 
indicate the external treatment needed. Rest and quietude ; 
fomentations applied over the bowels, etc. The pain should 
be relieved by giving diaphoretic powders, gr. iij, every two 
hours until the pain subsides. Also, give the following : ]J 
tincture of camphor, m. xv ; dandelion ex., gr. x ; belladonna 
ex., gr. }£. Dissolve the extracts in hot water 3ij, and add s. 
syrup to make 5J ; mix. Dose, 3ss every hour. As the 
bowels are always constipated in this case, to disturb them 
with laxatives or solid food will be liable to augment the pain 
and inflammation to a dangerous extent. No laxatives should 
be given, nor should the food be heavier than that of some 
kind of gruel. 

But little more aid can be rendered in this case than has 
been thus advised, while nature is taking the necessary time to 
perfect its recuperative processes. 



HECTIC FEVER. 



When this fever is silently making its effort in harmony with 
the systemic forces, it always evinces that purulent matter is 
being taken into the circulation, and also that the system is 
making a critical effort to repair abscess. This effort will 
depend for its success upon four conditions important to the 
physician as his allies : First, nervous energy to circumscribe 
as narrow matrix bounds for the abcess, or part to be removed, 
as possible. Second, proper glandular action to render the 
blood as pure as nature requires to succeed in a first effort. 
Third, a moderate motion of the heart to prevent further 
congestion, and Fourthly, pure air. 

Authors have contended that abscesses are one of the efforts 
of nature to depurate impurities from the circulation as an 
alternative when the renal organs fail to properly perform this 
functional work. Hence, the common remark that boils are 
healthy efforts to take impurities from the system, etc. The 
absurdity of this idea will be apparent when viewed in the 



152 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

iight of the physiological and pathological laws laid down in 
this work. All abscesses are an effort to dislodge some foreign 
substance accumulated in the capillary arteries, which is unas- 
similative, or which has been thrust into the part. In doing 
this it only seeks to remove the morbid matter within the con- 
fines of its own instituted Herverion walls, and by this 
precautionarily instituted process to repair the breach again. 
This work of removing foreign bodies from the system is one 
of the most interesting phenomenal processes that is brought 
within the observation of the physiologist and pathologist. In 
this process the first phenomenal work is to create a hard point 
in the centre, around which the ulcer first assumes a separatix 
line, at which the capillary nerves and circulatory vessels are 
terminated. This boundary forms the abscess matrix. The 
second work is to seal the capillary arteries, and provide the 
secretory apparatus, called the abscess matrix, which performs 
the office of secreting from these vessels the plastic lymph to 
fill the abscess, in which the new vessels are relaid after the 
pus and foreign substance have been removed. This work 
always begins by turning off the vital support from the part 
designed to be broken down for removal, and in which is con- 
tained the foreign body. When this foreign body is retained 
in the abscess after the pus has been removed, it will continue 
to be a source of irritation, that will continue to waste the 
plastic lymph by keeping open the abscess, and a fistulous 
opening will result. When the offending agent is readily 
expelled with the gangrenous pus, the next work is to seal the 
pointing aperture, to preserve the plastic lymph, in which the 
work is immediately instituted to resurrect the lost part. The 
system is so rapidly changing, the supply is needed instant and 
constant. Unless this demand is thus supplied, the part has to 
fall back upon this recuperative alternative for renewed vitality. 
Were it not for these provisional means to conserve the system, 
our destruction would follow the slightest obstruction ; there 
being no separatix, gangrene would be universal. But, as it is, 
we have only day after day to furnish the needed demands of 
the system for food, drink and warmth. Pure air is abundant, 
as is also light in its proper time. Hurried breathing does 
great injury to the lungs when the person is affected with either 
phthisis pulmonalis or lung fever. Surely the one measure of 
air does more good when deliberately inhaled and exhaled than 
when used in a too hurried succession. Care should be used 
to breathe slowly and quite full, as a general rule, as a person 
inclines to while sleeping, and the patient should go out in the 
open air as much as possible in pleasant weather. 

The oftener the vessels are worked, the greater the exhaustion; 
consequently, this hurried respiration should be avoided by 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 1 53 

doing everything coolly and deliberately. This will elevate 
better the tone of the vital powers needed for mending the 
damaged parts, and carry off the debris. Care should be used 
to prevent any purulent matter from closing the bronchia, lest 
it should induce the abscess to point in another direction, and 
form a new opening. This would alter the effort used to throw 
out plastic lymph to fill the abscess to that of clearing it, besides 
having two openings to seal in the place of one. Careful 
nourishment is indispensable in this pulmonary derangement. 
By conforming to these precautionary measures, it is difficult to 
conceive why the systemic efforts may not terminate lung abscess 
as favorably as those in other parts of the system. 

INFLAMMATORY FEVER. 

This fever is due to a local inflammation, the intensity of 
which depends upon the part of the system affected, and the 
density of the tissue involved ; it being more intense when 
located in the serous membranes of the great splanchnic cavi- 
ties, as the pleura and peritoneum. It excites the circulation 
much less when located in the extremities or dermoid tissue. 
When the inflammation involves the dense parts first mentioned, 
the fever is ushered in by a chill, that is followed by a high 
fever and a bounding pulse. When the invading symptoms 
have subsided, the fever will tend to abate and allow the patient 
some rest during its remission. Great care should be used to 
not disturb the composure so much needed for the successful 
work of recuperation, for it is in the hours of sleep that the 
Hippocratic medicatrix-naturae is enabled to obtain the systemic 
reins that govern the recuperative powers. By allowing the 
patient to sleep too deeply, will carry the case beyond recu- 
perative control, and endanger a species of paralysis or coma, 
difficult to overcome. Consequently, care should be used to 
secure superficial gentle sleep, to obtain the amount of recu- 
perative aid designed in it. The first efforts of nature are the 
most valid and successfully directed, for it has more power at 
its command. To compromise these first efforts in any way is 
to lessen the chances of recovery. Consequently, great care 
should be used to prevent the occurrence of any disturbance 
in the vicinity of the patient under such circumstances, but 
rather strive to render any rational aid nature requires to make 
a success in first efforts. 

Not unfrequently in these cases much valuable time is lost 
by deferring recuperative action by such disturbances, and the 
want of timely aid. W T hen the system has made the best effort 
it can under such unfavorable circumstances, if the patient 
survives, it may leave a troublesome inflammation to disturb 
the system continuously for some time. In making the exam- 



154 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

ination from whence to make up the diagnosis of the case, the 
locality of the inflammation may be readily ascertained ; first, 
by the throbbing sensation felt by the patient in the part, 
which is caused by the force of the heart against the stagnant 
blood in the capillaries of the congested part ; secondly, by 
the sensitiveness of the part under gentle pressure, and lastly, 
the acute pain of a more advanced stage is sufficient evidence. 

It is more generally the case that the inflammation is a 
secondary one, and the cause should be looked for in conges- 
tion of the periosteum of the inter-vertebral foramina that 
strictures the vital nerves that leads to the secondarily inflamed 
part. This spinal congestion may be due to an impure circu- 
lation, or, which is most common, to undue exposure to cold a 
sufficient length of time to carry the congestion of the spinal 
membranes to an extent that carries some of its fluids through 
the walls of the circulating vessels, that cannot be reclaimed 
by getting comfortably warm again. The diagnosis should 
carefully settle all of these points, in order to correctly direct 
the treatment. 

The indications of cure are, to correct the habits of the 
glandular system ; to support the nervous system, and to aid 
the systemic rally to the inflamed parts, which can be effected 
by the application of a mustard paste, or hot water fomenta- 
tions, and followed by a warm flax-seed poultice. If the case 
terminates in a superficial abscess, it then comes under the 
head of topical surgery. (See Abscess). 



BILIOUS FEVER. 

The term bilious is appended to this type of fever to direct 
the mind to the pathological condition the liver is forced to 
assume to protect the chyliferous apparatus against the poison- 
ous effects of the impurities in the circulation that induce this 
fever. 

This type of fever is one of the most frequent occurrence in 
places free from malarial inundations. 

This fever is mostly due to the use of food that ferments and 
sours the chyme, and disqualifies it for healthy blood. The 
nervous system is rendered sensitive by this acetous acid in the 
circulation, and the renal organs become inflamed and obstructed 
thereby, while depurating it from the circulation. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 155 

When the renal organs become thus obstructed, a portion of 
the urine secreted overflows into the circulation. This urea 
and acetous acid, when secreted by the liver from the circula- 
tion, irritates the duodenum, and as soon as the duodenal 
membranes begin to suffer from its poisonous effects, the biliary 
excretory ducts, which are ever in sympathy with the duodenal 
mucous membranes, are rendered sensitive to its presence, and 
thereby become congested, and their passage into the duode- 
num closed. Thus the systemic powers turn off these poisonous 
biliary secretions from the intestinal canal into the venous 
circulation. 

These unassimilative elements in the circulation, and the 
injury the nervous system sustains thereby, culminate a stasis 
in nutrition that brings on a chill, more or less intense, that 
reacts in a fever, 

This fever is not ushered in with a decided chill, like that of 
an intermittent, but a vague chill, that feels like cold water 
trickling down the back, and alternated with flashes of heat, 
until the fever is completely established. During these rigors 
of cold and flashes of heat, great pain is experienced in the 
head. The kidneys and loins are painful, and the urine scant 
and high-colored; the tongue is dry, and furred with a yellowish 
sord ; the patient is thirsty, and much oppression is experienced 
in the vicinity of the liver, pancreas and spleen, which are 
tumid with congestion ; the pulse is frequent and small during 
the rigors, and frequent and full during the fever, and the respi- 
rations are hurried, which is mostly caused by the tumidity of 
the liver, that encroaches upon the lungs, and only allows them 
to partially fill. 

A remission of the fever takes place at three or four o'clock 
in the morning, and allows the patient two or three hours of 
repose. This remission sometimes takes place twice in the x 24 
hours — morning and evening. This fever generally yields to 
correct treatment in from two to five days. 

The indications of cure are, first, to depurate the circulation 
by proper diuretics ; to abate the fever and relieve the cerebral 
congestion by anodynes and diaphoretics ; to help terminate 
the spinal congestion by the use of a good spinal liniment, and 
to gently open the liver after the renal organs have had ample 
time to clear the circulation of these impurities so dangerous 
to the duodenal and intestinal membranes. This is a very safe 
way of treating all fevers : To first depurate the circulation of 
the impurities that prevent nutrition, by administering a suit- 
able diuretic to clear the renal obstructions and keep up 
diuresis for twelve hours. To fulfill this indication, put 20 grs. 
of nitrate of potassa into a half-pint tumbler half-full of cold 
water ; give two teaspoonsful every twenty minutes until it is 



156 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

all taken. Also, if there is much distress in the kidneys, use a 
decoction of hops, made by filling a teacup of hops and pour 
it full of boiling hot water ; let it cool and strain off as it is 
wanted for use. Give two teaspoonsful every hour. After using 
these diuretics three hours, give to an adult three half-grain sugar- 
coated podophyllin pills, to open the liver and operate as a 
cathartic in 12 or 14 hours. In case the pills should not oper- 
ate in 24 hours, repeat the dose. If there is much determina- 
tion to the brain, with headache, give a three-grain diaphoretic 
powder every three hours until it subsides. Also, give 10 glob- 
ules of aconite (homoeopathic) every hour for three doses. After 
the bowels have been well opened, begin the use of a salicin 
solution by putting 15 grains into a half- tumbler of cold water, 
and add 10 grains of nitrate of potassa. Dose, two teaspoons- 
ful every hour ; or, in place of the salicin tonic, use sweet 
spirits of nitre 2 ounces, and 20 grains of quinine dissolved in 
it. Dose, one teaspoonful in four tablespoonsful of cold 
water. Give such a dose every two hours until the patient is 
fully recovered. Use the spinal liniment along the whole 
length of the spine once per day, to overcome, as speedily as 
possible, its congested membranes. The diet should be gruel 
as long as the fever continues, after which it may gradually 
become more liberal. Care should be used to secure a con- 
tinuous action of the kidneys, or the liver will become 
obstructed again. All of the glandular organs should be kept 
in general action, and when they need no further aid, the 
treatment may be considered ended. 



INTERMITTENT FEVER. 

This fever is one of most common occurrence on the great 
western prairies, while the soil is first being broken in new 
settlements. It no doubt is derived from the carbonic acid 
contained in the upturned vegetable mould, where it has been 
accumulating for ages, from its annual precipitation from a 
redundant accumulation of carbureted hydrogen in the atmos- 
phere, above its demand for the support of vegetation. By its 
combination with the oxygen of the atmosphere, it is precipi- 
tated,and a large portion of it enters into chemical combination 
with the vegetable mould, as a means of its conservation in 
position, as a capital for the vegetable kingdom to draw upon 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 157 

for support in the warm season. This upturned mould, 
becoming saturated with water and exposed to the evaporating 
powers of the sun, the hydrogen set free enters into combination 
with the acid in proportion to constitute it a gas as light as the 
atmospheric air, into which it rises and commingles. This 
hydrated carbonic acid gas becomes fused and precipitated, 
after its demand for vegetation is checked, by a succession of 
frosts. When this work of precipitation is transpiring, and the 
atmosphere is sufficiently saturated with this element, it is 
manifest in the luminous burning clouds in autumn nights, the 
phenomenon of which has been called aurora autumnale. 

After a few years of cultivation of such rich soils, this excess 
of carbonic acid, detrimental to health, becomes exhausted ; 
after which this fever seldom occurs upon the upland prairies. 
Hence, the common remark derived from observation, " that 
our western prairie country becomes very healthy as soon as 
the districts have been generally plowed, and the excess of 
carbonic acid becomes bleached out of the soil." But the low, 
untillable, alluvial bottom-lands in a hot climate are not thus 
reclaimable from occasional excessive malarial exhalation, to 
render this congestive type of fever epidemical in widely 
extended plains. 

It has for a long time been conceded by all eminent physi- 
cians that this intermittent type of congestive fever was of 
malarial origin, but they have not so well agreed upon the defi- 
nite element that comprises this malaria, nor the mode of its 
action upon the system by which the pathological conditions 
are induced that culminates a paroxysm of this fever. 

The order of the procedure of this disease is as follows : As 
the fault or primary cause is found in this impoverished state 
of the atmosphere, the first departure will be found in the 
defective primates chemically elaborated at the air cells in the 
lungs. First, the substitution of carbonic acid gas for that of 
oxygen gas, would serve to lessen the force of combustion and 
prevent the depuration from the blood an amount of carbonic 
acid equivalent to that contained in the air cells. Secondly, 
the hsematine primates become deficient in chemical quality 
and quantity. Third, the quantity of nervous electricity gen- 
erated becomes deficient in quantity and quality of its pri- 
mates ; and Fourthly, a deficient quantity of caloric is evolved ; 
all of these four conditions being unfavorable to the mainten- 
ance of healthy nutrition. With an accumulation of this acid in 
the circulation, nutrition becomes more defective with a corres- 
ponding decline of systemic vigor. The membranes of the 
excretory ducts of the renal organs become irritated by the 
acridity of this acid in the urine, causing congestion and an 
albuminous effusion that obstructs the passage of urine in some 



I58 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

of these ducts, which, as the circulating blood becomes more 
depraved, this renal congestion and obstruction of ducts 
becomes more general, causing an overflow of urea into the 
circulating blood through the renal emulgent veins. With this 
additional acid in the circulation, another derangement obtains, 
which is a closure of the biliary passage into the duodenum, to 
protect the intestinal membranes from its inflaming effects. 
With the failure of the kidneys and the closure of the pancreas 
and liver as depurating channels, the systemic powers 
become directed to the perspiratory apparatus for a grand flood- 
ing depuration of these dilute acids from the circulation. 
This systemic effort is achieved in the three stages of an inter- 
mittent paroxysm : the chill, the fever and the colliquative per- 
spiration, which are carried safely through by a grand systemic 
nervous rally by alternate means for such cases made and 
provided. (See Systemic Nervous Rally in this work.) The 
malarial cause and glandular obstructions being unchanged, a 
paroxysm in its various types will culminate in the following time 
viz : In the quotidian in 24 hours, in the tertian in 48 hours, 
and in the quartan in 72 hours. When the nervous and glan- 
dular systems improve, the paroxysms postpone, when they 
become more obstructed, it anticipates. By reason of it 
requiring more time to fill the circulation with these impurities 
adequate to induce a chill in some types than others, explains 
all there is in these types. The indications of cure are to 
overcome the glandular obstruction and give them proper 
support in the work of depurating the excess of carbonic acid 
accumulating in the blood, and to give a proper support to the 
nervous system by the use of well-selected tonics. 

Treatment. During the chill, if convenient, put the patient 
in bed and apply hot applications to the extremities and spine, 
and allow the patient frequent but small draughts of cold water. 
When the chill is on, administer a five-grain dose of diaphoretic 
powder. When the chill begins to subside, remove the hot 
applications, and as the fever begins to rise, gradually lay off 
the bed clothes as they become uncomfortable. The febrile 
symptoms, when they run high, should be moderated by 
sponging the patient over with moderately cool soft water. 
The use of diaphoretic powders in three (3) grain doses every 
two hours after the first five-grain dose is given, from the time 
the chill begins until the fever begins to subside, will shorten the 
time of the chill and the fever. Directly after the colliquative 
sweat has subsided, is the best time to begin the treatment for 
the glandular obstruction, leaving the tonic to be introduced 
directly after the liver is opened. No tonic is admissible under 
glandular obstruction. ]£ Nitrate of potassa 20 grains, put 
into a half-pint tumbler full of cold water ; give a table spoon- 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 159 

ful every fifteen minutes until it is all taken. This will clear 
the albumen from the ducts of the kidneys and support the 
kidneys in depurating all the impurities from the circulating 
blood before the liver is opened ; then the liver will have pure 
blood to secrete its bile from to pass harmlessly through the 
bowels, and afterwards be able to support digestion. After 
giving the solution of the nitrate of potassa three hours, give 
from two to four half-grain sugar-coated pills of podophyllin, 
according with the age and constitution of the patient. These 
pills will open the liver passage gently and without nausea, in 
14 hours. Then begin the use of the following tonic : r> sweet 
spirits of niter, (army strength), 4 ounces ; quinine 40 grains ; 
shake and it well be all cut and dissolved by the s. s. of nitre. 
Dose, i^3 diluted in one oz. cold water. Give such a dose 
every two hours the first 24 hours, then if no chill occurs, give a 
dose every 2^ hours during the day time, up to 9 P. M.; 
then after that give a dose every three hours during the day 
time, until the strength of the patient is fully recovered. 
Also, as soon as the bowels need more action, give a small 
dose of the podophyllin pills. The use of one teaspoonful dose 
of this tonic diluted, taken morning and evening, and gently 
keeping the liver open by these sugar-coated podophyllin pills, 
will prevent this fever. This treatment has proved successful in 
every case in my practice for over 30 years, and will ever 
succeed whenever proper judgment is used to administer a 
proper quantity of the remedy to fulfil these indications with 
the robust constitution and the child. In every order of fever. 
I immediately, before giving a dose of podophyllin, begin the 
use of the following solution : Nitrate of potassa, grains 15 to 
20, put into a half-pint tumbler, half- full of cold water. Take 
one-fourth of this solution at one dose before taking the 
podophyllin ; then take 4 drachms every half-hour until it is all 
taken. The objects to be gained from the use of this solution 
are to clear the renal excretory ducts of their albuminous 
obstructions, and assist in the depurative work of clearing the 
circulation of all impurities before the liver is opened. By 
this precaution the secreted bile will be pure to aid the diges- 
tion and chylosis. Without the use of this precautionary 
measure, the danger to be apprehended from forcing the liver 
to secrete these acids from the blood is in forcing an action 
which the systemic powers have taken the precaution to guard 
against by closing the duodenal passage to protect the intes- 
tinal membranes from the irritating and inflammatory effects 
of these acids, holding that it is better that the liver secrete no 
bile from the portal blood than to induce endo-enteritis by its 
continuance under such unfavorable circumstances, and depend 
on the routine of an intermittent febrile exacerbation for relief. 



l6o A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 



NOTE. 



The exposition of the systemic laws manifest in this par- 
oxysmal effort to resuscitate nutrition, not only elucidates the 
functional work of the vital nervous system in presiding over 
nutritive assimilation, but it manifests the power of the spleen 
and supra renal capsules over the nervous system whenever 
suspending assimilation and arterial plethora begin to endanger 
life, and in it is clearly manifest the object of these systemic 
efforts in the various types of fever. The odor of urine in the 
colliquative perspiration evinces one object gained in the 
exacerbation, being the depuration from the circulation through 
the perspiratory vessels of the skin, the urine accumulated in 
the circulation by reason of renal obstruction. Another valid 
point, no doubt, is gained in this perspiratory work, which is 
the flooding out of liquid dilute carbonic acid that fails to be 
depurated by the lungs when an equal quantity of the acid 
in a gaseous form is being inhaled with the atmospheric air. 
These two points being gained, nutrition is resumed for a time, 
to become gradually more defective until the accumulation of 
these two acids in the circulation brings on another exacerba- 
tive effort to expel them from the circulation. 



TYPHOID FEVER, 

OR, ENDO-ENTERITIS. 

This fever has been one of the surest destroyers of humanity 
that physicians have had to contend with. 

The success that attends the author's practice in fever is 
dependent upon the care use to depurate the circulation of the 
impurities on which the fever depends, before giving a biliary 
cathartic to remove the guard placed in the liver gate by the 
systemic powers, to protect the chyliferous apparatus against 
this poisonous element. If I am called to a case of fever that 
is free from a diarrhoea, by this caution I prevent its occurrence. 
I also find but a limited number of cases of fever that, in the 
early stages, have this diarrhoea on which this type is based : 
all which, if carefully and properly treated, will terminate favor- 
ably. Consequently, a very great majority of the cases of this 
type are induced by the use of biliary cathartics before taking 
the precautionary measure to first stimulate the renal organs, 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. l6l 

which are the designed depurative operatives to clear the 
circulation of its greater shares of impurities. After the circu- 
lation is thus improved, and the cause thereby that closed the 
liver being removed, the liver will respond to a very gentle 
purgative, and its secretions will be prepared to aid digestion 
by their purity, instead of inflaming the intestinal canal. 

To begin the treatment by prescribing first a bilious cathartic, 
is a very dangerous course to institute in taking up any case of 
fever. This liver gate should not be thus ruthlessly forced 
open, nor until the dangers are removed that the systemic 
powers closed it against, for nothing could prove more fatal to 
the case than to compel the liver to depurate the circulation 
of this destructive element, and send it forward to inflame the 
mucous membranes of the intestinal canal. Judgment should 
be used to protect this chyliferous apparatus in the treatment 
of all fevers, for when it becomes inflamed it closes one of the 
gates of life, and it too frequently proves an obstinate 
derangement that fails to recuperate in time to supply the 
exhausted circulation before the stock of adeps in the system 
is consumed, and life thereby rendered extinct. As all inflamed 
mucous membranes recuperateby forming new ones, the danger 
ill the case lies in this recuperation being deferred by the con- 
tinuous presence of the irritating cause. When the biliary 
secretions become sufficiently pure, these membranes will 
recuperate under rational treatment rapidly, if the mesenteric 
glands are not already in a state of ulceration. If this be the 
case, the danger is augmented by a farther postponement of 
chylosis, by the time required for these glands to recuperate. 
Since this fever always has this chronic diarrhoea connected 
with it, the indications of cure are, to remove the impurities 
from the circulation by the use of proper diuretics; to suspend 
the perpetuating cause of the diarrhoea and nervous prostra- 
tion ; to properly tone up the nervous system, and to secure 
quietude and sleep ; and to use such internal remedies as are 
calculated to facilitate the speedy termination of the inflam- 
mation of the mucous membranes of the bowels by contact. 

TREATMENT. 

Nitrate of potassa grs. xv., in solution of aqua fiij. Give 
3iv every half-hour. 

Aconite globules, 10 every half hour for three hours. 

Xanthoxilum t. ^iij. Give ^-3 in aqua 3ij every hour. 

Salicin grs. x, t. juniper m. xv, spirits of camphor m. x, aqua 
3v ; mix. Give 3j in two drachms of gum arabic mucilage 
every three hours. 

Marsh rosemary root 3iij ; make in decoction f. rvj. Give 
3j every hour. 



1 62 A. H. DAVIS THEORY AND 

If the patient does not sleep well nights, give cholera infan- 
tum powders grs. v, at bed-time, and repeat the dose every two 
hours until sleep is effected. 

The use of gruel enemas are well calculated to prolong the 
life of the patient, when the resources of adeps are not likely 
to hold out during the time required for the recuperation of 
these mucous membranes, sufficient for the resumption of 
chyliferous absorption. 

Use the spinal liniment on the whole length of the spine 
every morning. 

This prescription has always proved sufficiently efficacious 
in my practice, and it should be followed per day until the 
patient is convalescent. Use the diet recommended for chronic 
southern diarrhoea. 

When the passages contain bile, the liver is considered suffi- 
ciently open, and generally too active, by reason of the 
nervous excitability sent to the liver by the splenic rally. 
The above treatment is not only satisfactorily efficacious in 
endo-enteritis, but it is admirably adapted to relieve the febrile 
condition, with which it is connected in such cases. 



TYPHUS FEVER. 



This is a very contagious fever, and its propagation is 
dependent upon the inhalation of the malaria exhaled by a 
person who is afflicted with this fever. Consequently, the 
spread of this fever follows the direct line of its contagion. 
Doubts have been entertained in regard to its contagious char- 
acter, by reason of its being confounded with other non-con- 
tagious continued fevers, such as the malarial, congestive, 
remittent, and the typhoid. 

I will endeavor to give the leading characteristic features of 
these fevers, with a design to prevent the exposure of the 
populace from this typhus type of fever through such mistakes. 

The circumstances under which this type of fever occur may 
aid the physician in determining the character of the type. 
First, its following the line of contagion ; secondly, its occur- 
rence out of a malarial district, or out of its season, and not 
being endemical ; the surrounding circumstances of exposure, 
such as on ship-board, in the army or hospital, or having 
mingled with sea-faring emigrants. The circumstances that 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 1 65 

evince a case of malarial congestive remittent fever are, the 
locality and season for its recurrence, it being endemical, and 
the absence of the evidence of it being imported ; and, lastly, 
a knowledge of its sporadic occurrence very well settles its 
non-contagious character. 

In the malarial congestive remittent fever, the only observa- 
ble, distinguishable symptoms of that of the typhus are : The 
exacerbations and remissions are more observably marked ; the 
febrile action is more intense, inducing more determination to 
the brain, and the remissions are of longer duration. The 
nervous derangement is not as uniformly continuous, nor 
muscular prostration as rapid. Enough of the malarial 
periodicity of its character is observable to mark alternate 
worse and better days, and it is found to yield more readily to 
the use of malarial antidotes than the contagious typhus. The 
confounding of typhoid fever with that of typhus, has grown 
out of the absurdity of allowing endo-enteritis to give the 
typhoid type to any fever under which the patient may be 
laboring at the time of its occurrence. For experience has 
taught me that endo-enteritis is a lesion that by erroneous 
treatment can be, and not unfrequently is, induced in all the 
different types of fever. It is a very dangerous lesion to be 
induced in any form of fever, but more particularly so in the 
graver types. But endo-enteritis renders a type of fever neither 
more nor less contagious. Therefore, my nosology excludes the 
term typhoid from the fevers, and considers endo-enteritis as a 
lesion that is not dependent upon any particular type of fever. 

Celebrated authors have confounded the malarial congestive 
remittent fever with the contagious typhus. Beyond doubt 
there is much sameness in a majority of the symptoms present 
in these two types of fever; but upon closer scrutiny all the 
above-mentioned distinguishing characteristics belonging to 
these separate types of fever will be observable, and enable 
the physician to correctly distinguish them. 

The importance of correctly diagnosing this contagious type 
of fever, magnifies with the responsible duty of the physician 
to guard the public against the spread of its destructive conta- 
gion, as well as for correct treatment. Not a shade of doubt 
can be entertained of the contagious character of this fever, in 
my mind, and this opinion is strengthened by such eminent 
minds as have been considered competent to take charge of 
the public hospitals, and who, by their statistics, confirm its 
strictly contagious character. 

Laws of quarantine have been instituted as safe-guards against 
the introduction and spread of contagious diseases through 
large maritime cities, and hospitals have been expressly built 
to relieve vessels in quarantine. By this sanitary arrangement, 



164 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

a large per cent, of the population of these cities is saved 
annually. Other sanitary measures are also important to 
confine it to those who are afflicted with it, such as warding it 
off in hospitals, or secluding all but the attendants from the 
sick-chamber, and the use of disinfectant fumigations in the 
sick-room. 

DIAGNOSIS. 

The leading characteristic symptoms of this disease are : 
Great nervous prostration and rapid muscular debility ; the 
pungent heat of the skin, and torpidity of the bowels ; the 
listlessness to what is transpiring ; the great tendency to coma; 
the extreme thirst ; the parched tongue, and the dark sords 
that accumulate on the tongue, teeth, gums and lips, and the 
extreme prostration to which it generally reduces the patient 
before convalescence commences, together with the peculiar 
cadaverous fetor of the exhalations from the patient. The 
premonitory symptoms are not dissimilar from those of other 
continued fevers. The determination to the brain and the 
splenic pain are more uniform and less severe than in the 
congestive remittent. 

TREATMENT. 

Ijc, Nitre grs. xv, fluid extract of Wahoo 3iij, Tinct, Sang. can. 
3ss., mix. Dose 3j in Aqua 3iij, and repeat the dose every two 
hours. 

This prescription is designed to relieve the determination to 
the brain ; to act as a diuretic ; to stimulate the tonsillary 
glands, and gently open the liver after about twelve hours. At 
all events the prescription should be followed until the liver is 
opened. If the Wahoo cannot be obtained, use in its place ^ 
grains of podophyllin cut in alcohol 3ss, diluted with milk. 
After the bowels are thus properly moved, give a dose once in 
six hours, or regulate it so as to move the bowels once in 
twenty-four hours. 

After the liver is opened, commence the use of the following: 

I£ Quinine grs. ij, Tinct. Tanzy |ss, Muriatic acid m. ij, then 
add simple syrup fiijss. Dose ^ 3 five times in twenty-four 
hours, and repeat it each, day until the patient is convalescent. 
If there shall be too much determination to the brain, omit 
the Quinine tonic and give the following in its place : 

I£ Opii m. x, Nitrate of Potassa grs. xv, Tinct. of Sang. can. 
m. xv, Mountain Mint herb 3iv, made in decoction §ij, mix. 
Dose 3iv every hour. Also give Diaphoretic powder grs. 
ij, every three hours ; to relieve the brain and induce gentle 
diaphoresis. Apply a stimulating liniment to the spine once 
per day. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. l6$ 

If symptons of qualmishness are present, give a solution of 
Salt grs. x, in cold Aqua f. jiij. Dose 3iv, every twenty min- 
utes until it subsides, if it is not disagreeable. The tonic here 
advised may be substituted by the one recommended in inter- 
mittent fever. 

One principle should govern the treatment in all fevers, viz: 
to restore the lost action of the glandular system ; to protect 
the brain, and support the nervous system. 

REGIMEN. 

The room should be carefully ventilated, so as not to expose 
the patient to a current of air. Disinfectant fumigations should 
be used sufficient to keep the atmosphere of the room as pure 
as possible. This will militate favorably to the recovery of the 
patient, and serve to prevent the physician and nurse against 
its contagion. 

The patient may be allowed to drink in moderate draughts 
of cold water sufficiently often to quench the thirst. 

The diet should be of arrow root or corn starch gruel, or 
toast water, until the fever subsides. After which beef tea or 
a broth made from mutton or wild game can be used, exclud- 
ing chicken broth, for it will greatly endanger a relapse of the 
fever. A more liberal diet can be allowed as the strength of 
the patient improves. 

PREVENTION. 

The indications for a preventive are the use of remedies that 
will keep up the activity of the depurating organs, and thereby 
prevent any glandular obstructions. The incubative effects of 
this contagion upon the system tends to first obstruct the kid- 
neys and liver, before the disease culminates the fever, and if 
this impression is promptly met by keeping the blood pure by 
keeping up a full action of the kidneys, and a gentle action 
of the liver, and at the same time giving the nervous system a 
little support, the systemic powers will triumph over any conta- 
gion. 

3 Sweet Spirits of Nitre f. §ij, Quinine grs. xx, mix. Dose 
3j, in four table spoonsful of cold water. Take such a dose 
three times per day ; also keep the liver gently open by the 
use of one or two half-grain sugar-coated podophyllin pills once 
per week. The use of such a preventive by all persons exposed 
to typhus, typhus icterodes, scarlatina, spotted fever, diph- 
theria, and thereby the contagion will terminate with the af- 
fected cases. The author has thus terminated these maladies 
by the use of this prophylactic. 



l66 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

YELLOW FEVER 

OR TYPHUS ICTERODES. 

This fever is more prevalent in the tropics than in a climate 
of a higher latitude. When it occurs north of the equator, it 
has been observed to be imported in vessels that have made 
the long voyage to the East Indies and back. I regard it of a 
typhus type that is propagated in the time when the transit of 
the tropics are being passed, after making the long voyage to 
India, and thus far on the return voyage. The heat being so 
intense under a vertical sun, tends to prostrate the nervous 
system that has been already debilitated by so long a voyage, 
m vessels that have not been kept in such order as the laws of 
health demand. The query is, Why is it not then in all respects 
similar to the ship typhus fever that occurs on board of emi- 
grant ships of the North Atlantic ? The difference consists in 
this : The weather-bound time under the tropical sun is much 
more destructive to the nervous system than when it occurs in 
so high a latitude as that of the North Atlantic. 

When under the equatorial sun, it drives all below hatch in a 
calm to seek shelter from the burning sun. The glandular sys- 
tem having become debilitated by loss of nervous support, the 
liver becomes obstructed and inflamed by this depressing cause, 
which is greater than this cool climate can induce ; and, with 
a bracing atmosphere, the difference must be necessarily equally 
great. ' 

In a Northern latitude, the liver is paralyzed, and its secre- 
tions suspended ; while, under the great heat of a tropical sun, 
its secretions are unduly augmented, making the skin yellow 
with the bilious overflow into the circulation. Thisisthe reason 
why it is called yellow fever. It is also substantially the same 
fever modified by these two opposite influences of a hot and a 
temperate climate ; being equally contagious, but in no respect 
infectious, except by inoculation. During the blockade in the 
great Southern rebellion no cases of yellow fever occurred 
during that time, either in Mobile, New Orleans or Galveston; 
but as soon as the blockade was raised and East India vessels 
began to make these ports, the yellow fever was imported, and 
it raged with great severity in Mobile, New Orleans, and some 
of the ports in Texas. If this fever had made its appearance 
during the time of this two years blockade of our Southern 
ports, it would fee strong evidence of its local propagation. 

But the evidence points directly to that of importation from 
a Southern latitude. Therefore the best measures that can be 
taken to prevent its appearance in our Southern seaport cities, 
is that of strict quarantine upon East Indian and tropical vessels 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 1 67 

The difference between typhus and typhus icterodes is this: 
the surface is dark in the first, and yellow in the latter. This 
overflow of bile is caused by congestion and obstruction of 
the coleduct passage into the duodenum by the peculiar effects 
of this icterodes malaria and urea combined. While it stimulates 
the liver to undue activity in the secretory apparatus, all this 
impure bilious secretion is sent into the venous circulation, to 
saturate the membranes with its yellow pigment, and to pros- 
trate the nervous system with this human malarial poison. 

The accumalation of bile in the biliary ducts obstructs the 
portal circulation ; that induces congestion and inflammation 
of the liver that terminates in gangrene of that viscus. This is 
what causes the black vomit which is indicative of a speedy 
dissolution. The systemic prostration is very rapid towards 
dissolution, after the coledoct passage and portal circulation 
are obstructed. In many cases, persons who are very much 
exposed to this fever escape its contagion, while persons who 
are affected with glandular derangements fall an easy prey 
to it. During the rages of this fever, the nurses should use the 
following prophylactic : 

_$ Nitrate of Potassa grs. 60, Wintergreen t. fix. First dis- 
solve the Nitre in Aqua §ij, then add the tincture of Winter- 
green. Dose 3ij in five of water every two hours during the 
twenty-four hours on duty. This will support the kidneys and 
nervous circulation, and thereby prevent the disease. 

SYMPTOMS. 

The yellow fever is usually ushered in with lassitude and 
weariness, chilly fits, listlessness of everything around, faintness, 
giddiness, flushing of the face, redness of the eyes, pains in the 
eye-balls and lower part of the forehead, as likewise in the 
back ; debility and sighing ; thirst, and a tendency to lethargy; 
the urine is high-colored, small in quantity, and turbid ; the 
perspiration is irregular, interrupted, and greatly diminished ; 
the saliva is viscid ; the tongue is covered over with a dark 
fur ; the bile, which is scalding and acrid, is secreted in 
unusual quantities, and is thrown into the duodenum, from 
whence it is speedily ejected, and the skin is intensely hot, dry 
and hard. As the disease continues to advance,and the coleduct 
passage becomes obstructed, the eyes become of a deep 
yellow ; the face and breast are tinged with the same hue ; an 
incessant retching and vomiting of frothy mucus ensues \ great 
costiveness prevails, which is attended with a permanent dila- 
tation of the pupils of the eyes. 

There is seldom an evident remission until the fever has entirely 
gone through its first stage, which is generally in thirty-six or 
forty-eight hours, when there is often such an abatement of the 



1 68 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

symptoms as to induce the patient to think himself tolerably 
well ; but an early recurrence of the symptoms, in an aggrava- 
ted form, accompanied with extreme debility, soon convinces 
him of the contrary. In the last stage of the disease, the 
greatest debility prevails,and symptoms of universal putrefaction 
arise ; large patches of livid spots are to be observed on 
different parts ; the tongue becomes dry and black ; the 
teeth are incrusted with a dark fur ; the breath is highly 
offensive ; the whole body exhibits a livid yellow, in 
many cases, but not in all ; hemorrhages break forth 
from the mouth, ears and nostrils ; dark and fetid stools are 
discharged ; hiccoughs ; the pulse sinks, and death follows 
very quickly. These are the usual symptoms, but there is 
considerable variation. 

The following is an article written by the author in 1878, for 
publication in the Janesville Recorder, copies of which were 
sent to the boards of health in Memphis, New Orleans, and 
other cities where this fever was prevailing : 

" Yellow fever, in its origin, has invariably been traced to our 
homeward-bound ships around the Horn, through the hot, 
tropical clime, the first exciting cause of which is the stench 
of sour, filthy bilge water in the holds of ships. The second 
cause is long confinement below deck, to escape the tropical 
heat of the sun when the vessels are becalmed. The inhalation 
of the noxious gas arising from the bilge water has its malarious 
effect upon the system, while the inhalation of the human 
effluvia has its typhus effects. The first inflames the excretory 
ducts of the kidneys, causing uric acid to be turned into the 
circulating blood through the emulgent veins. When the blood 
is thus rendered too impure for assimilation, a chill sets in. 
The second cause impoverishes the neurine carried by the 
nerves of nutrition to the termina of the capillary arteries, for 
combination with the red globules of the blood in the work of 
nutrition. These two combined causes being detrimental to 
nutrition, induce the sudden debility and marked nervous 
prostration of the patient, which gives the typhus type to the 
fever ; and the exhalations of the decomposing elements of 
the system by the lungs, render the disease contagious only 
when the putrid fetid breath is present. The acrid renal 
secretions, turned back into the circulation, being secreted from 
the blood with the bile, render the bile so acrid as to irritate, 
congest and close the biliary passage into the duodenum. The 
accumulating bile crowding every duct to its fullest capacity, 
to distension, causes the redundant secreted bile to be turned 
into the circulation, giving the yellow color to the skin, which 
might properly be termed the yellow jaundice part of the case. 
All the venous blood that accumulates in the abdominal 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 1 69 

viscera returns through the liver ; this circulation is only 
impelled by the force of respiration upon the abdominal 
viscera ; consequently, the distended bile ducts encroach upon 
these channels of hepatic circulation to an alarming extent. 
Hence, in consecutive order, we find from an overflow of renal 
secretions into the circulation this duodenal obstruction that 
pens up the bile to its overflow into the circulating blood, and 
with the great distension of the liver, an unusually distended 
fullness of every vein in the abdomen, causing the short, hur- 
ried respiration of the patient. 

" THE BLACK VOMIT. 

" When the bile is thus pent up for a short time, it becomes 
dark-colored. When the duodenal obstruction subsides,vomiting 
is induced by the great quantity of acrid bile being forced into 
the duodenum. In proof of the point claimed for the black 
material vomited being the pent-up bile, I here offer a case in 
point which occurred in my practice in the city of Madison in 
1863. The patient was a Mr. Oakly. The case was one of 
yellow jaundice. After having taken the precaution to relieve 
the renal obstructions, then to overcome the duodenal obstruc- 
tion, I gave an emetic, which resulted in filling a vessel two- 
thirds full of a dark brown thick matter that gas would collect 
in bubbles upon and break, which in color was similar to the 
black vomited matter in cases of yellow fever. Mr. Oakly very 
soon regained his usual health. 

"The contagious character of this fever is limited to persons 
only whose renal organs are suffering from the effects of malaria. 
This fever would be more properly denominated a malarial 
typhus fever, or typhus gravior of ancient writers, for the rea- 
son that its spread is limited to a low country, and in a latitude 
where the heat of the atmosphere is sufficiently intense to 
stimulate the generation of an undue quantity of carbureted 
hydrogen gas from the carbonic acid contained in the soil of 
the low alluvial bottom lands. The fever generated in emigrant 
ships while crossing the Northern Atlantic, is of a pure typhus 
type, and not very contagious in a cool climate except in filthy 
districts in crowded cities, and even in that case the robust in 
health escape. The yellow fever becomes epidemical only 
when and where the people are being prostrated with severe 
malarial congestive fevers, many cases of which, no doubt, are 
too hastily pronounced yellow fever, not having the prostration 
of the typhus type of the fever present, very soon convalesce. 

The indications of cure in cases of yellow fever are : First, 
to relieve the obstructed renal organs, and to give them ade- 
quate support in their official depurative work of keeping the 
blood pure. Secondly, to overcome the duodenal obstruction, 



170 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

and thereby to relieve the congested state of the liver. 
Thirdly, as soon as the liver is relieved, to tone up the prostra- 
ted nervous system ; also, to resort to the use of diaphoretics 
to restore the action of the membranous system, and thereby to 
secure a gentle perspiration continuously, which serves to abate 
the fever and lessen the frequency of the pulse and give the 
patient rest. The course of treatment should be well-timed, 
and in order with the routine of the abnormal pathological 
conditions to be overcome in the case. To begin the treatment 
by giving medicine to force the closed duodenal biliary passage 
before clearing the obstructed kidneys, would be fraught with 
great danger of inducing a fatal inflammation of the aliment- 
ary canal. 

" Let us take a friendly review of the treatment most commonly 
used in the south for this disease. First, a dose of calomel, of 
twenty or more grains, is prescribed/and followed by from one 
to four ounces of castor oil. If the liver is not opened in 
twelve hours, the same doses are repeated. The castor oil is 
prescribed to protect the bowels from a fatal diarrhoea, that might 
result from the passage of the acrid bile when the liver should 
be opened. Let us see about driving the liver to secrete an 
undue quantity of bile while the cyst and biliary ducts are 
already crowded to overflowing. Under such treatment, the 
patient assumes more of a. yellow hue, and the oppression is 
increased, while the patient becomes more restless. The 
castor oil, in large doses, will severely obstruct the kidneys of 
a robust well man, consequently, its use under such obstruction 
renders the obstruction more permanent. The liver being forced 
open under this renal obstruction, all the impurities of the 
system must be sent through the alimentary canal to fatally 
inflame it, and cut off all hopes of recovery. The treatment 
most advisable, and one that would seldom fail in skillful hands, 
is as follows : 

"First, begin the treatment to open the kidneys by the use of 
pure nitrate of potassa, from twenty to forty grains, in solution 
in one-half pint of cold water. This solution should be given 
in one ounce doses every thirty minutes. (The number of 
grains used must be determined by the urgency of the case). 
At the same time, while using this diuretic solution, a decoction 
of mountain mint should be freely drank ; also, give five-grain 
doses every three hours of Beech's Diaphoretic Powders. 
After properly securing a good opening of the kidneys, proceed 
to open the duodenal passage to the liver with a prompt emetic. 
After the liver is thus properly opened, give ten grains of 
salicin in solution every two hours until a less quantity will 
suffice to keep up the tone of the nervous system. Gentle 
diphoresis and prompt diureses should be constantly maintained 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 171 

until the patient is convalescent. The liver will need no more 
urging. It will keep gently open if the renal organs are faith- 
fully doing their work of depurating all the impurities from the 
circulation. It is best, after the kidneys are freely opened, to 
principally depend upon the mountain mint, or some diuretic 
more stimulating than the nitrate of potassa. 

"All epidemical malarial fevers have been observed to sub- 
side as soon as the atmosphere became cool enough to check 
the elimination of this malarious gas, which has for its legiti- 
mate office the support of the vegetable kingdom, which gas is 
not obnoxious to health only when it becomes too redundant. 
Yellow fever also abates with the chill of the atmosphere. 

"preventive. 

" The daily use 01 a solution of ten grains of pure nitrate of 
potassa, and ten grains of salicin, put in a half-pint of cold 
water, to be taken at three doses, morning, noon and night, 
say before each of the three daily meals. Another — Sweet 
spirits of niter, army strength, four ounces ; quinine, forty 
grains ; put the quinine into the spirits of niter ; in a few 
minutes it will be dissolved and be ready for use. Dose, two 
teaspoonfuls put into two ounces of cold water. Take such a 
dose three times per day. The use of either of these prescrip- 
tions will circumvent the occurrence of yellow, or any 
contagious or malarial fever with any person who shall be 
using it." 



YELLOW AND BLACK JAUNDICE. 

These diseases derive their names from the color they induce 
in the complexion. The first gives it an orange yellow color 
that first appears in the sclerotic coat of the eye, soon after 
which it is diffused through the whole cuticle. 

The latter gives the complexion a dingy brown hue, that is 
not uniform but appears in patches, mostly on the forehead. It 
also colors, more or less, the whole skin where it is exposed to 
the light. 

The yellow jaundice is caused by the liver being too much 
excited when the coledoct passage into the duodenum is 
inflamed and closed, causing an overflow of the bile into the 
circulation. 



172 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

This inflammation of the duodenal membrane that closes this 
biliary passage, is generally induced by the concatenating 
causes of a dyspetic habit, that causes the food to sour in the 
duodenum before it is passed forward. Its mucous membranes 
are inflamed thereby, and congested, until the duct is closed. 

The black jaundice is induced by a chronic obstruction of a 
portion of the capillary execretory ducts with minute biliary 
calculi. Having not the ability to send the bile forward through 
these obstructed ducts, it overflows into the venous circulation, 
and, it being in a small quantity to diffuse through the cuticle, 
the light changes its color to that of a dingy brown, called a 
mothy complexion. 

TREATMENT FOR THE YELLOW JAUNDICE. 

If the patient is free from fever, give warm pennyroyal tea, 
sufficient to make the patient moist ; then give tine, of lobelia, 
3 ss. in tepid water, f. J iij. to be taken all at once. Repeat 
this dose in 45 minutes, then take a dose every 30 minutes until 
it operates as an emetic. If emesis is not induced by giving 
ten doses, no more should be given at this time. If the liver is 
not thrown open during this effort, defer its repetition two 
days ; during this two days give nitrt. of potassa gr. xl., t. sang, 
can., 3jss.; leontedon terax, ex. gr. vi.; veratr. glob., 30 ; dis- 
solve the extracts and globules and niter in hot water, |iij. 
Dose, 3jss., every two hours during the day time. Proceed 
with the use of an emetic with the formula, during two days, 
and follow this procedure until the liver is opened by the use of 
an emetic once in two days until it is accomplished. Then 
give salicin, gr. x., added to the above preparation, and follow 
it until the patient becomes strong and the yellow tinge has 
disappeared, 

TREATMENT FOR THE BLACK JAUNDICE. 

Begin the treatment with a lobelia emetic, as directed for 
yellow jaundice. After the emetic has operated well, put the 
patient on the following prescription, for it will require one 
year to overcome the deranging causes and habits of the system 
that induces this disease: $ wahoo bark of the root, 4 oz.; 
boil and extract the strength, strain it off and boil it down to 
one pint; add dandelion ex. gr. xxx., t. juniper berries, 3iij - > 
t. wintergreen, |iv. mix, dose, 3ij three times per day for ten 
days, unless this quantity shall prove too laxative ; in such case 
take one-half the amount; after that take one drachm three times 
per day. The emetic should be repeated once in three or four 
weeks for three times, until three have been thus administered. 
Either use a little capsicum, or ginger tea, every time the 
bowels are painful. If the use of this syrup is judiciously used 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 1 73 

to keep the bowels and liver sufficiently open, and in that con- 
dition to secure one easy passage of the bowels per day, after 
taking up the first syrup, in about one year the complexion 
will become fair and the disease cured. 



SCARLET FEVER. 

SCARLATINA SIMPLEX. 



This mild form of the disease seldom assumes a scarlet 
appearance, unless the patient has been prostrated previously 
by some other form of disease. 

The most common cause of this type is impure air, the use 
of acidulous fruits that induce renal obstruction, and by 
taking a cold that induces congestion in the cervical portion of 
the spine, that obstructs nutrition in the membranes of the 
fauces and tonsillary glands. Sleeping too warm and in small 
and unventilated rooms ; to subsist through the night upon an 
atmosphere that is growing less in oxygen and increasing in the 
quantity of exhaled carbonic acid gas from the person or per- 
sons, to exhaust the atmosphere of vital support, and poison it 
until it can but feebly support life. With this enervated state 
of the system, renal and liver obstructions are resulting con- 
comitants, and the spine, under this systemic condition, 
collapses upon very slight exposures to cold. Cases of this 
type of scarlatina are sporadical and non-contagious. The 
proper safe-guards are proper ventilation of sleeping-rooms, 
proper clothing, and avoidance of acid fruits and sour bread. 

SYMPTOMS. 

Languor and debility, with loss of appetite, precede, for a 
few days, the febrile accession. The pulse is frequent and 
small at first ; inflammation of the tonsillary glands is a promi- 
nent symptom in all the forms of this disease, and which 
augments in intensity with the gravity of the type. When this 
local inflammation extends so deeply as to stricture the ascend- 
ing sympathetic nerves that join with the supercervical to take 
care of the brain, it then endangers fatal inflammation of the 
brain. Then the febrile symptoms become augmented, and the 
paralysis of the nerves of the skin, induced by cerebral conges- 
tion, connected with the great force of the heart, under its 



174 A - H - DAVIS' THEORY AND 

bounding pulse, the capillary arteries become ruptured thereby, 
and some of the red globules escape under the cuticular mem- 
brane, to induce the scarlet appearance. Then you have a case 
augmented to that of the second order, called scarlatina 
anginosa. 

Paralysis of the branches of the sympathetic nerves, that are 
sent out from the supercervical ganglia, to take care of the 
membranes of the fauces and salivary glands, leaves these 
parts without their vital support, and congestion, inflammation 
and ulceration must follow, if active measures are not insti- 
tuted to relieve the stricture that induces the paralysis of these 
nerves. 

SCARLATINA ANGINOSA. 

This form is the one that is stricturing the ascending sympa- 
thetic nerves that induces cerebral congestion, and the parotid 
as well as the tonsillary inflammation is present ; the febrile 
symptoms of which run so high as to induce the scarlet effu- 
sion. Then the danger lies more in cerebral congestion than 
in the canker that assails the salivary glands and surrounding 
membranes. When the brain is congested the skin is left in a 
paralyzed state, having no support sent to it from the brain, 
rendering congestion and effusion under a high febrile action 
of the heart inevitable ; consequently, the scarlet effusion is a 
pathognomonic symptom of dangerous cerebal inflammation 
dependent upon the stricture of the cerebral nerves by the 
tumidity of the salivary glands. Instead of it being a relieving 
symptom, which some authors have claimed to be fully a? 
necessary as that of measles, it is a dangerous advance. Mon 
cases die in this disease with inflammation of the brain thar 
from the damage that the glands and vessels in the throat sus 
tain. 

The most that is necessary in this case is the relief of thi 
paralysis of these vital cerebral nerves To accomplish this end. 
the tumidity of the congested membranes and glands of the 
fauces that encroach upon these nerves must be relieved. To 
accomplish this end, a strong decoction of marsh rosemary 
may be applied to the glands and cankered membranes of the 
fauces with a soft swab, and repeat it every ten or fifteen min- 
utes until the patient can swallow without difficulty; then its 
application may be protracted to one-half hour. 

When the fever is intense, sponge the whole surface over 
with soft warm water. If the patient is comatose, add tinct. of 
capsicum to it. The spine requires the application of a stim- 
ulating liniment to it once per day. The patient should be al- 
lowed to drink freely of a tea made of mountain mint, pennyroy- 
al, spearmint or peppermint. Open the kidneys with Nitrate 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 175 

of Potassa grs. xv, Aqua f. fij, dose, f. 3iij, every hour. At the 
same time give three-fourths of a grain of Podophy llin. After 
this has cleared the liver, give diaphoretic powders grs. ij, every 
three hours until the patient rests well and a gentle diaphoresis 
is effected. Care should be used to keep up an action of the 
kidneys and liver until the patient is convalescent. 
. As soon as the fever subsides give salicin grs. x, Aqua f. |ij. 
Dose, 3ss every half-hour. 

The marsh rosemary wash should be made from one ounce 
of the root to f. §j, of the decoction. To effect this, boil and 
strain off two or Fhree times to get out all of the strength, then 
boil it down to one fluid ounce. If this is faithfully applied, it 
will relieve the canker of the glands and membranes in a few 
hours, and the fever will subside as soon as this congestion re- 
lieves the stricture of these sympathetic cerebral nerves. 

This treatment has not failed to give prompt relief to cases 
in my hands in a practice of over a quarter of a century. 



DIPHTHERIA, 

OR SCARLATINA MALIGNA, 



Most usually occurs in a contagious form in February and 
March. This is only an aggravated state of the symptoms, 
from excessive glandular obstruction and morbific influences 
generated midst this contagion, in which the canker affects 
other parts of the system besides the throat and salivary glands 
as in the pylorus and intestinal mucous membranes. Its char- 
acteristic feature is the extension of the canker in the fauces 
over the diphtheretic membrane into the trachea. 

In this case of pyloric or gastric inflammation, the disease is 
ushered in with obstinate vomiting, and within the space of a 
few hours the salivary glands, fauces, and portions of the soft 
palate and cheeks, become involved in patches of white canker, 
and a high fever follows, under which all the morbific symp- 
toms rapidly augment in intensity, which, if not arrested, will 
terminate the case fatally in from twenty-four to forty-eight 
hours. The parotid glands ulcerate and discharge from the 
ears ; the tongue and soft palate accumulate sords that turn 
black and block up the passages, and a tough, ropy phlegm is 
secreted from the glands and palate that causes a rattling in 



176 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

the throat, and which greatly endangers strangulation. The 
soft palate and tonsils slough, and a corrosive diarrhoea some- 
times sets in that inflames the external skin wherever it comes 
in contact. The scarlet symptoms make an unusually early 
appearance, and fatal congestion and inflammation of the brain 
is rapidly progressing to relieve the patient from its forlorn 
condition. 

The sequela of this order of scarlatina are frequently of a 
very unpleasant character, such as disfiguration from scars, 
perpetual deafness, and loss of sight. 

TREATMENT. 

When this form of the disease is ushered in by vomiting, 
special treatment is required to relieve the pyloric or gastric 
inflammation. To overcome this inflammation, give a mild de- 
coction of marsh rosemary with fifteen grains of Nitrate of 
Potassa dissolved in it. ^ Marsh Rosemary one ounce, made 
in decoction f. §iij . Dose, f. 3ij> every one-fourth hour until 
the vomiting subsides, then give an enema of podophyllin 1^ 
grs. cut in *4z of alcohol, and add Aqua f. §3, oliveoil3j; mix. 
Use it at once and take pains to have it retained by making 
gentle pressure with a napkin on the perineum for some time, 
lhe balance of the treatment, except the use of the podophyllin 
by the stomach, is the same as that recommended in the order 
anginosa. 

The use of the pulmonary balsam should be freely enough 
to keep up the action of the tonsillary glands and membranes 
of the fauces, as soon as the canker becomes subdued, and fol- 
lowed until the patient's recovery is complete. 



ACUTE BRONCHITIS. 



This disease originates from an exposure to cold that chills 
the upper portion of the spine, and the oblongata. By the 
long exposure to cold, the thermal standard becomes sunk be- 
low that required for nutrition, and the periosteal membranes 
of the spine become so much congested and thickened as to 
encroach upon the nerves that pass out from the spine. 

A stricture of the eighth pair of nerves at the oblongata, as in 
pneumonia, is involved, and a partial suspension of nutrition in 
the membranes of the bronchia obtains ; and their capillary 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 1 77 

arteries become congested and inflamed. A very troublesome 
cough ensues to dislodge the effusion of serum from the mem- 
branes of these tubes, which is frothy at first ; but if the inflam- 
mation does not terminate by resolution, suppuration of the 
membrane follows. The expectoration then assumes a yellow 
pus-like appearance while the old membrane is being removed 
and the new one is forming to supply its place. The direct 
lesion lies in the state of the nutritive nerves that follow the 
ramifying arteries of these bronchial membranes. The belch- 
ing cough serves to aggravate the congestion to a state of ef- 
fusion, and to lessen the prospect of a termination of the in- 
flammation by resolution. Consequently early and prompt treat- 
ment are indicated to thus terminate the inflammation ; and as 
this case is one in origin and lesions analagous to that of 
pneumonia, the same treatment is recommended. 

The danger lies in the degeneracy of the case into one of 
chronic bronchitis, that often proves very intractable, if not fa- 
tal. But with the early and prompt treatment recommended, 
seldom fails to terminate a case favorably in the course of two 
or three days. The following is a succesful course of treatment : 

TREATMENT. 

Begin by giving a solution of nitrate of potassa gr. x, in cold 
water f. fiv, dose, 3iv, every one-half hour. At the same time 
give podophyllin grs. j, and repeat both the solution and the 
pod. if it does not operate well in twelve hours. After the liver 
is well cleared, give diaphoretic powders grs. iij, every three 
hours until the congestive cough subsides. After one day's 
treatment thus, give the following expectorant : Tinct. Lobelia 
f. rijss, tinct. peppermint 3ij, tinct. sang. can. f. 511J, tinct. tolu 
|ij,s. syrup Oiij; mix. Give of this mixture 3j, everyone, two or 
three hours, according to the demand, to relieve the cough. 
Apply a mustard paste between shoulders and apply the spinal 
liniment on the spine once per day. Also give a solution of 
the extract of hyoscyamus grs. viij, to the f. f sweetened, and 
add 3ss, of the tinct. of peppermint. Dose, 3j, three times per 
day. The room should be quiet and of a uniform temperature 
of 70 degrees. All the cold water desired should be allowed, 
and the diet should be of gruel. 



178 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

CHRONIC BRONCHITIS. 

For chronic bronchitis keep up the action of the liver by- 
giving one gr. of podophyllin once per week ; at the same time 
give the following syrup : T. lobelia seed, ^iss ; t. sanguinaria, 
^ij.; t. tolu, Jij.; t. podophyllin, grs. iv, cut in the above tinc- 
tures: t. pepperment, 3j.; road nettle, urtica diorca, |iv. Make 
decoction ^iv. and dissolve in this ex. hyos. grs. xx; refined 
syrup, §xv; old bourbon whisky Oj. Add the decoction to the 
syrup after all the other ingredients are well mixed with the 
syrup. Shake all well together, and it is ready for use. 

Dose, one teaspoonful three times per day, two hours after 
each meal. 

Apply the spinal liniment to the back of the neck, and 
between the shoulders at bedtime. Thus continue the treat- 
ment until the patient recovers. The fluid ex. of road nettle, 
f. Jiv., may take the place of the herb. 

DIET AND PRECAUTION 

Avoid using anything sour, exclude coffee and hot cakes ; 
avoid late hours and exposure to a damp or cold atmosphere. 
Do not lean the back against anything cold, or a cold wall, or 
allow a strong current of air to drive upon the back of the 
neck. or head. Wear a felt spine and chest protector during 
the cold winter weather. 



LUNG FEVER, OR PNEUMONIA. 

Pneumonia is one of the most frequent visitants of the tem- 
perate climates, and those of higher latitudes, causing great 
mortality when it is epidemical. The direct lesion in this 
fever is suspended nutrition in some of the lobes of the lungs, 
inducing congestion and effusion of the red globules that gives 
the rusty color to the expectoration. The mediate cause is an 
obstructed state of the pulmonary nerves of nutrition at their 
central root of one of the pneumogastric nerves that preside 
over nutrition in the affected lung. Congestion in the mem- 
brane of the oblongata, or a stricture of a portion of the nerve 
in its transit through the cranial passage, or through the neck 
to the chest, caused by taking a cold that congests and thickens 
the membranes that encroach upon these nerves to obstruct 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 1 79 

them. The cold that precedes an attack of pneumonia is 
usually inordinately severe, so much so as to induce congestion 
of the liver and renal organs, to obstruct them more or less in 
their functional work. 

The symptoms in the case are a very dry, belching cough, 
with rusty or bloody expectoration mixed with frothy mucus. 
A severe determination to the head, which becomes very pain- 
ful, often a severe pleuritic pain in the left side about the region 
of the heart ; great suffering by the patient in the region of the 
spleen, and a bounding pulse. When the case assumes a high 
continued fever, it is an unfavorable omen of an obstinate con- 
gestion, and will soon terminate fatally. 

All possible diligence should be used to alleviate every 
urgent symptom ; to moderate the fever and induce diaphoresis 
or sweating, as soon as possible, and to keep it up gently and 
continuously is very important. Keep the room dark and 
quiet, to allow gentle sleep, which is so necessary to control 
the head ache and abate the fever. By the observance of these 
sanitary means, the treatment will prove much more successful, 
when, by a different course, the best of treatment may prove 
unavailing, and the patient quickly fall a victim in this disease 
to a fatal hepatization of the congested lung. The lungs 
become tumid, filling the chest, and allow but little space for 
the inhalation of air, consequently it has to be carried on rap- 
idly to supply the system. This must be supplied constantly 
under all circumstances, or it alone would be a cause of death; 
by it being ever deficient, under any circumstances, is a cause 
of emaciation and debility, and every person who feels 
oppressed for the want of more air, can, by spending more time 
in the open atmosphere, find relief. Solar light and fresh air 
contribute more to the health than man will ever realize, for 
the reason that they are accustomed to live in houses. This is 
demonstrated in the lives of hunters and Indians. The system 
is a particular vessel, capable of receiving and imparting all 
the elements designed to benefit it. When these elements have 
imparted their divine treasure to the system, they retire and 
give place to the cavalcade of others freshly laden, to keep up 
the systemic supply. W T hen the skin lacks the ability to keep 
the thermal equilibrium when exposed to a lower temperature, 
a draft will be made upon the caloric more internal. When 
this thermal standard is sunk below 75 degrees, nutrition 
becomes suspended and congestion results. Preceding an 
attack of pneumonia, the upper portion of the spine is thus 
chilled, and its membranes thrown into a state of congestion. 
Obstruction of the liver follows. The congestion of the spine 
interferes with the insulation of the pneumogastric nerves to 
an extent to induce a partial suspension of nutrition in the 



l8o A. H. DAVIS* THEORY AND 

lungs, followed by conjestion and effusion. When the kidneys 
are so much obstructed as to cause deficient systemic nutriti- 
tion, a high fever with a bounding pulse will obtain to induce 
pleuritic pain and effusion to color the expectoration. When 
thus complicated, it takes the name of pleuro-pneumonia, and 
when accompanied with a continuous diarrhoea, it takes the 
name of typhoid pneumonia. To account for this typhoid type 
has mastered many eminent pathologists, the sanity of which 
may be elucidated by taking into consideration the abnormal 
conditions of the patient when being exposed to the chill that 
usually precedes the pneumonial congestion. This epidemical 
typhoid type of pneumonia very seldom occurs, except in the 
cold weather of the latter part of February, and with persons 
who have been too closely confined during the preceding cold 
winter weather in small, unventilated rooms, wherein the number 
of its inmates were sufficient to exhaust the atmosphere of its 
vital oxygen and replace it with animal carbonic acid gas. This 
state of the atmosphere causes deficient nutrition, renal obstruc- 
tion and liver inactivity, to induce waning systemic health to a 
state of debility that leaves the person subject, upon exposure 
to cold, to become prostrated with scarlatina, putrid sore throat, 
diphtheria, cerebro spinal meningitis, or pneumonia, the order of 
disease being dependent upon the nerve or branch strictured. 
While the system is laboring under this state of systemic pros- 
tration, the chill collapses the kidneys and liver, the renal se- 
cretions are carried into the circulation to obstruct the nutri- 
tion, and a high congestive fever follows. The diarrhoea is 
very seldom a present symptom in the first stage of the fever, 
and when it does occur, it is caused by this uric acid in the 
circulation being secreted by the liver from the blood, and 
passing it, in its acrid poisonous state, through the bowels, to 
inflame the membranes, and thereby keep up a continuous 
diarrhoea. This diarrhoea is one of the most formidable symp- 
toms to overcome in any type of fever, yet with proper precau- 
tionary treatment, it can be- avoided, as its occurrence is gen- 
erally induced by the use of a biliary cathartic before remov- 
ing the renal obstructions in the case ; but, by allowing a few 
hours to clear the circulation of its poisonous urea before pro- 
ceeding to open the liver, this precaution will allow the liver 
secretions to be pure to assist in chylosis and protect the 
digestive apparatus in its functional work of keeping up the 
supply of aliment for a speedy restoration of systemic nutrition, 
while the local congestion that strictures the pulmonary nerves 
that produces the suspension of nutrition in the congested 
lung is being overcome, and as these nerves are not injured, 
only mechanically strictured by the congestion of contiguous 
membranes, and sometimes by the tumidity of the parotid and 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. l8. 

tonsillary glands, direct local treatment is available to rendei 
valuable aid in effecting more prompt relief. 

TREATMENT. 

Begin the treatment by giving a three-grain dose diaphoretic 
powders, and repeat the dose every two hours until the patient 
perspires gently and takes some sleep ; then give one once in 
two and a half hours. Also, at the same time, begin the use of 
the following diuretic solution : Put 20 grains of nitrate of 
potassa into one-half pint of cold water, and add one teaspoon- 
ful of the tincture of wintergreen. Take a tablespoonful every 
half hour until it is all taken. Also, lose no time in the 
application of a towel wrung out of hot water, and apply it 
around the neck as hot as it can be borne, and change it every 
five minutes for three or four times, leaving the wet towel on 
the neck and cover it with a dry napkin. If there is pleuritic 
pain in the chest, apply a similar hot fomentation over the 
seat of the pain, changing every five minutes, and continue 
them until the pain subsides ; then remove the wet cloth and 
apply a dry flannel. Three hours after beginning the use of the 
diuretic, give from two to four half-grain sugar-coated podo- 
phyllin pills, according with the age and constitution of the 
patient. After the liver is properly opened, and the bowels 
have moved as a cathartic, begin the use of the pulmonary 
balsam, in one teaspoonful doses every hour, until the lungs 
feel free from any inclination to cough; then give four grains of 
salicin, dissolved in two tablespoonfuls of cold water ; take such 
a dose four times per day until the patient feels strong and 
well. The patient can be allowed the use of cold water to 
drink in small quantity, sufficiently often to slake the thirst. 
In case the bowels do not move from the use of the podo- 
phyllin pills, in twelve hours, the dose should be repeated, for 
the congestive symptoms will not fully subside until the liver 
is properly opened. If the patient be a child that cannot take 
a pill, in such a case, give half a grain of podophyllin powder 
in a teaspoonful of milk, and allow a drink of milk to follow 
the dose. 

The diet should not be heavier than gruel, until the fever 
subsides. It is good practice to apply a stimulating liniment, 
to be applied the whole length of the spine and around the 
neck once per day ; also, to inhale the volatile gas from the 
oil of peppermint. Put one drachm of the oil into an ounce 
phial, then, by holding the phial in the warm hand, will fill the 
phial with the gas, which may be inhaled for 10 or 15 minutes 
at a time, and repeated at pleasure as long as the lungs are 
irritable. With the subsidence of the fever and the cough and 
a return of the appetite, the treatment may be considered ended, 



1 82 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

but while any morbid symptoms remain, the kidneys and liver 
must be kept gently open. This course has not failed to relieve 
such a case in from two to three days in the author's hands for 
thirty-three years. 



HAEMOPTYSIS, 

OR, A DISCHARGE OF BLOOD FROM THE LUNGS. 

Hemorrhage from the bronchial tubes is of very seldom 
occurrence, compared with its occurrence from the pharynx, 
palate, and nasal fossae ; the last of which contributes to make 
up the great majority of cases of spitting of blood. 

As the patient is generally unable to determine the source of 
the leakage, the alarm induced is equally great when it occurs 
from these unimportant sources. Hemorrhage of the lungs is 
a very important disease, one that demands a careful consid- 
eration in this work. 

DIAGNOSIS. 

Spitting of light red arterial blood is an indication that it 
proceeds from the lungs ; while venous blood, of a darker hue, 
is that which usually proceeds from the mucous membranes of 
the fauces and adjacent parts. Generally it is more profuse 
when emanating from these veins. To make up a genuine case 
of this disease, we must find the periodical collapse of assimi- 
lation in the extremities, accompanied by a sinking stage, with 
a slight chill, that induces an apoplectic determination to the 
lungs and brain, connected with a congestive, suffocating 
feeling in the lungs. The pulse becomes small and frequent ; 
a fine, nervous, prickly pain is experienced in some parts of 
the chest, that immediately precedes the coughing up of florid, 
arterial blood, which usually continues thirty minutes, after 
which the chill reacts into a slight febrile stage, that is of short 
duration, and the patient feels more comfortable again. Thus 
an exacerbation usually culminates daily, at a specific hour, 
yet in a minority of cases it culminates at alternate days, and 
occasionally at much greater intervals with females. 

In this disease there is not more than one-fifth of the cases 
that are affected with tubercles in the lungs. The points at 
which this leakage takes place is that of nutrition. The hur- 
ried force of the heart under arterial plethora induces 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 1 83 

congestion and effusion from the capillary arteries of a 
debilitated lobule of the lung, wherein nutrition is but tardily- 
effected. 

As the pathology of haemoptysis has not hitherto been satis- 
factorily presented by medical authors, it is quite important in 
this series of discourses that its concatenating causes should be 
clearly pointed out. 

When the lungs and chest are large, an abundance of room 
is offered for the circulation of air and blood needed for the 
system under a very deliberately slow respiration and arterial 
motion. Then the venous and arterial circulation equally 
balance without plethora in either system. 

Paralysis of the numerous capillary nerves that preside over 
nutrition, in a section of the lung, will induce the congestion 
on which the capillary rupture depends. Sections of the lungs 
are under the control of nerves that ramify it with the arteries 
to the points of nutrition. By reason of a chronic debility of 
these nerves to assimilate barely the quantity of blood sent to 
the part by a gentle and uniform motion of the heart, and the 
chronic debility of the capillary arteries to resist pressure, 
when a hurried motion of the heart occurs, congestion and 
effusion occur by distending the capillary vital arteries of the 
membranes of the bronchia into which the blood escapes. 

This hemorrhage cannot be attributed to tuburcular abscess, 
for it has been shown in the process of breaking down by 
abscess, that the matrix of the abscess securely seals the cap- 
illary arteries and veins around the tubercle, preparatory to the 
suppurative process, and that after the pus is removed, this 
matrix officiates to secrete from these abcess walls the 
plastic lymph required in which to relay these vessels anew. 
When this process is perfected, this matrix, like a callus formed 
around a fractured bone, is absorbed and disappears, it having 
no further offices to subserve. 

The ulceration of the membranes of an air cell never occurs 
until all the vessels that lead to it are first securely sealed by an 
investing matrix to preserve the vital fluid. Therefore, this 
hemorrhage must not be attributed to this cause, but sought in 
one more philosophical. Neither can this hemorrhage be 
attributed to any defect in the concert of action between the 
two ventricles of the heart, for the All-Wise Creator, in insti- 
tuting the heart for this service, well comprehended the 
necessity of securing perfect concert of action of the two 
ventricles with each other, in order to prevent the damaging 
effects that would occurfrom plethora in the circulation through 
the lungs, if the two ventricles of the heart were placed under 
the control of the separate hemispheres of the system, that 
would permit of an irregular action of these ventricles. Con- 



184 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

sequently, the heart is organized in such a manner as to contract 
both ventricles with one muscular arrangement that proceeds 
from the venous blood in the right ventricle, thereby securing an 
equal force to clear the lungs that is used to fill them. Both 
ventricles contract and dilate in direct concert with each other. 
The diastolic motion draws the venous blood from the vena cava 
to fill the right ventricle, and at the same time the left ventricle 
is drawn full from the lungs ; and at the same moment, when 
the systolic motion sends the arterial blood from the left ven- 
tricle into the circulation, the venous blood is sent into the lungs 
by the right ventricle, the arrangement of which admits of no 
possible means of suppressed action or delay. Consequently, 
to look for this derangement in an incidental defect in the 
working of this organ is absurd, for no principle in physiology 
or pathology of the diseases of this organ of an incidental 
character, will bear us out in the suggestion. For in palpitation, 
quick, frequent, or slow pulse, both ventricles participate in at 
the same moment ; and as this disease is periodical or inci- 
dental, it evinces that it is not due to organic disease of the 
mitral valves of the left ventricle that prevents them from 
patening ; for if they were thus deranged, the retrograde force 
into the lungs would be continuous and not incidental. Neither 
can it be looked for in the deficient size of the left ventricle, 
by which the right ventricle forces a greater quantity of blood 
upon the left ventricle than it can forward in each throe. If 
this disparity existed in these ventricles, death would ensue in 
a very short space of time. The only part the heart plays in 
this disease is that of its exhilerated force and frequency. 

This is the order of the ordinary procedure of an attack 
of this disease. In the duration of the disease it makes poor 
and defective capillary vessels, that incline to rupture under 
much less force than when in a state of integrity. Just in pro- 
portion to this depraved standard of organization will be the 
tendency of the capillary arteries to give way to a given force 
of the heart in times of pulmonary congestion. If some one 
of the lobules of the lungs shall be laboring under deficient 
nervous support, and consequent debility to an extent to 
become congested under the nervous prostration and arterial 
excitement, connected with an exacerbation in this disease, it 
is subject to rupture these capillary arteries that yield to the 
force of the heart. 

Again, when this condition of the system obtains, hemorrhage 
can be induced by any brisk and long-continued muscular 
effort, that shall over-drive the circulation to congest the weak 
portion of the lung. The author has witnessed several cases 
of rupture of these vessels under these circumstances. 

Consequently, great care should be used not to excite the 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 1 85 

circulation unduly while laboring under this habit of the system. 

The general debility that paves the way for this derangement 
is generally induced by glandular obstruction and spinal dis- 
ease, but when it assumes its periodical form, it evinces the 
presence of a malarial intermittent, with the other concatena- 
ting symptoms, which must be treated under that head. 

This disease is made up of the primary stage of phthisis 
pulmonalis, and an immoderate circulation beyond the resist- 
ance of the enfeebled vessels, that become rended when the 
circulation is impeded by this sectional lung congestion. When 
hemorrhage is induced by undue muscular effort, that excites 
the heart to powerful and rapid action, the hemorrhage then is 
incidental ; and its recurrence is dependent upon a repetition 
of a similar excited state of the circulation. Yet it will recur 
under much less effort until the rupture has recuperated. The 
periodical type is the one that belongs to haemoptysis proper, 
the congestive symptoms of which rupture the same vessel at 
each exacerbation. 

TREATMENT. 

The indications of cure are : First, to arrest the hemorrhage 
when it is present, by a use of four grains of the extract of 
hyoscyamus, dissolved in a little hot water, to obtain its effects 
more speedily. This will usually, by its sedative effects upon 
the heart, and tonic effects upon the pulmonary nerves, suspend 
the hemorrhage within five minutes, by it operating to suspend 
the arterial force and the pulmonary congestion that induces 
the impediment to the circulation, and that induce the rupture. 
The hyos. ex. should be repeated in one grain doses every four 
hours for four days. 

When the hemorrhages are periodical and connected with a 
chill, the treatment advised for an intermittent fever should be 
used to restore glandular action and perfect systemic nutrition. 

This course will restore the action of the paralyzed nutritive 
nerves, and nutrition in the lobule of the lung will perfect the 
vessels to standard strength and activity. 

Also, give the following : I£ Winter break root or marsh 
rosemary root 3ij, made in decoc. f. 3iss, t. xanthox 3iv, ex. 
leon terax gr. xx., fluid ex. of wahoo f. %) ; dissolve the extract 
of leon terax in the decoction and mix. Dose, 3j three times 
per day. Gentle exercise should be indulged in, while care 
should be used to prevent any unusual arterial excitement. 

The idea that is generally entertained, that the cough must 
be suppressed for fear of inducing the hemorrhage, should be 
abandoned, as the cough is not capable of inducing the excit- 
ing cause, neither is that of a full inflation of the lungs. Avoid 
inclement weather and the night air, also the use of anything 
sour. 



l86 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

PHTHISIS PULMONALIS, 

OR TUBERCULAR FORMATION IN THE LUNGS. 

The subject of tubercular formation becomes particularly- 
interesting when considered in connection with phthisis pul- 
monalis. Therefore I design to treat the subject in a manner 
calculated to elucidate the three stages of phthisis pulmonalis. 
The lungs are composed entirely of nerves, tubular circulating 
vessels of the finest order, and an elastic membranous tissue 
that composes the air cells. Every fiber and part of this vis- 
cus is constantly under the recuperative charge of the vital 
nerves and arterial blood sent to it to minutely ramify in every 
part. 

These very delicate vessels and membranes are dependent 
upon the purity of the blood and the integrity of the vital 
nerves to assimilate it into their structure. If the blood shall 
contain proper elements, the conversion then depends upon 
the proper quantity and quality of the electric elements to 
chemically combine with and direct the order of the structure 
of each part. If the system becomes incapacitated to provide 
the pure blood, assimilation will be defective and the vitality 
of the organ lowered, together with all parts of the system. If 
the vital nerves become obstructed by congestion of the spine 
in the foramina of the cervical vertebra, so as to interfere with 
the insulation of the pulmonary nutritive nerves, so as to 
suspend in part the transportation of the electric elements 
suitable for active nutrition, the arterial capillaries become 
congested ; then comes sad glimmerings of the necessity 
for these tubercular formations. Great danger is just here 
maturing a breach between the capillary arteries and nerves. 
In this condition the assimilative point in the arteries mis- 
placed from the terminus of the nerve, causing defective as- 
similation and a neurotic deposit in the terminal sac which 
is being formed by this congestion. The burrowing process 
now begins, preparatory to their removal to restore the normal 
condition, by the process of breaking down by suppuration, 
(which article see under this head in this work). For want of 
arterial support, by reason of its displacement, the neurine is 
lost in this fungus or tubercular deposit, which has to come 
under the alternate law of abscess for its removal and reform- 
ation of the part. 

An improved condition of the quality of the circulation and 
the nervous insulation is necessary to secure the success of 
this regenerating work. 

By bringing these facilities to the aid of the systemic powers, 
this process may be as effectually successful in the lungs as in 
other parts of the system. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 1 87 

The primary cause of phthisis pulmonalis most usually pro- 
ceeds from severe congestion of the spine, which obstructs, to 
a greater or less degree, some of the nerves that support the 
lungs and the large glands. This spinal congestion is usually 
produced by a severe cold. The severity of this congestion 
and its duration very much depend upon the season of the 
year in which it occurs. 

The latter part of winter, after the systemic powers have be- 
come enervated by seclusion from the atmosphere, which pre- 
disposes the spine to severe congestion upon being unduly 
chilled for a great length of time. This condition of the sys- 
tem renders it subject to part with its caloric with greater ra- 
pidity than when more vigorous, and in this state of nervous 
prostration, the rally from the congestion is more difficult, and is 
one that is apt to degenerate into chronic organic derangement of 
the spine, if neglected. The primary congestion lies in the spine 
and the secondary one in the organs. The origin of pulmon- 
ary congestion depends upon the degree of paralysis of its 
nerves and the duration of the spinal congestion that perpet- 
uates the paralysis. Every part must receive its quota of elec- 
tric element to insure assimilative or nutritive support. If in 
some parts this supply is cut off, capillary displacements may 
result from the congestion induced. Every willing nerve holds 
in readiness the supply needed for the waste of every organ 
and tissue in the system ; consequently when they are unob- 
structed and the arterial blood is pure, continuous health will 
obtain. This tubercular displacement cannot obtain until the 
resistance to arterial force has been greatly debilitated by an 
unusual systemic decline, by long-continued glandular obstruc- 
tion that disarms the nervous system to properly support the 
vital organs. This is followed by defective chylosis and hsema- 
tosis, and a state of chlorosis necessarily results from these 
causes. This constitutes the tubercular or scrofulous cachexia; 
and tubercular deposits may obtain in any part of the system 
when the nervous support is cut off, while the system is labor- 
ing under high arterial excitement. 

Various causes may constitute the first departure from health 
that eventuates in this scrofulous cachexia, which constitutes 
the predisposing cause of phthisis pulmonalis. 

Impure air, improper diet, a disparity between great mental 
activity and muscular action, while leading a sedentary life, as 
is usually the case in our literary institutions. During the first 
invasive effects of these causes, but little more than a lassitude 
and a diminished appetite are experienced, which vacillate 
between better and poorer days. Presently the poorer days 
amount to quite an indisposition, and the patient is less brilliant 
on the better days. This disparity is not very observable at 



1 88 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

first, but eventually it becomes very much more apparent. 

A sallow appearance, with a bluish tinge to the sclerotic coats 
■of the eyes, mark the approach to a state of chlorosis. The 
patient complains of taking a cold from slight exposure, that 
induces hoarseness and a tickling cough, that is augmented by 
brisk exercise of the lingual organs in talking or laughing. Not 
much alarm is produced by the cough at first, which is generally 
neglected, fancying it would soon subside of itself, as it used 
to when they were stronger. Under this enfeebled state of the 
spine and lungs, upon taking a severe cold that congests the 
spine from the cerebellum to the vicinity of the inferior cardiac 
plexus, cuts off the vital support of the pulmonic nerves, and 
under the high febrile arterial excitement that follows, the lax 
capillary arteries yield to tubercular displacement, before the 
too powerful force of the heart for their resistance, after which 
much suffocating oppression is experienced in the lungs. 

This spinal derangement usually first obtains at the superior 
cervical plexus, that at first induces a catarrhal cough, with 
phlegmy expectoration ; and as the spinal derangement advan- 
ces downward, the second and finally the third plexus becomes 
obstructed, and by reason of this gradual descent of the spinal 
derangement from above downward from the first to the third 
sympathetic plexus, is the reason assigned for the upper portion 
of the lungs being assailed by tubercles first. 

The resources of the system must be soon exhausted when 
the tubercular habit is formed, unless every systemic aid is 
brought to the rescue. In a dogmatical system of practice, 
that is out of harmony with systemic law, how much recupera- 
tive aid can be expected from it ? The sentence of " weighed 
in the balance and found wanting" is written upon the mineral 
practice in this, as in all diseases that cannot rise without 
correct medical aid. Total suspension of treatment is much 
preferable to the use of mercury, antimony, arsenic or iron. 

This disease, above all others, is calculated to test the extent 
of medical ability t<5 comprehend systemic law, and to sift the 
different theories of practice, by reason of its great mortality. 

Dr. Kost says that " it has been estimated that in Europe 
one-fifth of the annual number of deaths take place from this 
disease, and we have woful evidence that the proportion is not 
much less in America. 

u In New York, the average number of deaths by consumption 
is computed at 243 in 1,000, which is nearly one-fourth. The 
city inspector, in his report for the year 1839, makes the whole 
number of deaths 7,953, of which 1,315 died of consumption, 
460 of inflammation of the lungs, 36 of inflammation of the 
chest, 28 of bleeding from the lungs, 28 of congestion of the 
lungs, and 72 of bronchitis — total, 1939." 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 189- 

As the public mind is demanding a specific to overcome this 
cachexia, demagogues have seized upon the opportunity to fill 
their coffers by offering pretended secret specifies, and are with 
flaming bills heralding their certain success, with forged vouch- 
ers so numerous that it would seem that for one to die of 
consumption it must be due to an ignorance of these potent 
remedies. Persons affected with this disease are not usually 
apprised of the great departure from health, or how low the 
system has fallen, the nature of the effort required, nor the 
great length of time necessary to raise the systemic powers to 
a healthy standard again. Consequently, the fickle-minded 
patient will not give any one physician a sufficient length of 
time to make a point in their case, under the most sane treat- 
ment. Therefore, to overcome this instability, it becomes 
necessary that the patient should be informed of all the bearings 
in the case, and of the sanitary routine necessary to pass 
through, by which to regain his lost physical powers. In 
treating phthisis pulmonalis I have had an extensive experience, 
and the valuable discoveries thereby gained I am willing to 
contribute to the profession. I will honor talented authors 
who are disposed to contribute the value of their experience to 
the fraternity of practicing physicians ; for I am aware that an 
immense amount of valuable knowledge that has been derived 
from experience, has been lost to the world for the want of such 
liberal contributions. 

Public security from the ravages of disease requires the 
preservation of every axiom gained for the promotion of this 
science. Therefore, I have spared no pains to contribute what 
knowledge I have gained to this end. Questions quite numer- 
ous, and very important to a correct pathology of disease, and 
a successful practice, which were unanswered in the books,, 
became a source of great embarrassment to me in my early 
practice. These questions I have taken much pains to explain 
in this work. These explanations are calculated to not only 
render this disease more tractable, but nearly the whole cata- 
logue. Beginning my investigations in the plane of systemic 
law and the resources of life, and prosecuting them through the 
various abnormal changes that constitute the pnenomena of the 
different diseases, and finally closing them in a series of general 
remarks upon the choice of remedies and correct medication. 

The particular surroundings of the patient, which tend to 
depress or cheer the mind,[have more importance in this lesion, 
to hinder or promote the work of recuperation, than one would 
suppose not being familiar with the powers of the mind over 
the system. The damaging effects of mental torture, from the 
mistaken idea that no one can recover from this disease, has 
defeated the salutary efforts of much judicious treatment, that 



190 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

might have proved a success under the inspiring influence of a 
more buoyant hope. The principle is this : to administer to 
the mind the balm of hope, of the accessible points in the 
case to be attained in the path of success. This is to mind 
what an anodyne is to the irritable frame, giving that relaxation 
and rest needed for recuperation. Lost vitality is a thing not 
so easily reclaimed as to expect it to return unsolicited. It 
must be sought with great diligence in all the avenues of the 
vital resources, for in this decade of health the fountains that 
were wont to swell the rivers of life, and make green and fra- 
grant the plains of health, one by one begin to fail, almost 
imperceptibly at first, but as sure as slow, until the drouth of 
the desert parches all the once fresh and vigorous scene. Then 
to the fountains of health we must go, when the river fails, and 
the whole plain is famishing below. These fountains of life, 
Divinely chaste, are adequate to every supply ; they suffer no 
waste. 

Renewed efforts to command a more vigorous supply of 
physical power must be instituted. That the most vigorous 
muscular efforts flow from the soul though the will, no One will 
attempt to deny. An energetic soul inspires a resolute will 
that develops great physical power. Then, if we have ceased 
to call for vigor by shunning labor until the muscles can but 
feebly respond to the will, these steps must be gently and care- 
fully retraced, as a means of bringing the soul and body into 
closer sympathetic relation to each other, to restore the sys- 
temic powers. If we have lost vitality by seclusion from the 
open air, we must train ourselves carefully, without undue 
exposure, to stand the gentle breezes of the atmosphere which 
is the conservatory of the human molecules, which are little 
thunder-bolts in themselves, armed with the divinest electricity 
to invigorate the human frame. Have we lost our health by a 
waste of vitality in a wanton life ? In this I find more impaired 
constitutions than by that which arises from chaste labor or 
excessive dutiful cares ; while midst these errors we should 
take an early alarm at our waste of vitality, and let the review 
teach us to mind our ways, and learn that obedience to physical 
law is health. 

The popular idea of a gentleman is to be able to live without 
labor. % Therefore labor, which is one of the greatest sources of 
health, is rendered unpopular and disgraceful ; consequently, 
labor is shunned by all classes when they wish to appear 
respectable. The idea is not of American origin, and since all 
men here are equal before the law, it is to be hoped that it may 
meet here with an early subversion, and the highest caste of 
respectability be given to industry, intelligence and virtue. 
Such a popular idea would reduce bills of mortality by con- 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. I9I 

sumption seventy-five per cent., by thus preventing the 
constitutional decline on which the disease is dependent. Will 
the day fail to commend those notable mothers who trained 
their sons to respect these three cardinal virtues, the result of 
which are now embodied in the principles of the free institutions 
of our model government ? 

Justice to humanity, undermined by popular prejudices, has 
never demanded so great a sacrifice as this one, which asks the 
populace to retire from the fountain of life, to secure the caste 
of a popular dogma. 

In making up my diagnosis of phthisis pulmonalis, I want 
to find first the points at fault, at which vitality is wasted. If 
my case is in the first stage, I can usually detect and remedy 
them. If the case is in the second stage, I shall find that this 
stage has been rendered possible by the prostration in the 
first, and that, upon an unfortunate exposure to cold, severe 
spinal congestion was induced that infringed upon the insula- 
tion of the nerves of pulmonary support. Then came severe 
pulmonary congestion in these deranged parts of the lungs, 
where the congestion was carried by the bounding force of the 
heart to this damage in the capillary arteries of the lungs. I 
shall find the hurried respiration, the small, frequent pulse, the 
dull sound under percussion, the crepitating sound, like the 
bending of sole leather, the collapse of the inferior portion of 
the sternum, much pain in the region of the spleen, that 
extends up the left side of the chest towards the heart, the 
spine lame between the shoulders, and in the neck, and feel- 
ings of partial suffocation, the kidneys obstructed, parched 
hands and feet, causing the nails to roll and become very 
brittle. The prudish state of mind makes the patient find 
fault with every dish, much of which is due to the state of the 
brain and nervous system. 

In the third stage, I must find the decade of the two former 
stages, and in addition thereto, the puriform expectoration that 
evinces the breaking down of tubercles ; a very exhausting 
cough is induced in keeping the bronchial tubes cleared of 
pus. 

The hectic lever, with its three stages, the cold stage, that 
continues about forty minutes, followed by a febrile stage that 
gives a flushed cheek and an increased velocity and volume to 
the pulse, which numbers from 120 to 130 per minute. This 
stage lasts about two hours, when it gives way to the third 
stage, that of the colliquative sweat. Each exacerbation that 
composes these three stages occupies the space of about six 
hours. 

In this last stage, if the system is not well supported and the 
circulation rendered sufficiently pure to enable the systemic 



I92 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

powers to successfully renew the parts being removed, the 
case will degenerate to a fatal terminus in the space of three or 
four months. When this stage becomes complicated with an 
obstinate diarrhoea, it is a very unfavorable omen. It is indi- 
cative of the breaking down of the mesenteric lymphatic glands, 
connected with endo-enteritis, the last of which bars recuper- 
ation and exhausts the system very rapidly. 

The three stages of this disease call for additional treatment 
for all the new lesions that compose them. 

INDICATIONS OF CURE IN THE FIRST STAGE. 

The first stage, which is noticed by the sallow countenance, 
debility, predisposition to catarrhal colds, arising mostly from 
glandular obstructions and spinal debility at the pulmonic ner- 
vous centers, suggests the following indications of cure: The 
kidneys require stimulating to a competent ability to uniformly 
and properly depurate the circulation. The torpidity of the 
liver must be overcome and barely raised to a standard of 
action by gentle alteratives, to secure a good appetite, prompt 
digestion and natural movements of the bowels. The spine 
requires a shielding and stimulative protection against the col- 
lapse it is subject to from slight exposure to cold. This treat- 
ment is important to support the system, while the regimen 
required in the case is regaining possession of the vital powers 
to a competency to subsist by the harmony of systemic law, 
without the aid of remedial agents. The regimen suggested is 
to seek the pure open atmosphere, that has not been exhausted 
of its vital elements, divinely designed to invigorate the system, 
avoiding inclement weather and night air. 

The wasted muscles and their lost powers that have failed 
for the want of a resolute will to command them, must be con- 
scripted and martialed into actual service again, until their 
energy is competent to support the vital organs. This muscu- 
lar training should be carefully graduated by a daily increase 
of effort that shall only keep pace with the muscular ability, 
developed and conducted with that moderation that shall not 
increase the frequency of the pulse more than ten per minute. 

The patient should be sponged over with soft tepid water, 
containing bicarb, soda 3j. to one quart of water every morning, 
and rubbed off briskly until dry with a coarse towel, and it 
should be conducted in a way not to induce any chill. At 
evening use the flesh brush briskly. If any portion of the 
spine feels obstructed, let some person percuss the spine with 
the hand several times per day. 

Mirthful company is well calculated to give elasticity to the 
mind and vigor to the system that facilitates digestion and 
refreshing repose. The hours of sleep and recuperative rest 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. I93 

should not be trenched upon. In the inclement season, fine 
madder red flannel should be used for undergarments, to excite 
more activity in the cuticle and preserve the caloric. The 
neck and spine require special protection when going out in 
the winter weather ; care, also, should be taken not to inhale 
the cold air through the mouth to chill the trachea and lungs. 
That which is inhaled through the nasal fossse is partially 
warmed before it reaches the lungs, so as not to chill the mem- 
branes of the trachea and bronchia below the standard for assimi- 
lation, for congestion thereby is very easily induced in these 
membranes in cases of spinal debility. 

The diet should be nutritious and of easy digestion, and 
great care should be used to masticate it well. The articles of 
diet can be selected from the catalogue of those not excluded 
in the dietetics in this work. 

TREATMENT FOR THE SECOND STAGE. 

When the first stage is neglected until the systemic powers 
have lost their control over the capillary arterial resistance in 
the lungs to the powerful throes of the heart, under severe 
spinal congestion and consequent nervous paralysis of the pul- 
monary vital nerves, the termina of the capillary arteries yield 
to that displacement on which the immediate cause of the 
tubercle is dependent. • 

Thus is inaugurated the beginning of the second stage. In 
this stage we find the case complicated by this tubercular 
derangement, in addition to the great general debility. 

In this stage greater resolution on the part of the patient and 
professional skill are required to overcome the tide of circum- 
stances that are setting in against the case. 

The additional indications of cure in this stage to that of the 
first, are to improve the spine at the pulmonary nervous center. 
Unless this point is guarded against subsequent attacks, the 
systemic powers will decline in each of their repeated efforts to 
provide the aid required to construct and circumscribe the 
bounds of the tubercular matrix for relaying these deranged 
capillaries successfully. At each of these repeated congestive 
attacks, the case becomes more complicated by the waste of 
recuperative power and the extended field of tubercular 
derangement. Degenerated power is one of the causes of the 
capillary displacement, and an improved condition of the 
systemic powers is indicated to support these enfeebled ves- 
sels. The system must be supported by every possible means, 
to enable it to construct the matrix so as to closely circum- 
scribe the bounds of the tubercle to be displaced. This is the 
object sought to be accomplished in this second stage, and 
which paves the way for the success of the third and last stage 



194 A - H - DAVIS THEORY AND 

by the breaking down of the tubercle and relaying these 
capillary vessels and nerves in the plastic lymph. This is the 
modus operandi that the system uses to adjust these capillary 
nerves and arteries in proper position to each other for the 
resumption of perfect assimilation. 

The original idea was, that to succeed in the case, the tuber- 
cles must be absorbed without suppurating, and that when the 
tubercles break down by suppuration, it is a hopeless surrender 
to a destruction of so much of the lungs. 

This solution I have given to teach the rational means of 
successfully aiding the system to triumph over this perilous 
condition, known as phthisis pulmonalis, or consumption. 

The treatment in this stage includes all that has been intro- 
duced in the first stage, and in addition thereto, to provide 
against a nervous tickling cough that is damaging to the re- 
cuperative processes instituted in the lungs, and as has been ex- 
plained, to provide against the repetition of the congestive 
cause. Carelessness to have this point unguarded will defeat 
the most judicious course of treatment in the case. 

The sanitary course to pursue is too important and compli- 
cated for a patient to undertake without the advice of an intel 
ligent physician, who by experience will be better en bled to 
comprehend all the points in the case. 

Treatment in the different stages is founded upon the dif- 
ferent derangements found to be present in the case. 

TREATMENT FOR THE FIRST STAGE. 

In the kidney derangement I would suggest the use of the 
following formula : I| Tinct. Lupulin 3iij, Queen of the Mead- 
ow |iss (fluid extract), Tinct. Xanthox 3vj, S. Syrup |ij ; mix. 
Dose, three-fourths of a drachm four times per day, or in doses 
adequate to overcome the torpor and maintain a competent 
action of the kidneys to properly depurate the circulation. 

The torpor of the liver can readily be overcome by the use 
of podophyllin in alterative doses, given often enough to se- 
cure a natural passage of the bowels once per day. 

To support the nervous system, use extract of Hyoscyamus 
in one grain doses four times per day. 

To protect the spine, and aid its recuperation, sometimes 
use the spinal plaster and at other times use the spinal liniment 
on the spine every night, or every other night, as the case 
seems to indicate. 

TREATMENT FOR THE SECOND STAGE. 

In this stage, wherein the systemic powers require more sup- 
port, and to lessen the inclination to cough due to capillary 
congestion, give in addition to the treatment of the first stage: 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 1 95 

r} Salicin grs. x, Tinct. Opii. m.xv, Tinct Juniper ~ss, Leon 
Tarax ex. grs. x. Dissolve the extract and Salicin in warm 
water, 3iij, mix and add S. Syrup sufficient to make two ounces. 
Dose, 5ss, four times per day. 

TREATMENT FOR THE THIRD STAGE. 

In this stage we are called upon to safely carry the patient 
through the most perilous crisis in this disease. This stage ad- 
mits of no margin for mistakes. The plastic lymph of the ab- 
scesses must be preserved to lay the fibers and vessels anew by 
first intention, or fistulous abscesses will follow to exhaust and 
carry off the patient. 

In this stage we find the hectic fever, which is induced by 
the circulation becoming so highly charged with the puriform 
matter as to obstruct assimilation ; then comes the chill and 
arterial plethora, and the febrile reaction to resume assimila- 
tion, and thereby save the debilitated vessels of the lungs from 
ruinous congestion. 

Then follows the colliquative sweat, which is an effort in 
this dilemma to depurate this excess of impurities in the cir- 
culation through the pores of the skin. If the cause of this 
hectic fever is overlooked or neglected, and the fever allowed 
to continue, it will defeat the successful relaying of the removed 
tissue. Happily all of the mischief of this fever can be pre- 
vented by saving the necessity for its occurrence. Prompt ac- 
tivity of the renal organs to keep the circulation free from this 
puriform matter and other impurities not only saves the neces- 
sity for this damaging fever, but it furnishes a pure circulation 
to insure the secretion of that pure plastic lymph necessary for 
a perfect resurrection of the removed tissue of the lungs. 

As this renal inactivity in this disease is generally divided 
between glandular obstructions and nervous prostration, the 
course for the physician to pursue to resuscitate the activity of 
these organs, is clearly pointed out, which is to stimulate the 
kidneys with proper diuretics, and to tone up the nervous sys- 
tem to enable it to properly support the organs. . 

The use of the prescription given for the second stage, if 
given in doses adequate to support the nervous system and 
keep up an efficient activity of the kidneys, will carry this point ; 
remembering to always keep up a gentle and uniform action of 
the liver as directed in the first stage. 

If the patient is found in a debilitated state, colliquative 
sweats will occur from the relaxation of too deep a sleep. To 
provide against this symptom, give the fluid extract of the star 
root in one-fourth drachm doses, diluted in two of water, four 
or five times per day, until they subside. 

If expectoration is difficult, a good expectorant should be 



I96 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

given to save the damage that labored coughing may do to the 
recuperative process in the lungs. Give for an expectorant 
diaphoretic powders gr. ij, every three or four hours, or as ne- 
cessity may require. One more important symptom that is 
subject to occur, in which we must constantly bear in mind to 
guard against, or at least not to induce by the use of colagogue 
cathartics, which is a diarrhoea dependent upon inflammation 
of the mucous membranes of the bowels, which inflammation 
frequently extends to the mesenteric lymphatic glands. When 
it becomes thus obstinately seated, the food and fluids will be 
hurried rapidly through the bowels, chyliferous absorption is 
suspended, thereby barring further support from the chyle, and 
causing the patient to sink rapidly. 

Consequently, whenever the bowels become too lax, prompt 
attention should be given to this dangerous symptom. In such 
case give some soothing remedy at first, such as a decoction 
of marsh rosemary, in small and repeated doses, until the symp- 
toms subside ; and if it shall assume a more obstinate form, 
the remedy should be given sufficiently prompt to overcome it 
in a few days. 



ii- 



LARYNGITIS, 

OR, INFLAMMATION OF THE LARYNX. 

This disease is one of the violent order, that has taken off its 
captives by thousands ; and, in point of fatality, it is not secon- 
dary to that of phthisis pulmonalis (or consumption), when it 
is not arrested in its acute stage. 

This human scourge is admitted to be more prevalent where 
the country retains the water in the soil for the want of drain- 
age facilities ;• virtually a flat country with a hard-pan bottom 
that contains a deep alluvial soil above it. The direct cause 
of this disease is irritation of the mucous membrane of the 
larynx. The epidemical order is usually attributed to a re- 
dundance of carbureted hydrogen in the atmosphere. The in- 
halation of coal gas that escapes into the room from a poor 
stove, is the usual predisposing cause in the winter season. In 
periodic cases a chronic spinal derangement in the cervical 
centers usually precedes an acute attack. This spinal conges- 
tion is most commonly present in all epidemical intermittent 
fevers, but in this case it is acute. 

In the acute stage of the epidemical order, the danger lies in 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. I97 

the effused fluid being converted into a fibrinous phlegm too 
tenacious to be expectorated, and which accumulates in the 
larynx until it suffocates the patient. By the irritability of this 
membrane a severe cough is induced that is almost incessant, 
whilst a severe determination to the upper portion of the spine 
and larynx obtain. More circulation is forced upon them than 
can be assimilated in their half-paralyzed state ; consequently, 
under a high febrile action of the heart, this congestion obtains 
that permits of this fibrinous effusion. 

To keep these vital nerves from being obstructed by the spi- 
nal congestion, is the most accessible means of saving the case 
from degenerating into this dangerous state. The next, is to 
control the circulation, by the use of arterial sedatives, to give 
time for this nervous center and these membranes to recuper- 
ate. When the patient is too severely attacked to secure this 
point by the use of the internal remedies indicated, a strong 
stimulating liniment should be applied to the external larynx 
and back of the neck, to assist the nervous recuperative rally 
to terminate the inflammation by resolution. Much is to be 
gained in this disease by timely aid, for it not unfrequently 
terminates fatally in from twenty-four to forty-eight hours, and 
the fatal mischief frequently obtains within twenty-four hours, 
even when the case is protracted several days. If the case has 
become chronic, much time will be required to remove the 
causes that prevent these membranes from recuperating. Many 
carefully selected remedies have been exhausted by these 
chronic cases. The inhalation of various stimulants has been 
resorted to with no better results. Then the question arises as 
to what encouragement we have for these unfortunate sufferers ? 
Once, I had none ; but from a more perfect acquaintance with 
the systemic law, I find that this disease is rendered tractable, 
when all the systemic resources can be enlisted by a proper 
course of medication to make a new effort to recuperate the 
lesion. The various undermining derangements that prevent 
the recuperation of this organ must be overcome and turned 
into allies of support. This course is the safe method that se- 
cures the success that attends this practice. 

The damage that occurs from imperfect digestion makes the 
disease more intractable by disqualifying the circulation for ac- 
tive nutrition. The point is not to be gained short of directing 
a course of treatment that shall secure pure arterial blood, and 
a free circulation in the vital nutritive nerves that preside over 
the diseased part. This pure blood will support combustion 
and energetically combine with the electric radical base fur- 
nished by the nerves in abundance, to supply the demands of 
the part. Having these points gained, we have attained the 
means of success. 



I98 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

TREATMENT. 

In the acute stage, while the powers of the system are in a 
tolerable state of activity, prompt response is expected from 
remedial agents. If then the remedies shall be so judiciously 
directed as to aid the systemic powers in their first and most 
powerful efforts to regain the lost balance of the nervous cir- 
culation, the derangement will be overcome, and the inflam- 
mation will terminate by resolution, without leaving behind a 
chronic weakness. 

In the acute stage, to allay the nervous irritability of the 
system, give diaphoretic powders, five grains, and repeat the 
dose every three or four hours. To aid in overcoming the cer- 
vical spinal congestion, apply a mustard paste on the back of 
the neck and one over the larynx ; remove them before they 
vesicate the cuticle. Also give a solution of nitrate ofpotassa 
grs. xv, in water f. Jii, give 3iv, every hour until it is all taken. 
At the same time, after giving a dose of the solution, give 1 ^ 
grain of podophyllin, and repeat the dose every twelve hours 
until it moves the bowels. 

On the second day's treatment, substitute the above for the 
following : First, give Old Jamaica Rum f. 3iii, in hot water 
f i, for a dose, and repeat the dose every five hours, if there is 
no fever to contra indicate it. In case of the presence of 
febrile symptoms, substitute the rum for diaphoretic powders, 
three grains every three hours until the fever subsides. 

The spinal liniment should be applied to the back of the 
neck and over the larynx once per day. Make a decoction of 
marsh rosemary root 3iv, boil fifteen minutes, strain off and 
make f. fij ; give three-fourths of a teaspoonful every hour while 
it lasts. Do not take anything to wash it down, for its local 
effect is needed in the fauces. Use the pulmonary balsam freely 
enough to subdue the cough. Great care should be used to 
prevent the patient from taking cold. The diet should be light, 
excluding animal food and everything sour until the cough en- 
tirely subsides. 

The treatment for chronic laryngitis requires a very differ- 
ent course from that of the acute, based, as before stated, upon 
the systemic derangements present in the case. In a chronic 
case the cough will be as obstinate as are the membranes slow 
to recuperate ; and, if every facility in regimen and diet are 
not used that are indicated to improve the case, it will be 
protracted to render the chances of recovery less favorable. 

The treatment should be such as will secure the two great 
points in the case : the purity of the blood, and a free circula- 
lation of the vital nutritive nerves in the laryngeal membranes. 
These facilities, when gained, and these only, will terminate 
the cough. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 1 99 



WHOOPING COUGH. 

This is a lingering disease, and not unfrequently it proves fa- 
tal, surpassing in obstinance many diseases of greater import. 
Every disease has its local seat and lesion. In this case the 
rim of the glottis is involved. 

This disease has ever been considered contagious, and the 
closest investigations leave no doubt of the correctness of this 
conclusion. By my observation in the disease, I find that the 
distemper first originates by the patient being too much ex- 
posed to cold, and by the frequency of such exposures, induces 
congestion in the superior cervical nervous center, which in- 
duces paralysis of the vital nerves assigned to the care of the 
glottis, which results in congestion and inflammation of this 
organ. 

The disease at first has quite a fever connected with the lo- 
cal inflammation. The patient, having generally been in a 
healthy state, no danger is apprehended from such ordinary 
exposures ; but, after being exposed to this disease, the usual 
protective powers are weakened by causing nervous weakness 
in this cervical center, which is congested at such exposures. 
Whenever the patient becomes exposed to the contagion, this 
incubative work is going on, troubling the brain and medulla 
spinalis, making a smothering cough by collapsing the glottis, 
when the whooping sound is produced. The spine is conges- 
ted, and when the cough is severe, it is due to the glottis not 
being properly supplied with nervous elements to clear the 
capillary arteries in the mucous membrane of the glottis, and 
a spasmodic cough results from the fibrinous effusion from this 
membrane ; the cough being an effort to expel it, to keep the 
air passage open. 

If this passage is allowed to become obstructed one minute, 
under such circumstances, life will become extinct ; hence, the 
acute sensitiveness of the trachea and bronchial membranes as 
safeguards to perpetuate life. Whenever these tubes approxi- 
mate towards a state of obstruction by fibrinous phlegm, an 
unendurable tickling sensation is experienced, which induces 
the cough ; and this sensation will keep it up until the obstruc- 
tion is expelled. Therefore, the cough is a safeguard to keep 
open the lungs when they are diseased, and not a cause of the 
obstruction. This secretion must be suppressed by inducing a 
restorative of the circulation in the vital nerves, and the con- 
gestion in the membranes will subside. By keeping up this 
action a sufficient length of time, it will effect a cure. When 
a patient is first attacked with whooping cough, if proper meas- 
ures are used to relieve the spinal congestion, and perseverance 



200 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

is used to hold it under control for eight or ten days, the dis- 
ease will subside; otherwise, if the patient is subject to frequent 
exposure to cold, and the neck not properly protected, it will 
be subject to continue for a great length of time, and notunfre- 
quently until severe bronchitis results, and finally ends in fatal 
pneumonia. 

The best time to subdue it is when it makes its first appear- 
ance, when the patient is fuller of vigor than at any subse- 
quent period of the disease; and, like all other diseases, the acute 
stage is the one that puts forth the greatest effort for recovery, 
and is the one that requires less medical aid to succeed. 

If advantage is taken of the earliest stage, it will yield to 
treatment much easier in the acute stage, when the effort of the 
systemic rally is put forth to try to overcome these obstruc- 
tions alone. Then caution should be used to prevent any 
further exposure for quite a length of time. For soon the 
lungs begin to take on the same condition, and the cough will 
be increased in proportion to the extent of the congestion. 
When danger exists of suffocation, the lungs are always impli- 
cated, and the only way to furnish remedial aid is to give a 
good expectorant ; then resort should be had to glandular and . 
spinal remedies. This will necessarily have to be continued 
in a judicious manner for ten or fifteen days. When the case 
is slight, it only affects the mucous membrane of the glottis, but 
when it becomes more severe, it paralyzes and weakens the rim 
of the glottis, so much so that when coughing severely it col- 
lapses, and under this collapse the whoop is produced in an 
extra effort to fill the lungs. 

TREATMENT. 

Begin the treatment by giving nitrate of potassa, 10 grs. in 
solution of decoction of hops ?ii; dose 3i every hour, until it 
is all taken. Six hours after beginning the use of this solution, 
give from one-quarter to one grain of podophyllin in milk ; 
repeat every twelve hours until it operates well as a cathartic. 
Then give the following expectorant : B T. sang, can., 3iv; T. 
lobelia seed, 31V.; T. of tolu, 3iv.; T. of anis, 3ss.; T. opii, 3i.; 
add simple syrup, |viij. Shake all until well mixed. Dose, 
one-half drachm as often as the cough returns, night and day. 
Also, give 1 drachm cf the syrup of rhubarb every night, and one 
in the morning also, if required, to keep the bowels a little lax. 
This treatment usually relieves the case in about two weeks. 
It is well to apply the spinal liniment on the back of the neck 
occasionally, and use due care to prevent the patient from 
taking a cold, and avoid strictly the use of anything sour. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 201 

DYSPEPSIA. 

Dyspepsia is a deranged state of the digestive apparatus, by 
which a large portion of the aliment is lost to the system by 
acidifying in the stomach before it passes the pylorus into the 
duodenum, to do its damaging effects upon the membranes of 
the consecutive organs in its passage. The term dyspepsia is 
a wholesale expression, not to be used when a single organ of 
the apparatus is affected, but it signifies a general derangement 
of all the digestive organs, arising from a common cause. 
Each of these organs, when deranged, have their terms to 
express it. Inflammation of the stomach is called gastritis, 
that of the duodenum, duodenitis, and that of the small intes- 
tines, enteritis; consequently, when authors wish to use a term 
to express that all these organs are involved in inflammation, it 
is called gastro-enteritis, and the terms acute and chronic are 
applied to it ; consequently, the terms dyspepsia and chronic 
gastro-enteritis are one and the same thus far ; but the term 
dyspepsia may be further extended to keep in view the pro- 
gressive mischief of the deranging cause. 

Constipation of the bowels is the first observable derange- 
ment. This is referable to a torpid state of the peristaltic 
nerves of the duodenum and the other portions of the small 
intestines. 

Duodenal congestion contracts and obstructs the foramina of 
the ductus choledochus, and causes an accumulation of glan- 
dular secretions in the ducts of the liver and pancreas, which 
becomes a source of pain, also various symptoms of a general 
character accompany this obstruction. Among them are nausea, 
palpitation of the heart, headache, flatulence, cramping pain 
in the bowels, and vinous fermentation of the food in the 
stomach. By the morbid state of the pylorus, the chyme is not 
permitted to pass until it has undergone the process of vinous 
fermentation. In this process, the alcoholic element gener- 
ated relaxes the pylorus, and the sour chyme is allowed to pass 
into the duodenum. Tke gas eliminated induces the flatulent 
pains in the bowels, and to save the damage the system would 
incur from the passage of this sour chyme into the chyliferous 
circulation, the mucous membranes of the jejunum and ileum 
become at the presence of it spasmodically contracted to pre- 
vent its passage into the circulation, but in its passage it tends 
to inflame the ileo-csecal passage, which often results in acute 
diarrhoea. When the membranes of the alimentary canal 
become morbidly obtuse to the presence of this sour chyme, 
they cease to wholly protect the system against its passage into 
the circulation. From this standpoint numerous diseases take 
their further complications. Among them are biliary and 



202 A. H. DAVIS THEORY AND 

renal calculi, tracheitis, bronchitis, phthisis pulmonalis and 
heart disease. The favorable opportunity to avoid these com- 
plications is prior to much systemic decline. 

TREATMENT. 

Begin the treatment by giving one grain of podophyllin ; at 
the same time give a solution of niter. I£ nitrate of potassa grs. x; 
aqua §iv. Dose, 3ij every half-hour. After the bowels have moved, 
begin the use of the following prescription : I£ wahoo bark of 
the root, one ounce or fluid ex. §i.; marsh rosemary root, 3iij; 
bi-carbonate of soda, 3ij; licorice ex., 3viij; fluid ex. of cypripe- 
dium, 3vi; colocynth, grs. x ; tinct. wintergreen, 3ij ; ex. dan- 
delion, grs. xl; T. juniper berries, 3j ; s. spirits of niter f. §j ; 
ex. hyoscyamus, grs. iij, dissolved in the hot decoction. Boil 
the wahoo and rosemary a half-hour and strain off, and add the 
ex. of licorice and boil it until it dissolves; then boil it down to 
five fluid ounces ; add the bic. of soda after the boiling is 
finished, then add two and a half ozs. of refined sugar ; add 
the colocynth, and when cold, add the other ingredients, and 
when well mixed it will be ready for use. Dose, one teaspoon- 
ful. Take eight doses per day for ten days ; then drop off two 
doses per day until you have four doses per day. 

If it shall be needed to keep the bowels open, occasionally 
take one podophyllin one-half gr. sugar-coated pill at bed time 
when needed. Stop taking the syrup when the symptoms are 
improved, so as not to require it. 

If afterwards, by taking a cold, the symptoms shall return, 
have resort to the same until it is overcome ; then suspend the 
treatment, &c. 

DIET. 

Use boiled rice, good stale bread and butter, soups of oysters^ 
clams and mutton, corn bread, mush and butter, soft boiled 
eggs, and two drachms of maderia wine, added to the mush 
and butter ; sirloin of veal broiled, roasted veal seared well ; 
sauce ; prunes, blue berries and figs. Use best Japan tea. 
Avoid every thing sour. Use the flesh brush on the spine and 
chest every night ; also use the spinal liniment on the spine 
every second night. Dress comfortably and use gentle exer- 
cise. 



ASTHMA. 
This disease has been hitherto considered as being among 
the obscure secrets of the unknown principles of the physiology 
of the lungs, and the involuntary motor nervous system. By 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 203 

reason of the subtle combination of derangements that culmi- 
nate this disease, and its great intractability in the hands of 
the majority of physicians, and the great amount of suffering 
it induces, its great importance demands a very critical analysis 
of all the abnormal conditions that are found contributing to 
derange respiration. 

Asthma is usually divided into two kinds, the idiopathic and 
the consecutive; but I think a more consistent division is that 
of the irregular intermittent, that may recur at any moment, 
recurring perhaps every hour and of but a few moments' dura- 
tion, and the periodically intermittent,that recurs usually twice in 
twenty-four hours, between the hours of twelve and two o'clock 
a. m., and four and six o'clock p. m., the paroxysm of which 
usually lasts from one to two hours ; both varieties being of a 
spasmodic character, but the latter is less severely suffocating 
than the former. A fit of irregular spasmodic asthma is usually 
heralded by a strictured feeling in the chest that augments into 
a severe spasm, that seems to threaten a total suspension of 
respiration j but as it reaches its maximum, a large quantity of 
glairy mucus is expectorated the spasm subsides and allows 
the patient to respire comfortably again. An attack of the 
periodical order is usually preceded by a sinking feeling, the 
extremities become cold, and the labored breathing augments 
antil a cold, clammy sweat drenches the whole surface of the 
patient. The countenance becomes haggard, anxious and livid, 
evincing great distress. The chest feels strictured, and the 
respiration has to depend upon the voluntary efforts for its 
continuance or perpetuity until the spasmodic condition sub- 
sides. This condition is from one to four hours duration, after 
which the patient becomes comfortable until another periodical 
attack. Persons affected with this disease are more subject to 
it in the warm, muggy months, that are dependent upon south 
winds, which induce a light atmosphere deficient of oxygen. 

The direct cause of an asthmatic paroxysm is the suspension 
of the nervous circulation in the sympathetic functional nerves 
of the lungs, and the involuntary motors of the diaphragm. 
Here allow me to remark that the position I take to explain the 
cause of this disease is based upon my physiological discover- 
ies of the functional nervous arrangement of the lungs for the 
work of hsematosis and the involuntary motion of the diaphragm, 
which article see under the head of Hcematosis and Diaphragm- 
atic Motion ,\n this work. The sympathetic ::ervous system be- 
comes disqualified to properly support the diaphragmatic motion 
whenever a paroxysm is present. The question arises as to the 
cause that thus disconcerts these functional nerves at the time 
of this paroxysm. I answer that respiration is dependent upon 
the motion of the diaphragm to fill the lungs with air, and the 



204 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

chemical work of arterializing the blood, upon a discharge of 
the electrical element for haematosis from the functional nerves 
that terminate at the air cells. These functional nerves of the 
diaphragm and lungs arising, as they do, from the same nervous 
centre, sympathize with each other as follows : As soon as a 
full tension of the membranes of the air cells is reached to 
elicit this electrical emission, the diaphragm is relieved of its 
contractile force, and the lungs allowed thereby to collapse. 
Thus these two branches of sympathetic nerves reciprocally 
carry on the work of respiration. 

This pulmonary derangement is induced by the draft made 
on the sympathetic nerves to arouse some delinquent organ to 
perform its offices ; as that which is made to remove severe 
obstructions from the biliary excretory ducts leaves the sympa- 
thetic respiratory centres without an adequate support for the 
work of respiration. The tension of the air cells not being 
effected, the diaphragm is left in a strictured state, that calls for 
bringing into use the voluntary nerves and muscles of the dia- 
phragm, in order to subsist during the paroxysm. 

The principal part of the nerves of motion are at the com- 
mand of the will, to do the work of protecting the person, and 
providing for the demands of life in a physical world. But 
those which impel the circulation and respiration were of 
necessity important labors that must be regularly continued, as 
well in the unconscious, slumbering state, as that of a wakeful, 
conscious one. Consequently, the Divine left not these impor- 
tant functional labors subject to the caprices of a finite mind, 
but placed them under the provisional rhythmic forces divided 
between the structure of the organs and the supporting energy 
of the sympathetic nervous system, which is ever in harmony 
with the state of the systemic powers, and in close sympathy 
with the standard powers of the vital nervous system, be they 
strong or feeble. 

Prostration of the system is the predisposing cause that 
permits of the diversion of the systemic from the ganglionic 
support. This unmans the renal organs for promptly depurat- 
ing the circulation of the impurities therein contained. The 
liver becomes obstructed by the improper stimulus of these 
impurities left in the circulation by this renal delinquency ; 
then the brain and spine becomes quickly injured by the poor 
quality of the blood used for their recuperation. Gossamer 
fibers cannot be composed of gross material. The gross 
material will enlarge the calibre of these nervous fibers to the 
detriment of their insulation. With these derangements pres- 
ent, a high arterial excitement will induce a great derangement 
in the lungs, and engorge the membranes of the air cells so 
much as to lower their sense of the stimula of the oxygen. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 205 

The instantaneous relief from a fit of asthma derived from 
the inhalation of the smoke of burning stramonium and salt 
petre pastiles, is effected by the nervous reaction induced from 
the strangling effects of the inhaled smoke. 

This circumstance reveals the nervous character of the 
disease, and forces the conclusion that a paroxysm is symp- 
tomatic of derangements in other organs. 

To elucidate all the concatenating causes that contribute to 
this systemic decline manifest in this disease, we must begin 
first with impurities in the circulation, biliary obstruction and 
spinal congestion, that admits of nervous debility barely able 
to support the organs in a state of equilibrium. When the 
system is thus prostrated, any derangement of the system that 
calls for a periodic nervous rally, will bring on a periodic fit of 
asthma. When a damaged state of the pulmonary air cells 
obtains, then every excitement that induces much nervous 
diversion from its uniform balance will contribute to an 
asthmatic paroxysm. There are many other disposing causes, 
such as an impoverished atmosphere, musty dust, sleeping on 
feather beds, over-distended stomach with gas or food, indiges- 
tion, over-taxing the brain with exhausting mental effort, etc. 
No disease is so justly deserving of close observation for 
careful treatment as this, and no disease requires more care in 
diet and regimen, in order to rise above the prostrated condition 
on which the disease depends. 

The withered parts must be resuscitated and turned to the 
work of self-support, and thereby contribute its surplus power 
to the stamina of the system. Some cases are much more 
complicated than others ; the simple order yielding readily to 
an invigorating course of treatment, while the most complicated 
order requires much time to overcome the many abnormal 
conditions that prevent recovery from these asthmatic symp- 
toms. Frequent and short respiration helps to keep the system 
in a debilitated state, while deliberately full inspirations 
contribute to invigorate the system. The inhalation of car- 
bonic acid gas will render life extinct in a few moments ; the 
absence of free oxygen to induce the combustion in the lungs 
is this fatal cause. Therefore, an atmosphere unimpoverished 
of its oxygen, is required for the greatest measure of health. 
To inhale more oxygen than that contained in standard 
atmospheric measure will be subject to induce ruinous com- 
bustion in the lungs. Comfortable lodging on a spring bed ; 
excluding feathers ; supply the room with fresh air and light. 
Damp rooms, high-colored carpets and dust, are objectionable. 
Use pure soft water to drink, and temperately abstain from the 
use of alcoholic beverages. With these sanitary measures, and 
a judicious course of treatment that will overcome the 



206 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

derangements on which the debility depends, will, with proper 
time, restore the health of the patient. The points to be 
observed are, a prostrated nervous system that but poorly 
supports systemic nutrition, direct spinal congestion at these 
ganglion centres. Sour chyle is one of the most frequent 
causes that irritates the sensitive membranes of the air cells, 
and when carried into the circulation often induces neuralgia 
of the brain and the medulla spinales. The damage it does to 
the brain is a source of debility that is of much injury to the 
organs in disarming them of their functional powers. The 
next most damaging cause is that which proceeds from renal 
secretions being turned into the circulation. This inflames the 
pancreas and liver, and renders the case more complicated by 
thus obstructing nutrition to induce systemic decline, and 
render recuperation more difficult. 

It will be a judicious plan to treat this disease upon the 
principles laid down under the head of each derangement 
present in the case. When the patient has an asthmatic par- 
oxysm, if the strictured diaphragm can not be overcome by 
powerful voluntary efforts to inflate the lungs to full expansion 
of the air cells, it will be best to do it by the inhalation of smoke 
of burning asthmatic pastiles, or, which is nearly identical with 
this, is to inhale the smoke of dry, thick, brown paper that has 
been saturated in a solution ol nitrate of potassa. ^ Nitrate 
of potassa, grs. 60, water f. 3J. One thorough strangling inha- 
lation will so thoroughly inflate the air cells as to elicit the 
nervous expenditure at those points that relieves the strictured 
state of the diaphragm. Then, by using a little effort for full 
inspirations for a little time, the paroxysm will subside. In 
pursuing this course, it gives momentary relief and saves the 
strength of the patient, while the remote causes are being 
overcome by a judicious course of treatment. Immediately 
after subduing a paroxysm, begin the use of the following 
prescription : r^ Hyoscyamus grs. 40, ex. dandelion grs. 30, 
t. juniper berries 3ij, veratrum globules, No. 2, fifty, nitrate of 
potassa grs. 30, fl. ex. of wahoo f. |j ; dissolve the extracts in 
hot water f. |ij, and the nitrate of potassa and globules, and 
when it gets cool add the other ingredients ; then add simple 
syrup f. |iij. Dose, 3j diluted in water f. 3SS. Take such a 
dose every three hours, and take an extra dose when the stric- 
tured breathing shows its appearance. If the paroxysmal 
attacks are severe, this preventive dose should be two drachms. 
If the amount of wahoo in this prescription does not keep the 
bowels sufficiently open, more maybe added to suit this neces- 
sity. If the liver shall at any time become obstinately 
obstructed, as is frequently the case, it should be cleared by 
one grain of sugar-coated podophyllin pills ; then proceed to 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 2CJ 

keep it open by the use of wahoo syrup. If the patient is 
much debilitated, or the case is periodical, support the system 
by the use of the following : Sweet spirits of nitre, 2 fluid 
ounces, quinine grs. 20 ; dissolve the quinine in the sweet 
spirits of nitre. Dose, f. 3j, diluted in water f. 34- Give such 
a dose three times per day. Suspend its use when the patient 
becomes sufficiently strong to do without it. 

When the case proves unduly obstinate, it is usually due to 
a great number of small concretions that obstruct the small 
capillary biliary ducts of the size of onion seeds. The author 
expelled and preserved a two-ounce phial full from a case of 
severe asthma in Fox Lake, Wis. They were dark brown, 
and looked much like onion seed. An occasional lobelia 
emetic will dislodge them all. The debilitated spine may 
derive much benefit from a good stimulating spinal plaster. 

When dyspeptic symptoms arise, they should be relieved by 
remedies recommended under that head. If the patient is 
intemperate, he must abandon the use of all alcoholical stimu- 
lants, as they tend to perpetuate the disease. The different 
phases this disease assumes with different persons, and even 
with the same person, renders it a difficult task to make out the 
most judicious course of treatment to persons for each variety 
of complications. Therefore the proper course to pursue is to 
give due attention to every deranged organ in the case, until 
the systemic harmony is restored, using judgment to deter- 
mine the amount of doses needed in the case. The author 
has had great success in the use of the following treatment : 

TREATMENT. 

To relieve a fit of asthma, dissolve 10 grains of extract of 
hyoscyamus in hot water one ounce, tincture of lobelia seed 
10 drops ; tincture of bloodroot 10 drops ; sweeten with one 
teaspoonful of sugar, and add tincture of wintergreen 15 
drops, or one-quarter teaspoonful. Give one-third of it for a 
dose, and repeat it every hour until the asthmatic tightness of 
breathing subsides. Then prepare a solution of nitrate of 
potassa, 30 grains in a half-pint of cold water, and add T. of 
peppermint five drops. Give one tablespoonful every half 
hour for three hours ; then igve one and a half grains of podo- 
phyllin in milk ; then use a dose of the solution once per hour 
until it is all taken. After the liver is well cleared by the oper- 
ation of the podophyllin as a cathartic, prepare the following : 
3 Hyoscyamus extract (Henry Thayres), 60 grains ; extract 
of dandelion 60 grains ; nitrate of potassa 60 grains ; tinc- 
ture of juniper berries, 6 drachms; tincture of blood root 6 
drachms ; tincture lobelia seed 2 drachms ; fluid ex. of wahoo 
2 ounces Dissolve the extracts in two ounces of hot water, 



208 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

and add the nitrate of potassa, and when cool add the other 
ingredients. Then add one pint of sugar syrup. Dose, one 
teaspoonful, and repeat the dose every two or three hours, 
unless the wahoo in it proves too laxative. In such case, take 
less, and add extract of dandalion 30 grains to each two ounces 
of the syrup. 

The object to be attained is to keep up a good action of the 
kidneys ; keep the liver only gently open, and that the asth- 
matic symptoms be controlled by the use of hyoscyamus in 
divided doses as small as will suffice. Some persons will require 
more than others. The patient will not bear tonics or ardent 
spirits. The diet should be free from everything sour, and 
avoid sleeping on feather beds, and see that the room is well 
ventilated where it will not blow upon the patient. Use a 
stimulating liniment on the spine once per day. 



SCIATICA. 

This disease is one of quite frequent occurrence in cold 

climates. 

The knowledge of its precise lesion has been a subject of 
autopsical search, but being discouraged by this fruitless 
source of information, it has been abandoned, and its local 
cause left to conjecture and speculative opinion. 

In all my cases of sciatica, I have inquired into their previous 
habits and conditions of their systems, and I have found the 
concatenating causes leading to an induration of the neurilem- 
mas of the sciatic nerve and its branches, which are sent to 
he hip and knee joint. This deranged state of these neuril- 
emmas is mostly due to glandular secretions turned into the 
circulation. The membranes of the sacrum suffer from the 
same cause, and the nervous system becomes helplessly pros- 
trated and sensitively irritable, so much so, that upon the least 
excitement a nervous pain shoots down the limb. 

Between the cylindrical cortical lamina of the nerve hun- 
dreds of delicate gossamer fibres are stowed in a bundle, which 
are coursing their way from their centers, sending out slips 
along the way for every part of the limb. While their insula- 
tion is undisturbed, no sensation is realized the felicity of 
health reigns. The dependencies for the duration of this state 
of health are perfect depuration and suitable elements for 
food, proper temperature, good judgment in avoiding exposure 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 209 

to every detraction from the balances of health. During the 
different attacks of suffering the patient undergoes, there will 
be a direct prognostic symptom of an incipient stage of the 
disease. Here are the symptoms: The back feels as if it was 
broken at the loins ; the failing strength is daily apparent ; 
the ambition usually wanes with the progress of the disease 
and loss of strength ; colds are acquired upon slight exposure, 
at which time the person begins to feel a pain in the lower 
limb under the knee ; the internal cord of the thigh feels tense 
and sore. Living thus defiant of the internal organic derange- 
ments, the system will daily decline. Among the causes that 
lead to this decline are : excessive labor, broken rest, exposure 
to wet and cold while in an exhausted state, and a habitual use 
of acids. A severe cold forms a crisis for glandular obstruc- 
tion that precedes spinal debility, thickening and induration of 
the neurilemmas of the nerves. A corresponding derange- 
ment obtains with the digestive organs, and the dormant nerves 
martial a combined force for the resuscitation of the strictured 
sciatic nerves; consequently, in this rallying effort, a fever arises, 
and with it the subsultus pain that becomes more unendurable 
as the disease progresses. With the continuation of the cause, 
the system rapidly sinks, and the patient becomes exhausted 
from the intensity of the pain. 

In this agony and loss of vitality, we find that the proper 
treatment will relieve the distress and restore the patient, if 
seasonably instituted. In an early stage of this disease, no one 
is more tractable to remedies, but cases of long standing are 
groundless of all hope. 

The indications of cure are to relieve the pain, to support 
the nervous system, the renal organs and liver in their func- 
tional work. 

TREATMENT. 

Give English or solid extract of hyoscyamus, in three-grain 
doses, and repeat the dose every hour until the patient is quiet 
and can get some sleep. Then skip three hours ; then give 
four or five grains every three hours, or as often as needed, to 
keep the patient tolerably free from pain. 

Also, at the same time, give a solution of nitrate of potassa, 
grs. xx, in aqua f. §iv. Dose, f. tss, every hour. Also 
use the following : r> T. sang. can. 3ss ; T. lobelia seed, 3j ; 
simple syrup, f. §ij.; tine, pep., Zji- Dose, 3j every hour. 
After the patient has got some relief from the pain, give two 
grains of podophyllin to open the liver. After the cathartic 
has operated well, give salicin grains v, every two and a half 
hours. Judgment must be used to keep the liver and kidneys 
gently open for a long time. Use the spinal liniment On the 
spine once per day. 



A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 



TETANUS. 



Much that has been written upon this disease has had its ten- 
dency to create that excessive alarm in the patient that tends 
to make the derangement more intractable. The one incision 
that is most disposed to tetanus is in the flexor tendon of the 
thumb. Help must be immediately obtained to prevent this 
alarming disease when this tendon is injured. 

The sanity of tetanus reveals an important systemic law 
designed to preserve the system rather than to destroy it. In 
allowing the air to come in contact with the wounded tendon 
causes an exceedingly painful inflammation. This excessive 
pain causes the bold herculean effort to relieve suffering, and 
to restore the part. The irritating cause being continuous, 
throws the muscles into a state of partial, or complete, rigid 
contraction that the will cannot control, as the exciting cause 
continues. The dermoid tissue (or skin) is given to protect 
the internal tissues from the caustic effects of the atmosphere, 
which is one of the most exciting causes of pain to an open 
wound. If tetanus should occur from neuralgia in the dental 
nerves, it is called trismus or lock-jaw. If it occurs from 
neuralgia of the womb, it induces contractions of the muscles 
of the back, called opisthotonos. If the contraction is upon 
the anterior muscles of the spine, it bends the person forward, 
and is called the emprosthotonos. Tetanus is called complete 
when the greater number of the voluntary muscles of the body 
are contracted. In this case, the flexor and extensor muscles 
antagonize each other, so that the body is not bent in either 
direction. 

The danger lies in not supporting the nervous system suita 
bly to relieve it from this diversion, before the vital nerves 
become exhausted by it. Seldom do we meet with a case of 
inflammation of the internal psoas muscles to induce the for 
ward flexure called emprosthotonos tetanus. 

The suppuration of the injured tendon is the point that 
most surgeons fix upon as the cause of tetanus. If this is the 
case, what causes it when it is not of the traumatic order 
wherein no tendon has been injured ? Damage to a muscle is 
a cause of ordinary cramp in the lower limbs. By overworking 
a muscle, leaves it in an excitable state, that is easily thrown 
into a state of cramp by stretching, after they have been re- 
laxed by sleep. 

The cramp from cholera always follows an unendurable pain 
in the extremity thus spasmodically contracted. The direct 
cause, therefore, is painful inflammation of a tendon or apo- 
neurosis of a muscle. The more dense the inflamed structure, 
the more acute is the pain ; consequently, it requires as dense 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 211 

a structure as these fibrous ligaments, to induce a pain suffi- 
ciently intense to command this intense motor nervous circu- 
lation to the muscles, independent of the will, manifest in 
tetanus. 

The treatment indicated consists in controlling the pain by 
the use of hyoscyamus in doses of four grains each, every three 
or four hours, until the spasmodic contraction subsides ; then 
give grs. j, sufficiently often to control the pain. 

In case of wounds of fibrous ligaments, tetanus may be pre- 
vented by speedily excluding the air from the wound by bring- 
ing it to perfect suture, and securing it in position with adhe- 
sive straps, used in surgery ; using the precaution to perfectly 
exclude the air. If tetanus is caused by severe neuralgia, the 
treatment is the same ; control the pain, and in due time the 
symptoms will subside. In urgent cases, a dose of hyoscyamus 
should be given every hour, until the cramp subsides. 



CHOREA, 

OR ST. VITUS DANCE. 



This disease appears to manifest a perverted action of the 
motor nerves of the upper extremities. The hands of the pa- 
tient are almost continually in motion, and, in the attempt to 
use them, many false motions are made that are so ludicrous 
as to annoy the patient more than any unpleasant sensation 
that arises from the disease, or any derangements that pro- 
ceed from it. But a few nerves have a given service that are 
not at the command of the will. God has reserved all but the 
motors, to serve the fiat of His grand systemic design in direc- 
ting all its vital relations necessary to construct and recuperate 
the system. All the remainder are at the service of the indi- 
vidual mind as servants that wait for orders. When in a healthy 
state, they are endowed with all the capabilities to instantly 
obey ; but none to resist the will. All of the muscles bound into 
action at the mandate of their lord and master, the will ; (as 
these serve the will, so should the soul serve God). 

The motor nervous centers connected with the sixth and sev- 
enth cervical and the first dorsal vertebral centers appear to be 
deranged, but the lesion is most probably of cerebral origin. 
The evidence in support of this opinion is derived from the 
fact that the movement is often opposite to that designed by 



212 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

the will ; the extensor in place of the flexor, and vice versa, 
often obtain. The confusion appears to be at the source of 
motor fibrillar of these nerves. If the motor effort is started 
on a flexor fibril at the brain, it cannot change in the transit. 
The external portion of the brain is cortical, and the internal* 
medulla. From the cortical, all fibrillar arise, and these fibrillar 
are in contact with and are supported by the medulla in their 
functional work. The cortical and medulla bodies are as sec- 
tional as the branches of nerve fibrillar that emanate there- 
from. In a case of hemiplegia, or paralysis of one side, the 
whole anterior hemispheral fascicular have, to a degree, lost their 
subdivisional boundaries at their sources, or it would appear 
that the accumulating medulla has lost an atom out of its 
chemical formula which disqualifies it for generating a recep- 
tive motor element. The nutritive agencies are not lost in the 
vital nerves that support the cortical portion of the brain ; 
therefore the fault must lie at the source of the section of cor- 
tical fasciculi that furnishes ground for misplaced fasciculi that 
induces misdirected motor action. 

Fatal results seldom -attend this disease. By a careful course 
of treatment, it generally subsides in a few weeks. 

TREATMENT. 

^ First, give a solution of nitrate of potassa, fifteen grains 
in one-half tumbler of cold water; take one tablespoonful every 
hour, until it is all taken ; then at bedtime take two one-half 
grain sugar-coated podophyllin pills. Then use the following : 
Fluid extract of dandelion one fluid ounce, fluid extract cypri- 
pedium one ounce, fluid extract of gentian one-half fluid ounce, 
tinct. of wintergreen one drachm ; add six ounces of sugar 
syrup. Dose, one teaspoonful every three hours during the 
day-time. Also at the same time, use Fowler's solution of ar- 
senic, three drops four times per day; dilute each dose in a 
teaspoonful of cold water. Continue this treatment until the 
patient is fully relieved. Not in a single instance has the author 
known this treatment to fail to give full relief. 



MEASLES. 



This is a contagious disease, yet not unfrequently it is epi- 
demical. A person is not liable to contract this disease a sec- 
ond time. 

From ten to fourteen days after exposure, constitutes the in- 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 213 

cubative period. The first symptoms are chilliness, congestion 
of the palate, fauces and trachea, inducing a high fever and a 
dry, tight, troublesome cough. The eyes are swollen and suf- 
fused with tears, there is a hoarseness and not unfrequently 
sore throat; the fever runs high, and the patient is very thirsty ; 
and from three to five days the eruptions, like flea bites at first, 
beginto make their appearance, and subsequently spread into 
irregular red patches. They appear at first in the roof of the 
mouth, then on the face and forehead, neck and chest, and 
finally over the whole body and extremities. 

When the eruptions are long suppressed, symptoms of pneu- 
monia are very apt to accompany this disease, which, when 
manifest, must be promptly subdued by treatment under that 
head. 

The immediate cause is membranous congestion. The 
mediate is glandular obstruction, and their secretions turned 
into the circulation to obstruct nutrition, and general mem- 
branous congestion follows. 

The remote cause is contagion, contracted of a person lab- 
oring under the disease. This disease may be primarily in- 
duced in crowded rooms, where they are compelled to remain 
a long time, as on board ship, and in military barracks, by in- 
haling the atmosphere overcharged with carbonic acid gas ex- 
haled from the crowd. This poisonous acid is carried into the 
circulation, the kidneys become inflamed by it, while in the 
act of depurating it from the blood. When this is long contin- 
ued, the kidneys become obstructed, and send their secretions 
into the circulation to find depurative escape from the system 
through the dermoid membrane, and, in the effort, this mem 
brane becomes congested and inflamed to an extent that ef- 
fusions occur to induce the irregular scarlet patches on the ex 
ternal skin. 

The indications of cure are to relieve the obstructed glan 
dular organs, and ventilate the system of the impure glandulai 
secretion s inthe circulation ; to moderate the fever and nu- 
trition will be restored, and the skin relieved of this unusuai 
burdensome task to save life, while the glandular organs tc 
whom this depurative work is assigned are disqualified to per- 
form their functional work. 

TREATMENT. 

Begin the treatment by giving colocynth grs. x, nitrate of 
potassa grs. xx, in cold water fiii. Dose, 3ii> every one-half 
hour, and in six hours give ij4, grains of podophyllin, and re- 
peat the twenty grain solution of nitrate of potassa the second 
day. After the podophyllin has operated well, give the following: 

$ Fluid extract of spice bark (benzoin odoriferum) §ss, 



214 A - H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

fluid extract of saffron Jss, fluid extract of rhubarb |i, simple 
syrup Jiv ; mix. Dose, 3i, every hour, if it does not prove too 
laxative ; in such case give the doses once in two hours, and 
substitute three grains of cholera infantum powders every two 
hours. Continue this treatment until the measles have turned, 
which is usually on the fourth day. This is the critical period 
to guard against fatal venous congestion by keeping up a gen- 
tle perspiration. The introduction of milk punch while passing 
this critical period is advisable to make doubly sure this point. 



MUMPS. 

This disease is known by an enlargement of one or both of 
the parotid glands. A very common test is to take some sour 
article into the mouth. If it be mumps, the affected gland or 
glands will be Jhrown into intense pain, by the effects of the 
acid upon them. A fever more or less intense corresponding 
with the degree of congestion these glands obtain. Persons 
of all ages are subject to contract this disease by being ex- 
posed in the presence of one who is suffering from it. 

The disease runs much lighter with persons under the age of 
puberty. All the invasive symptoms are also augmented by 
the effects of a cold recently contracted while the incubative 
work is encroaching upon the vital and functional nervous 
centers that support these glands. It is often the case that 
persons in good health may be exposed several times before 
acquiring the disease. Again one side may pass through its 
stages before the other side becomes affected, or it may pass to 
become affected on exposure at some future time. Metastasis, 
or a transfer of the swelling from the parotid glands to those of 
the testes, sometimes occurs with males after the age of pu- 
berty, mostly due to inefficient treatment of the kidneys and 
liver, so as to give an early and prompt relief to all the glands 
in the system. With this aid to nutrition, the symptoms will be 
light, and no fears of metastasis need be apprehended. 

The time limited for contracting the disease is claimed by 
authors to be within the first four days. Begin the treatment 
by the use of nitrate of potassa grs. xv, water $iv. Dose, 3iv 
every half-hour until it is all taken. After using this solution 
three hours, give sugar-coated half-grain podophyllin pills, four 
at a dose. After the pills have operated well as a cathartic, 
use the following : Ex. hyoscyamus grs. xx, T. wintergreen 3ii> 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 215 

nitrate of potassa grs. xxx ; dissolve in water it; f. ex. rhubarb 
fi, T. bloodroot 3i, f. ex. burdock ri, f. ex. marsh rosemary 3ii, 
simple syrup riii ; mix. Dose, one 3. Take such a dose every hour 
for three days, then four doses per day for three days. In case 
of a metastasis to the testes, apply the spinal liniment to the 
parotid glands, and foment the swollen testes with cloths wrung 
out of hot water, until the swelling subsides. When the patient 
is free from the swellings, great care not to take a cold need to 
be observed for several days. 



CHOLERA MORBUS, 

OR, ACUTE DIARRHCEA, 



Is caused by the use of unripe sour fruit or food undergoing 
vinous fermentation. When a law of dietetics becomes thus 
outraged by forcing into the circulation large quantities of acid 
dangerously detrimental to nutrition, the systemic powers feel 
the shock, and rally an undue force through the functional 
nerves that support the depurative work of the glands, to rapidly 
absorb the redundance of this acid from the circulation \ and 
when vinous fermentation occurs in the stomach, as soon as 
it is sent forward as sour chyme, the mesenteric glands and intes- 
tinal exhalents conspire to prevent it from passing into the 
chyliferous circulation by rapidly hurrying it through the intes- 
tinal canal. The villi of the mucous membrane become buried 
in a coat of thick mucus that prevents the sour chyle from 
being carried into the chyliferous circulation to inflame the 
lungs in its passage into the arterial circulation, to impede 
nutrition in the brain, and congest the whole systemic capillary 
system. To expel this sharp acid from the system without 
entailing this mischief upon it, is this phenomenal systemic 
undertaking. But the mucous membrane of the intestinal 
canal is without protection, save from judicious medication to 
prevent, in severe cases, the exhaustion of the serum of the 
blood. The occurrence of the cramp is an evidence of a rapid 
approximation to this dangerous condition. 

The indications of cure are, to neutralize the acid, to stimu- 
late a nutritive nervous rally to the mucous membranes to 
overcome the congestion, and to overcome the excessive irrit- 
ability of the system by the use of anodynes. The attack is 
usually very sudden, and attended with fainting, vomiting and 
purging, with passages of gas. The passages are copious, fluid, 



2l6 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

frequent, and discharged with great force. To allay vomiting, 
give nitrate of bismuth grs. x, in a tablespoonful of water, and 
repeat the dose directly after each fit of vomiting, and if 
needed for three doses. Also, give bi-carbonate of soda 3ss, 
water |ii, T. opii. m. xv, nitrate of potassa grs. x, T. pepermint 
m. v. Dose, 3iv, to begin with ; then give 3ii every fifteen min- 
utes until it is all taken. Likewise, give T. of xanthox 3i, in water 
3iv, for a dose ; give such a dose every fluid passage of the 
bowels. If 'the bowels are painful, wring a towel out of hot 
water and lay over the bowels as hot as can well be borne, and 
change them every four or five minutes until the pain subsides. 
If the passages assume a rice-water appearance, and are fre- 
quent and copious, give the following enema : T. xanthox 3ii> 
T. opii. m. xx, tepid water 3ii. 

Second mode of treatment, see "Cholera Specific, and its 
mode of use for a case of cholera morbus." To allay the thirst 
use scorched wheat bread crust toast water. 

A third mode of treatment has proved to be so very effica- 
cious that I insert it : IJ F. ex. marsh rosemary root 3vi, 
bi-carbonate of soda 3ss,T. xanthox berries 3iv, nitrate of potassa 
grs. x, T. peppermint m. viij, T. opii m. xv, water f. jiii. Dose, 
3i every fifteen minutes until the vomiting ceases. Then give a 
dose every time the bowels move in a fluid state. This last 
treatment fulfills all the indications admirably, and leaves the 
system free from fever, and the mucous membranes from any 
chronic inflammation. This preparation is very harmless, and 
in very urgent cases the doses may be doubled, or even trebled, 
until the urgent symptoms begin to subside. 

CHRONIC SOUTHERN DIARRH02A. 

The emaciation to which the patient is reduced in this 
disease is due to a chronic inflammation of the mucous mem- 
branes of the small intestines, that prevents chyliferous ab- 
sorption, and every order of food or drink taken is rapidly 
hurried through them. This inflammation is usually extended 
to the mesenteric glands, which become tumid, and often break 
down by abscess. One of the peculiar features of this diarrhoea 
is its periodic habit, which occurs regularly at about four 
o'clock a. m. At this time a very large passage occurs. The 
pulse is small and frequent. The urine is scant and high-col- 
ored, evincing more or less obstruction of the kidneys by a 
chronic inflammation, rendering their functional work deficient, 
and thereby the blood is rendered less nutritious, and as chy- 
losis is greatly impaired, renders a rapid systemic decline 
inevitable. The appetite is poor and the tongue red. A slight 
chill precedes the passage of the bowels in the morning, that 
clears the liver like a portion of jalap ; at other times of the day 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 217 

the passages are small, and dependent upon the quantity of food 
and drink taken. 

The intermittent symptoms in the case, and the perpetuating 
cause of the diarrhoea, are directly due to an overflow of renal 
secretions into the circulation, which are secreted by the 
pancreas and liver from the blood, and evacuated through the 
intestinal canal. The pungency of this urea in the bilious 
passages each morning repeats the injury received by these 
intestinal mucous membranes. The poor success that has 
attended the treatment of this disease in our military campaigns 
has been due to an oversight in our pathologists to direct 
proper attention to this renal obstruction as its producing and 
perpetuating cause. The author had a favorable opportunity 
to demonstrate the correctness of this point, in his great suc- 
cess in the treatment of a great number of our soldiers who 
returned from the Mexican war emaciated with this diarrhoea, 
but then called the Mexican diarrhoea; and during the great 
rebellion his success was equally satisfactory to place his views 
upon the pathology of this disease beyond question. 

Good judgment is required, and close observation very 
important, to select the most potent remedies to fill the indica- 
tions, and so carefully direct the quantity of doses to insure 
steady progress in the very low cases we are frequently called 
to treat. 

TREATMENT. 

To relieve the chronic inflammation of the mucous mem- 
branes of the bowels : R Prickly ash bark of the root 2 oz., 
marsh rosemary root 2 ozs.; boil thoroughly and strain off f. 3 
iv. To clear the albuminous obstructions in the ducts of the 
kidneys, add nitrate of potassa grs. xv, and T. of wintergreen 3ii. 
Dose, 3j every hour until the diarrhoea subsides. To overcome 
renal inflammation, and insure their functional activity, also to 
give a proper support to the nervous system : Tfc Sweet spirits 
of nitre, army strength, f. fiv, quinine grs. 40 ; mix. Dose, 
3iss, diluted water 3iv ; give such a dose every two hours for 
two days ; then give 3i diluted every three hours for two days 
more. After this, if the patient seems to bear the tonic well, 
give a dose every four hours until the patient is convalescent. 
To give rest and to allay the nervous irritability of the system, 
give the cholera infantum powders grs. iii, every two hours. 
After two days' treatment, to aid the liver in secreting healthy 
bile, and enable the patient to better bear the tonic effects of 
the quinine, give at bed-time a quarter-grain sugar-coated 
podophyllin pill. No other alterative will as safely and effec- 
tually fill the indications in this case needed as the podophyllin, 
which are to secure gentle glandular action, and the relief of 



2l8 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

membranous congestion. Repeat the use of a quarter-grain 
podophyllin pill as often as every third night, if the bowels will 
permit. Apply the spinal liniment the whole length of the 
spine once per day. When the hips or feet become cold, apply 
heated bricks wrapped in cloths, to them. 

DIET. 

For a few of the first days use arrow root gruel, soaked soda 
crackers and butter, gelatin or mutton soups, seasoned to suit. 
Drinks : white of one egg beaten and put in a half-pint of cold 
water. Use when thirsty. Also, give toast water made by 
scorching well crusts of wheat bread, made still more alkaline 
by dipping a few live wood coals into the water before it is 
poured on to the toast. 

Give good blackberry or port wine 3ii once in three or four 
hours, just before giving food. If the patient complains of 
pain in the bowels, apply cloths wrung out of hot water, and 
change them every five minutes until the pain subsides. 

Exclude everything sour from drinks and diet. 



SMALL POX. 



This is a contagious and infectious disease. It is very 
unpopular, and one that is very poorly understood by the 
majority of physicians. 

Small pox, like measles, is an eruptive fever, propagated by 
contagion running a definite length of time in its course, and 
as a general rule, to which, indeed, the exceptions are rare, but 
generally affecting persons but once in the course of life. Its 
origin is lost in antiquity, and the common opinion is that in 
these days it never arises except by contagion ; yet, there is 
reason to believe that under an exceedingly unfrequent concat- 
enation of causes, it may be engendered. It must have 
originated, in the first instance, from common causes, and it 
would be strange if the causes that gave rise to it then can 
never now recur. 

Long dissertations have been written on this disease, which 
for so many ages was the scourge of communities, and which, 
when it did not prove fatal, left the most unpleasant traces 
behind it, disfiguring the face of beauty so that the former 
traits could be scarcely, if at all, distinguished ; but it has 
become of somewhat less interest since the introduction of 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 219 

inoculation and vaccination, and few opportunities occur for 
witnessing it in country practice. 

The most convenient divisions of small pox are into the 
distinct, the confluent, and the modified. Other divisions have 
been made by writers, but they are not necessary, and are apt 
to create embarrassment. 

1ST. DISTINCT SMALL POX. 

Before describing the symptoms of distinct small pox, it may 
be remarked that in all the forms and varieties four stages may 
be distinguished : first, that of incubation, in which the virus 
is at work in the system and doing its work of inflaming the 
kidneys and deranging the skin, and most of the organs in the 
system. 

I think it important that the disease should be well under- 
stood, in order to guard all who have been exposed to its 
contagion against its occurrence by terminating the work of 
the contagion on the system at once, by nipping the incubative 
work upon the system in the bud, by a specific preventive. 

I will give in this place the formula for the proper preventive, 
which should be used by all persons as soon as possible after 
being exposed to this contagion, viz : Nitrate of potassa gr. 
xxx, salicin gr. xxx, T. xanthox 3vij, water f. fiv ; mix. Dose, 
3ss four times per day. Keep the liver open by giving podo- 
phyllin, gr. ^, every second night. 

This treatment should be begun within five days after expo- 
sure, and continued twenty days. Then the patient need have 
no fears of its occurrence, for this remedy will hold the organs 
it attacks in that state of health, rendering it impossible for the 
disease to make any progress of incubation in the system. 

This formula is also a perfect specific to be used in all cases 
when the disease has reached the eruptive form, and during 
the whole time of the disease. If the patient is kept in a 
darkened room, the desquamations will not disfigure the patient 
if this remedy is used, and under its use the disease will always 
be distinct and light. Use the prescription for the incubative 
stage in all its stages. 

The following doses should be given : To an adult, after the 
disease has broken out, give m. xiv, in sweetened water 3j ; use 
such a dose ten times per day, that is, during the twenty-four 
hours ; give a dose once in two hours up to four o'clock a. m.; 
then let the patient rest until eight o'clock a. m. Continue its 
use thus for four days ; then take four doses during the day 
time for twenty days. 

All who are using this preventive should abstain from the use 
of all acids, hot cream-of-tartar biscuits, hot bread, hot griddle 



220 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

cakes, fried eggs and meat, nor use any alcoholic drinks. 

The second stage is that of the eruptive fever. 

Thirdly, that of maturation. 

Fourthly, that of decline, dessication and secondary fever. 

The stage of incubation is the period between the reception 
of the poison into the system, and the commencement of visi- 
ble signs of disease. It is the latent period, and does not 
differ from that of other eruptive fevers which are produced by 
a specific contagion. 

After the reception of the miasma, there may be many days 
before the eruptive fever ; the premonitory signs become at 
times marked, and the patient is languid and listless, with more 
or less disorder in the kidneys and the digestive functions. 

The duration of the period of incubation, when the disease 
is taken naturally, varies. The usual time is twelve days, but 
it may extend from seven to fourteen days. Usually on the 
eleventh or twelfth day from the reception of the poison into 
the system, the eruptive fever declares itself, and, almost 
always, by rigors, followed by the train of symptoms which 
usher in the measles, and which do not, therefore, require "repe- 
tition here. It may be remarked, however, that the signs of 
great prostration of strength are decided ; that the expression 
of the countenance is anxious ; and that in cases where the 
constitution is delicate, the debility amounts almost to a 
collapse. The period at which the eruption appears is tolera- 
bly fixed. Almost always it is seen at the end of forty-eight 
hours from the commencement of the eruptive fever, whatever 
may be the character of the disease, that is, whether distinct 
or confluent. This period may be lengthened, by weakness of 
habit, loss of blood, long-continued vomiting, or extreme cold; 
but so far as the experience of one who has had large oppotu- 
nities goes, (Geo. Gregory), it is never shortened. 

The eruption is generally completed over the whole body in 
one or two days, but it may extend through double this period. 
Minute pimples, sensibly elevated above the skin, first show 
themselves on the face and forehead, the nose, the chin and 
the upper lip ; afterwards they are seen on the neck and 
wrists, and subsequently on the trunk and limbs, the feet being 
always implicated last. 

In case of distinct small pox, the fever is greatly relieved on 
the appearance of the eruption. 

When the eruption first appears, the pimples are separated 
and surrounded at their base by a red areola, and when they 
are numerous, it is difficult to decide whether the disease be 
small pox or measles. The difficulty does not continue long, 
however, for the pustules become more and more elevated, and 
the true character of the disease is manifest. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 221 

The stage of maturation of the pustules succeeds to that of 
the eruptive fever. In the first and second days, the eruption 
is papular, but about the third day, the tops become vesicular 
and transparent, and on the same, or next day, the pustular 
character is marked, and suppuration has commenced. The 
pustules have now acquired some size, and their tops present a 
a flatness, followed by an umbilicated depression. This is per- 
ceptible from the third or fourth day, and becomes more 
marked as the period of maturation approaches. The pus- 
tules present a whitish appearance, and are surrounded by a 
red areola. The umbilicated depressions are readily seen on 
isolated pustules, but when they coalesce, or are in groups, they 
are rarely perceptible. On the eighth day from the appearance 
of the eruption, the suppuration is at its height, but as the pustules 
of different parts of the body do not appear simultaneously, 
three or four days may elapse before some of them attain a 
maturity. Those on the face and neck generally acquire their 
full size first, and discharge their contents ; next those on the 
trunk and upper extremities, and lastly, those on the feet. 

Simultaneously with the appearance of the pustules on the 
skin, they may be observed on the mucous membrane of the 
lips, on the tongue, palate, interior of the cheeks, &.c; but it 
has been questioned whether they are ever seen lower down, 
although it has been affirmed that dissections have exhibited 
them throughout the whole track of the intestines. They are 
not unfrequently seen on the eye, and the author has met with 
more than one case, in which loss of sight was occasioned by 
them ; but of the variolous inflammation of the eye, he has 
treated elsewhere. 

The seat of the variolous pustule is the cutis vera. Beneath 
the epidermis, a disc of a consistence like pulp or thick mucus, 
a pseudo-membranous secretion, exists, and the vesicle contain- 
ing it is found to be multiloculous. 

The constitutional symptoms, during the stage of maturation, 
vary greatly in intensity, and this usually in a direct ratio with 
the number of the pustules. When they are very numerous, 
the fever may be high and the local irritation considerable. 
Frequently there is a great tenderness of surface and itching ; 
the face is often swelled, and the eyes closed by the tumefac- 
tion of the eyelids, immediately before the entire maturation 
of the pustules, and the swelling of the hands is often a source 
of great inconvenience. Ptyalism also occurs at times to a 
considerable extent. This has been regarded as salutary, but 
it is considered by others to be an inflammatory process, 
occasioned by the existence of the pustules, and may, accord- 
ing to M. Andral, be attended with disagreeable consequences. 
Such a case the author has not met with. 



222 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

On the eighth day from the appearance of the eruption, it be- 
gins to dry up, after the bursting of the pustules, and scabs form, 
which, under favorable circumstances, fall off in the course of 
four or five days. This is the stage of desiccation or decline. 
By the fourteenth day of the eruption, the fever has generally 
subsided; the swelling of the face has diminished or disappeared, 
and the encrustations have fallen off from the face and upper 
parts of the body ; but the surface of the skin, especially that 
of the face, is left of a reddish brown color, and where ulceration 
has occurred, it may be pitted. The discoloration sometimes 
continues for months, and the pits remain for life. Thus is the 
ordinary course of the distinct form of small pox. 

2D. — CONFLUENT SMALL POX, OR VARIOLA CONFLUENS, VARIOLA 
REGULARES CONFLUENTES. 

In this variety of small pox, all the precursory symptoms are 
more severe ; the eruptive fever runs much higher ; the regular 
progress of inflammation is interfered with by the immense 
quantity of papulae, which occupy the skin, and the inflammation 
extends to the subjacent cellular texture ; the mucous surface of 
the mouth, pharynx, larynx and trachea are, also, the seats of 
the eruption, and it has been seen in the mucous membrane of 
the rectum. The nervous system is greatly implicated ; the fever 
continues, and even increases in violence after the appearance 
of the eruption, and its decline is attended with secondary fever, 
which appears to be the fever of recuperation, and occurs chiefly 
in cases where the cellular membrane over the body has become 
extensively involved with the skin in the inflammation. 

This form of the disease is characterized by hot and dry skin, 
white tongue, rapid pulse, sleeplessness and unquenchable thirst, 
and is very apt to be complicated with some important affection 
of a part of the economy as exanthematous, pustulous and other 
affections of the skin, superficial abscesses, opthalmia, encepha- 
lic, thoracic or abdominal mischief, &c. Like measles and scar- 
latina, it is also liable to develop scrofulous and other taints, so 
that its sequelae are, at times, most distressing. Throughout 
the whole period of maturation and disiccation, there is a dis- 
agreeable odor from the body, which is quite characteristic. 

Although in many cases the inflammation and irritation of 
the skin are so violent as to induce great febrile irritation, at 
other times, owing most commonly, perhaps, to deficient power 
in the system, the eruption is imperfectly developed, and 
instead of filling and proceeding favorably to maturation, the 
pustules remain flat, and contain but very little fluid. The 
accompanying fever is, in many of these cases, markedly 
adynamic, and certain of them put on all the characters of con- 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 223 

gestive fever. The strikingly adynamic character of the fever, 
and the appearance of the skin, resemble so much petechial 
typhus as to render the term petechial small pox, which has 
been given to this form of the disease, not inappropriate. The 
pustules themselves fill, at times, with a bloody ichor, so as to 
give occasion to the term variola nigrce, sometimes applied 
to it. The appearance of the pustules has, indeed, suggested 
numerous subdivisions of variola by different authors, but they 
do not seem to be of any practical utility, whilst they cannot 
fail to embarrass the young inquirer. 

It is generally sufficiently easy to diagnosticate small pox, 
except during the first day of the eruption, when it may resem- 
ble measles or febrile lichen. A short time, however, is suffi- 
cient to remove the uncertainty, and prior to this, the existence 
of small pox may be suspected from the fact of the person 
having been exposed to contagion, and his having had measles 
previously. 

The danger of the disease depends greatly on the extent of 
the eruption, and the implication of the mucous membranes. 
Distinct small-pox very rarely proves fatal ; whilst confluent 
small-pox is full of danger, and proves fatal at times, by the 
supervention of internal mischief, when everything has seemed 
to be going on favorably. When the mucous membranes, and 
especially that of the larynx, are much affected, the danger is 
great ; hence, hoarseness, at an early period, is always unfav- 
orable. The appearance of the mouth and throat will afford 
some index as to the probable state of the larynx and trachea. 
A natural tone of voice is a good omen, even although the 
eruption be confluent, with a disposition to cellular inflam- 
mation. 

It need scarcely be said that the symptoms of typhus pros- 
tration exist ; when an altered and putrescent condition of the 
fluid obtains, the prognosis must be unfavorable. 

Small-pox is more dangerous to very young than to old per- 
sons. It has been affirmed, indeed, from the result of obser- 
vation, that persons above forty years of age rarely recover, 
even from severe confluent small pox. The most favorable age 
would appear to be from the seventh to the fourteenth year, 
when the powers of life are in full vigor, without the risk of 
plethora. Plethora is, indeed, as unfavorable as great consti- 
tutional debility. 

In very severe cases, the fatal event takes place before the 
eighth day ; and more commonly, it occurs between the tenth 
and seventeenth days. Prior to the introduction of vaccination, 
the deaths by small pox were to the total deaths in town or 
country, in the ratio of 16 to ioo, or about one-sixth of those 
attacked. The average mortality is usually stated at one in four; 



2 24 A - H - DAVIS THEORY AND 

but the numerical method has not been extensively and vigor- 
ously applied here. It seems to vary in different places ; thus, 
the mortality from primary small pox in London has been es- 
timated at 36 per cent.; whilst in Germany, it is only 20 per 
cent. 

Even now, it would appear — when accurate statistical ac- 
counts are taken by the Registrar General of England — that in 
1837, there were only five diseases more fatal in England, and 
that the deaths throughout England and Wales amount to about 
12,000 annually. 

At times, during particular epidemical influences, the mor- 
tality from small pox is terrific. A modern writer (Mackintosh) 
affirms that he had occasion to attend fifty cases of small pox, 
all of which were distinctly traced to the imprudence of a 
woman, who exposed her unvaccinated child to the contagion 
when visiting a sick friend. Of these fifty patients, thirty-five 
had gone through the process of vaccination ; fifteen had never 
been vaccinated — they were infants under one year of age. All 
the protected cases recovered. Of the fifteen unprotected, ten 
died, and three only of the fifteen had the disease slightly. Of 
the fiv€ children that survived the attack, one did not recover 
perfectly, and died of chronic bronchitis some months after- 
ward. 

Causes. — It has been already remarked that the mode of 
propagation of small pox is by contagion. The sporadic origin, 
if it ever occurs, must unquestionably be rare. The disease 
may be communicated to one who is unprotected — that is, who 
has never had it in the natural way, or by inoculation, or who 
has not been vaccinated. It may be induced by a miasm dif- 
fused in the air, or by positive contact of the variolous matters, 
or by inserting it under the cutis — in other words, by inoculation. 
It has been affirmed that the contagious character is developed 
during the suppuration of the pustules, and is preserved until 
their desiccation, and that the disease is not communicable 
during the eruptive fever, and the two or three succeeding 
days; but experience appears to have shown the inaccuracy of 
this opinion, and that there is no safety after the manifest ap- 
pearance of the disease. 

The scabs retain the contagious power for a considerable 
time ; and it is affirmed that a confluent case of small pox will 
taint the air and spread the disease for at least ten or twelve 
days after death. 

The contagious miasms can*attach themselves to clothing ; 
and, if air be excluded from these formites, they may commun- 
icate the disease for a long period afterwards. Such is the view 
entertained, and it is probable. There can be no doubt, how- 
ever, that a free ventilation will prevent this ; for the author 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 225 

has never met with a case in which the practitioner has been 
the agent of conveying the disease from one house to another. 

The circumstances that give occasion to an attack of con- 
fluent small pox in one person, and of the distinct kind in 
another, from exposure to the same contagion, are totally un- 
known. Certain it is, that the same matter will produce both 
forms in different individuals ; nor would it seem that the mat- 
ter of the confluent pustule is more likely to induce the con- 
fluent form than that obtained from the distinct pustule. The 
form of the disease appears to depend upon constitutional dif- 
ferences that are unappreciable. 

Like other contagious diseases, this is epidemico-contagious. 
In other words, it does not rage at all times alike. Before in- 
oculation or vaccination was introduced, it visited epidemi- 
cally the same region after uncertain periods ; and one of the 
strong objections urged against inoculation, was the fact, that 
as natural small pox could be communicated from the inocula- 
ted, the introduction of inoculation kept the disease always in 
a community, and that hence the mortality from small pox was 
absolutely increased after the introduction of inoculation, al- 
though the ratio of deaths in those attacked was diminished. 

The greatest epidemics in recent times, in England, have 
been in 1781, 1796, 1825, and 1838. 

Seasons and climate are devoid of influence over it. 

Small pox attacks both sexes and all ages ; and, like meas- 
les, it may affect the foetus in utero. The cases of this kind on 
record are very numerous. (Duffel, Fabrlcius, Hlldanus, T. 
Barf holla, Femellus, Hoogeveen, Jenner, Maurlceau, Van der 
Wlel, Van Swiefen, Mead, Rosenstein, Ploucquet, Hunter, Bill- 
lard, etc.) In many of them the mother was unaffected. 

All persons are not equally susceptible ; and the suscepti- 
bility appears to vary at different periods. A physician may, 
for example, pass through a long life, attending to many cases 
of it with impunity, and yet may, ultimately, take the disease 
naturally or by inoculation. It rarely affects the same person 
more than once ; so rarely, that the proportion has been esti- 
mated at not more than one in fifty thousand. 



ASCITES, 

OR ABDOMINAL DROPSY, 

This dropsical state of the abdomen may be determined 
from plethora by the fluctuation of the water when placing one 



2 26 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

hand upon one side of the abdomen and cuffing the other side 
with the other hand. If it be a body of water, a wave willbeat 
against the quiet hand at each blow of the other hand. 

This dropsical state is most usually induced by obstructed 
portal circulation. Whenever the portal circulation of the 
blood through the liver is impeded to an extent that the ven- 
ous accumulation exceeds that of the portal transfer, a back- 
set occurs in the portal reservoir and all the mesenteric veins, 
which causes the abdomen to become very tumid at first, 
which finally induce so much venous extension as to cause an 
effusion of the serum through the meshes of these mesenteric 
veins, in quantity equal to the excess of the accumulation to 
that of the portal transfer. This difference is seldom very great, 
but by the obstruction remaining continuous, the accumulation 
is inevitable, and finally the accumulation of water in the ab- 
domen becomes observable. As obstructed renal organs usually 
precede liver obstructions, we find in this case that the urine 
is scant, and sometimes suppressed. Bowels constipated, and 
appetite very poor. 

There are other sources of abdominal dropsy, as the exuda- 
tion from an encysted tumor ; but their unfrequency are as 
one to ten referable to portal obstructions. Of these the ovar- 
ian tumors are the most common. The impediment to the 
passage of the portal blood through the liver is due to disten- 
ded biliary ducts that encroach upon the capillary transit veins, 
that narrows the channels of some, and wholly obstructs others. 
There are two orders of biliary duct obstructions. One is ple- 
thora of bile, caused by a closure of the duodenal passage of 
the ductus choledochus. The other, yet of less frequent occur- 
rence, is induced by dense accumulations of concrete albumen 
in the capillary biliary ducts. This concretion is constantly 
packed to the distension of these ducts by the constant peristal- 
tic effort to clear them. 

To provide against these obstructions, the liver becomes 
tumidly enlarged by the force of the portal plethora, and to 
provide for keeping open the channels of its transit capillary 
circulation. When this distension of the liver for enlarging 
the circulatory channels, and vena portarum, for reservoir, have 
reached their greatest capacity, and the lymphatic absorbents be- 
come unequal to the task of disposing of the redundant serum, 
dropsical accumulation becomes inevitable. 

The systemic energy conscripted to this effort to sustain 
these plethoric vessels, ! and to support the undue activity of the 
lymphatic absorbents, is detrimental to renal activity, and the 
usual systemic support distributed to other vital organs. Di- 
gestion and nutrition fail to keep up the tone of their depart- 
ments, and the muscular fibre wanes in calibre and energy. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 227 

This is the routine of the general systemic decline in a case of 
this order of dropsy. 

The indications of cure are, to remove all obstructions from 
the renal and biliary ducts, to render efficient aid to these 
glandular organs to ensure functional action, and give a proper 
support to the nerves of nutrition. By thus removing the 
cause of the dropsical accumulation, the lymphatic absorbents 
will gradually absorb the dropsical water from the abdomen. 

TREATMENT. 

Begin the treatment by attending to the inactivity and 
obstructed state of the renal organs. I> Nitrate of potassa 
grs. 60, f. ex. uva. ursi. f. |i, f. ex. prickly ash 3iv, f. ex. of 
hyoscyamus 3ii, T. of wintergreen 3ii, f. ex. of wahoo f. 3i, 
water f. 3iv, f. ex. blood root 3i ; mix. Dissolve the nitrate of 
potassa in the water first ; then add all. Dose, 3i, diluted in 
water 3ii. Take such a dose every hour the first day up to bed 
time. The second day give a dose every hour and a half; then 
at bed time give podophyllin grs. ii, and repeat the podophyllin 
if it does not clear the liver by the next night. Continue the 
diuretic formula, a dose every two hours, to keep up the activity 
of the kidneys. If the quantity of wahoo in the prescription 
shall be sufficient to keep the bowels quite lax, after taking the 
podophyllin, very well, continue it ; if not, take enough of the 
fl. ex. of wahoo in ^3 doses, diluted in 3iv of water, daily, to 
keep the liver and bowels open while the dropsy lasts. 

Also, after the bowels have moved as a hydragogue cathartic, 
begin the use of salicin grs. xv, water fii. Dose 3ii- Give 
such a dose every one and a half-hour. Apply a stimulating 
liniment to the spine once per day. It is very important that 
this treatment be bold enough to ensure a success in thoroughly 
opening the kidneys and liver. Then afterwards judgment 
should be used to graduate the doses and time of doses, so as 
to only secure standard glandular action, until the dropsy sub- 
sides and the glandular system is able to perform its functions 
without aid. 

When the lesion lies in an obstruction of the duodenal 
passage, and the skin becomes tinged yellow by overflow of 
bile, in such a case the proper and only safe course to pursue 
in the undertaking to open the duodenal passage is to admin- 
ister a prompt lobelia emetic, after using the diuretic formula 
advised for two days. If the emetic fails to open this duodenal 
passage, it should be repeated once in twenty-four hours until 
bile becomes thus ejected. Then afterwards the liver may be kept 
open by one-grain doses of podophyllin, repeated at intervals 
of from three to five days apart. The objection to the use of 
the podophyllin in this case is, it will cause an increased secre- 



2 28 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

tion of bile, while it may fail to open the duodenal passage ; 
if so, an increased plethoric distension will obtain in the biliary- 
ducts, the lobelia being more reliable to open this passage, 
while it does not increase to so great an extent the secretion 
of bile. 



APOPLEXY. 



The patient, when attacked with a fit of apoplexy, becomes 
suddenly paralyzed, unconscious, and lies in a deep, snoring 
sleep. 

Paralysis of the tentorium, and an undue influx of venous 
blood in the longitudinal sinus to press heavily upon the organ 
of consciousness, appears to be the condition of the patient. 
From the prostration the system sometimes receives from 
exhausting labor, the tentorium loses its ability to prevent the 
person from passing into a deep state of unconsciousness, 
manifest by snoring. But as the vigor of the system recuper- 
ates by rest, superficial sensitiveness augments to make the 
tentorium sufficiently tort to disperse the blood in the longitu- 
dinal sinus, and to raise the brooding pressure from this 
portion of the brain, and the full, conscious, wakeful state 
obtains. These two states are analogous. The apoplectic 
state is a sleep unto death, in the majority of cases, while 
recuperative rest will secure the means of conscious wakeful- 
ness to the laborer. From the prostration the external mem- 
branes receive from continued fevers, is the cause of coma, 
which is a subsidence of external sensation, the means of 
consciousness. The author was called, in 1853, to see David 
Foy, of East Randolph, N. Y., who had been under treatment 
thirty-two days by another physician, for typhoid fever. The 
patient was in a state of coma, and the friends were called in 
to see him die, one of which, being dissatisfied with the course 
of treatment, made the call. As low as he had waned to reach 
this unconscious state, a proposition was offered for the friends 
to retire, and an effort would be made to arouse the patient to 
a state of consciousness. The patient was washed all over 
with a strong tincture of capsicum, and an enema of the same, 
diluted four times with tepid water, was found necessary before 
the patient began to manifest any signs of returning conscious- 
ness. A piece of woolen cloth was dipped in a solution of salt 
as much as the water, when hot, could dissolve ; then the cloth 
was dried, thus making a rough chafing cloth. By chafing with 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 229 

this cloth, after the external bathing and enema, in the course 
of twenty or thirty minutes he became conscious enough to 
recognize his friends, but was disposed to sink as soon as the 
chafing was suspended; consequently it was continued. As 
soon as he could swallow, began to give the spirits of nitre and 
quinine tonic, and a little diluted tincture of capsicum. By 
pursuing this course to hold the consciousness for twenty-four 
hours, he was entirely relieved from this state of coma, and the 
patient speedily recovered. A Mr. Baily, and a daughter of 
Willard Ransom, were also saved from similar states of coma 
by this course of treatment by the author. By reason of what 
analogy exists between coma and apoplexy, these cases, and 
the success that followed these efforts to call back the lost state 
of consciousness, these cases have been referred to as the most 
proper course to pursue to restore the apoplectic patient to a 
state of consciousness. If this course will not make any favor- 
able impression, add to it blood-letting from the arm, and use 
a warm bath, with a quantity of capsicum steeped and added 
to the bath. The case is considered hopeless when these 
efforts fail. It is an admissible fact that a cranial depression 
will induce a state of unconsciousness, but as no cause of 
encroachment from that quarter is apprehended, it is to be 
looked for elsewhere. In a child it may be suspected from a 
knot of worms, which, when made to scatter, relieves the 
patient at once. 



•*-♦- 



DIABETES. 

This disease is most generally due to a tumid or hypertrothied 
state of the kidneys. In this state the nerves become enlarged 
and rendered morbidly or acutely sensitive in their plexus 
roots. In this case the spine is always inflamed at the seat of 
this renal plexus. The systemic nervous relief sent through 
the renal plexus to recuperate this inflamed portion of the 
spine, causes undue activity in the renal functional nerves that 
center in the renal plexus. This undue nervous force, thus 
contributed to these functional nerves of the kidneys, augments 
the renal secretions, and causes an enlarged state of the corti- 
cal secretory vessels. One or both kidneys may be involved 
in the disease. When both are involved, the system goes down 
most rapidly. 



23O A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

This disease is known by the excessive quantity of urine 
passed, and the great thirst for water. 

The indications of cure consist in taking care of the cause, 
which lies in the spine and excited renal nerves, and thirsty 
stomach and duodenum. 

TREATMENT. 

Give the balsamic diuretic. Dose, 3i four times per day. 
Keep the liver and bowels sufficiently open by the use of two 
one-half grain sugar-coated podophyllin pills, and repeat the 
dose often enough to keep the bowels a little lax. 

Also give : t> Fl. ex. cypripedium, ladies' slipper, |j, f. 
ex. marsh rosemary ri, licorice ex. 2 ozs. dissolved in boiling 
water |iii ; when cool, mix. Dose, j4Z every half-hour, 01 
often enough to allay the irritation of the stomach, and thereby 
prevent the thirst. Restrict the draughts of water to 3vi once 
per hour. Carry a stick of licorice ex. in the pocket to nibble 
when thirsty, instead of indulging in too frequent draughts of 
water. The balsamic diuretic, for a change, may be modified 
by mixing it, equal parts, with the pulmonary balsam. 

Apply the spinal liniment on the spine freely once per day. 



TOPICAL SURGERY. 

INFLAMMATION. 



When any part of the animal body is red, swelled and pain- 
ful, this state always receives the name of inflammation. 

Inflammation is said to be acute when attended with redness, 
swelling and pain, and when the quickness of its course is such 
as to terminate favorably by resolution within a few days, or 
brings on in the space of time, suppuration, or when seated in 
vital organs, even the patient's dissolution. 

Chronic inflammation is of a slower and less painful kind, 
frequently beginning almost imperceptibly; then lingering in 
parts for an indefinite period. It may be attended with little 
heat or pain. Gradual and insidious as its progress may be, it 
frequently leads in the end to structural changes and functional 
derangements of the most serious and irremediable kind. Acute 
inflammation may terminate in it, and many of the slowly 
formed thickenings and indurations of various tissues appear 
to be effects of it. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 23 1 

Among the most remarkable effects of inflammation are, the 
adhesion of parts one to another ; the filling up of the inter- 
stices of the cellular texture with fibrine ; the deposit of the 
same substance upon free surfaces in the form of one or several 
layers, having the appearance of a membrane, and hence fre- 
quently called pseudo-membrane ; or around collections of 
purulent matter in the form of a cyst ; or around a foreign body 
lodged in the parts to prevent irritation of the neighboring tex- 
tures; or it is deposited between the surfaces of a recent wound 
which have been brought together, where it forms their bond 
of union, called healing by first intention. Whether inflamma- 
tion is to be adhesive or suppurative depends on the part affected. 
In serous membranes, adhesive inflammation is more readily 
excited than suppurative. On the other hand, a mucous mem- 
brane is more prone to suppurative than adhesive inflammation. 

NUTRITION. 

In order to comprehend the principles of inflammation, so as 
to be able to render proper medical aid, it will be necessary to 
understand the laws that govern nutrition in a state of health, 
and the pathology of the abnormal conditions on which inflam- 
mation depends. The part that the vital nerves perform in 
nutrition, is that of furnishing a kindred element to combine 
with the vital element contained in the globule of the blood, to 
form the tissue of the part. These arterial blood globules 
being homogeneous in every part of the system to which they 
are sent, and as many parts of the system are dissimilar in 
chemical composition, we are compelled to account for this 
dissimilarity through the agency that the vital nerves play in 
furnishing these dissimilar nutritive incentives. By this ele- 
ment contained in the arterial blood globule being capable of 
combining with different bases, and in different proportions 
with the same base, qualifies it to contribute to the structure 
of all the variously composed parts of the system. Any cause 
that partially or wholly obstructs the circulation in a vital 
nerve will cause a partial or complete suspension of nutrition 
in the part over which the vital nerve presides. The circula- 
tion in the capillary arteries is suspended, more or less, cor- 
responding to the nervous obstructions, and a corresponding 
state of congestion obtains in the part. 

When the obstructed circulation is complete, the capillary 
arteries will be distended by the forcing power of the heart 
until the serum escapes through their walls, and even in ex- 
treme cases the red globules will escape also, as in the cases of 
pneumonia and dysentery. 

When the capillary arteries become distended to a certain 
extent, they become painful, which is more or less acute in pro- 



232 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

portion to the extent of the congestion. Thus we have to 
make up the phenomena of inflammation: 1st, Nervous obstruc- 
tion ; 2d, suspended nutrition ; 3d, capillary arterial conges- 
tion with tumidity and soreness, and 4th, pain. 

This painful sensation is divinely designed to induce by 
sympathy a nervous rally from all parts of the system to revive 
the circulation in the obstructed nerves. When the nature of 
the nervous obstruction is such that this nervous rally shall 
succeed in restoring the nervous circulation, nutrition is 
resumed, and the congestion subsides. When an inflammation 
thus subsides, it is said to terminate by resolution ; but when 
this resolution does not obtain, effusion results. By this sus- 
pended animation, the capillary arteries are disenabled to retain 
their usual caliber under the force the heart is able to exert 
upon them. They are thus compelled to yield to this force, 
until the serum escapes through the meshes of their distended 
walls. When this effusion escapes into the cellular membrane, 
the tumidity continues until the capillary arteries become 
blocked up with crassamentum ; this gives the red appearance 
to a phlegmon which always degenerates into abscess and suppu- 
ration. When effusion occurs in an inflamed mucous mem- 
brane, it escapes into the cavity of the part in the form of a 
limpid albumen at first, which is called by different names in 
different parts. When it occurs in the nasal fossae it is called 
coriza; in fauces, trachea and bronchial membranes, a blenor- 
rhcea ; after it degenerates into a yellow appearance it is called 
catarrhal pus ; when it occurs in a serous membrane, it 
escapes into the serous cavity in the form of a thickened fluid 
resembling bird lime, containing fibrine and the phosphate of 
lime, that endangers the adhesion of contiguous parts. The 
pain in an inflamed serous membrane is generally so intense as 
to establish a favorable reaction, and it thereby generally ter- 
minates by resolution. 

The functional secretion of a membrane is always suspended, 
and the abnormal one obtains when inflamed. The approxi- 
mate cause of inflammation is due to a suspension or depravity 
of one or more of the three contributors to nutrition, which 
are, first, that which is contributed by the vital nerves ; second, 
healthy arterial blood, and thirdly, a proper thermal tempera 
ture of 98 deg. Fah. The nerves admit of three derange- 
ments, either of which will disqualify them for contributing 
their share to the work of nutrition. First, external violence ; 
second, deranged insulation; thirdly, depraved element, 
derived from contagion, infection, or narcotic poisons. Insu- 
lation may be deranged so as to suspend the nervous circula- 
tion in part or in toto, by congestion and inflammation of the 
neurilemmas. The nerves are very subject to stricture from 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 233 

congestion of the periosteum in the foramina by contracting the 
passages through which the nerves emanate from the spine. This 
congestion of the periosteum of the spine may be induced by 
violence, by severe colds, a scrofulous diathesis, the use of 
mercury, venereal poison ; also from long-continued glandular 
obstruction, the secretion of which overflows into the circula- 
tion, rendering the blood too impure to supply but poorly the 
fine structure of these membranes, and they thereby become 
chronically debilitated, so as to become easily affected and 
thrown into a state of congestion from slight colds or over- 
fatigue. The different preparations of mercury, when used, 
more or less of it, is deposited in the cells of the spongy bones 
of the spine, to become a constant exciting cause of congestion 
and inflammation of the periosteum, to the damage of the cir- 
culation in the spinal nerves. 

Among the causes that impoverish the blood are, improper 
food, poisonous beverages, glandular secretions and purulent 
matter taken into the circulation ; also, the imperfect work of 
diseased organs of the digestive apparatus in preparing the 
aliment for chyle. Third, and lastly, caloric as a supporter of 
nutrition. The system provides for its caloric as well as for 
its neurine or electricity. It is a well-established fact in chem- 
istry, that at every chemical change matter undergoes, caloric 
and electricity are evolved ; consequently every elemental 
change that is wrought in transforming crude elements into the 
structure of the living temple, contributes to the perpetual 
supply of these two subtle elements. 

The nerves are insulated by the neurilemmas, so as to pre- 
serve this electrical element for its specific uses. There are, also, 
devices for the preservation of the engendered caloric, sufficient 
to carry on the work of nutrition under ordinary circum- 
stances. The blubber that envelopes the whale, being a non- 
conductor of caloric, operates to prevent the internal temper- 
ature from being sunk to the temperature of the ocean, so, in 
like manner, is the adipose matter deposited in our cellular 
membrane able to preserve a due amount of caloric needed 
in the warm season, in a temperate climate, but when the 
season becomes more inclement, resort is had to clothing made 
of wool and fur, and to apartments where the temperature is 
made comfortable by the use of fuel. The calorific waste is 
much greater in winter than any one would suppose. To pre- 
serve this waste in out-door life in winter, men can supply 
themselves with a sufficiency of warm clothing to be rendered 
comfortable. The system instinctively provides a much 
greater quantity of caloric in the winter than in summer. 

It is generally conceded by physiologists that death ensues 
when the temperature of the whole body is sunk to 75 degrees, 



234 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

and that in health it stands at about 96 degrees Fahrenheit. 
Therefore, it is fair to conclude that nutrition will be sus- 
pended when the temperature is reduced below 75 degrees. 

When the surface or a part of the body is exposed to a lower 
temperature, it approximates to the lower temperature by the 
draft, the lower makes upon the higher. To protect the part thus 
exposed from being sunk below the standard of nutrition, it is 
supported by a draft upon the internal heat of the system. If 
this exposure be long continued, the internal supply will 
become exhausted and unable to protect the part. Then the 
person will sink into a state of lethargic sleep, from which they 
never wake. 

In the work of nutritive assimilation, the principles on which 
it is effected are so subtle as to evade the scrutiny of the most 
powerful microscope, for the reason that all the elements that 
enter into the structure of the living body have to be first 
reduced by the chemical work of nutrition to an invisible 
gaseous element before it can rise into the visible structure 
of the part. When the receptive portion of the fiber is thus 
fed, every particle of matter in the fiber exchanges debris for 
this more vital element. Just in proportion to the amount of 
nutriment the system thus receives into its structure, is the 
amount consumed and reduced by combustion, to an invisible 
element again, in the chemical work of nutrition. Caloric and 
electricity are derived from it, and the residuum is carried 
forward in the venous circulation with the carbonic acid, 
which is to be exhaled by the lungs. By these laws these 
vital currents are constantly kept up, and the elements of the 
human form thus used perform their operative mission until 
their vigor is exhausted. Then they retire and give place to 
those armed with fresh vigor. In this way all make up the 
parts of one universal whole to clothe the spirit with a physical 
form, and thereby render man a living soul. 

CHRONIC INFLAMMATION. 

It has been shown that acute inflammation is the result of a 
complete suspension of nutrition in the part affected, whereas 
chronic inflammation is but a partial suspension of nutrition. 

Every inflammation of much extent or violence is attended 
with a general disturbance of the whole system, called the 
sympathetic inflammatory fever, resulting from the perverted 
action of the nervous system from its normal local work by the 
rally to the part obstructed and inflamed. This sudden draft 
upon the nervous system leaves nutrition below the standard 
of action in all parts of the system, inducing an accumulation 
of arterial blood in the capillary arteries, rendering them 
sensitive enough to command the whole nervous system to its 
local work again : and as there is an unusual quantity of blood 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 235 

in the capillaries, which is assimilated in a short space of time 
as to raise the temperature of the system to the fever heat, by 
the unusual quantity of caloric generated, therefore, this sym- 
pathetic fever is but a reaction from the local draft made upon 
the nervous system to help resuscitate the injured part. 

In this fever the pulse becomes frequent, strong and full, and 
as nutrition is partially suspended, the secretions are dimin- 
ished, urine scant and high colored, mouth and fauces parched, 
and bowels constipated, appetite lost, the patient restless and 
sleepless, headache, and sometimes confusion of intellect, and 
even delirium. This fever furnishes an illustration of what 
Mr. Hunter used to call " an universal sympathy of the body 
with the disturbed condition of a part of it." The system 
remits in this work of rallying to resuscitate its deranged parts, 
and consequently is making repeated efforts to succeed in the 
work of recuperation ; and action succeeds reaction while the 
acute stage lasts, and it only becomes modified when it passes 
into the chronic form. And here let me remark, that it is this 
repeated effort that is made by a debilitated system that reveals 
the laws, and points out the ways, by which recuperative aid 
can be rendered by the physician and surgeon, to succeed in 
restoring a chronically inflamed part; for when nature has ceased 
its efforts, all proffered help must be in vain. 

The treatment for inflammation must be based upon a 
knowledge of the cause, and the system at fault, (the nervous, 
or the vascular), and it not unfrequently happens that both 
are delinquent. The remote, as well as the approximate cause, 
should be considered and attended to, that the approximate 
may be the more readily subdued ; and in all cases the nature 
of the cause must suggest the natural and proper treatment. 



SYMPATHETIC INFLAMMATORY FEVER. 
The irritation of a local injury upon a healthy constitution 
produces that disordered state of it termed sympathetic inflam- 
matory fever. This is the immediate consequence of local 
irritation. This at first is a continued type of fever. It soon 
begins to change this type for that of the remittent ; and when 
the system becomes fatigued and debilitated by the continu- 
ance of a disease which it cannot subdue, it at length loses 
the power of entering into those strong efforts which charac- 
terize the preceding description of this fever. However, 
exhausted as it is, it still sympathizes with the local irritation, 
and the type assumed in this debilitated state is that of hectic 



236 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

fever y which is remittent in its type, a paroxysm of which is 
preceded by a slight chill, and followed by a fever, and 
terminates with a colliquative sweat. The sympathetic inflam- 
matory type of the fever subsides when the inflammation 
degenerates into abscess. The hectic type is induced by pus 
being absorbed and carried into the circulation. Hectic fever 
is generally considered to be remittent in its type, by reason of 
the continued frequency of the pulse, which frequency is 
generally augmented during the febrile exacerbation. But if 
we take into consideration the fact that the debilitated state of 
the system is the cause of the general frequency of the pulse, 
then the type will appear to be intermittent. As it is preceded 
by a chill, then comes the fever with its augmented frequency 
of pulse, and it is terminated by a colliquative sweat ; and 
these exacerbations recurring at regular periods. These exa- 
cerbations are marked by a sensation of burning heat in the 
palms of the hands, which become red and mottled. A 
circumscribed redness is seen in the cheeks. Whatever may 
be the form of the exacerbations in the day-time, they are 
generally succeeded towards the end of the night by copious 
sweats. 

When a diarrhoea supervenes in the latter stages of this 
disease, the sweats commonly disappear. A reddish sediment 
of uric acid is mostly observable in the urine after the sweats ; 
but it is absent during the hot fit, when the urine is usually pale 
ana limpid. treatment of hectic fever. 

The treatment indicated in hectic fever should be directed 
to secure a healthy action of the glandular system, that the 
circulation may be kept as pure as possible. The nervous 
system should be supported by good spinal tonics, while it ia 
laboring to repair the broken down part. Highly nutritious 
food, free from acids, should be given, prepared in the form of 
chyme, to save this power in the system to be exerted ir 
repairing its waste places. Cleanly apartments and fresh ai; 
in sunlight are also very necessary recuperative agents. 

TREATMENT OF ACUTE INFLAMMATION. 

In the treatment of a case of acute inflammation, it k 
important for the physician to take into consideration all of tht 
operative causes that contribute to obstruct the work of nutri- 
tion in the inflamed part, that he may properly direct the 
sanitary means of aiding the system in. its effort to terminate 
the inflammation by resolution. If the fault lies in an 
obstructed circulation in the nerves of the part, a mustard 
paste should be laid on over the part, to aid, by its painful 
stimulative action, in inducing a more efficient nervous rally to 
the part than the local pain is able to command, to insure a 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 237 

resuscitation of the nerves. It should be removed before it 
blisters the part ; or it is good practice to apply a towel wrung 
out of hot water, as hot as the patient can possibly bear, and 
lay it on the painful part, changing them every three or four 
minutes for a half-hour, with the same intent. If the physician 
is apprehensive of the nervous obstruction being located in the 
spine, and induced by congestion of the periosteum, from 
colds, or any other cause, additional treatment should be insti- 
tuted by applying a good stimulating spinal liniment to the 
spine to aid in overcoming this obstruction. If the spine has 
been deranged by an overflow of glandular secretions being 
taken into the circulation, remedies should be directed to the 
glandular organs in fault, that the circulating blood be rendered 
as pure as possible by ventilating the circulation of all these 
impure elements, by accelerated secretory action of all the 
large glands. 

When no chance appears to remain for the inflammation to 
terminate by resolution, and the vital forces are directed to 
the work of breaking down the part into an abscess in the form 
of pus, to remove the part that has lost its vitality, then this 
work should be aided by cutting off the sympathy with the part 
by soothing anodynes, and the application of emolient poultices. 
When pus has been formed, as represented by softness and 
pointing, the abscess should be opened by a sharp instrument, 
as a lancet, to dislodge the pus as early as possible, which, 
while it remains, will effect the destruction of the soft parts in 
contact in every direction, as well as of that to which it is 
pointing to expel the pus. The sooner the abscess is opened, 
the smaller it will be, and the sooner will the work be institu- 
ted to provide the healthy granulations to restore the pait. If 
an abscess be small and making quick progress to the surface, 
with pointing, and a thin state of the skin, denoting that it will 
soon burst, whether a puncture be made or not, is a consider- 
ation of little importance ; for here no risk prevails of the pa- 
tient's suffering being long protracted, or of the abscess being 
much extended ; but if the abscess be large, it becomes impor- 
tant to expel the matter as early as possible, for so soon as the 
abscess is formed, more or less of the matter is absorbed and 
taken into the circulation, to the injury of the health of the pa- 
tient ; for it not unfrequently is the case where deep-seated 
abscesses, beyond surgical aid, send so large a quantity of mat- 
ter into the circulation as to induce a scrofulous diathesis that 
often destroys the patient, as abscess of the lungs, kidneys, 
psoas and lumbar muscles and mesenteric glands. 

Too much caution cannot be exercised in puncturing ab- 
scesses in the vicinity of important vessels, lest a nerve or ar- 
tery might be divided or ruptured. In most cases the abscess 



238 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

forms external to these vessels, and the cut should be made 
parallel to them, 'i he best place for the puncture is generally 
where the fluctuation is most perceptible, or where the point- 
ing takes place ; for here the skin is thinnest. The size of the 
opening should be such as will allow the matter to escape with 
facility. 

Sinuses are produced by the matter not readily getting to the 
surface, or not having an outlet made for it with due prompti- 
tude. Here the principal indication is to make an opening in 
such a situation and of such a size as will prevent all further 
lodgment of pus. 

Fistula are disposed to occur whenever there is something at 
the bottom of or in the abscess keeping up suppuration a long 
time, or preventing the ready escape of the matter that forms; also 
where the abscess is subject to continued disturbance from the 
action of muscles ; hence, one cause of fistulae in ano. In the 
treatment of abscesses attended with fistulse and sinuses, or a 
backwardness to heal from the pus not passing out readily, a 
position should be taken calculated to facilitate the escape of 
the matter from the opening ; or the skillful application of a 
compress and bandage over the place where the matter col- 
lects frequently supersedes all occasion for fresh incisions. 

When fistulae and sinuses cannot be cured by the foregoing 
principles, and they have become indolent, recourse should be 
had to stimulating injections of solutions of vegetable caustic, 
or nitrate of silver, tannin or a decoction of marsh rosemary, 
before applying the compress. See breaking down by suppu- 
ration. 

BREAKING DOWN BY SUPPURATION. 

If a foreign substance accumulates in a capillary artery, it 
has to be removed by the process of suppuration ; that is, it 
will have to be disposed of by breaking down the part, to give 
place for the formation of a new fiber. In instituting this pro- 
cess to save the life of a part, it become necessary as a primary 
step to set the bounds of the abscess, by the sealing process, 
that closes the arteries and turns off the blood from the part 
to be broken down. All vital support now being withdrawn, 
the work of decomposition begins. The sealed boundary is 
vitally protected from the decomposing matter with greater in- 
tegrity at every other point than at the gate left for the matter 
to pass. This is called the pointing of the abscess. Every part 
of its boundary after the escape of the pus becomes a secre- 
tory matrix, to produce the plastic lymph needed to fill the 
abscess, in which to lay the tubular arteries, veins and nervous 
fiber, and all the new structure needed for the part. In order 
for this process to be carried on successfully, nature requires first, 
that the suppurated matter and the foreign body be expelled, 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 



2 39 



from the abscess. Secondly, it requires to be sealed up to pro- 
tect the plastic lymph from escaping or being corroded by the 
atmosphere ; and thirdly, it requires to be tenderly cared for 
to protect the delicate fibrous structure that is being laid 
through the plastic lymph in the abscess. Here we see the 
wisdom and benevolence in the divine intention in rendering 
the part so exquisitively sensitive ; it being given as a secu rity 
against the disturbance of this delicate work of resurrecting the 
part. 

If the abscess is left open, the presence of atmospheric air 
will corrode the forming structure and destroy its vitality ; and 
it will be lost and voided, as long as it is exposed thus ; also, if 
it is violently handled or pressed upon, it will interfere with 
the successful work of organizing the new fiber and vessels ; 
and it will be lost and new plastic lymph will have to be secre- 
ted to fill it, and the work of laying the fibers, etc., instituted 
again. If this loss is repeated by either of these causes, or by 
a foreign substance remaining in the abscess, a fistulous open- 
ing will be formed ; then it becomes a chronic abscess. 



SCROFULA. 



The premonitory symptoms of scrofula are manifest by an 
enlargement of the lymphatic glands. When the disease has 
advanced to a certain stage, it is apt to attack the glands prop- 
er. The complexion becomes sallow. The person does not 
feel languid at first, but as the disease advances it saps the 
foundation of the system, and enervates it, and the sinuous blood 
prevails and produces the scrofulous or tubercular deposit ; 
and in the proportion that the system is deprived of the hsem- 
atin of the blood, the powers of nutrition will fail, and the 
tubercular or scrofulous habit prevail. The larger tubercles, 
for want of nervous support, degenerate and break down in ab- 
scesses. 

There are three primary causes of scrofula, venerea, itch and 
measles. These three furnish the principal derangements that 
lay the foundation of scrofula in the system. For their modus 
operandi of enervating the system, I refer to the dessertation 
on scabies or itch. 

The indications of cure are, to ventilate the system of the 
glandular secretions in the circulation ; to remove all glan- 
dular obstructions to prevent the repetition of the cause of de- 



240 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

fective nutrition ; to tone up the system, and thereby give in- 
creased energy to the nutritive powers of the nervous system, 
and put the patient on proper diet and regimen. Begin the 
treatment by giving from one to two grains of podophyllin, 
preceded by a nitrate of potassa solution fifteen grains in water 
§ii, dose, 3ii ; every one-half hour. Then use 1> f. ex. yellow 
dock, burdock, dandelion, wahoo, urtica diorca, marsh rose- 
mary, uva ursi, colocynth, prickly ash aa |i, f. ex. hyoscyamus 
3iv, T. sang. can. 3vi, nitrate of potassa grs. 60, salicin 3i, T. 
Wintergreen 3iv, simple syrup Oi. Dose, 3i, four times per 
day. If this is not sufficiently laxative, add more f. ex. wahoo, 
or make the deficit in the use of a one-half grain sugar-coated 
podophyllin pill. Use this prescription for a long time, occa- 
sionally suspending it a day or two. 



CANCER, 

ROSE AND SPIDER. 



This is one of the most formidable diseases we are called upon 
to treat, and one of the most distressing and loathsome that af- 
flicts humanity. It is not of a scrofulous origin, as has been claimed, 
neither is it dependent upon an impure state of the blood, or 
any general derangement of the nervous system, but is a lo- 
cal derangement in the nutritive process in a single fibre, one 
that diverts the recuperative element from a portion of the 
fibre after the proper nutritive process has obtained at the ar- 
terial termina, inducing a fungous excrescence from the fibre. 
Where the disadjustment obtains between the nerve, artery and 
fibre, so as to prevent the nutritive process from obtaining, the 
part is removed by the process of abscess, and the adjustment 
made in the relay of these vessels in the plastic lymph that fills 
the abscess for that object. This excrescing fungi having re- 
ceived the proper vital composition at the point of nutrition, 
is supported from direct decomposition, and as the supply is 
continuous, the excrescence enlarges until the extreme part de- 
composes, for the lack of the proper electrical circuit used in 
the recuperative process of exchanging the fresh element for 
the worn. 

There are quite a variety of these excrescences recorded that 
depend for their dissimilarity upon the order of structure in- 
volved for their composition. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 24I 

In the treatment of an external rose cancer, it is a very er- 
roneous method of treatment to torture the patient with the 
slow process of cauterizing with the various orders of caustics, 
when it can be better accomplished, and at once, with the knife, 
the object being to remove the tumors and its capillary artery 
and nerve center, and make a proper clearance of the parts 
with as little waste of the skin as possible. If it is well done, 
no further trouble need be apprehended from its return. The 
spider cancer is an enlargement of an artery of the skin, and is 
of no importance while it is not disturbed. 



SALT RHEUM. TETTER. 
(herpes psoriasis.) 

Very small eruptions or vesicles appear, which break and 
discharge a thin corrosive fluid that causes a very great degree 
of itching, which concretes, and afterwards scabs off. Four 
kinds are enumerated. 

1 st. Herpes Farinosus> or what may be termed the dry 
tetter, is the most simple of all the species. 

2d. Herpes Pustulosus. This form of the species appears 
in pustules, which are originally separate and distinct, but after- 
wards run together in clusters. 

3d. Herpes Millar is, or miliary tetter. This breaks out in- 
discriminately over the whole body, but more frequently about 
the loins, breast, perineum, scrotum and groins, than in other 
parts. It generally appears in clusters, though sometimes in 
distinct rings or circles of very minute pimples, the resem- 
blance of which to the millet seed has given rise to the name 
of the species. 

4th. Herpes Exedens, the eating and corroding tetter, (so 
called from its destroying or corroding the parts it attacks.) 
This species appears at first in the form of several small pain- 
ful ulcerations, all collected into larger spots of different sizes, 
and of various figures, always of more or less of an erysipelas 
inflammation. These ulcers discharge large quantities of a 
thin, sharp, serous matter, which forms into small crusts that in 
a short time fall off. 

Treatment of the first order. Apply the white percipitate 
ointment to the affected part three times per day. For exter- 
nal treatment of the second order, use a strong decoction of 
marsh rosemary root on the parts, and keep them wet for 
five hours by dipping a piece of muslin in the decoction, and 



242 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

apply it on the part affected. After it is removed, apply the 
white precipitate ointment. Repeat this wash every day, and 
follow with the ointment until it is well. 

Treatment of the third order. rJL T. capsicum and T. gum 
myrrh, aa fi, oil of wintergreen, 3i; mix. Apply this to the 
tetter six times per day, and at bedtime apply the white per- 
cipitate ointment. 

External treatment for the fourth order. T. capsicum and T. 
of gum myrrh, aa Ji, oil wintergreen 3ss; mix; corn meal 12 
ounces, Jamaica ginger 3iii. Boil the corn meal, and stir in the 
ginger and make into mush, and when sufficiently cold to apply, 
to each ounce of the mush, stir in one-twelfth of the tincture, 
when it is wanted for use. Spread this one ounce on a piece 
of muslin in the form of a paste, and apply it to the part 
affected, and let it remain three-fourths of an hour. Thus use 
three of them, after which apply the white percipitate ointment 
for the remainder of the day. Repeat this treatment daily for 
twenty days, unless the recovery of the part occurs sooner. 

GENERAL TREATMENT FOR ALL THE ORDERS. 

3 F. ex. yellow dock, f. ex. of burdock, f. ex. uva ursi, 
f. ex. of dandelion, f. ex. wahoo, each one ounce, nitrate of 
potassa 120 grains, salicin 120 grains. Dissolve the two last 
in water $vi ; also dissolve in the water 40 grains of the extract 
of hyoscyamus. Mix all together. Dose, 3i, diluted in 3iv of 
sweetened water. Take five doses per day. After using this 
prescription two days, at bed time take four sugar-coated half- 
grain podophyllin pills, and repeat this dose of pills once per 
week for four weeks, or until the cuticle is free from any erup- 
tions and the patient feels soundly well. 

Avoid in diet and drinks every sour thing ; otherwise a good 
sound diet may be indulged in. 



ERYSIPELAS. 

Erysipelas most usually attacks the face, and appears in the 
form of a swollen, reddened and blistered surface, on which 
the blistering process slowly creeps in all directions, destroy- 
ing the cuticular membrane, wherever this effused, acrid 
serum comes in contact with it, unless a course is pursued to 
neutralize its corrosive properties. 

The primary cause is usually a severe cold that obstructs 
these nutritive nerves at their spinal center. It is ever the case 
when the spinal column receives a severe shock from a cold 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 243 

sufficient to induce conjestion in its periosteal membranes, that 
all the vital organs become obstructed, and an inflammatory 
fever results from the plethora and congestion arising from sus- 
pended nutrition, the fault of which is not due to the integrity 
of these nerves, but it can be found in the narrowed foraminal 
passage from the cord through the spine that strictures their 
circulation by this congestion of the spinal periosteum. The 
seat of the congested nervous center, when it attacks the face, 
lies in the medulla oblongata. The indications of cure are to 
stimulate and help every glandular organ perform its offices 
by removing all obstructions j and, secondly, to make an effort 
to overcome the spinal congestion as speedily as possible, by 
direct stimulating applications to the portions of the spine 
affected, and thirdly, to apply some neutralizing agent to the 
blistered surface that shall prevent it from spreading ; fourthly, 
aid cuticular exhalation by the use of a diaphoretic. 

The following has proved to be a successful treatment : 
Begin first with an antacid diuretic. r> Decoction of hops 
|iv ; bicarb, soda 3ss ; nitrate of potassa, grs. 20; mix. Dose, 
3ii. Give such a dose every half-hour for six doses, then give 
a dose every hour. Also, begin the use of diaphoretic powders 
in two-grain doses, repeated every two hours. After using the 
diuretic three hours, give four sugar-coated half-grain podo- 
phyllin pills at one dose, and repeat the dose, if they do not 
operate as a cathartic in eighteen hours. 

Apply the following to the inflamed surface : R Tannin, grs. 
x ; nitrate of potassa, grs. 60 ; warm water, rviii ; bicarb, soda 
3ss. Dissolve the ingredients in the water, and keep the in- 
flamed part constantly wet with it by wetting a piece of folded 
muslin in it and laying it upon the blistered and reddened sur- 
face, and often changed, not allowing it to get dry. This mus- 
lin should be thoroughly washed before dipping it into the 
solution, for a renewed application, every change. For a night 
change, use plentifully the white precipitate ointment in place 
of the solution, and repeat its application often enough to 
keep the part constantly lubricated. Apply a good stimulating 
liniment on the back of the neck and the whole length of the 
spine once per day. Apply a hot water pack to the back of 
the neck for some twenty or thirty minutes, is advisable as a 
first measure in the treatment, to overcome the spinal conges- 
tion as speedily as possible. The bowels should be kept open 
by the use of podophyllin in one grain doses, taken often 
enough to secure two passages per day. Give the patient a 
drink of a decoction of mountain mint, catnip or sage, and an 
occasional draft of cold water. The diet should be arrow root 
gruel alone, when it can be obtained, else corn starch gruel, 
until the fever subsides. Then, when he can bear fifteen grs. 



244 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

of salicin per day, in three five-grain doses before each meal, a 
more liberal diet can be indulged in. The spreading of the 
vesication is frequently checked by drawing a line around it 
with a pencil of nitrate of silver. A wash, also, of nitrate of 
silver, six grains to an ounce of soft water, is a favorite pre- 
scription to neutralize the acridity of the exhaling fluid j its 
only objection is that it colors the skin black and the clothing 
coming in contact with it. The case will be obstinately per- 
sistent in its course until the stricture of the nerves at their 
spinal exit is relieved ; then the recovery will be very rapid. 
When fatal gangrenous sloughing of the part occurs, it is wholly 
due to a continuous stricture of the vital nerves that preside 
over nutrition in the inflamed part. 



INFLAMED EYES. 

Acute ophthalmia consists of inflammation of the conjunc- 
tiva. Symptoms: smarting heat, stiffness, dryness of the eye, with 
a feeling as if dust had got into it ; the conjunctiva is of a 
bright scarlet redness ; the redness superficial, so that the 
enlarged vessels can be moved by pulling the eyelids ; slight 
intolerance to light, and flow of tears on exposure of the eye, 
and more or less headache and fever. 

Chronic conjunctiva, or chronic ophthalmia, usually occurs 
as a sequel to the acute. 

The acute form usually follows a severe cold, that obstructs 
the fifth pair of nerves in their exit from the medulla oblongata, 
the middle branch of which presides over these membranes. 
This suspended nutrition is the cause of the congestion. Long- 
continued congestion at the root of these nerves will induce 
purulent ophthalmia. A partial recovery of this nervous center 
will leave a chronic inflammation, the degree of which will 
depend upon the degree of the relief of the presiding nerve. 

The indications of cure are, to relieve the obstructed nerves 
and the glandular inactivity usually present in the case. 

Ophthalmia Tarsi is an inflammation of the palpebral con- 
juctiva and the edge of the eyelids, with disordered secretions 
of meibomian glands, so that the eyelids, stick together and 
become encrusted with dried mucus during sleep. It may be 
acute, attended with pain and soreness, but it is generally 
chronic and obstinate and attended with itching. 

Treatment for acute ophthalmia: Proceed to relieve the con- 
gestion ot the spine and head, induced by the cold, by giving 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 245 

a five-grain diaphoretic powder, and repeat with three-grain 
doses every two and a half hours. Apply cloths wrung out of 
hot water to the back of the head and neck, changing often 
for a half hour. Also give n. potassa grs. 30, in cold water ?viii j 
give 3iv every hour ; also give podophyllin grs. 2, and repeat 
one grain the second night. Apply the white precipitate oint- 
ment to the outer lids and around the eyes, and keep the skin 
constantly oiled with it. With this treatment the relief will be 
very prompt, seldom extending beyond the third day, and often 
subsiding in twenty-four hours. 

TREATMENT FOR THE CHRONIC STATE. 

In long-continued chronic ophthalmia, add to this treatment 
to induce an active nervous rally to the membranes. Apply 
the cholera specific without dilution, in the following way : 
Have ready a wash-bowl of cold soft water, and a soft sponge. 
Close the eyes tightly, and apply the stimulant with the finger 
wet in it, on the outer eye-lids. Let it smart intensely, for in 
this depends the success of restoring the hitherto paralyzed 
nerves ; but when the excitement becomes unendurable, apply 
the cold water with the sponge, dipping it often, and continue 
it until the eye can bear to be opened ; then apply the white 
ointment externally. Apply this hot application twice per day, 
morning and evening, until the inflammation subsides. It is a 
very happy surprise to see how speedily a case of a years' 
standing will yield to this prompt rallying process, while under 
the use of the above glandular treatment. Ophthalmia tarsi, of 
many years standing, will yield to this treatment ; yet it is 
advisable, when they are very raw, to first, for a few days, 
apply a solution of tannin of the strength of tannin grs. 5, 
water 3i, with a camel's hair brush ; after which apply the 
white precipitate ointment to save the granulations. Repeat the 
penciling three times per day. In long-continued, old chronic 
cases of ophthalmia, the following syrup will be useful to take 
for a long time to secure a continuous,healthy glandular action, 
and to give proper tone to the nervous system : 

3 Fl. ex. yellow dock, burr dock, wahoo, dandelion, cypri- 
pedium, aa fi, f. ex. hyoscyamus 3iv, nitrate of potassa grs. 
60, T. juniper berries, T. wintergreen aa 3ii, simple syrup 
f. §viii ; mix. Dose, 3i. Give from four to six doses per day. 
Use two one-half-grain podophyllin sugar-coated pills every 
second or third day, as the case may require, to secure one or 
two passages per day. 



246 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

CATARRH 

OR, INFLAMMATION OF THE SOFT PALATE. 

This disease occurs most frequently from severe colds. It is 
caused by a sudden collapse of the glandular system, and a 
partial obstruction of the cervical nerves that preside over 
nutrition in the uvula, or soft palate. 

When the spine, at the seat of these nerves, becomes affected 
by a chronic inflammation between the joints, the palate will 
become congested by slight changes of atmospheric tempera- 
ture, from temperate to below freezing. Then the chronic 
habit is formed that is called Catarrh. 

As this spinal congestion descends from joint to joint, and 
partially obstructs the nerves that arise between them, conges- 
tion and inflammation in the organs over which they preside 
result. In this way this disease descends from the palate to 
the fauces, trachea and bronchia, inducing tracheitis and 
bronchitis. 

TREATMENT. 

Use the internal treatment recommended under the head of 
chronic bronchitis. Several gargles may be used to advantage. 
First, cholera specific 3i, diluted in cold water §iv. Use 3i as 
a gargle ten times per day. No harm will result from swallow- 
ing it. Second, f. ex. of marsh rosemary |ii. Use 3i as a 
gargle. Repeat it five times per day. Third, tannin grs. 15, 
in solution of water f iv. Use 3ii as a gargle, in place of the 
others, five times per day. This may be sent into the nose 
with a syringe, in bad cases, to come in contact with ulcers on 
the back part of the uvula. 

In case of syphilitic ulcers, use nitrate of silver grs. 5, in 
solution of water |i. Apply this with a swab to the palate and 
fauces. Keep the mouth open for a short time; then use directly 
a gargle of either the tannin or marsh rosemary, after first 
washing out the mouth with some fresh water. Use it three 
times per day. Use the spinal liniment on the back of the 
head and neck once per day. Inhale the gas accumulating 
from oil of peppermint several times per day. Abstain from 
the use of everything sour, and if the disease is of venereal 
origin, abstain from the use of meat. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 247 



SCABIES, OR ITCH. 

This is a contagious disease, dependent upon exposure to 
one who has the disease, for its propagation and spread in 
families and communities. 

It first makes its appearance upon the wrists and between 
the fingers, and in a short time the eruptions degenerate into 
a white pus contained under the cuticular elevations. After a 
few days, it makes its appearance over various parts of the 
system. Its time of incubation, after exposure by contact 
with one affected with it, is from one to two weeks before it 
makes its appearance. 

The presence of this virus in the pores of the skin inflames 
and obstructs them, and suppuration is the result. 

This disease is not unfrequently transferred from the external 
to the internal membranes, inducing tracheitis, bronchitis, pleu- 
ritis, peritonitis or vaginitis. Under these circumstances the 
system will rapidly degenerate into a scrofulous habit by the 
great amount of pus taken up by absorbents and carried into 
the circulation, to go on from bad to worse until it accumulates 
in large abscesses, to ruin the patient. 

The indications of cure are, to aid the glandular system, and 
use such agents as are indicated, to neutralize the virus of the 
absorbing pus, and render the blood more nutritious, and use 
an external ointment that will support the activity of the heal- 
ing process in the skin, and protect it from a further spread. 

Begin the treatment with a solution of nitrate of potassa grs. 
20, water rvi. Dose 3ii every hour. On the second night give 
an adult podophyllin sugar-coated pills, grs. 2, and less by age. 
After this operation, use fine sulphur 3iv, molasses ?vi ; mix ; 
stir well before giving. Dose to a child four years, old two 
teaspoonfuls at bed-time for three days ; then skip one night, 
then use three nights. Use externally the red precipitate oint- 
ment freely. Just keep the bowels a little lax with the sulphur. 
Ten days to three weeks will cure this disease. 

PRAIRIE ITCH. 

This disease is more troublesome than the pustular itch 
called scabies. It occurs more frequently in warm than in cold 
weather. 

The eruptions are preceded by an itching, stinging sensation 
in the skin, which, upon being irritated, blotches up like the 
hives. In this state of congestion the itching continues until 
the patient is stimulated to scratch the part until it bleeds ; 
then it will -subside and heal. Fresh eruptions continue to 



248 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

make their appearance, until so much of the surface is affected 
as to render the symptoms unendurable. 

The immediate cause is congestion of the cuticle to the 
closure of the pores. This disease is not contagious, occur- 
ring most usually sporadically, but sometimes it occurs 
epidemically in malarious prairie districts. The carbonic acid 
gas escaping through the pores of the skin being rendered 
unduly acrid, irritates the pores and closes them, and they will 
itch and sting until they are mechanically opened. 

The internal treatment for ague and fever, and the use of the 
white precipitate ointment externally, will cure the patient in 
two or three weeks. An occasional dose of the sulphur and 
molasses will expedite the cure by neutralizing the pungency 
of the carbonic acid, by combining with it. Persons who do 
not use hard, limey water are not very subject to this disease. 
The kidneys become more or less obstructed by the calcareous 
element, to disqualify them for depurating this excess of 
carbonic acid from the circulation ; hence, it has to find its 
exit through the pores of the skin. 



PERICARDITIS CHRONIC, AND DROPSY OF THE 
CHEST. 

This case may be known by the following symptoms : Pain 
in the region of the heart and in the left side, running up the 
side to the top of the shoulder, occasionally. An habitual 
cough, with phlegmy expectoration; finds it difficult to lay low 
in bed; pale and sallow complected ; appetite not good ; quite 
slight exertion will induce hurried respiration. In advanced 
cases the patient has to be bolstered up in bed; cough frequent, 
with copious expectoration, and bloating of the lower 
extremities. 

TREATMENT. 

]J Fl. ex. hops, burdock, yellow-dock, wahoo, uva. ursi, aa 
|i, f. ex. hyoscyamus 3iv, nitrate of potassa grs. 45, T. winter- 
green 3ii, simple syrup ^vi ; mix. Dose 3i six times per day, 
diluted. At bed-time give grs. iii of diaphoretic powders. 
Also, make a free use of the pulmonary balsam in drachm doses 
every time the cough becomes troublesome. 

After taking this prescription for two days, at bed-time take 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 249 

three sugar-coated half-grain podophyllin pills, and afterwards 
take one pill at night, if having no passage of the bowels on 
that day. When the cough becomes troublesome, while taking 
the above prescription, the patient may take three grains of 
the diaphoretic powders once in three hours, or often enough 
to carry that point, which serves to overcome the dropsical 
secretion in the chest, and support the nervous system to 
resume nutrition in the chronically inflamed pericardium. 
After the cough improves with all other symptoms, three to 
four doses of the syrup per day may suffice. By using proper 
judgment to carry these points with this prescription, the 
patient will recover in the course of from four to six weeks. 
The author has met with great success in this case with the use 
■of these remedies. 



SPLEEN ENLARGEMENT. 

This enlargement is induced by arterial plethora often re- 
peated, as in a long-continued case of ague and fever. Use 
the treatment directed for intermittent fever, but reduce the 
quantity of the doses one-half. Also use the same for a habit- 
ual pain in the spleen, or for pain in the left side, remember- 
ing that the liver must be opened before beginning the use of 
the tonic. Apply the spinal liniment on the spine the length 
of the chest once per day, and not fail to keep the liver gently 
open with podophyllin pills until the tumid state of the spleen 
subsides. 



PLEURITIS, 

OR, PLEURISY AND ACUTE PERICARDITIS. 

This acute inflammatory attack of the pleura, when occurring 
in the left side, usually involves the pericardium of the heart in 
it; and, as the symptoms and treatment are the same in either, 
for brevity's sake we will treat of them together. The symp- 
toms are a high bounding fever pulse, with a pain that lanci- 
nates so keenly as to cause the patient to catch the breath in 
less than full inflations of the lungs. 



250 A. H. DAVIS THEORY AND 

TREATMENT. 

R Give hyoscyamus ex. grains five dissolved in 3iv of hot 
water, T. peppermint }(Z sweetened for one dose. Then, if 
the patient does not become free from pain in one hour after, 
give two more grains of the hyoscyamus extract. Supply hot 
cloths wrung out of water as hot as the patient can bear, and 
apply them to the painful portion of the chest ; and change 
them every four or five minutes until relief is obtained. 

Also prepare a solution of nitrate of potassa grs. xx, in water 
pv. Take 3iv every one-half hour until it is all taken. After 
giving the first dose of the solution, give podophyllin grs. ii, in 
a tablespoon of milk, drinking some before and after. The 
pulmonary balsam should be used in 3i doses every hour. If 
three-grain doses of diaphoretic powders be given once in 
three hours, the patient will perspire and sleep. After the liver 
is well opened, a dose of diaphoretic powders of three grains 
each taken three hours apart, and the pulmonary balsam, will 
finish the treatment in the case. The patient will be relieved 
in three hours and rest on this prescription. 



RHEUMATISM, ACUTE AND CHRONIC. 

WHITE SWELLING. 

White swelling is an enlargement of the knee joint, arising 
first from a disability of the internal sciatic nerve to support 
nutrition in this portion of the external membrane of the cap- 
sular ligament of the joint. Congestion and effusion of a phos- 
phatic fibrinous lymph into the cellular membrane, that com- 
bines with the lime, and the overflowing urine being turned 
into the circulation, forming the triple concretion of a phos- 
phatic urate of lime. This effused fluid being too dense and 
tenacious to be taken up by the lymphatic absorbents, remains 
and augments in the cellular membrane to enlarge this concrete 
swelling, which is wholly external to the capsular ligaments 
of the joint, and not at all in contact with the periosteal mem- 
brane of the bone of the joint. When this concrete enlarge- 
ment is found upon a horse, it is called, in veterinary surgery, 
a bone spavin. 

We must bear in mind, while contemplating the pathology of 
a class of inflammatory diseases that involve the large joints of 
the upper and lower extremities, that they are local inflamma- 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 25 1 

tions ; and that all locally inflamed parts have their direct 
cause in an obstructed state of the nutritive nerves, that dis- 
qualifies them for furnishing the electric radical primates, for 
combining the recuperative element needed for the structure 
involved ; also that this obstruction will be invariably found 
at the spinal emanation of the nerve. Congestion of the per- 
iosteum of the spine narrows the canal and strictures the nerve 
in its passage from the medulla spinalis through the spine. The 
fault is in the congested state of the spine ; the nerve being 
mechanically strictured will promptly support nutrition as soon 
as the stricture is removed. 

This congestion in the spine may be mechanically induced 
by lifting, jumping upon solid ground, inducing congestion in 
the synovial membranes between the joints ; also by taking a 
cold, — but impure blood is the most general exciting cause in 
protracted cases of gout, and chronic rheumatism, that involve 
the large joints of the extremities. White swelling, gout, inflam- 
matory rheumatism, and inflammation of the capular ligaments 
of the ankle joints, all originate from a spinal obstruction of 
their recuperative nerves, and only vary in the portion of the 
spine from which they emanate. I here class them all together 
as local inflammations of the large joints of the extremities, 
and treat of them in their acute and chronic stages. 

When the system has acquired a gouty or rheumatic habit, 
its relapses are quite frequent, and are subject to occur under 
severe colds and excessive systemic exhaustion. 

The remote cause of this systemic condition requires a care- 
ful and elaborate analysis to trace all its concatenations in the 
development of this spinal weakness, or prostration ; for it is 
not the creature of a day, but has been sapping the foundations 
of the health of a patient for a long time. It can first be seen 
in an abuse of the digestive apparatus ; in the use of improper 
food and unhealthy drinks ; also in the derangement of the 
nervous system, by sitting in crowded assemblies, and in 
crowded and poorly ventilated sleeping rooms ; in late hours ; 
in brooding over disappointed hopes, and undue love of money 
and position, — all which serve to impair digestion, distract the 
brain, and prostrate the vital nerves that preside over nutrition. 
When the food is not properly chymified, it is apt to degenerate 
into an acid. This acid is taken into the circulation and sent on 
to the kidneys for separation from the blood. When the kidneys 
are thus taxed beyond endurance, a partial paralysis ensues in 
the functional nerves in the secretory department, and conges- 
tion and obstruction in the excretory ducts results j and urea 
is turned into the circulation by reason of such obstruction. An 
overflow of urea into the circulating blood not only renders 
the blood less nutritious, but it becomes a source of irritation, 



252 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

congestion and albuminous obstruction of the capillary biliary 
ducts, and a biliary overflow of this acrid bile into the circula- 
tion obtains, to render the blood still less nutritious. Even when 
but a few of the renal excretory ducts are obstructed, it serves 
to deprave the recuperative work in the fine structure of 
nervous fibrillar, the epithelial membranes of ducts and the 
synovial membranes of the joints. This defective nutrition is 
rendered more insufficient in the work of recuperation by an 
increased number of the renal excretory ducts being involved 
in the obstruction, to augment the quantity of the renal over- 
flow. While small quantities serve to thicken the serous mem- 
branes between the joints of the spine, certain larger quantity 
of its accumulation in the circulation will induce a general sus- 
pension of nutrition, and bring on a chill, to rally an adequate 
systemic nervous force to render the impoverished blood as- 
similatable. 

While the great spinal nervous centers are being disarmed 
by a chronic renal derangement, exhausting labor, jumping or 
lifting, to injure the synovial membranes between the joints, or 
a severe cold that congest a portion of the spinal membranes, 
will tend to bring on a fit of rheumatism in the part depend- 
ent upon the nervous center obstructed ; and its duration will 
depend upon how speedily the remote cause, located in the 
renal organs, the approximate cause, located in the congested 
spinal nervous center, are removed, to relieve the direct cause 
of suspended nutrition, inducing congestion and inflammation 
in the capsular ligaments of the affected joint. 

There are some peculiarities in a case of acute inflammatory 
rheumatism not common to other orders of this class of inflam 
mations, " which is the transfer of the inflammation from the 
large joints of the lower extremities to those of the upper ex- 
tremities." In the winter of 1850 and 185 1, the author had an 
opportunity to observe several cases of the one under consid- 
eration. A severe epidemic of putrid sore throat was very 
prevalent : quite a large per cent, of these cases was prostrated 
with inflammatory rheumatism. These occurrences were only 
with those who had a severe pain in the head, and a high fever 
from the effects of the local inflammation, and of several days 
duration. Those who escaped the sequences of this rheuma- 
tism were more promptly relieved by proper direct treatment 
of the inflamed throat, that caused an early subsidence of the 
fever. But with the less fortunate cases, the systemic rally to 
that nervous center was sufficiently intense and continuous to 
leave the lower sciatic nerves unable to support nutrition in 
the lower extremities, while the febrile arterial force induced 
congestion in the large joints of the lower limbs. 

The intense pain induced by inflammation in these dense, 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 253 

fibrous ligaments instituted a nervous .rally that restored the 
activity in the lower sciatic nerves in a short time ; but this 
severe rally was at the expense of deranging the normal activity 
of the upper sciatic nervous centre, that induced congestion 
in the capsular ligaments of the joints in the arms. If this 
paralysis affects the cardiac nervous centre also, which lies 
contiguous, the heart will be involved in inflammation. The 
pain in the upper extremities may be as intense as it was in the 
lower one, but the rally cannot be as prompt, by reason of the 
remaining sensitive state of the improving lower seat of 
inflammation. Consequently, the upper limbs will improve 
slower ; but usually the congestion is of less intensity than that 
which was induced in the lower limbs. Prompt relief of the 
glandular obstruction present in these cases is indicated, and 
will not fail to save the patient from these painful sequences. 
Add to this an application of an active liniment to the spine, 
will prevent this metastasis. There are three other causes that 
often serve to induce rheumatism : 

First : The Turn of Life /with the female. At this period 
menstruation begins to be suspended. This functional work 
serves as a purifier of the blood, wherein the glandular system 
has been habitually inactive, and the system made the best of 
this monthly depurative work to secure passable health. With 
this suspended aid comes less nutritious blood, spinal derange- 
ment at the sciatic centres, and a rheumatic habit obtains, that 
becomes as intractable as are the glandular and nervous 
systems slow to assume new duties and become aroused to 
their full standard of functional activity. 

Secondly : Deposits of mercury, accumulated in the cellular 
structure of the bones of the great joints and those of the 
spinal column, caused by the use of calomel and mercurial 
blue pills. This order is very intractable, rendering the health 
of the patient very unstable, having a tendency to take a cold 
easily, and with its spinal congestion induced, augments or 
brings on a fit of rheumatism. In this way these poor sufferers 
live at a poor, dying rate. Some have been cured, others 
greatly relieved of their suffering, while millions have found, 
from the use of this drug, premature graves. 

Thirdly : Siphilitic Rheumatism. Physicians of very high 
authority have ventured the statement that it is very difficult 
to determine whether this rheumatism is of venereal origin, or 
the result of mercurial treatment, so commonly used in that 
disease by the allopathic school of physicians. (See Mercury) 
As the author has never known a case of rheumatism to occur 
as a sequel to venerea among the great number of cases suc- 
cessfully treated by his vegetable remedies, is an evidence that 
an abusive use of mercury has been the cause of the spinal 



254 A - H - DAVIS THEORY AND 

congestion that induced . the rheumatism ; proving that the 
sequelae of mercury are worse than the disease for which it is 
used. From the effects of one dose of calomel administered 
to the author, while suffering from scarlet fever, when he was 
six years old, so much deranged the spine at the sciatic nervous 
centres, as to induce this rheumatic habit, that lasted thirteen 
years. At this time relief was afforded by the enlargement of 
the bones, while making the growth from youth to puberty. Its 
routine of symptoms were as follows : Upon taking a cold, 
sometimes the left and at others the right knee would begin to 
be painful, and swell to a great extent, which was painful 
beyond the power of language to express. This attack would 
generally be of about six weeks duration. During this conva- 
lescence the limbs would become serviceable, until prostrated 
by another cold. The mercurial deposit lying in the spine to 
weaken the nutritive processes in the membranes, and induce 
congestion upon a slight chill, and afterwards to prevent or 
protract their recuperation. Fifty-one years have elapsed 
since being relieved from this mercurial disease, in which the 
author has enjoyed good health. 

ACUTE SCIATIC RHEUMATISM 

Is one of the most painful diseases known, and one that renders 
the patient immovable, without exciting the most intense pain, 
but when properly treated is as tractable to consistent remedies 
as many diseases of less formidable character, yet it requires a 
bold, full-dose treatment adequate to overcome all the impedi- 
ments found in this path of health. We find glandular 
obstructions, impoverished blood, congestion of the spine, and 
great nervous prostration, and suspended nutrition, congestion, 
and a painful inflammation in the capsular ligaments of the 
affected joint. For external treatment for the spinal congestion, 
apply a strong spinal liniment twice per day. To remove the 
renal obstruction, and render the circulation more nutritious 
and more combustible, give decoction of hops |iv, nitrate of 
potassa grs. 30 ; mix. Dose, 3ii every half-hour until it is all 
taken. Also, begin the use of 1> Ex. hyoscyamus, (Henry 
Thayer), grs. 40, f. ex. phytolacca d, 3ii, f. ex. wahoo |i, T. 
lobelia seed 3i, T. sang. can. 3ii ; dissolve the ■ extract of hyos. 
in one ounce of warm water, put all into a four-ounce phial, 
add T. wintergreen 3ii, and fill the phial up with simple syrup. 
Dose, 3i in a little water. Give such a dose every two hours 
for six doses ; then give a dose three hours apart. 

If the patient is suffering with much pain, for the first dose 
dissolve 5 grains of hyoscyamus in 3iii of water, and add T. 
wintergreen 3^3, sugar 3ss ; give it at one dose to support the 
nervous system and relieve the suffering. Afterwards, give from 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 255 

two to three grain doses of the hyos., and from two to two and 
a-half hours apart, or often enough to make the patient quiet 
and get some rest, extending the time between these doses 
during the time of rest and quietude from pain. After using 
the hop and nitrate solution three hours, give two and a-half 
grains of podophyllin in a tablespoon of milk, letting the 
patient drink a little milk before and after taking it. On the 
second day, after finishing the use of the hop solution, give the 
following : uva. ursi. 3iv, decoction of hops 3iv. Dose, 3ii 
every hour. Keep the inflamed joint constantly wet with wet 
cloths wrapped around it, and dry ones externally. If the 
liver is not properly opened in eighteen houis, two more grains 
of podophyllin should be given. After the fever subsides, give 
grs. iii of salicin every two and a-half hours. To illustrate the 
success of this prescription in severe cases occuring in the 
author's practice, a short history of a few cases will be related : 
The author, in 1844, was called twenty miles, in the case of 
James Spencer, living in Warren, Pa. The case was a very 
painful one of ten days' standing, and immovably confined in 
bed. Arrived at evening and staid over night, and used the 
above treatment. The patient rested well from two a. m., and 
was able to move the limb and sit up in an arm chair comfort- 
ably, in the morning. He followed up the treatment until he 
was able to be about. He had no relapse — the recovery was 
complete from the one visit. 

The case of Stillman Chase, of Little Valley, four 'miles 
north of Salamanca, N. Y., which town has since been built. 
Was called to the case, sixteen miles, in December, 1847. 
Found the patient immovably confined to his bed, and greatly 
worn with two weeks' suffering. Had called first one physi- 
cian, then added the second, and finally the third. But as no 
relief came of their treatment, the author's services were 
sought. Arrived at evening ; gave the above treatment ; the 
patient slept well from eleven o'clock until three a. m.; when 
he awoke, was perspiring gently, and felt comfortably free from 
pain ; could move his limb without pain or aid, and turned 
upon his side without help ; slept again until seven a. m., and 
when breakfast was ready he was assisted into an arm chair, 
and sat up to the table and ate some light toast and drank a 
cup of tea. Left after breakfast, and returned the second day 
after, and found him up and dressed, and able to walk with a 
cane to steady himself, as the ligaments of the joint were so 
much relaxed as to give inadequate support to the position of 
the joint. Directed the knee joint to be carefully bandaged ; 
left treatment for ten days. His recovery was steady and 
complete. 

The case of Samuel Town, resident of the town of Leon, 



256 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

Cattaraugus county, N. Y. Was called in August, 1846. Mr. 
Town was six feet and four inches tall, and a powerful athlete 
with the axe. He had nearly finished a fifteen-acre job of 
heavy timber slashing. Being ambitious to fell a certain area 
of timber per day, drove on to induce systemic relaxation^ 
spinal exhaustion, and while being drenched with perspiration, 
returned home in the evening without coat or jacket ; took a 
severe cold, inducing congestion in the spine at the lower 
sciatic nervous centers, which induced an equally severe case 
of that of Mr. Chase, before related, and of fifteen days stand- 
ing, under the treatment of Dr. Wheeler, of Rutlege, during 
the time. He was a well-read allopathic physician, and had 
represented his senatorial district in the New York Legislature. 
But as no visible improvement obtained from his remedies, an 
intelligent messenger was sent to call the author, nine miles 
away. As the messenger was able to give a satisfactory descrip- 
tive history of the case, treatment was sent, it being in the 
evening, with a promise of a visit the next day. The prescrip- 
tion was followed, and the author arrived at 10 a. m., and 
found the patient free from pain, which left him at 2 a. m. After- 
wards he slept well until morning ; was perspiring gently, pulse 
moderating. Had him helped out of bed into his chair, with- 
out inflicting any pain ; took some tea and toast ; directed the 
above continued treatment, and returned after two days. The 
patient had no relapse of the pain ; had improved so finely as 
to be up and dressed, and able to be carefully walking with the 
assistance of a cane. Directed ten days treatment, and left the 
case, which steadily improved so as to require no further treat- 
ment. 

A multitude of other cases might be cited, but these cases 
are selected as being the most severe cases that a physi- 
cian may be called to. Their improvements are cited to give 
confidence in the efficacy of the treatment prescribed, for any 
case of acute sciatic rheumatism. This selection of remedies 
to fill the rheumatic indications of cure, are the best selection 
the author has been able to make in a test of forty years prac- 
tice. They are recommended in chronic cases, but less in 
quantity will suffice, being satisfactorily efficacious, and leave 
the system in good condition after recovery. Yet there are 
other remedies that fulfil these indications, but experience has 
placed them lower on the list of remedies. 

One of the worst cases of chronic rheumatism that the 
author ever saw, and which was successfully treated by him, 
will here be described, and the course of treatment pursued. 
This was the case of Hiram B. Willowby, of the town of Sheri- 
dan, Chautauqua county, N. Y., aged forty years. He had 
been helplessly confined to his couch for fourteen years. His 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 257 

elbows and knees were partly flexed and anchylosed, nearly at 
an angle of 45 degrees. The wrists and ankles were contorted, 
crowded partly out of joint, and enlarged calluses that were 
fiery red and acutely painful. The second joints in all the 
fingers were enlarged to the size of butternuts. This case was 
put under treatment for chronic renal and biliary obstruction, 
nervous prostration and spinal congestion at the upper and 
lower sciatic centers. In six weeks he had improved so as to 
be up and able to get out on to the sidewalk by the support of 
two canes, and in one year was well and able to do a good days 
work on his farm. One year after this, being in his vicinity, 
made it an opportunity to call on him. To show his physical 
ability, he called attention to six cords of wood ranked up in his 
yard that he had chopped; a ten- acre orchard that he had 
pruned, and stated that he had also participated in all branches 
of raising and securing the crops on his farm. For external 
treatment of the spine and inflamed joints, the following lini- 
ment was used : r> Fresh beef gall Jvi, spirits of turpentine 
Jii, neats foot oil ^ii, essence of hemlock §i, T. of cayenne fss, 
alcohol fiv, laudanum Jij mix. This liniment was freely applied 
to the spine and inflamed joints morning and evening, until the 
joints had fully recovered. 

To remove the obstructions in the kidneys, gave f. ex. eryn- 
gium aquaticum |ii, nitrate of potassa grs. 30, water jii ; mix. 
Dose, 3i- Gave a dose diluted in water 3ii every hour. Gave 
grs. of colocynth, five at noon and at bedtime; gave grs. two 
of podophyllin, and afterwards kept the bowels open by one 
grain dose of podophyllin as often as needed. After using all 
the first diuretic, gave the following for a long time : r} Eryn- 
gium aquaticum f. ex. Jiv, f. ex. cimicifuga riv, f. ex. hyoscya- 
mus ?i. T. lobelia seed 3ss, T. sang. can. 3i, f. ex. of dandelion 
§i ; mix. Dose, 3i dilated in water. Take a dose every two 
hours. This prescription is diuretic, diaphoretic, and a good 
stimulating nervous tonic. When the amount of this prescrip- 
tion directed to be used does not control the pain, or fails to 
induce any perspiration, carry that point by using occasionally 
a three-grain dose of the diaphoretic powders ; also, ensure 
a fair night's rest with the same. Hot packs on the spine and 
hot thermal, spring or domestic baths are recommended. 



258 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 



RACHITIS, OR RICKETS. 

This disease generally attacks children, and distorts the spine 
into a lateral curvature or a hump-back. 

The fault lies in defective nutrition in the psoas muscles 
and capsular ligaments, that interferes with the symmetry of 
development. Glandular obstruction, and a habitual consti- 
pated state of the bowels, usually precede this derangement. 

The indications of cure are to secure a healthy and continu- 
ous action of the renal and biliary organs; to stimulate the 
spine by an external, direct application. 

TREATMENT. 

First, give f. ex. burdock |ii, f. ex. yellow dock, f. ex. dande- 
lion aa. |ii, f. ex. colocynth 3i, f. ex. cypripedium 3i, f. ex. 
marsh rosemary 3i? T. wintergreen 3ii ; mix. Dose, half-drachm 
diluted in 3ii of cold water, sweetened; give four doses per day, 
or enough to keep the bowels a little lax. Apply the spinal 
liniment or the cholera specific on the spine once a day, or, 
which is more preferable, the rheumatic liniment. Abstain 
from the use of every sour thing in food or drink, and use ex- 
ercise in the open air in pleasant weather ; continue this course 
until the recovery is complete. Sweet Fern, in this case, is a 
good substitute for Marsh Rosemary. The author has never 
known this treatment to fail, if continued a sufficiently long 
time, and as it is a very harmless and invigorating prescription, 
there can be no fears from its use by the year. It usually takes 
from one to two years to overcome a curvature of two years' 
standing. 



FELON, OR WHITLOW. 



A felon is a very painful swelling, located on the inside of a 
finger or thumb-joint. This inflammation is very much dis- 
posed to suppurate, but the suppurative process is very slow to 
mature. The immediate cause is inflammation of the annular 
ligament of the joint, and most generally induced mechanically 
by a blow or the use of some tool, as a spade. 

TREATMENT. 

I£ F. ex. hyoscyamus 3iv, nitrate of potassa grs. 30, f. ex. 
wahoo 31, T. wintergreen 3i- water Si ; mix, and add simple 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 



: 59 



syrup to make in all |iv. Dose, one drachm every three hours, 
unless the Wahoo shall keep the bowels too active. Poultice 
the felon with a bread and milk poultice continually, and open 
the swelling lengthwise as early as possible, to relieve the stric- 
ture of the hardened skin that augments the pain, and apply a 
crystal of the nitrate of silver to the fungous flesh in the opened 
part, to excite the suppurative process, and repeat it once per 
day; after each operation do up the finger in the white precip- 
itate ointment, and keep it moist with it continually. Much 
time may be saved by hastening the decomposition of the 
proud flesh that delays the recuperation of the abscess. If it 
shall be so painful as to be unable to sleep, take four grs. of 
diaphoretic powder on going to bed, and repeat the dose when 
the pain returns. To do it up at night in a thick bread and 
milk poultice, after it has been opened and cauterized, will 
serve to facilitate the recuperative process and keep it free 
from pain. 



INFLAMMATION OF THE PALMAR FASCIA. 

Involves the inner fascial membranes of the palm of the hand. 
Treatment: To restrict the extension of the inflammation- 
and relieve the pains, do up the hand in soft soap, (it will not 
injure the skin); keep it renewed until an opening point pre- 
sents between the fingers. When leaving off the use of the 
soap, apply the white precipitate ointment, and keep it well 
lubricated with it until it is well. Many a hand has been saved 
from amputation in this case by a free use of this treatment. 



BOILS AND CARBUNCLES. 

These dermoid or skin abscesses are too well known to need 
a description. Their cause is due to a habitual constipation 
of the bowels, wherein the faecal matter, to some extent, becomes 
decomposed and carried into the circulation. Some of this 
poison, in being depurated by the dermoid exhalents, inflames 
the pore or duct, and closes it, and the systemic alternative of 



260 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

breaking down by abscess is resorted to to remove the fibres 
that have lost their vitality and resurrect new ones in their 
places. It is proverbially remarked that when this habit of 
boils is once formed, their recurrence may be looked for until 
the habit is changed by a proper course of medical treatment. 
Carbuncles are located upon the back of the neck over the 
broad ligament. It is a very painful phlegmon, and when it in- 
volves the ligamentum nuchae, in the inflammation, it frequent- 
ly destroys the patient. The external treatment should be 
early poulticing, to save time and obviate pain. 

INTERNAL TREATMENT. 

3 F. ex. wahoo, yellow dock, burdock . aa fii ; F. ex. 
dandelion |i, f. ex. hyoscyamus 3ii, nitrate of potassa grs. 40 ; 
dissolve the nitrate potassa in water |i and mix. Dose, 3i di- 
luted in water 3vi. Take six doses per day two hours apart 
while the boils are troublesome ; then take three doses per day 
until it is all taken, and the habit will be fully overcome. 
When a boil is very painful, give in addition to the above pre- 
scription diaphoretic powders grs. iii, every three hours, until 
the patient is made comfortable enough to get a tolerable 
amount of sleep and rest. 



STONE BRUISE 



Is an abscess upon the foot, caused by a bruise. They are 
very painful during the suppurative process. Very tender-footed 
children should be kept well shod. Keep the bowels open with 
T. rhubarb 3i, diluted, morning and evening until it moves the 
bowels, and repeat a dose when needed. To relieve the pain, 
give diaphoretic powders grains two, every two hours. Keep 
the foot done up in wet cloths or poultices continually, until 
the abscess is opened by a lancet, as soon as pus is formed. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 26 1 



INVERTED TOE NAIL. 



This is located in one of the great toes, and may be known 
by an inflamed and tumid state of the end of the toe, the tu- 
midity of which so completely invests the sides of the nail that 
in its growth it has to cut its way into the flesh, the direct 
lesion of which lies in an inflamed state of the capsular liga- 
ment and synovial membranes of the joint next to the nail. 
This inflammation is induced by defective nutrition, and, like 
all other local inflammations, the fault lies in the presiding 
nerves which are strictured at their spinal exit, that is as chronic 
in its duration as that of the inflammation in the toe; conse- 
quently nothing can be gained by the usual practice of dissec- 
ting out the nail while this strictured state of these nerves is 
continued. 

The remote lesion must therefore be looked for between the 
joints of the sacrum from whence emanates this branch of the 
internal sciatic nerve. The indications of cure are to restore 
the vital nerves, relieve the morbid sensitiveness in the toe, 
and the congestive encroachment upon the nail will soon subside. 

A usually symmetrical trimming of the nail should be done, 
if needs be, but no part of the nail should be dissected out. 

If the toe is painfully swollen, apply slippery elm bark poul- 
tices, and add a teaspoonful of laudanum in each poultice, and 
change them before they get dry. Continue their use through 
the day-time ; and for the night apply a good quantity of the 
white precipitate ointment, sufficient to keep it moist dur- 
ing the night, and continue the use of the ointment until the 
swelling demands the use of the poultices. This is the best 
course of external treatment that can be pursued : Bathe the 
spine at the small of the back and over the sacrum with a good 
stimulating liniment once per day. When first taking up this 
case, begin at once the following internal treatment : I£ De- 
coction of hops 31V, nitrate of potassa xx grains ; mix. Dose, 
3ii, every hour up to bed-time. Take four sugar-coated one- 
half grain podophyllin pills, and continue the use of the decoc- 
tion the next day until it is all taken. Then use the T. of the 
polen of hops 3i, for a dose, diluted in sweetened water |i. 
Take three such doses per day, one before each meal. Use it 
continuously until the recovery is complete. 



262 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 



BUNION. # 

A bunion is known by a chronic enlarged state of the large 
joint of the great toe. This inflammation at first only attacks 
the capsular ligaments of the joint, but by the aggravating 
cause being long continued, it is extended to the synovial mem- 
branes to augment the secretion of the synovial fluid or joint 
water that forces apart the joint at the outward part and tips 
the toe abruptly inwards, at the same time the outward portion 
of the joint becomes very much distended and thickened. 
When a bunion is neglected and allowed to augment, it often 
becomes a very troublesome pest for a life-time. It primarily 
may be caused from a bruise, or from wearing a tight or too 
hard a boot or shoe. But the joint has but a poor nutritious 
support, and by its chronic proclivity, we may justly refer it to 
the same cause that induces the inverted toe nail. (Which see.) 

TREATMENT. 

First, clear all glandular obstructions by giving IJ Decoc- 
tion of hops ?iv, nitrate of potassa grs. 15 ; mix. Dose, 3ii 
every hour during the day-time until it is all taken. At bed 
time, after using this decoction as much as six or more hours, 
take two sugar-coated half-grain podophyllin pills. After using 
all of the diuretic decoction, prepare and take the following : 
fy Hops, a large teacup pressed full ; fill it with boiling water; 
let stand and cool. Take one-third of it at a dose, and take 
three doses per day for ten or fifteen days, and two of the half- 
grain podophyllin pills once per week. 

For external treatment : r> Oil of sassafras 3ii, T. capsicum 
3iv, T. of opium (laudanum) 3vi, alcohol 3iv ; put the sassafras 
oil in the alcohol first, to cut it ; then mix. Wet cotton batting 
with this liniment, and do up the toe with it and keep it moist 
until the pain subsides. Then do it up in the white precipitate 
ointment until it gets well. Also, apply this liniment to the 
small of the back and spine down once per day. 

In diet and drinks avoid the use of everything sour, and be 
very cautious in dress to prevent taking a cold. 



CORNS. 
Corns often become very painfully troublesome, to prevent 
which soak the feet often in water as hot as can be well borne,, 
making a liberal use of castile soap. Then use the treatment 
recommended for bunions. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 263 



INFLAMMATION OF THE GROIN. 

The seat of this disease is in one of the lymphatic glands, a 
cluster of which are located in the groin. 

This disease is manifest by a painful tumor, that increases in 
size and tension for about twenty days before it suppurates. 

This disease is caused in both sexes by inflammation of the 
urethra, and other membranes of the sexual organs. 

When it occurs while a person is affected with a venereal 
disease, it is called a bubo ; under other circumstances a 
phlegmon. 

TREATMENT. 

In the primary stage give podophyllin grs. ii, nitrate of 
potassa grs. 15, cold water |iv. Take 3iv for a dose every 
hour for two hours ; then take the podophyllin, and continue 
the solution until it is all taken. At the same time apply the 
spinal liniment to the tumor three times per day, and follow 
with the white precipitate ointment. This treatment will gen- 
erally discuss it in a short time. But in its advanced stage, 
where suppuration is inevitable, poultices of slippery-elm bark 
3i, laudanum 3i> one egg well beaten ; mix into a soft poultice; 
add water if needed. Apply it to the bare surface of the part 
affected. Repeat a fresh poultice as often as it dries. Repeat 
this until it will do to open with a lancet. 

The physician should bear in mind that the femoral artery 
and the internal sciatic nerve lie beneath it, and must only 
carry the lance into the abscess. 



AXILLA ABSCESS 



Occurs under the arm. They are usually caused by habitual 
glandular obstruction. They are slow to mature, and apt to 
recur after their habit is once formed. Use the treatment for 
inflammation of the groin. 



264 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 



WARTS. 

Warts are dermoid excrescences that disfigure the part more 
than injure health. Apply the following to the warts : T. of 
capsicum, spirits of turpentine aa. 3ii ; mix. Saturate the 
warts with this preparation five minutes six times per day until 
they disappear. Put the wart in the mouth of the phial, and 
turn the phial over it. 

Another is recommended by authors, but the author has had 
no experience with it ; but as it is simple, and the plant com- 
mon, it is inserted : Apply the milky juice from the pod of 
the green silk weed, and keep the wart wet with it until the 
wart comes off, which requires a few days. 



RUN-AROUND. 



This disease is manifest by a reddened inflammation that 
invests the roots of the finger nail, one or more, and sometimes 
all the fingers are attacked by it. 

This inflammation is obstinate to yield to ordinary treat- 
ment, and very slow in maturing the recuperative state. 

The immediate cause is congestion of the fibres that support 
the growth of the nail. The approximate cause is generally an 
injury sustained from a blow; but sometimes in venereal cases 
it attacks all the fingers. 

TREATMENT. 

For a case suffering from an external injury, the following 
external treatment will suffice : Make a poultice of fine ground 
slippery-elm bark 3iii ; add water enough to form a poultice, 
and do the finger up in it, and change it as often as it begins to 
get dry. Thus recruit the poultices and apply them for three 
days ; then apply the white precipitate ointment, and keep it 
moist with it continuously for four days, and it will become 
quite well. The same external treatment is very well for 
venereal run-arounds,but the following treatment will, in addi- 
tion, be required : Balsamic diuretic 3i- Take four doses per 
day, and one grain of podophyllin every fourth day until the 
recovery is complete. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 



HYDROCELE. 



This has hitherto been one of the most difficult diseases to 
treat successfully that physicians are called to. Much time and 
effort have been expended in research for its successful treat- 
ment. But happily, with improved pathology comes improved 
treatment. Hydrocele signifies a collection of serum in the 
tunica vaginalis in the scrotum. 

Symptoms : It forms a pear-shaped swelling, smooth on its 
surface, free from pain and tenderness, causing mostly a little 
uneasiness by its weight. 

Among the best diagnostic signs of a hydrocele, .1 would 
specify its transparency, its fluctuation, its commencement at 
the tunica vaginalis, its gradual extension upwards, its pyriform 
shape, and the circumstance of a portion of the spermatic cord 
between the abdominal ring and the upper part of the swelling 
remaining free and unsurrounded by the fluid. We are able to 
discriminate a hydrocele from a sarcocele, or diseased testicle, 
by the latter being much heavier, more globular or oval, and 
flatter at the sides than a hydrocele ; by its being also more 
solid, and productive of a peculiarly sickening pain when com- 
pressed ; by its being attended with a greater degree of pain 
in the loins, and very frequently with a very unhealthy, sallow 
look, which is not by any means a characteristic of hydrocele, 
which often occurs with very healthy-looking persons. 

The cause of this dropsical accumulation may be chargeable 
to an obstructed state of the nerve that ramifies with the cap- 
illary arteries of the congested membrane, either at the 
spermatic plexus, or by a stricture at the abdominal ring 
through which it passes, causing a chronic or partial suspension 
of nutrition in the membrane, inducing an effusion of serum 
into the sack. Also, the fault may be divided between the 
strictured state of this nerve and a deranged state of the lym- 
phatic ganglia in the groin, that induces inactivity in the 
absorbents to take up the redundance of the serous excretions 
accumulating in this sack. 

The indications of cure are, to relieve the strictured nerve, 
that nutrition in the congested membrane may be resumed, and 
with it the cessation of the dropsical effusion ; also, to stimulate 
the lymphatic glands in the groin to a full state of activity, and 
to correct any derangement that may be found in the glandular 
system affecting the purity of the blood. 

TREATMENT. 

The following consistent course of external treatment has 
proved to be adequate to relieve the strictured nerve, and with 



266 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

it comes active resumption of nutrition to suspend the conges- 
tion and dropsical effusion : 

First, have a suspensory sack made to overcome the tiresome 
weight of the parts upon the testis cord. Provide a wash-bowl 
of soft cold water and a sponge ; then apply a strong tincture 
of capsicum to the scrotum to induce a severe prompt nervous 
rally to the part, to restore the nervous circulation in the nerve 
to the part. When it becomes unbearable, apply the cold water 
to mitigate the severity of the smarting ; after the part becomes 
comfortable from smarting, apply a free quantity to it of the 
white precipitate ointment ; then apply some T. of capsicum 
to the groin and over the spine at the small of the back and 
hips, and directly after apply some of the ointment over the 
groin. Use this application morning and evening until the 
dropsy disappears. 

For internal treatment use the following : I£ F. ex. Ameri- 
can gentian, wahoo, yellow-dock, hops, uva. ursi., aa §i, nitrate 
of potassa grs. 60, fl. ex. cypripedium 3vi, T. wintergreen 3iii ; 
mix. Dose, one teaspoonful diluted in sweetened water ; give 
from four to six doses per day. The intention is, to regulate 
the quantity given per day to move the bowels twice per day. 
Suspend the treatment when the dropsy subsides, and the part 
is able to bear its suspensory weight. 

If the affection is a sequel to venerea, in addition to the 
above treatment use per day three one-drachm doses of the 
balsam diuretic, and two grains of podophyllin once per week. 



HERNIA. 

Hernia signifies a protrusion of any viscus from its natural 
cavity ; but the word here is restricted to the protrusion of 
some portions of the intestines and its investing omentum sack. 
The viscera most liable to hernial protrusion are the small 
intestines, omentum, and arch of the colon. 

Hernia is divided into several species : 1st, According to 
its situation, as the inguinal, that protrudes by the side of the 
testicle cord in the male, into, or towards the scrotum, and by 
the round ligament of the female into the labia ; the crural 
that protrude by the side of the crural artery nearer the groin, 
and the umbilical, at the umbilicus, which is mostly confined to 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 267 

babes. Hernia is usually the result of violent bodily exertion, 
as lifting heavy objects, especially if being previously debilita- 
ted, or unused to so great muscular exertion. 

A hernia is said to be reduceable when returnable into the 
abdomen ; irreduceable, when not returnable into the abdomen; 
strangulated, when subject to some constriction which naturally 
prevents their return into the abdomen, but also interferes with 
the passage of their contents and with their circulation'. 

The oblique inguinal hernia is the most common. It takes 
precisely the same route as the testicle takes in its passage 
from the abdomen into the scrotum. It commences as a full- 
ness, or swelling, at the situation of the internal abdominal 
ring, a little above the centre of Poupart's ligament ; next it 
passes into the inguinal canal. If the protrusion is allowed to 
increase, it will project through the external ring, and descend 
into the scrotum of the male, or the labium of the female. To 
return a reduceable hernia, place the hips higher than the chest 
and while lying on the back grasp the tumor with one hand, 
and make tact with one finger of the other hand upon the 
centre of the tumor, and press it slowly and gently, until it is 
carried into the abdomen. Then, to prevent a recurrence of 
its displacement, a truss should be worn, so admirably adjusted 
over the seat of the rupture, with pressure adequate to keep it 
from slipping out by any ordinary lifting or coughing. The 
great fault in many of the models of trusses, is their elasticity, 
pressing too deeply when not needed, and being too weak for 
resistance when needed. The model needed is an unelastic 
steel bow to fit to the hips, properly covered with soft leather, 
and a smooth, wooden bearing, which apply directly on the 
orifice, and bend the bow to a direct fit, that shall not annoy 
with undue pressure, nor yield to any needed pressure. With 
a good, soft 1% inch-wide belt to complete the circuit, wi'l 
render a truss complete, that will keep the orifice so well closed 
that many fresh ruptures have been well united by this means 
to a radical cure. But to this end the breach must not be 
subject to dilatations. 

The symptoms of a strangulated hernia are, pain in the part 
and at the pit of the stomach, with vomiting. When in this 
dangerous case, counsel is needed without delay, and a surgeon 
should be called. A delay of the relief will in a short time be 
attended with the fatal symptoms of gangrene. 



268 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 



WOUNDS. 



Incised wounds are those made by clean-cutting instruments. 
Punctured wounds are those made by instruments the length 
of which greatly exceeds their breadth, including stabs and 
pricks of all sorts. The lacerated in which parts are torn, and 
the contused effected by bruising, are the chief varieties. The 
incised are produced with the least violence, and generally ad- 
mit most easily of repair. The punctured are dangerous from 
their depth and from the possibility that deep blood vessels- or 
viscera may be injured, or that deep-seated extravasation of 
blood or abscess may follow. The lacerated and contused 
wounds are produced with great violence, less likely to heal 
and more prone to slough or suppurate. They do not however, 
in general, bleed so much as incised wounds, because arteries, 
when torn, contract more than when cut. 

TREATMENT. 

The treatment of all wounds comprises four indications: 
i st. To check bleeding. 2nd. To remove foreign bodies. 3rd. 
To bring the divided parts into their natural position andkeep 
them in union. 4th. To promote adhesion. 

First. To check bleeding, moderate pressure, a raised position, 
and the application of cold or an astringent will be sufficient 
in most cases ; but if an artery has been wounded, or the 
bleeding prove obstinate, measures must be adopted to secure 
the artery with a ligature, if possible. 

Second: The removal of all foreign bodies, if any are in the 
wound, should be effected as soon as possible, by the fingers or 
by forceps, or sponge and water. Dirt, gravel, etc., are best 
got rid of by effusion with water. All clots of blood must like- 
wise be removed. 

Third : In order to bring the sides of the wound into contact, 
the part must be placed in such a position as will relax any 
muscular fibres that have been divided, or that lie under the 
divided parts. Then the edges must be made to meet as nicely 
as possible. On this point the utmost diligence should be used, 
because the more perfectly the parts are adjusted, the less 
chance will there be of suppuration, and the more speedy and 
free from deformity will the cure be. The edges of the wound 
may then be kept in their place by cross strips of adhesive 
plaster, one end of the plaster being first applied to that side 
of the wound which is loosest, and the other being brought 
across. Then a compress and bandage may be applied to 
keep on the dressings, and protect the parts from injury, and 
should be applied with such a degree of firmness as feels com- 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 2O9 

fortable, and will have the effect of preventing bleeding and 
other exudations. 

There are two principles in the healing process that we 
must regard in the dressing of wounds. One is to exclude the 
corrosive air to preserve the forming granulations. The other 
is to preserve from wasting, leakage of the plastic lymph that 
serves to conduct the electric round of current through it from 
the afferent to the efferent end of the broken fibres, and also 
the lymph serves as a matrix in which to lay the connecting 
part of the new fibres. When the flap of the skin to be adjusted 
is large, stitches should be used, first to bring it into position; 
then perfect the sutures with adhesive straps. 

To relieve from excessive pain, give three-grain doses of 
diaphoretic powders, and repeat them from two to four hours, 
or often enough to afford relief and some rest, and also admin- 
ister a diuretic and laxative. For bad contusions and gun-shot 
wounds, consult works on operative surgery. 



BURNS AND SCALDS 



May only induce redness. In such case dip it quickly into 
cold water, and let it remain for fifteen minutes ; then keep it 
ointed for a day or two with the white precipitate ointment. 
Slight blistering the same. But when larger surfaces of the 
cuticle peel off, a dressing of cotton batting dipped in equal 
parts of unboiled linseed oil and lime water, and done in a 
manner to exclude the air, and change it daily until the cuticle 
is formed. Diuretics, anodynes and laxatives are indicated. 



BILIOUS COLIC. 



This disease is known by severe colic pains in the epigas- 
trium, that are very severe for a few minutes, and attended with 
severe retching to vomit ; then subside with remissions of from 
fifteen to twenty minutes. These fits of vomiting go on with 
obstinate persistency, often forty-eight hours, or until the pa- 
tient sinks with exhaustion, unless proper aid is sooner furnished. 



270 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

The cause is most usually a biliary calculi lodged in the ductus 
coledochus, at its passage into the duodenum, and the systemic 
effort manifest is designed to dislodge it. 

The indications of cure are to aid the expulsion of the cal- 
culi. The only successful course the author has found to give 
prompt relief in this case, has been through the administration 
of a prompt lobelia emetic, which he has never known to fail 
of giving the proper relief as soon as the vomiting became en- 
ergetic. The patient becomes quiet, and the physician may 
consider the treatment ended. 



PERIODIC VOMITING. 



This is a case of quite frequent occurrence, wherein the 
patient is attacked with a fit of vomiting, and remissions for 
fifteen or twenty minutes, minus the colic pains, but accompa- 
nied with great thirst. These paroxysms of vomiting recurring 
in a given length of time and very persistent in evacuating any 
fluid taken, and, unless properly treated, very slow to overcome. 

The direct cause is duodenal congestion, caused by a sudden 
renal obstruction, that was turning its secretions into the circu- 
lation, when the pancreas and liver were in a state of secretory 
activity to depurate promptly these acrid renal secretions from 
the circulation, and passes it into the duodenum with the bile. 
This acrid bile speedily irritates the duodenal membranes, 
and brings on the thirst and vomiting, which recurs as often as 
a fresh emission of bile passes this intestinal gate. The indi- 
cations of cure are to relieve the renal obstructions and Drotect 
the duodenal membranes. 

TREATMENT. 

First, give tris. nitrate of bismuth grs. x, wet up in a spoon 
of cold water. Then commence the use of the following solu- 
tion to open the obstructed ducts in the renal organs : 1), Ni- 
trate of potassa grs. 25, put into water |iv, that had three or 
four good-sized hardwood live coals quenched in it, and add T. 
capsicum m. x. laudanum m. x.; mix. Dose, 3ii- Take such 
a dose every fifteen, twenty or thirty minutes, according with 
the persistency of the vomiting, repeating the dose afterwards 
when the fits of vomiting recur the most frequently. A second 
dose of bismuth may be given in two hours, if the vomiting is 
still persistent. Apply cloths wrung out of hot water over the 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 27 1 

kidneys, and change them to the epigastrium. This course 
will succeed as soon as the renal organs become relieved of 
their obstructions, and have a little time to depurate the circu- 
lation of this acrid element. 



EAR ACHE. 



Caused by congestion of the parotid gland. The following 
the author has not known to fail in giving prompt relief: r^ 
Tepid water 3i,T. lobelia m. iii, T. opii m. iii.; mix. Fill the ear 
and let it remain until the pain subsides ; then empty the ear, 
and wet some cotton wool in it and plug up the ear. 



WETTING BED AT NIGHT. 

Use the balsamic diuretic in half-drachm doses four times 
per day until relief is given. Another : Spirits of turpentine 
in one-third drachm doses in milk ; give such a dose every 
third night, for three doses only. Another : Spirits of camphor 
m. iii, given in a tablespoonful of milk ; give such a dose every 
night at bedtime, until the object is attained. This last has re- 
lieved some cases ; others have had to resort to the first pre- 
scription ; or, the case may be one of diabetes : in such case, 
follow the treatment laid down for that disease. 



THE FEMALE ORGANS OF REPRODUCTION. 

THEIR FUNCTIONAL USES AND DERANGEMENTS. 

The uterus in its unimpregnated state is about two and one- 
half inches long, and one and one-half wide at the top, and it 
being pear-shaped, it terminates in the neck below, which is 
about one-half an inch across ; its walls are very thick and the 



272 A. H. DAVIS THEORY AND 

cavity very small, which opens through the neck into the vagina. 
Its appended organs are the fallopian tubes and the ovaries. 
The fallopian tubes are two in number, forming canals that 
connect with the upper angles of the uterus. They are about 
fivj inches long. They proceed from the uterus in a transverse 
direction to some distance, when they form an angle and curve 
downward toward the ovaries. 

The ovaries are two flattened bodies of about one inch in 
length, one of which is situated on each side of the uterus, on 
the posterior surface of the broad ligament, and are invested 
completely by a process of the posterior lamen, which forms a 
coat, and also a ligament for its attachment to the uterus, 
called the ovarian ligament. 

The uterus is situated in the pelvis, between the bladder and 
rectum, and is enclosed in a duplicature or fold of the peri- 
toneum. The neck, or the lower portion of the uterus, is 
united to and protrudes into the vagina. That portion which 
protrudes into the vagina is hard and oval, and divides the 
opening into the neck of the uterus into two lobes, called the 
lips of the os tinea, or os uteri. 

The canal of the vagina forms a cavern under the uterus, 
the bladder above rests upon it, and the rectum is behind and 
beneath it. 

The office of the ovaries is to produce the ova, and hold 
them in reserve for impregnation, which are not disturbed 
until the first molecules are transmitted to them for the primary 
work of unfolding the physical structure of the new being. 

The office of the fallopian tubes is to form a passageway for 
the impregnated ova into the uterus, when they escape from 
ovaries. 

The office of the uterus is that of a matrix, to receive and 
properly care for this embryotic being, in harmony with the 
systemic provisional laws during the full time of gestation, 
which is 280 days; at the close of which time parturition be- 
gins, and the infant is expelled from the mother by the periodi- 
cal contractile throes of the uterus. 

In order to properly comprehend the functional work of this 
group of reproductive organs, or their derangements, it will 
become necessary first, to properly consider their nervous ar- 
rangement, bearing in mind the principle that the vital nerve 
sent to an organ is endowed with a capacity to construct the 
order of its form, in harmony with the laws of its functional 
use; and that the vigor of the organ is ever dependent upon 
the integrity of its vital nerve for ability to properly execute 
its functional labors. 

The group of nervous ganglia that compose the spermatic 
nervous centre, are the ones that are assigned to these organs. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 



2 73 



These ganglia being hurdled together, to bring the organs into 
nervous sympathy with each other, so as to be enabled to for- 
ward the demanded element to the respective organ, as their 
circumstances may require to fulfill their respective offices. 

The presence of the sperm in contact with the excited 
vaginal mucous membrane, provides the first chemical inter- 
change of elements, designed to compose the physical structure 
of the conceived being, by stimulating the vaginal efferent 
sympathetic nerves to send from the ovarian ganglion, in the 
spermatic group, the vital molecules to the most mature and 
impregnated ovarian vesicle necessary to its escape. This ex- 
pansive growth bursts the external coat of the graafian vesicle, 
and the ovum escapes and is transported through one of the 
fallopian tubes into the uterus. 

At this same time, the uterus is receiving the vital attention 
in preparing for the reception and safe keeping of the embryo, 
by secreting an albuminous phosphate to seal the lower pas- 
sage of the uterus, to prevent its loss, into the vagina. 

Any derangement of the dermoid tissue of the vagina, that 
disqualifies it for this first germinal impression, bars the first 
step in conception. Therefore, the importance of much care 
in preserving the health and purity of this membrane. 

The depuration from the circulation of certain impurities 
with the menstrual fluid, too pungent for this membrane, inflames 
and chronically debilitates and partially paralyzes it, so as to 
disqualify it for this high functional office. 

There are many other causes that induce sterility, Inflam- 
mation or paralysis of any of this group of organs, will disap- 
point the completion of the work of conception. 



THE MENSES. 



The design of this habit is to give the organs of fecundation 
renewed energy ; to arouse the spermatic nervous circulation 
suitable to execute the first germinal processes in conception. 
By this habit conception is rendered practical, soon after the 
subsidence of each of these floodings. Every adult female 
meets this habit, which in this climate is between the ages of 
twelve and sixteen years. In the tropical climate, females ma- 
ture much earlier than in a temperate one, and it not unfre- 
quently is the case that they become mothers at the age of 
twelve years. 



274 A - H - DAVIS' THEORY AND 



RETENTION OF THE MENSES. 

When the menses do not appear at the usual period of life, 
and the person is of full habit, we consider the menses as being 
retained. This delay may be due to a deranged condition of 
some organ or foreign part of the system, that diverts the usual 
nervous action from the part ; or, the functional action of the 
organ may be too feeble to institute it. If it be retained by 
the derangements of other parts, the relief will depend upon 
the removal of such derangements by the treatment given un- 
der their respective heads. When it is due to inertia of the 
osgan, give : R T. rhei 3iij, T. of American gentian 3iij, T. 
lupulein |j ; mix. Dose, 3ss in 3iij of sweetened water ; take 
three such doses per day, until the object is attained. 



OBSTRUCTED MENSTRUATION. 

By obstructed menstruation is meant an impediment to their 
recurrence, after the habit has been established — or when the 
symptoms are well marked and no appearances have occurred. 
In such cases it may be due to an imperforate uterus or 
vagina. If it is due to an imperforate vagina, a longitudinal 
section of the hymen should be made sufficient for its 
passage, by an experienced surgeon. If it is due to an imper- 
forate uterus, a gum-elastic bogie should be inserted into the 
vaginal orifice or neck of the womb, and carried through into 
the uterus, which generally very easily ruptures the feeble 
membrane that obstructs this passageway of the uterus into the 
vagina. If it is due to other causes, they should be properly 
diagnosed and cared for; and a good emmenagogue, such as is 
recommended for the retention of the menses, should be taken 
as there directed, beginning its use one week before the usually 
marked period, and suspend it after two weeks, if it does not 
succeed, and take it up again as before, one week before the 
time marked, etc. It will succeed by using it through a few 
periods in very bad cases. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 275 



MENORRHAGIA. 

By me?iorrhagia, we are to be understood to mean, an im- 
moderate flow of the menses. The quantity of the menstrual 
fluid usually secreted at each period differs with persons, each 
having a healthy habitual quantity, which, with the majority, 
will average about four ounces. Yet, some never have more 
than one ounce, while others are regular on six. Either side, 
out of these bounds, may be considered irregular in quantity. 
Each lady, also, has her own healthy habit of duration of 
time for the menstrual flow ; some not more than two days, 
while others never stop short of six days ; but the average time 
is four days. Outside of these bounds of usual habit must be 
considered an irregularity in the time of their duration. 

Among the causes of immoderate menstruation are excessive 
fatigue, the use of drastic cathartics, fear, grief and anger. 
Temperance, or moderation in all of these excesses, will do 
much to moderate this condition. 

Leucorrhoea, by its debilitating effects upon these organs, is 
one of the most aggravating causes to induce an immoderate 
flow, and to protract the time of its secretion. Designedly 
repeated abortions are not only a fearful cause of this derange- 
ment, but thousands have terminated their lives early by it. 
The poisonous effects of patent or quack abortive remedies 
induce abortion, by prostrating the vital powers of the repro- 
ductive organs, to a degree that their constitution seldom 
recovers from the shock. The return much short of their reg- 
ular time, or their continuation beyond their usual time, are 
evils that should not be neglected, but should be corrected by 
proper medicinal agents. 

TREATMENT. 

I£ Hyos. ex. gr. lxiv. Dissolve this extract in hot water ^ij, 
and add s. syrup §ij, T. wintergreen 3ss ; mix. Dose, when 
the flowing is immoderate, 3j> and repeat it every two or three 
hours, as the circumstances may seem to indicate, until it is 
sufficient to moderate ; and when the flowing has passed four 
days, continue it until it stops. 

To guard against a return short of the full period, one or two 
doses of 3ss per day should be taken. 



276 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 



UTERINE HEMORRHAGE 

May be induced by various causes that tend to produce the 
one pathological condition of the uterus on which the hem- 
orrhage depends. 

It usually occurs with females who are afflicted with chronic 
uterine debility at the time of the menstrual period. 

Severe driving pains, under undue arterial force upon the 
lax and half-paralyzed membranes of the uterus, inflames or 
congests them until the vessels give way to sanguineous effusion 
at first, that if continued augments into a hemorrhage. 

This hemorrhage is not unfrequently induced by emmena- 
gogues and abortives, that over-drive the functional nerves to 
a paralysis that allows the heart to congest the organ to a 
fearful extent, when thus disarmed of its usual nervous support. 

Undue congestion of the organ is always its immediate cause; 
and here bear in mind that paralysis of the vital nerves is 
always present as a principal cause that allows the part to 
become congested. Undue arterial excitement, induced by 
running, brisk walking, or any long-continued, energetic mus- 
cular motion that causes a rapid motion of the heart, will force 
an undue quantity of blood upon the menstrual vessels, until 
they become congested, debilitated, and give way to hemor- 
rhage, by being distended sufficient to allow the globules of 
arterial blood to escape between the meshes of the fibres that 
compose their tubular walls. 

The indications of cure in this case are, those which point 
to relief in all internal hemorrhages, viz : to quiet the excessive 
motion of the heart by rest and arterial sedatives. Secondly, 
to give support to the prostrated vital nerves to enable them to 
overcome the congestion by rendering them more efficient aid 
in nutrition by the use of proper nervine supports. 

The prescription given for menorrhagia will not fail to give 
prompt relief when given in doses of Z), every hour for three 
doses. Then extend the time to two, three, or four hours, as 
the case may seem to indicate, until the flow moderates or 
suspends. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 277 

DYSMENORRHEA. 

PAINFUL MENSTRUATION— MENSTRUAL COLIC. 

Dysmenorrhea is a Greek word that signifies a difficult 
monthly flow. 

The flowing is preceded by severe pain through the loins and 
lower part of the abdomen. These pains are sometimes so 
intense as to cause the patient to take her bed. 

This derangement is due to a too rapid nervous concentra- 
tion upon a morbidly sensitive organ, so rapidly as to induce 
painful congestion before the time required for the secretion to 
be induced ; then the congestion interferes with the secretive 
action until the congestive driving exacerbation begins to sub- 
side; then the secretion commences, and the painful congestion 
is soon relieved. Consequently, the relief that is obtained 
from active diffusible stimulants is obtained by diverting the 
systemic concentrated forces from over-driving the organ. 

This over-driving action at each period does not allow the 
uterus an opportunity to recover from its morbid sensibility 
before it is congested again, and of necessity the derangement 
continues to be troublesome each period. 

The indications of cure are, to forestall this abnormal deter- 
mination to the uterus, by the use of proper nervines that tend 
to render this morbid sensitiveness more obtuse, so as to secure 
a more gradual concentration of the systemic forces, that will 
induce the secretion without congesting the organ. After the 
secretion is fairly established, the use of the nervine may be 
suspended. If this course be successfully carried out for from 
four to six months, the patient will be relieved from this 
painful habit at this period. 

To secure this object, begin the use of pulsatilla four days 
prior to the period. r> Pulsa. globules xv for a dose. Take 
vj doses per day until the flowing commences. Also, as soon 
as the symptoms begin to give signs of its approach, take dia- 
phoretic powders in three-grain doses every three or six hours, 
according to the necessity of the case, the object being to 
moderate, instead of suppressing, the symptoms. 



278 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

TURN OF LIFE, 

OR, CESSATION OF MENSTRUATION. 

The cessation of menstruation, commonly called the turn of 
life, obtains with a very great majority of females, at the age of 
forty-five ; yet persons of unusually great longevity go much 
beyond that time, while a great minority suspend before the 
age of forty. This period is very properly considered 
a critical one for females of delicate health, for it may be 
fraught with peril through which she can be safely conducted 
only by a skillful and experienced physician. It is, therefore,, 
very important that all the unpleasant sensations which may 
be experienced, during this time of the turn of life, should 
receive due attention. 

With the robust constitution, this period may pass without 
any unpleasant symptoms; the monthly flow gradually suspends 
without disturbing their usual good health, and after which 
they become more solid and heavier than previous to making 
this change. 

Upon the integrity of the functional nerves of this organ will 
depend the ability of the system to safely make this change in 
harmony with provisional law. Not unfrequently this change 
has to be made while these functional nerves are laboring under 
severe derangement, having sometimes to encounter an over- 
driving action to depletion, and great prostration. Again, on 
the other hand, the suppression is so abrupt as to induce severe 
apoplectic determination to the head, and obstructing the brain 
and nervous circulation as to cause a numb sensation, and 
occasionally a partial paralysis of one hemisphere of the 
system. 

The danger of making the patient paralyzed consists in 
risking too much to nature, when its forces are too much divi- 
ded among other systemic derangements. The time required 
to make this change is from one to two years ; the longest 
time is required by the invalid, who, during this time, experi- 
ences a great variety of symptoms, such as vertigo, palpitation 
of the heart, head-ache, renal and liver obstructions, indigestion, 
constipation, piles, bloating of the abdomen and extremities, 
the brain becomes incompetent to retain the memory, and the 
usual expression is " that my brain feels so much oppressed 
that fears are entertained of losing the mind." Suffocating 
feelings in the chest become distressing, and the tendency to 
chills evinces symptoms of asthma. 

Every derangement should be properly diagnosed and gentle 
treatment instituted for them, in order to regain thereby the 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 



279 



healthy balances of the nervous system suited to make this 
important change with their designed ability. 

If a female of delicate health shall be thus successfully 
carried through this period, her health will be much more 
permanent afterwards, it seeming to renew her systemic powers 
for longevity, and her last will be her best days. On the other 
hand, if dangerous symptoms shall be neglected, a rapid 
decline of health not unfrequently results. 



PRURITUS. 



This is a very troublesome disease, and one that females are 
very liable to have who are troubled with retension of the 
menses. This disease affects the female directly after the close 
of the menses. 

It is manifest by an itching, stinging sensation in the vulva, 
which causes the female to rub and scratch the part until the 
membranes become tumid and inflamed before the itching will 
subside ; then it will only be quiet for a short time. These 
symptoms generally last about ten days. 

This disease is caused by acrid leucorrhcea comingin contact 
with the parts affected, which poison paralyzes the nerves of 
the membranes and induces congestion. 

It is presumed that gonorrhoea is the most frequent cause of 
this disease, but nevertheless it is often induced by inveterate 
leucorrhcea. 

TREATMENT. 

Give the balsamic diuretic in half-drachm doses four times 
per day, podophyllin four half-grain sugar-coated pills, and 
repeat, ten days apart. With each dose of these pills give a 
solution of nitrate of potassa grs. 15, bi-carb. of soda 3ss, in 
water -iv. Take 3iv every half-hour until it is all taken ; after 
taking two doses take the pills, or begin the solution at noon, 
and take the dose of pills at bed-time. 

Use an enema of nitrate of silver grs. 15, soft water |iii. 
Use 3ii, per vagina, with a glass female syringe. Twenty min- 
utes after the use of each of these enemas, follow with the use 
of one made of tannin grs. 15, soft water 3m ; use 3ii at once. 
Every time after using these enemas, apply some of the white 
precipitate ointment on the parts. 



280 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

The same solution may be used on the parts with a sponge 
or piece of muslin. When the disease is not of a suspicious 
origin, care should be used not to allow the solution of the 
nitrate of silver to come in contact with the linen, else it will 
stain it black. This course will not fail to effect a cure in 
either order. 



MIDWIFERY. 

PRELIMINARY OBSERVATIONS. 

The theory and practice of midwifery embraces too much to 
be treated at length in this work, yet, as it is intended as a 
compendium of the most important principles embraced in 
medical science, I deem it important ' to furnish a condensed 
article under this head, advising, at the same time, all who are 
intending to make a profession of this branch of medical 
science, to obtain a work that treats the subject at length, such 
as Ramsbotham's, Dues', or Churchill's System of Midwifery. 
God has provided a wise arrangement of the sexual organs for 
conception. He has also endowed the female organs with 
functional powers adequate to the necessity for gestation and 
successful parturition. The great number of the different 
species of the animal kingdom, below man, rely successfully 
upon these instinctive powers for multiplication. The human 
family are not less cared for in the Divine arrangement for 
successfully populating the earth. Natural and successful 
labor, that requires no interference, forms the great majority of 
cases, equal to two hundred to one, that occurs, that require 
mechanical aid. Therefore, it is important to clearly eluci- 
date % the processes of natural labor, in order to inspire 
confidence in its operations, and to allow the time necessary 
for its successful termination without interference. 

PARTURITION 

Is that natural process which is instituted at the expiration of 
forty weeks from conception, and by which the womb expels 
the foetus and placenta, and contracts to assume its normal 
condition when unimpregnated. 

NATURAL LABOR. 

This term is applied to those cases in which the head 
presents, and descends regularly into the pelvis ; where the 
process is uncomplicated, and concluded by the natural powers 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 2S1 

within twenty-four hours, with safety to the mother and child, 
and in which the placenta is expelled in due time. First labors 
are more tedious, and of longer duration than subsequent ones, 
chiefly due to the slow dilatation of the soft parts ; by this 
reason I have witnessed several first cases of natural labor that 
were extended to forty-eight hours. 

STAGES OF LABOR. 

Certain occurrences take place during the process of partu- 
rition, which may be considered in three divisions, or stages : 
the first comprehends all that may occur before a complete 
dilatation of the os uteri; the second includes all that takes place 
between the development of the os uteri and the expulsion of 
the child ; the third embraces everything connected with the 
detachment and expulsion of the placenta. 

SYMPTOMS PRECEDING LABOR. 

For several days before labor sets in there are often many 
premonitory symptoms which, by women who have borne 
children, are viewed as precursors of that approaching crisis. 
Among these are : 

1. Restlessness, particularly at night, very frequently precedes 
parturition for many days, and is rarely to be considered as 
bearing unfavorably in labor. 

2. Subside?ice of the womb and abdomen is not an unusual 
monitor of the close of the period of gestation. It may be 
viewed in a favorable light, inasmuch as it indicates room in 
the pelvis. 

3. Glairy mucous secretion from the os uteri and vagina some- 
times occurs for days before the more active symptoms of labor. 
It is often streaked with blood, and tends to lubricate the parts 
concerned in parturition. 

4. Irritability of the bladder and rectum, demanding their 
frequent relief, is another precursor of labor. The third is the 
only one that evinces that labor is at hand. 



THE PROCESSES OF NATURAL LABOR. 

SYMPTOMS OF LABOR. 

I shall now proceed to the description of labor in each stage, 
first detailing the phenomena, and afterwards prescribing the 
requisite management. 



282 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

The commencement of labor is dated by the patient from 
the moment that the uterine contractions become painful, and 
correctly so if the entire uterus is engaged ; if they recur reg- 
ularly after short intervals. But this is not always the case : 
the uterus not unfrequently at first acts partially, irregularly, 
and inefficiently ; such efforts are called false, or spurious pains. 
A little careful .observation will enable us to distinguish them 
from true pains, as they commence about the fundus, and are 
of limited extent, recur at irregular intervals, and are not 
attended with the mucous discharge from the vagina, and do 
not dilate the os uteri, or protrude the bag of water. On the 
other hand, true pains generally commence in the lower part 
of the uterus, and are first felt in the back, extending gradually 
to the front, recurring with regularity, though increasing in 
frequency, dilating the os uteri and protruding the membranes. 

The true pains recur at regular intervals, gradually increasing 
in frequency and power, and each pain from its commencement 
augmenting in intensity, until having arrived at its maximum, 
it remains stationary for a short time, then subsides, thus pre- 
senting, as it were, a type of the entire course of pains. 

The pains exhibit, however, different characteristics, accord- 
ing to the stage of labor, and have, therefore, been divided 
into two kinds : cutting, or grinding pains, and bearing down, 
ox forcing pains. The cutting or grinding pains are indicative 
of, and confined to, the first stage of labor, during the dilatation 
of the os uteri. They are short, severe, and not very frequent,, 
obliging the patient to suspend her occupation, and partially 
arresting respiration, but not inducing any voluntary effort. 
They are generally seated in the back, gradually extending, 
around the loins to the abdomen and thighs. 

The suffering they occasion is considerable, and although it 
is less than that which accompanies the stronger pains of the 
second stage, yet it appears more difficult to bear, and the 
patient gives utterance to groans and loud out cries. The out- 
cry which attends upon the cutting pains is an excellent 
diagnostic mark of the first stage of labor. 

During the first stage, we generally find the patient more 
irritable and desponding than subsequently. This distressing 
state of mind disappears as the labor advances, and hope, 
resolute courage and physical powers come to the rescue equal 
to the emergency, and at the time when it is most needed. 

During the first stage, the stomach is apt to become irritable 
and discharge its contents, which is by no means an unfavora- 
ble symptom ; it only evinces that the powers commonly used 
for digestion are being called to aid in parturition. At the 
commencement of labor, the orifice of the os uteri will readily 
admit the point of the fore-finger, and by the repeated pains 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 283 

it is gradually widened so as to allow the child to pass. The 
rate of dilatation is slow at the beginning; it is truly said to take 
as much, or more, time to dilate the os uteri to the size of half 
a crown, than to complete the process. 

Towards the end of the first stage, when the os uteri becomes 
pretty well dilated, we remark an increase in the sanguineous 
appearance in the vaginal secretions, and the accession of 
voluntary efforts, slight at first, but gradually increasing. 
About this time the membranes generally give way, the liquor 
amnii escapes, and by the next pain the head passes through 
the os uteri and enters upon tha second stage of labor. 

SECOND STAGE. 

The phenomena are now somewhat changed, especially in 
their intensity. The pains are more frequent and of longer 
duration ; the breath is suspended during a pain, and the out- 
cry suppressed, except at its termination. The character of 
the outcry is therefore as good a test of the second stage as 
the first. 

At the accession of each pain the patient holds her breath, 
and seizing hold of something with her hands, brings the 
muscles of the extremities of the back and abdomen to aid 
the expulsive force of the uterus. These are the bearing-down 
pains of the second stage. 

If the second stage is prolonged, the patient often feels 
heavy and sleepy, and may doze between the pains — mostly 
the result of fatigue. It is a favorable symptom when the pa- 
tient appears to refresh her strength by it. 

If an internal examination be made at the beginning of the 
second stage, we shall find the vagina dilatable, its walls rugous 
and flabby, and prepared to yield to the pressure of the head. 
The head will be perceived at the upper part of the pelvis, fill- 
ing it more or less completely, descending with each pain, and 
receding at its conclusion ; the advance exceeding the reces- 
sion, and the excess marking the rate of progress of the labor. 

At a later period, the head will be felt on the floor of the 
pelvis, where it meets with considerable resistance, but it is 
overcome by the mechanism already described. We observe 
the same repeated advance and recession, the head each time 
propelled a little further than before, and often with a kind of 
spiral movement, until, after a time, proportioned to the differ- 
ence between the force employed and the resistance, the ob- 
stacles yield, and the head presses upon the perineum, which 
undergoes the same process of dilatation. 

At this period of the labor, when the head is distending the 
perineum and dilating the external orifices, both the suffering 
and the exertion reach their maximum point \ and yet it is 



284 *A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

beautiful to observe, how cautiously and how securely the pro- 
cess is effected. Adequate expulsive force is called into action, 
and if it were continuous, nothing could save the patient from 
injury; but each pain is just long enough to gain upon the 
point of advances made by its predecessor. The head is de- 
tained for a few moments at its furthest point of advance, then 
it recedes ; this is repeated until the perineum is completely 
softened, and the passage dilated. At the latter part of the 
second stage, the pains are often what are called double, i. e.; 
they succeed each other so quickly, that a new one commences 
before the former has quite terminated. At length, the force 
conquers all resistance, and with a throe of agony the head is 
expelled, after which there is a short rest equal to two or three 
pains, then the uterine force is again exerted to expel the body 
of the child. 

The second stage is now completed. The suffering which 
was intense, is exchanged for perfect ease, and the sense of re- 
lief is inexpressibly great. 

The third stage includes the detachment and expulsion of the 
placenta or after-birth. In some cases, the contractions which 
expel the child expel the after-birth. In most cases, however, 
it is partially or wholly detached, remaining in the uterus or 
vagina, from whence it may be expelled by the natural powers 
alone, or by the aid of gentle traction. There is an interval 
which elapses after the expulsion of the child, before the uterus 
again contracts to expel the placenta, which varies somewhat 
in different cases, apparently according to the fatigue the organ 
has undergone. Statistics make this interval to average about 
twenty minutes. From this data we may conclude, with the 
highest authorities, that, in natural labor, the placenta ought to 
be expelled within an hour or an hour and a half, and that when 
the interval exceeds this, the case fairly comes under the order 
of retained placenta. 

When this interval, whatever it may be, has elapsed, the 
uterus again contracts, but much less forcibly, and by one or 
two pains the placenta and membranes appended are expelled. 

Its expulsion should be aided by winding the placental cord 
around the right hand, and the index finger of the left hand 
should be passed up the cord to the placenta, and gentle trac- 
tion should be made at each pain ; but great care should be 
used not to break the cord, lest we may be deprived of this 
means of help. If the child be healthy and it has not suffered 
from pressure, etc., it will cry as soon as it is born, and when 
respiration is established it may be separated from its mother 
by tying firmly the umbilical cord with a strong silk or linen 
cord two inches from the umbilicus, and another two inches 
from this toward the placenta ; then divide the cord half-way 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 2S5 

between these ligatures with a pair of round-pointed scissors, 
all of which should be done under the bed-clothes, without ex- 
posing to view the mother or child. It should then be wrapped 
in flannel, and handed to the nurse. 

The most common cause of protracted labor is a right or 
left obliquity of the head of the child, causing it to rest upon 
the pelvis. This condition is manifest by a fullness upon the 
side where it is lodged upon the pelvis and a vacuum upon the 
opposite side. This obliquity can be remedied and the head 
made to present correctly in the pelvis, by making tact with 
fore-finger during the absence of a pain, upon the head near 
the obstructed side of the pelvis, and gently press the head 
backwards until it is clear from the pelvis ; then press it to the 
opposite side, until both sides present equally. An early ex- 
amination should be made to ascertain the state of the present- 
ation, that any abnormal presentation may be thus adjusted as 
soon as possible. 

As soon as the after-birth is delivered, a dry napkin should 
be applied around the patient, over the region of the womb, 
and made comfortably tight, after which, three grains of 
diaphoretic powder should be given to quiet the after-pains 
and support the nervous system. After she has been allowed 
to rest quietly for a short time, she should have all of her soiled 
apparel and bed-clothes removed,withoutmuch exertion on her 
part, and she be placed with her child quietly in bed; and after 
she has taken a cup of tea and a little food, she should be al- 
lowed to sleep. Three grains of diaphoretic powder should be 
given every three hours until the after-pains subside. On the 
second day, she should take one grain of podophyllin com- 
bined with two grains of diaphoretic powder, to act upon the 
liver and glandular system and move the bowels, thereby pre- 
venting febrile symptoms and a broken breast, that so fre- 
quently occur when these precautionary measures are not used. 

The milk is not secreted immediately after delivery. At the 
end of the second, or beginning of the third day, the breasts 
are larger, heavier and more tense ; the patient surfers from 
rigors, heat of skin, pain and soreness of breasts, and the pulse 
is quickened. At this time the secretion commences : at first, 
slowly and with difficulty, but afterwards more freely. The 
early application of the child to the breasts aids the secretion, 
and prevents congestion and inflammation of the breasts. The 
first milk differs from that secreted afterwards, and is designed 
thus to physic the child. 

MANAGEMENT OF THE INFANT. 

The first business of the nurse after receiving the child is to 
properly wash it, and cleanse the skin from all the scurf that so 
intensely adheres to it. This can be greatly facilitated by first 



286 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

rubbing it with purified olive oil, or melted fresh lard, then us- 
ing castile soap and soft water made warm; this process being 
properly executed, the next is to properly do up the funis be- 
fore putting on its garments ; for this purpose, use a soft piece 
of muslin, three inches wide and six inches long; cut a hole 
through it near the middle, just large enough to pass the funis 
through it ; when it is thus put on, lay the muslin lengthwise 
of the abdomen, then lay the funis toward the stomach, and 
fold the lower part over it, making the fold one-half inch below 
the umbilicus ; then apply the bandage, and it is ready to be 
dressed. Great care should be used to prevent fatal hemor- 
rhage at this place, and if needs be, another ligature should be 
applied before it is done up. 

There is no relic of barbarism retained in this civilized age 
that equals that which is very generally practiced upon the 
new-born infant. This practice is to give the infant urine 
very soon after it is born. Another is to give it castor 
oil, and the third is to stuff the child with food, before it gets 
its mother's first milk. This is all erroneous ; God has pro- 
vided for all these points. First, there is a pabulum in the 
stomach which takes several days to become digested, and as 
this becomes diminished the infant inclines to draw the breast, 
which is beneficial both to mother and infant. Secondly, the 
first milk secreted will physic the infant as much as is required. 
Therefore, the proper course to pursue, is to only give a little 
weak catnip tea, until it is supplied from the breast of the 
mother. 

Nothing will inflame the stomach worse than urine. Castor 
oil has been considered a very harmless laxative, consequently 
it has been long used as a family laxative for children. But 
here let me correct this fatal idea, for I know of no article of 
medicine that has been given to children, before I have been 
called to them in cases of fever and pneumonia, that has given 
me so much trouble to overcome its mischievous effects to 
finally succeed, as castor oil. Its first effect is to increase the 
peristaltic motion of the bowels, and move them; its secondary 
effect is to paralyze and inflame them, and obstruct the gland- 
ular system more permanently than before, requiring two or 
three times larger doses of podophyllin to operate on the 
glandular system after castor oil has been used. I never use 
it only to oil my buggy. 

After the infant is dressed it should be laid upon its right 
side, to prevent the blood from escaping through the foramen 
ovale, which gives a blue cast to the child when it occurs. 
As soon as this appearance is observed the infant should be 
immediately laid on its right side, and these symptoms will in 
a few minutes disappear. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 287 

In foetal life the blood passes directly through the septum of 
the heart from the right to the left side, through a passage 
called the foramen ovale, instead of its passing through the 
lungs, as it does after its birth. This opening is oblique, and 
somewhat valvular, and closes from left to right. When the 
infant lies on its right side, it closes by its gravity; when placed 
on its left side, it inclines by its gravity to open. This opening 
generally closes permanently in a few days. 

Much has been said in regard to the position the female 
should be placed in during parturition. 

During the first stage no definite position need be required, 
but she should be allowed to change to any position that will 
afford any comfort, as from the couch to the lounge, to kneel 
on a cushion, and lean in a chair. But when she enters upon 
the second stage, wherein she has a desire to place her feet 
against a firm substance, and to grasp hold of something un- 
yielding with her hands, to bring into action all of her muscu- 
lar powers to aid in the expulsive force, then the best position 
is on a bed, (of straw, as this cannot be damaged by the pro- 
cess), with her head and shoulders elevated. Let her place her 
feet firmly against the foot-board, or an extra board placed 
across the foot of the bed for that purpose ; then tie a sheet 
to the foot-posts, making it the right distance to grasp and pull 
upon during each pain. This arrangement will save the assist- 
ants the exhausting labor of grasping her hands and pulling 
with her during each pain. No parturient remedy should be 
given to augment the expulsive force of the uterus until the 
case is well advanced in the second stage, wherein the presenta- 
tion has been ascertained to be correct, the stage protracted, 
and the powers begin to fail by exhaustion. In such case I 
would give three grains of macrotin, and repeat the dose once 
in three hours until the infant is born ; or, as a substitute for 
the macrotin, I have used with equal success a strong decoc- 
tion made from the dried leaves of red raspberry, prepared as 
follows : Put as many leaves as you can press into a pint cup, 
pour it half-full of boiling water and let it boil a few minutes ; 
press it down, then strain and press out a half-pint of the 
decoction. As soon as it is cool enough to drink, give a half 
of it at a dose, and give the balance in twenty minutes. This 
arouses renewed energy to all the muscular powers of the 
system, and especially to the expulsive force of the uterus, 
adequate to the necessity. 



MATERIA MED1CA. 



Quite a diversity of opinion exists in the medical world in 
regard to the mode of treatment and agents to be employed 
by which the derangements of the system may be relieved and 
the weak made strong. 

This diversity of opinion has divided the profession into 
many schools of practice. The sanaty of these various theo- 
ries I do not here design to discuss, for in an abridged work 
like this, space can only be found for recording known princi- 
ples. Our first observation for accomplishing this end may be 
best derived from the laws of health, under experiments for 
acquiring the greatest degree of muscular force. The ancient 
Grecian and Roman schools for developing the athletic, have 
furnished examples worthy of high consideration, as an accept- 
able means within the province of the physician, by which the 
valetudinarian may regain his lost powers. What belongs to 
the province of medication cannot be overcome by muscular 
discipline ; nor can medication give to the system that power 
that can be derived only from muscular action. The most 
reliable of these two provinces,by which health may be restored, 
is that of medication. The therapeutical agents employed by 
which to aid the visvitae to clear the obstructed organs, to tone 
up the nervous system, or control its undue excitability, and 
to fulfill any other indication, should be composed of elements 
that the system can dispose of without taxing its vital powers 
after they have efficiently fulfilled their indications. 

Many times help may not be possible ; then the remedy 
should, if given in large doses, tend to support vitality, rather 
than to militate against it. I have ever found the most efficient 
and reliable agents to fulfill the most important indications 
among those derived from the vegetable kingdom. And so 
admirably do they fulfill these therapeutical indications that 
they would seem to have been expressly designed by the Divine 
Creator, and placed within the reach of man to relieve his 
abnormal conditions. 

These medicaments will, while fulfilling their indications, 
assimilate into the composition of the system. In these reme- 
dies is much of the life-generating principle that resides in the 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 289 

perennial plant for reproducing its new body annually ; in the 
pollen, the life of the germ, and in the germs of all the pristine 
forms of vegetable life. In the eclectic alkaloid preparations 
made from the various medicinal plants, these vital principles 
are admirably preserved ; and in this constitutes one of the 
secrets of their great efficacy in supporting the system while 
fulfilling their remedial indications. 

This life principle in the vegetable kingdom is the procedure 
to animal life, and its vital principles are readily seized upon 
and turned to the account of the vitality of the animal 
economy. Upon these principles is animal life preserved while 
subsisting upon vegetable food. 

Thus we see that the chemistry of vegetable life as a kingdom 
officiates as a medium between the mineral and the animal 
kingdoms, by transforming the gases that compose the mineral 
kingdom into genial elements to support the animal kingdom. 
Every therapeutical indication can be better fulfilled with 
botanic remedies than by those of mineral composition. . The 
three therapeutical indications in which the mineral remedies 
are used are : alteratives, emetics and tonics. 

The chloride of mercury, (or calomel), or the blue pill, are 
the mineral preparations used to fulfill the alterative indication. 
Tartarized antimony, or tartar emetic, to induce emesis, and 
the different preparations of arsenic and of iron, are used to 
fulfill the indication of tonics. 

It is not a question but what mercury, when taken, will 
augment the biliary secretions. It is not long since this min- 
eral came into notice as a medicinal agent. It was first 
advocated by Paracelsus Bombastus, or the drunken chemist, 
who conceived the vague idea that one-ninth of the compound 
elements of the human constitution was composed of mercury, 
and taught the absurd doctrine that disease was the result of 
the deficiency of mercury in the system, and to relieve disease 
the deficiency must be supplied. This idea of mercury com- 
posing any part of the system has long since been exploded by 
the science of chemistry ; but, notwithstanding that, the school 
that is based upon the mineral practice has sought, and still 
seeks, other theories by which to keep it in use, overlooking or 
waiving the mischief that follows in the wake of its action. 

Robley Dunglison, Professor of Theory and Practice of Med- 
icine in the Jeffersonian Medical College at Philadelphia, in 
his Theraputics, vol. 2, p. 291, 292, 293, thus exposes the dan- 
ger of the use of this remedy : "That mercury when taken is 
carried into the circulation, is proven by the fact that metallic 
mercury is discovered in the bones, and blood when freely 
used. The precursory phenomena usually are, tenderness, 
tumefaction, and pale rosy color of the gums, except at the 



290 A. H. DAVIS THEORY AND 

very margins, where they are deep red. The gums gradually 
fall away from the teeth, and a white secretion occupies the 
portions of the teeth from which they have subsided. The 
mouth becomes sore ; the tongue swollen ; the teeth are ten- 
der and pressed against each other, and are loose ; the breath 
acquires a characteristic fcetor, and a coppery taste is experi- 
enced. In this state the mouth is said to be equivocally 'touched,' 
by mercury ; and it would be well if the effects could be thus 
limited. Either by accident or design, they may, however, 
extend much farther. The salivary glands may become tender 
and tumefied, and increase their secretion profusely ; and, 
when once induced, ptyalism is an affection that generally 
continues unmodified by medicine, or is self-limited, contin- 
uing for days and sometimes weeks ; the whole system suffers, 
partly from the extent of discharge, but still more, perhaps, 
from the suffering and irritative fevlr that accompany it. 

"At one time, it was supposed that the mercury is thrown 
off in the fluid of the ptyalism ; but careful analysis by skilful 
chemists has entirely failed in detecting the smallest particle 
of the. metal in that fluid. 

"Such are the phenomena induced by mercury, when used 
for the cure of disease. In some constitutions mercury acts 
as a true poison, causing what has been termed mercurial ere- 
thism, or a febrile condition characterized by great adynamia ; 
in which, on the occurrence of some emotion or exertion, the 
individual suddenly expires. 

"Besides these effects, a train of phenomena strikingly like 
those of syphilis have been ascribed to the action of mercury. 
To the aggregate of these, the names hydrargyriasis, mercurial 
disease or cachexia, and by some pseudo syphilis, have been as- 
signed to it. Among them may be enumerated, mercurial 
iritis, sloughing ulceration of the fauces, inflammation and 
caries of the bones, periostitis, mercurial tremors, cachexia, 
etc. The effects of the ptyalism occasioned by mercury are 
sometimes awful ; sloughing of the soft part of the mouth and 
throat, loss of the teeth, caries of the bones, adhesions of the 
cheeks to the gums, and ligamentous bands preventing the de- 
pression of the lower jaw, and awful cases of deformity, are 
occasionally the result of the use of this remedy." 

The laws by which this remedy excites the liver and glandu- 
lar system, and also by which it destroys the bones and teeth, 
and causes gangrenous sloughings, have not hitherto been well 
defined. It is therefore considered important in this place to 
critically analyze .its medicinal modes of action, and its mis- 
chievous results when taken. I have never given a dose of 
mercury in any of its forms in my practice, which is over a . 
quarter of a century ; by reason of finding in the podophyllin 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 2QI 

all that could be desired to fulfill this therapeutical indication; 
and in its action its results are salutary rather than injurious. 
Chloride of mercury (calomel) when taken, often comes in 
contact with free chloric acid in the stomach secreted from 
the chloride of sodium, in the circulation of gastric juice. 

When this mild chloride of mercury, (as it is called), is 
taken, and it comes in contact with this free chloric acid in 
the gastric juice, they combine, and form the bi-chloride of 
mercury, which is corrosive sublimate, a most deadly poison: 
one that is capable of coagulating the albumen of the animal 
fiber and destroying it by contact. Whenever the symptoms 
of Dunglison's mercurial erethism appear, which are so soon 
followed by death, this bi-chloride of mercury is the mis- 
chievous cause. When mercury is taken it is rendered very 
divisible, under the temperature of the system, so much so as 
to unite with the chyle and pass into the circulating blood, to 
clog the termina of the capillary arteries and prevent assimila- 
tion ; and inflammation of these capillaries must result. 

When the capillaries of the membranes of the bones are 
thus obstructed by it, caries of the bones usually follows. 
Much of this mercury is carried and deposited in the cells of 
the spongy bones of the spine and condyloid processes, and 
it there collects into mercurial globules, to expand and con- 
tract under heat and cold, to torment the patient with what is 
called mercurial neuralgia. 

When the cartilages are congested with the presence of this 
mercurial poison, severe inflammation results ; and when it 
congests the salivary glands, it induces ptyalism ; and when it 
congests the soft parts, gangrenous sloughing results. Its ac- 
tion in the liver and glandular system, is first that of great 
nervous excitability of the organ, causing excessive secretion 
of bile ; its secondary effect is that of paralysis and inflam- 
mation of the organ, especially when the system is laboring 
under a febrile action. When it congests the spine in the in- 
tervertebral foramina, paralysis, to a greater or less extent, oc- 
curs in the pairs of the torpid nerves. When it congests 
the membranes of the alveolar processes, the gums slough, the 
processes crumble and the teeth fall out, or become loose 
when not carried quite so far. It is sent to the brain when 
the patient lies in a recumbent position; the great force of the 
heart under febrile action induces inflammation of that organ, 
and the patient dies of softening of the brain. 

Tartar emetic is another very injurious medicament, the ac- 
tion of which requires analyzing to be better understood. 

This chemical preparation is one which induces emesis, by 
inducing inflammation of the mucous membranes of the stom- 
ach and duodenum. It is capable of inducing vesication of 



292 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

both the internal and external membranes when in contact 
with them. It will thus irritate every vessel through which it 
circulates, and when carried into the capillary pulmonary ar- 
teries, it induces congestion and obstruction of those vessels, 
causing hepatization of portions of the lungs, when given in 
cases of pneumonia. 

This remedy is next to mercury in obstructing the capillary 
termina, and causes thereby obstruction to assimilation, and 
the breaking down of the parts. It will, when carried into the 
periosteum of the spinal vertebra, induce obstruction of the 
lateral nerves, and caries off the bone. Many of the severest 
lumbar abscesses are induced by a long-continued use of this 
mineral. It lessens febrile action in chronic bronchitis, by 
the nervous prostration it induces in the vital bronchial nerves; 
and, when looking for a favorable reaction of the system under 
its use, the systemic powers will fail to rally, and sink lower 
and render the case still more dangerous. If it is used in cases 
of fever to induce emesis, it will inflame the mouth, fauces, 
oesophagus and stomach, and cause a sore throat, and very soon 
blocks the membranes with thick, dark brown sords — depend- 
ent upon the membranous vesication it induces. Its direct 
action upon the animal economy is best demonstrated when 
applied to the external skin for the purpose of making an an- 
timonial sore to fill the indication of an escharotic. 

There are over forty official preparations of iron laid down 
in the United States Pharmacy, which are mostly used to fill 
the indications of tonics, and chemists are annually offering 
new combinations of this metal for use. The prescriptions 
most popular in use to fill this indication are the phosphate, 
carbonate, iodide, muriate, etc. Sincere as may be the profes- 
sion in attempting to invigorate the debilitated constitution 
with these ferruginous preparations, I must take issue with 
them in regard to these preparations being the most judicious 
selection to fill this indication. The diseases in which the 
properties of tonics are most commonly used are dyspepsia, 
neuralgia, fevers and chlorosis. To offer to restore lost vitality 
to patients suffering with these derangements, is like offering 
stones for bread, when the bread is as accessible as the stones. 
This metal is, nine times out of ten, made proper use of in 
giving strength to agricultural implements and engines of 
power, but the man who first conceived the idea of giving it as 
medicine, to give back-bone or spinal power to man, ought to 
be immortalized among the genii for absurd conceptions. 
The animal economy is divinely placed two kingdoms above 
that of mineral, and man, in his subtle nervous organization, 
crowns the animal kingdom ; therefore, everything to be 
rendered capable of serving this divinest economy, must pass 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 293 

through the elaboratories of the vegetable kingdom, in order to 
be recognized among the affinities of this complicated being. 

When a mineral is introduced into the human circulation, it 
finds no kindred element or inviting affinity to welcome or give it 
a place in the animal economy. It not only becomes an intruder, 
but blocks up the; passages by occupying room needed for 
those vital elements which perpetuate the chain of life, and re- 
quiring, at times, more vital effort to remove it than it can 
always command, except through the process of breaking down 
by abscess, to remove the offensive mineral sediment. The 
damage it does to the nervous system, is to prevent its ele- 
mental supply of its fibrous structure ; then comes determina- 
tion to the brain, with obtuse condition of the sensitive nerves, 
which tolerates the pain of the derangement, rather than reliev- 
ing the diseased condition. 

The solution of ferri absorbs the hematine and holds it in 
combination, instead of contributing to it, and when it is de- 
purated, it carries with it the best article of nutrition, hematine; 
therefore, it extracts from the system the very agent designed, 
when given to supply. This is becoming a very popular remedy, 
by reason of its supposed ability to increase the hematine, or 
red coloring matter of the blood. The hematine is derived from 
the combination of the oxygen derived from the inhaled air.. 
with the electric element furnished by the functional nerves of 
the lungs. In consequence of its remedial action in cases of 
neuralgia, it has been inferred that the most prominent cause 
of neuralgic disease was a kind of chlorosis, due to a deficiency 
of the red globules in the blood. Chemists having discovered 
iron 2.25-1000 in the blood have vainly supposed that by feed- 
ing patients with iron, it would enrich the blood with its he- 
matine. More observing chemists have discovered that the 
hematosin is the result of the vital chemistry in the air cells, 
that deposits it upon the periphery of the blood globules, and 
that the elements contained within the blood globules are free 
from it ; consequently, if this solution of iron should be found 
to mix with the chyle, and become bottled up in the blooa 
globules, it could not in the least aid this chemical process 
that occurs exterior to the globules, that takes place in the 
tissuary vesicles that line the air cells, when in the red pig- 
ment or hematosin, is chemically produced by the union of the 
oxygen with the electric element furnished by the functional 
nerves of the lungs, and deposited upon the exterior surface 
of these blood globules. 

Chemists have been unable to detect any of the properties 
of iron in the chyle, when it has not been administered intern- 
ally. It is only formed in the hematosin deposited upon the 
external coats of the blood globules ; and that in the vital 



294 A « H - DAVIS' THEORY AND 

chemistry of hematosis, three agents are observable as con- 
tributing to the production of this hematosin — electricity, 
oxygen and carbon — the peculiar electric elements needed and 
furnished by the pulmonary functional nerves ; the oxygen 
from the inhaled air, and the carbon derived from the chyle 
in the circulation. 

Quite a mystery seems to have been thrown around the 
sources of this iron in the circulation, and pathologists seek to 
account for disease based upon its variable quantity as the 
cause of nearly all diseases, and the profession were carried 
away with the error ; and, as general and local blood-letting 
ranked among the most popular therapeutical agents for febrile, 
inflammatory and neuralgical diseases, for the space of two 
hundred years, which the light of science has but recently ex- 
ploded as a very grave error, so it will be with use of iron as 
with blood-letting and the use of mercury : it will have its run, 
until the light of vital chemistry shall prove it to be an offen- 
sive agent in the circulation, that will induce vertigo, palpita- 
tion of the heart, debility of the reproductive organs, mental 
incapacity, serving to shorten life by destroying the systemic 
perpetuating forces. The baneful effects of phlebotomy, mer- 
cury and antimony upon humanity, causes it to appear more like 
troops retiring from battle than any other comparable idea pres- 
ent in my mind ; and if millions are not prematurely lost from 
the ranks of the living by the use of this popular ferriginous 
remedy, it will come within my fears of its sly, mischievous 
work, before its coiled up serpent will be publicly detected. 
But it is to be hoped that the wise will take heed, and escape 
its baneful effects upon the health and longevity of the race. 
The only periodic effects observable, resulting from the use of 
this remedy, are due to its offensive presence in the capillary 
arteries, that causes what I call a capillary nervous rally, that 
stimulates more active combustion to dispose of it, at the ex- 
pense of a waste of nervous energy, the sequence of which is 
general debility for a greater length of time than if this indi- 
cation was induced by quinine or salicin, which are good sup- 
porters of combustion, neutralizes the malarial poison, and 
supports the nervous system by aiding assimilation in its fibrous 
structure, and contributing to the deficient supply of neurine. 



ARSENIC. 

This deadly poison constitutes one of the popular mineral 
tonics. The form in which it is used internally is that of Fow- 
ler's solution. By reason of arsenic being so deadly a poison 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 295 

in its concentrated form, will deter the populace from calling 
for it as a remedial agent. Its action as an anti-periodic is like 
that of iron, in changing the nervous system to a higher state 
of action for its removal. The absorbents become so severely 
taxed in the attempt to clear the system of so offensive an 
intruder, that causes them to fall into a state of great debility 
when the reaction takes place. And the sequence of its use 
as an anti-periodic in intermittent fevers is lassitude, loss of 
muscular endurance, and dropsy of the cavities and lower ex- 
tremities, that require the system a great length of time to 
overcome. 

With this exposition of the deleterious effects these mineral 
therapeutical agents induce upon the vital powers of the phy- 
sical system, the balance I pass without further remark ; judg- 
ing that the elucidation of the pernicious action of these are 
sufficient to exclude all mineral preparations from the materia 
medica as internal therapeutical agents. 

On the other hand, the vegetable remedies readily assimilate 
into the structure of the system, and fulfill their therapeutical 
indications in harmony with systemic law, and under their 
judicious use their sequences are favorable to health and lon- 
gevity. None of the excruciating pain follows their use, ob- 
servable to occur from the use of mineral remedies. 



ACONITE. 

ACONITUM NAPELLUS. 

Native of Europe. The Root and Leaves. 

This plant is domesticated in the United States, being 
cultivated in gardens, and bears blue flowers in May and June. 
It contains an alkaloid, termed aconitina, which is sometimes 
used externally, in the form of ointment. 

Properties. — In over-doses, an acrid poison. In proper 
doses, it acts as a direct sedative to the nerves of sensation, 
and is powerfully anti-phlogistic. It should be administered 
with extreme caution. Externally, preparations of the root, 
which are stronger than those of the leaves, are used to deaden 
the pain of neuralgia, rheumatism and gout. 

Antidotes. — Strong emetics, speedily administered ; after 
which stimulants, externally and internally. 

. preparations. 

Fluid extract aconite leaves. Dose, two to six drops diluted. 
" " " root. " one to four " " 



296 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

LINIMENT OF ACONITE AND CHLOROFORM. 

Tincture of aconite root, one fluid ounce, 

Castor oil, 

Chloroform, " " " 

Aqua ammonia, (hartshorn), " " " 

Camphorated tincture of soap, one-half " " 

Mix. To be shaken. Used externally for gout, rheumatism, 

neuralgia, and pains generally, when the skin is not broken. 

The remedy is indicated to relieve head-ache, and to abate 

the frequency of the pulse in febrile action. 



ALOES. 

ALOE. 

Native of South Africa. Juice of the leaves. 

The plants which supply the resin of aloes are of various 
kinds, and yield products bearing different names. They gen- 
erally send up stalks of from one to three feet in height, 
bearing respectively white, scarlet, or different colored flowers. 
The best aloes is made from the dried juice of the cut leaves. 
Soctorine aloes is considered the finest variety. 

Properties. — Active cathartic, generally used in combina- 
tion with other purgatives, to modify and decrease its drastic 
effects. Extensively used in the various pills of the day. 
preparations. 

Fluid extract. Dose, ten to twenty drops. 

Solid " " five to ten grains. 



AMERICAN VALERIAN. 

CYPRIPEDIUM PUBESCENS. 

Common Names : Ladies' Slipper, Nerve Root. 

Native of the United States. The Root. 

Grows in rich woods and moist lands, blossoming in May 
and June, having red and yellow blossoms. It is found plenti- 
fully in most parts of the United States. 

Properties. — Nervine and anti-spasmodic. Given to quiet 
the system in nervous irritability. A popular remedy to 
relieve headache and promote sleep. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 297 



PREPARATIONS. 



Fluid extract, Dose, one to two teaspoonfuls, diluted. 
Solid " " five to ten grains. 

COMPOUND MIXTURE OF AMERICAN VALERIAN. 
NO. I. 

Fluid ex. American valerian, one fluid ounce, 

" " Virginia snake root, " " " 

" " ipecac, twenty (20) drops. 

Mix. Dose, from a-half to one teaspoonful. Used as an 
anti-spasmodic, and to increase perspiration. 

no. 2. 
Fluid ex. American valerian, one fluid ounce, 
" " hops, " " " 

" " skull cap, " " 

Mix. Dose, one-half to one teaspoonful. Used, as an anti- 
spasmodic. 



ANGELICA. 

ANGELICA ATROPURPUREA. 

Common Names : Masterwort, High Angelica. 
Native of the United States. The Root. 
Inhabits fields and moist lands, bearing flowers during the 
summer months. 

Properties. — Aromatic and stimulant. Used in flatulent 
colic, and is a popular remedy in infusion to promote men- 
struation. 

preparations. 

Fluid extract. Dose, a-half to one teaspoonful. 

INFUSION OF ANGELICA ROOT. 

Fluid extract, one fluid ounce, 

Hot water, " pint. 

Mix. Dose, two to four fluid ounces. 

COMPOUND INFUSION OF ANGELICA ROOT. 

Fluid extract of angelica root, one-half of a fluid ounce, 

" " gravel plant, " " " " 

Hot water, one pint. 

Mix. Dose, one to two fluid ounces. Repeat as required. 
Used as a diuretic. 



298 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

ARBOR VITJE. 

THUJA OCCIDENTALIS. 

Common Names : White Cedar, False White Cedar. 
Native of North America. The Twigs and Leaves. 

This is a well-known evergreen tree much used for hedges 
and to ornament gardens. It abounds in Canada and the 
Northern States, growing in rocky places near the borders of 
streams and ponds. The leaves yield, by distillation, a pun- 
gent, essential oil. 

Properties. — Used in rheumatic and scorbutic diseases, in 
fevers, cough, and as a vermifuge. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, ten to twenty drops. 

POULTICE OF ARBOR VITjE. 

Fluid extract, two fluid ounces, 

Hot water, " " 

Mix. Add of ground slippery elm, linseed, or rye meal 
sufficient to make of the proper consistence. Used for 
removing rheumatic pains and swellings. 



ARNICA. 

ARNICA MONTANA. 

Common Names : Leopard's Bane, Mountain Tobacco. 

Native of Europe. The Flowers. 

Inhabits the cold, northern regions of Europe, flowering in 
June and July. 

Properties. — Diaphoretic and stimulant. In large doses, 
poisonous. Seldom used in this country internally, but very 
generally used externally for the relief of pain, whether 
resulting from bruises, sprains, or internal inflammation. 

Antidotes. — Emetics, followed by vinegar, or other vegeta- 
ble acids. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, ten to thirty drops. 
Solid " Not used internally. 

TINCTURE OF ARNICA. 

Fluid extract. Three fluid ounces. 
Dilute alcohol. Thirteen " " 

Mix. Used externally. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 299 

POULTICE OF ARNICA. 

Fluid extract. One fluid ounce. 
Vinegar, Three " •' 

Mix. Add rye or linseed meal to make a proper consistence. 
Used for bruises, swellings, sprains and rheumatic affections. 

ARNICA PLASTER. 

Pine resin, one ounce, 

Yellow wax, or beeswax, one-half ounce. 

Melt together, and add fluid extract of arnica one fluid 
ounce, stirring until cold. To be spread upon soft leather, 
cloth, or glazed paper. When spread upon very thin material, 
it makes a good plaster for corns. 

ARNICA OINTMENT. 

Solid extract, softened, 3ii> 

Lard, one ounce. Mix. 

ARNICA COURT PLASTER. 

Russian isinglass, half-ounce, 

Water, four " 

Mix. Dissolve by a gentle heat, and add of fluid extract of 
arnica 3SS. Spread the preparation with a soft brush upon 
silk, stretched upon a suitable frame. From two to four coats 
will be required, each application being made after the previ- 
ous one has entirely dried. 

GLYCEROLE OF ARNICA. 

Fluid extract of arnica, one fluid ounce, 

Glycerine, f. 5SS. 

Mix. Used as an application for bites of mosquitos and 
other insects. The addition of one to three grains of morphia 
adds to its efficacy for relieving pain, and especially that of 
the sting of bees. 

FOMENTATION OF ARNICA AND WORMWOOD 

Fluid extract of arnica, f. 5H, 

" " wormwood, " 

Hot water, a-half pint. Mix. 



BALMONY. 

CHELONE GLABRA. 

Common Names : Turtle Head, Turtle Bloom, Snake Head. 
Native of the United States. The Leaves. 
Grows in damp soils, and flowers in August and September. 



300 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

Properties. — Anthelmintic, mildly laxative, and tonic in 
small doses. Used as a vermifuge, a tonic for convalescent 
cases of fever, is one of the best tonics for debilitated nervous 
systems of weekly females. Very useful in chronic bowel 
complaints, especially dysentery, and a good appetizer in dys- 
peptic and consumptive cases. Its best preparation is in an 
infusion of the fine leaves, one drachm, put in a teacup and 
filled with boiling hot water ; set it aside, and in fifteen minutes 
strain. To be taken in doses from one to two drachms, every 
hour. 



BARBERY BARK. 



BERBERIS VULGARIS. 

Native of Northern States. The Bark. 

Grows on rocky hills, and in hard, barren, stony localities, 
bearing small, yellow flowers in May, and ripening its well- 
known acrid fruit in June and July. 

Properties. — Tonic and laxative, with an after astringent 
effect. Used in jaundice, dysentery, common and chronic 
diarrhoea. 

preparations. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one to two teaspoonfuls. 

Infusion, F. ex. Jii. 

Hot water, one pine. Dose, one to two fluid ounces. 

jaundice bitters. 

Fluid extract barberry bark f. gii, f. ex. 

Orange peel f. 5H, f. ex. 

Prickley ash f. |ii. 

Dilute alcohol two pints. Sweeten to the taste. 

Dose, one wineglassful. 



BAYBERRY BARK. 

MYRICA CERIFERA. 

Common Names : Wax Myrtle, Wax Berry. 
Properties. — Astringent and stimulant. Used in bowel 
complaints, jaundice; as a gargle for sore mouths, and throat, 
and as a snuff for catarrh, of the fine ground bark. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 



PREPARATIONS. 



Fluid extract. Dose, half to one teaspoonsful. 
Infusion fluid ex. one ounce. Warm water, one pint. 
Tincture of capsicum, m. 10 to 15. Used as a gargle for 
sore throat. 

BAYBERRY POULTICE. 

Fluid extract, one ounce. 

Hot water, three fluid ounces. 

Mix, and add either ground flax seed, slippery elm, or rye 
meal, to make of the right consistence. Apply around the 
throat in scarlet fever, diphtheria, croup, and common sore 
throat ; also, to scrofulous tumors or indolent ulcers. 



BELLADONNA. 

ATROPA BELLADONNA. 

Common Name : Deadly Night Shade. 
Native of Europe. The Leaves and Root. 

Grows in old fields and around old buildings, blossoming in 
June and July. It is cultivated in this country; 

Properties. — Powerfully narcotic. In over-doses, poison- 
ous; in suitable doses, anodyne and anti-spasmodic, with some 
diuretic and diaphoretic properties. Used in cases of mem- 
branous irritability. 

Antidotes. — Strong emetics speedily administered, after 
which stimulants applied externally and internally. The use 
of iodine has been recommended. 

preparations. 

Fluid extract, Dose, five to eight drops, 

Solid " " one-fourth to one grain. 

Pills, (sugar-coated), " " " " 

Homoeopathic globules, No. 2,five to twenty. 

TINCTURE OF BELLADONNA. 

Fluid extract, two fluid ounces, 
Dilute alcohol, fourteen " " 
Mix. Dose, fifteen to thirty drops. 



302 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

COMPOUND SYRUP OF BELLADONNA. 

Fluid extract belladonna, half a fluid ounce, 

" " elecampane, one " " 

" " wild cherry bark, four " " 

Simple syrup, two pints. 

Mix. Dose, one to two teaspoonfuls. 

An excellent remedy for whooping cough and common 
coughs and colds. 

NEURALGIC PDLS OF BELLADONNA. 

Extract of belladonna, twelve grains, 

Morphia, four " 

Strychnia, two " 

Mix, and form thirty-two pills. 

Used to relieve severe neuralgic and rheumatic pains. Also, 
in sick head-ache. 

Dose, one pill, repeated once in four or five hours until relief 
is obtained. Should be used with caution. 

BELLADONNA OINTMENT. 

Soft solid extract belladonna, one ounce, 
Lard, eight " Mix. 

LINIMENT OF BELLADONNA. 

Fluid extract belladonna, two fluid drachms, 

Aqueous " opium, one fluid ounce, 

Dilute alcohol, three " " 

Mix. Used to relieve nervous pains and pains in the joints. 

BELLADONNA POULTICE. 

Fluid extract belladonna, f. |i, 
Hot water, f. Jiv. 

Mix, and add ground flax seed, slippery elm or rye meal, to 
make proper consistence. 
Used for inflamed joints. 



BITTER ROOT. 

APOCYNUM ANDROS-^EMIFOLIUM. 

Common Names : Dogs' Bane, Milk Weed, Wild Buckwheat. 
Native of United States. The Root Bark. 
Grows in dry soils, by road-sides and borders of woods, 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 303 

flowering from June to August. The plant exudes a milky 
juice when cut or bruised. 

Properties. — Tonic, emetic, and laxative. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract, as emetic. Dose, one-half teaspoonful in a 
cup of warm water, repeated as required. 

Fluid extract, as tonic and diaphoretic. Dose, ten to twenty 
drops. 

TINCTURE OF BITTER ROOT. 

Fluid extract, f. ?ii. 

Dilute alcohol, f. fxiv. 

Mix. Dose, one to three drachms. 



BITTER SWEET. 

SOLANUM DULCAMARA. 

Common Names : Woody Night Shade, Violet Bloom, Fever 
Twig, Scarlet Berry. 

Native of United States and Europe. The Root and Twigs. 

A woody vine growing around hedges and fences, flowering 
in June and July. Its red berries hang upon the vine in 
clusters during autumn and winter. 

Properties. — In large doses, narcotic ; but used principally 
as an alterative. Administered in cutaneous and rheumatic 
diseases, scrofula, jaundice, and obstructed menstruation. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, from one to two teaspoonfuls. 
Solid " " two to five grains. 

TINCTURE OF BITTER SWEET. 

Fluid extract, f. pi, 

Dilute alcohol, f. rxiv. 

Mix. Dose, two to four tablespoonfuls. 

INFUSION OF BITTER SWEET. _ . ■ 

Fluid extract, f. Ji, 

Hot water, one pint. 

Dose, one to two ounces three times per day. 



304 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

SYRUP OF BITTER SWEET. . 

Fluid extract, f. ^iv, 

Simple syrup, f. 3xii. 

Mix. Dose, two to four teaspoonfuls three times per day. 

Used for scrofulous affections. 

BITTER SWEET OINTMENT. 

Fluid extract, f. 31V, 

Lard, eight ounces. 

Melt the lard, and add the fluid extract, stirring until cold. 

Used for burns and cutaneous eruptions. 



BITTER SWEET— FALSE. 

CELASTRUS SCANDENS. 

Common Names: Wax- work, Climbing Bitter Sweet, Staff Vine. 

Native of America. Bark of the Root. 

Grows in woods and thickets, among hedges and rocks, and 
tv ining about trees. Flowers in June, bearing a scarlet berry. 

Properties. — Alterative, diaphoretic, slightly diuretic. Used 
ii scrofulous, cutaneous, and hepatic affections. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one to two teaspoonfuls 

SYRUP. 

Fluid extract, f. gii. Simple syrup, f. Jxiv. 
Mix. Dose, one to two tablespoonfuls. 

INFUSION. 

Fluid extract, f. %i, 

Hot water, one pint. 

Mix. Dose, two to four tablespoonfuls. 



BLACK ALDER. 

PINOS VERTICILLATUS. 

Common Name : Winter Berry. 
Native of United States. The Bark. 

Common in swamps and by the side of running streams. 
Flowers in June and July. 

Properties. — Tonic and alterative. Has been used with 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 305 

success in dropsy, and is recommended in diseases of a typhoid 
* type. Also, used externally for ulcers and eruptions. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one to two teaspoonfuls. 

Tincture of B. A. — Fluid ex. f. fii. Dilute alcohol f. ^xiv. 
Mix. Dose, one to three tablespoonfuls. 

Syrup of B. A. — Fluid ex. §iv, simple syrup f. |xii. Mix. 
Dose, one to three teaspoonfuls. 

Lotion of B. A. — Fluid ex. f. fiv, water f. ?xii. Mix. 

Poultice of B. A. — Fluid ex. f. §i, hot water f. |iii. Mix. 
Add ground flax seed, slippery elm, rye meal, sufficient to 
make of proper consistence. Used for gangrenous or ill-con- 
ditioned ulcers. 



BLACKBERRY ROOT. 

RUBUS VILLOSUS. 

Native of United States. The Bark of the Root. 

A perennial prickly shrub or cane, growing beside fences, 
around rocks, and in the borders of woods. It flowers in June 
and July, and its fruit ripens in August. 

Properties. — Astringent and tonic. Used in diarrhoea, 
dysentery, cholera infantum, and a relaxed state of the bowels 
in children, to relieve premature bearing down with pregnant 
females. Also, as an astringent gargle and lotion. 

preparations. 

Fluid extract, Dose, one-half to one teaspoonful. 

Solid " " five to eight grains. 

Tincture of B. R. — Fluid ex. f. fii, dilute alcohol f. Jxiv. 
Mix. Dose, one to three teaspoonfuls. 

Infusion of B. R. — Fluid ex. f. ri, hot water one pint. Mix. 
Dose, one to two fluid ounces. 

Syrup of B. R. — Fluid ex. f. fiv, simple syrup f. fxii. Mix. 
Dose, one-half to one fluid ounce. 

Wine of B. R. — Fluid ex. f. |iv, sherry or native wine f. |xi. 
Mix. Dose, one-half to one fluid ounce. 

Syrup of the fruit of blackberry. — To one pint of ripe 
blackberries add one pint of dilute alcohol or brandy ; let it 
stand for one week ; then express the liquid through a cloth, 
and add of refined sugar enough to suit the taste. Used for 
bowel complaints. Dose, for an adult, one-half to one wine 
glassful two or three times a day ; for children in proportion. 



306 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

BLOOD ROOT. 

SANGUIN*RIA CANADENSIS. 

Common Names : Red Puckoon, Indian Paint, Red Root. 
Native of United States. The Root. 

A small perennial plant, found in rich soil near the borders 
of woods. Its delicate white flowers are among the first to ap- 
pear in spring, and the plant continues to bloom until June. 
The root, when broken or cut, emits an acrid red juice resem- 
bling blood, hence the name. Blood root yields a resinoid to 
to which the name of sanguinarin has been given, and which 
contains the concentrated properties of the root. 

Properties. — In small doses, stimulant and tonic. In large 
doses, sedative, reducing the pulse and increasing expectora- 
tion. In still larger doses, emetic. 

preparations. 

Fluid extract. Dose, ten to twenty drops. 

Solid " " one to two grains. 

Sanguinarin, " one-quarter to one grain. 

Tincture of B. R. — Fluid ex. f. gii. Dilute alcohol, f. Jxiv. 
Mix. Dose, as a tonic, stimulant, or expectorant, ten to sixty 
drops; as an emetic, two to four teaspoonfuls. 

Infusion of B. R. — Fluid ex. f. p. Hot water, one pint. 
Mix. Dose, from one-half to one ounce. 

Syrup of B. R. — Fluid ex. f. fi, f. ex. of hops, f. Ji, simple 
syrup, f. |xiv. Used as a tonic, diuretic and expectorant. 
Dose, one teaspoonful every three hours. 



BLUE FLAG. 

IRIS VERSICOLOR. 

Common Names : Fleur-de-lis, Flag Lily, Liver Lily, Snake 
Lily. 

Native of the United States. The Root. 

Grows in moist and wet locations, bearing blue flowers in 
June and July. 

Properties. — Cathartic, alterative and diuretic. Used ex- 
tensively in eclectic practice as a substitute for mercury. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 307 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one-half to one teaspoonful. 

Solid " " one to four grains. 

Iridin, " one to two grains. 

Tincture of B. F. — Fluid ex. f. fii. Dilute alcohol f. 3xiv. 
Mix. Dose, two to four teaspoonfuls. 

Syrup of B. F. — Fluid ex. f. |ii, simple syrup f. ^xiv. Mix. 
Dose, 3ii to 3iv. 

Powder for Dropsy. — Hydragogue cathartic. — Iridin, three 
grains, leptandrin, six grains, bi-tartrate of potassa, twenty 
grains. Mix. For one dose. 



BOX WOOD BARK. 

CORNUS FLORIDA. 

Common Names: Dog Wood, Flowering Cornei. 

Native of United States. The Bark. 

A small indigenous, found in some of our forests, growing 
generally from twelve to fifteen feet in height. The flowers are 
small, of a greenish yellow color, surrounded by large, white 
involucres, making it during April and May one of the most 
showy trees in our forests. 

Properties. — Tonic and astringent. Used in eclectic prac- 
tice as a substitute for cinchona bark in intermittent fevers. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one-half to one teaspoonful. 

Tincture of Box Wood Bark. — Fluid ex. f. ^iv, dilute alcohol 
f. 3xii. Mix. Dose, two to four teaspoonfuls. 

Wine of Box Wood Bark. — Fluid ex. f. |iv, sherry or native 
wine f. fxi, alcohol f. |i. Mix. Dose, two to four teaspoonfuls. 

Infusion of Box Wood Bark — Fluid ex. f. |ii, hot water one 
pint. Mix. Dose, a wine glassful every two hours. Used in 
intermittent fevers. 



BROOM TOP. 



CYTISUS SCOPARIUS. 

Native of Europe. The Tops. 

Broom is cultivated in gardens in this country, bearing large 
golden colored flowers in May and June. 



308 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

Properties. — In large doses emetic and cathartic ; in 
smaller doses a valuable diuretic. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one to two teaspoonfuls. 

Infusion of Broom Top. — Fluid ex. f. 5i, hot water, one 
pint. Mix. Dose, one fluid ounce every hour until the desir- 
ed effect is produced. 



BUCHU. 

BAROSMA CRENATA. 

Native of the Cape of Good Hope. The Leaves. 
The different species of this plant possess similar medical 
Properties. — It was first introduced into American practice 
in 1823, and the estimation in which it was held by the Hot- 
tentots in diseases of the urinary organs has been verified by 
trial here. It is now acknowledged as a standard remedy in 
such diseases. Our fluid extract is made with great care from 
the long-leaved buchu. It retains the natural oil of the plant, 
and is a reliable preparation. 



BUCK HORN. 

OSMUNDA. 

Common Names : Buck Horn Brake, Royal Flowering Fern. 
Native of the United States. The Root. 

A beautiful fern frequenting moist and low lands. It flow- 
ers in June. The root, which resembles a deer's horn, yields 
an abundance of mucilage to boiling water. 

Properties. — Used for female weaknesses and in pulmon- 
ary complaints. 

PREPARATION. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one to two teaspoonsful diluted. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 309 

BUCK THORN. 

RHAMNUS CATHARTICUS. 

Native of Europe. The berries. 

A shrub growing from five to eight feet high, which is do- 
mesticated in this country. It flowers in May or June, and 
its black shining berries ripen about the first of October. 

Properties. — Hydrogogue cathartic, used in dropsy, for 
worms, and in the form of syrup, is a favorite domestic ca- 
thartic. 

preparations. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one to two teaspoonsful. 
Syrup of buck thorn, fluid ex. |iv., fluid extract allspice §i. 
Fluid extract ginger f. §ii, simple syrup f. fxii. Mix. 
Dose, one to two fluid ounces. 

BUCK THORN BARK. 

Rhamnus Catharticus. The Bark. 

Properties. — Cathartic, useful in rheumatism and dropsy. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one to two teaspoonsful. 
Infusion of buck thorn bark, fluid extract f. §i 
Hot water, one pint. Mix. 
Dose, one to two tablespoonsful. 



BUGLE WEED. 

LYCOPUS VIRGINICUS. 



Common Names : Pauls Betony, Green Archangel, Water 
Horehound, Sweet Bugle, Mountain Mint. 

Native of United States. The Plant. 

Grows in shady and moist situations, flowering in August. 

Properties. — It is a diuretic, diaphoretic, emmenagogue, ex- 
hilarating as a diffusible stimulant, is one of the smoothest 
diuretics and best febrifuge we have to use in all febrile con- 
ditions. Useful in gravel, dropsies, female weakness, and 
combined with other medicaments contributes to form one of 
the most useful remedies to relieve congestion of the synovial 
membranes between the joints of the spine. By virtue of its 
affinity for the elements of the nervous system and brain, it facili- 
tates rapid nutrition, relieving congestion and pain. It thereby 



3IO A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

becomes a good nervine without being narcotic. Its best 
preparation is that of infusion made of the leaves and flowers. 
It can be drank freely without any danger until it fulfills its 
specific indications. 



BURDOCK. 



ARCTIUM LAPPA. 

Native of Europe and United States. The Root. 

This well-known plant grows abundantly in waste places 
throughout the United States. 

Properties. — Alterative and diuretic, used in scrofulous, 
rheumatic and venereal diseases. 

preparations. 

Fluid extract. Dose, half to one drachm. 

Tincture of B. D., fluid extract f. fii, dilute, alcohol f. fxiv. 

Mix. Dose, half to one fluid ounce. 

Infusion of B. D. fluid extract f. ?i. Hot water, one pint. 

Mix. Dose, one to four fluid ounces. 

Ointment of B. D., fluid extract f. §i. Lard, three ounces. 

Melt the lard and add the fluid extract, stirring until cold. 

Used for diseases of the skin. 



BUTTERNUT. 



JUGLANS CINEREA. 

Common Names : White Walnut, Oil Nut. 

Native of the United States. The Bark of the Root. 

An indigenous forest tree, sometimes attaining the height of 
fifty feet. It flowers in May, and the nuts ripen in September. 

Properties. — A gentle cathartic, operating without pro- 
ducing debilitating effects, and particularly useful in cases of 
habitual constipation. The resin oil prepared from it, called 
juglandin, is highly commenlded by eclectic practitioners as a 
laxative and cathartic. The preparations of butternut are 
much used in domestic practice for throat diseases of children. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one to three teaspoonfuls. 
Solid " " five to twenty grains. 

Juglandin, " one to five grains. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 311 

PILLS OF BUTTERNUT. 

Solid extract B. N., twenty grains. 

" " henbane (Hyos), ten grains. 
Podophyllin, five grains. 

Mix together and form ten pills. One to be taken at bed- 
time for habitual constipation. 

SYRUP OF BUTTERNUT. 

Fluid extract B. N., f. ^iv. 

" " loveage, f. |i. 

" " rhubarb, f. |ss. 
Simple syrup, f. 3X. 

Mix. A good laxative for children, in doses of one to two 
teaspoonfuls. Cathartic in doses of one to four teaspoonfuls. 

COMPOUND SYRUP OF BUTTERNUT. 

Fluid extract B. N., f. rii. 
Aqueous extract of senna, f. |i. 
Fluid extract of jalap, f. ?i. 
Fluid extract coriander, f. p. 
Fluid extract ginger, f. 3SS. 
Simple syrup, f. 3X. 

Mix. To be shaken when used. Dose, one-half to one fluid 
ounce. 



CANABIS INDICA. 

FOREIGN INDIAN HEMP. 

Native of Asia. Tlie top of the Flowering Plant. 

Called by then atives, ganjah or gunjah. Hashish, Churrus. 
Bhang, subjer. 

Canabis indica is the same plant as canabis sativa of Europe 
and America, but the latter does not contain the resin which 
the climate of India gives to the flower. It has been long 
used in Asia for its strong narcotic and intoxicating properties, 
and has, within a few years, been introduced into European and 
American practice. In the resin exists the medical properties 
of the plant. 

Properties. — Narcotic, exhilarant, sometimes used instead 
of opium. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, five to twenty drops, cautiously increased 
from five drops. Administered in syrup, milk, or on powdered 
sugar. 

Solid extract. Dose, one-half to one grain. 



312 



A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 



TINCTURE OF CANABIS INDICA. 

Solid extract, twenty-four grains. 

Alcohol, one fluid ounce. 

Mix. Dose, ten to twenty drops, and repeated as required. 

HOMOEOPATHIC PREPARATION. 

Unmedicated globules of the sugar of goat's milk, No. 2. 
Fill a phial with them. Then pour it full of the tincture, let 
stand one hour, pour off the tincture and spread the globules 
to dry on a sheet of white paper turned up at the sides, stirring 
them occasionally to prevent them from adhering together. 

Used in febrile attacks of children. Dose, ten to twenty, 
and repeated every hour until the child rests. 



CARAWAY. 

CARUM CARUI. 

Native of South Europe. The Seeds. 

This well-known plant is extensively cultivated in the United 
States. 

Properties. — A pleasant carminative, indicated in dyspep- 
tic cases, and useful to facilitate digestion. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, half to one teaspoonful. 
Infusion of caraway. Fluid extract f. |i. Hot water, one 
pint. 

Mix. Dose, two to four tablespoonfuls. 



CASCARILLA. 

CROTON ELEUTERIA. 

Native of West Indies and South America. The Bark. 

Properties. — Aromatic, stimulant, tonic and febrifuge, used 
advantageously with cinchona in intermittents and as an in- 
gredient in tonic bitters. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, half to one teaspoonful. 
■ Tincture of cascarilla, fluid extract f. §ii. Dilute. 
Alcohol f. Jxiv. 

Mix. Dose, one to teaspoonsful. 
Infusion. Fluid extract f. Ji. Hot water, one pint. 
Mix. Dose, two to four teaspoonsful. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 313 

CATMINT. 

NEPETA CATARIA. 

Native of Europe. The Tops and Leaves. 

This plant, supposed to have been introduced from Europe, 
grows abundantly in this country, and is easily recognized by 
its peculiar pleasant taste and odor. 

Properties. — Diaphoretic, carminative. Used extensively 
in domestic practice for local diseases accompanied with febrile 
symptoms, in the form of an infusion made from the dried 
plant. 

preparations. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one to two teaspoonfuls. 
Infusion, fluid extract, f. |i ; hot water, one pint. Mix. Dose, 
one to four fluid ounces. 

sedative mixture. 

Fluid extract C. M., f. §i. 
Fluid extract valerian, f. |ss. 
Fluid extract scullcap, f. rss. Mix. 

Dose, one teaspoonful, repeated as required. Given to allay 
nervous excitement. 



CAYENNE. 

capsicum anunum. 
Common Names : Cayenne Pepper, Red Pepper. 
Native of South America and most hot climates. The Fruit 
An annual plant. Although abundantly cultivated in this 
country, the fruit raised in hot climates is preferred for medici- 
nal purposes. 

Properties. — Stimulant. Used internally to stimulate the 
digestive organs ; used externally as a counter-irritant. In 
the form of fluid extract, it is vesicatory. 

cayenne liniment. 

Alcohol tincture, f. |ss. 

Aqueous extract of opium, f. 3SS. 

Oil of origanum, 3ii. 

Tincture of camphor, f. |xii. 

Alcohol, f. |xii. 

Mix. For rheumatic and neuralgic pains, sprains, &c. 



314 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

CAYENNE PLASTER. 

Melt together four ounces of resin and one ounce of yellow 
wax. Remove it from the fire, and when nearly cold stir in 
alcoholic tincture of cayenne, f. 3ii- Camphor in powder, half 
an ounce. Oil of sassafras, forty-five drops. Mix. To be 
spread on some proper material. 

A good stimulating, strengthening plaster. 



CHECKERBERRY. 

GAULTHERIA PROCUMBENS. 



Common Names : Patridge Berry, Wintergreen, Deer Berry, 
Mountain Tea. 
Native of United States. The Leaves. 

Properties. — Stimulant, tonic, diuretic and astringent. Its 
essential oil is much used for its stimulating properties, agree- 
able flavor and taste. 

preparations. 

Oil of checkerberry 3i, alcohol f. Ji, forms the tincture. Dose,, 
m. 15, diluted. 

Infusion, tincture 3i, hot water half-pint, sweetened to suit. 
Dose, two to four ounces. 

The oil is used as an external application to the neck and 
spine, as a stimulant in cases of colds, to relieve the spinal 
congestion. 



CHERRY BARK. 

prunus virginianus. 
Common Name : Wild Cherry. 

Native of the United States. The inner Bark. 

A handsome forest tree of the Middle States, attaining the 
height of seventy or eighty feet. It flowers in May, and ripens 
its fruit in August. 

Properties. — Tonic, and invigorating in its impressions 
upon the stomach, but sedative to the circulatory and nervous 
systems. Extensively used as an ingredient in pulmonary mix- 
tures, for which it is well adapted by its sedative qualities and 
agreeable flavor. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 315 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, half to one teaspoonful. 

Compound fluid extract. Dose, half to one teaspoonful. 

The compound fluid extract is composed of cherry bark, 
blood root, ipecac and opium. It is extensively used for coughs, 
colds, and pulmonary complaints in general. 

SYRUP OF WILD CHERRY. 

Fluid extract, f. |iv. Simple syrup, f. fxii. Mix. Dose, one 
to four teaspoonfuls. 

Infusion, fluid extract, f. 31. Cold water, one pint. Mix. 
Dose, one to two ounces. 



CINCHONA. 

CINCHONA. 

Common Names : Peruvian Bark, Jesuit's Bark. 

Native of South America. The Bark. 

Various kinds of barks are known in commerce by the name 
of cinchona, and the amounts and kinds of alkaloids contained 
vary with the different species. Quinia and cinchonia are the 
two most important alkaloids contained in the bark, and the 
reputation they have attained is equalled by no other isolated 
principle, unless it be morphia obtained from opium. But the 
medicinal virtue of cinchona bark does not exist entirely in 
these two principles ; there are others, some capable of isola- 
tion and some of a complex nature not yet fully understood. 
And the fact is well recognized that the bark, or preparations 
of the bark, which contain all the properties unaltered, often 
produces the desired effect when quinia or cinchonia fails. 
Henry Thayer & Co. manufacture three varieties of fluid ex- 
tracts of cinchona bark, viz : cinchona calisaya, cinchona true 
red, and cinchona loax. The doses and preparations of each 
are the same. 

Properties. — Tonic, febrifuge, anti-periodic. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, fifteen drops to one teaspoonful. 

Compound fluid extract. Dose, fifteen drops to one tea- 
spoonful. 

(Formula like tine, cinchona comp.) Fluid extract aromatic. 
Dose, one to two teaspoonfuls. 



316 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 



TINCTURE OF CINCHONA. 



Fluid extract, f. Jiii. Dilute alcohol, f. |xiii. Mix. Dose, 
one to four teaspoonfuls. 

Infusion of cinchona. Fluid extract, f. |i. Hot water, one 
pint. Mix. Dose, one to two fluid ounces. 



WINE OF CINCHONA. 



Fluid extract, f. |iii. Sherry, or native wine, f. fxiii. Mix. 
Dose, one to two tablespoonfuls. 



WINE OF COMP. CINCHONA. 

Fluid extract of cinchona comp., f. |ii. Sherry, or native 
wine, f. Jxiv. Mix. Dose, half a wineglassful three times daily. 

ELIXIR OF CALISAYA BARK. 

Fluid extract cinchona-calisaya, 3ix. 

" " orange peel, 3ii. 

" " cardamon, 3ss. 

" " cinnamon, 3ii. 

Simple syrup, f. |v. 
Dilute alcohol, f. f viii. 

Mix the syrup and diluted alcohol together before adding 
the extracts. Dose, one tablespoonful. 



CLEAVERS. 

GALIUM APARINE. 

Common Names : Goose-grass, Bedstraw, Catchweed. 

Native of Europe and United States. The Plant. 

An annual weed growing in cultivated fields along the border 
fences. It flowers in July and August. 

Properties. — Aperient, diuretic. Valuable in diseases of 
the urinary organs and skin. » Used domestically in decoction. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one to two teaspoonfuls. 

Infusion of cleavers. Fluid extract, f. |ii. Hot water, one 
pint. Mix. Dose, one to two fluid ounces, repeated to fill the 
indication. 

OINTMENT OF CLEAVERS. 

Fluid extract, f. fii. Lard, eight ounces. Melt the lard and 
add the extract, stirring until cold. Used for scrofulous swell- 
ings and cutaneous eruptions. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 317 

COHOSH— BLACK. 

CIMICIFUGA RACExMOSA. 

Common Names : Rattle Root, Squaw Root, Bug's Bane, Black 

Snakeroot. 

Native of United States. The Root. 

Found growing in rich soil in upland woods and hill-sides. 
It flowers from May to August. It contains a peculiar resin 
called cimicifugin, which is extensively used. 

Properties. — Tonic, nervine and anti-spasmodic. Used suc- 
cessfully in chorea, convulsions, nervous excitability, asthma 
and other spasmodic diseases, in remittent and intermittent 
fevers, acute rheumatism, and to accelerate parturitions. 

Fluid extract. Dose, half to one teaspoonful. 

Solid extract. Dose, four to eight grains. 

Compound fluid extract. Dose, half to one teaspoonful. 

(Composed of black cohosh, cherry bark, licorice and blood 
root.) 

Cimicifugin. Dose, one to six grains. 

This remedy is indicated only after all glandular obstructions 
are removed. 

tincture of black cohosh. 

Fluid extract, f. pv. Dilute alcohol, f. §xii. Mix. Dose, 
one to two teaspoonfuls. 



COLOCYNTH. 

CUCUMIS COLOCYNTHIS. 

Common Names : Bitter Apple, Bitter Cucumber. 

Native of Africa and Asia. The Fruit. 

The fruit is about the size of an orange, yellow and smooth 
when ripe. It contains a yellow medullary pulp, which, when 
deprived of the seeds, is the part used. This has an intensely 
bitter taste, and yields its virtues to water and alcohol. 

Properties. — A powerful drastic hydragogue cathartic, pro- 
ducing, when given in over doses, violent griping. It is sel- 
dom given alone, but when combined is considered a standard 
remedy. It stimulates the pancreas to secrete and discharge a 
greater quantity of its juice, and thereby removes all obstruc- 
tions of that organ. Its bitter and laxative properties com- 
bined serve to assist digestion in chronic dyspeptic cases. It 
operates as a pepsin in these cases, and no other has filled this 



318 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

indication as satisfactorily as a formula for indigestion, con- 
taining colocynth, long used by the author. Colocynth is one 
of our quickest cathartics, and is valuable when a speedy and 
sure action is desired. Its force of action is moderated by 
combining with it an anodyne, as hyoscyamus or cypripedium. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, five to ten drops. 

Powder. Dose, five to ten grains. 

Pepsin formula. Alcoholic tincture colocynth, 3ii. Alco- 
holic tincture caraway, 3ii. Alcoholic tincture cypripedium, 
f. §ii. Lime water, f. pv. Mix. Dose, 3i every hour during 
the daytime, making twelve doses per day. If it proves too 
laxative, increase the quantity of all the other ingredients. If 
not laxative enough, add more tincture of colocynth to the 
formula. 

Pill of colocynth. Colocynth powder, fifty grains. Solid ex- 
tract of hyoscyamus, ten grains. Make ten pills. Dose, one 
pill. Used to relieve headache and constipation. 



COLUMBO. 

COCCULUS PALMATUS. 

Native of Eastern Africa. The Root. 

Columbo root has been known as a medicine since the year 
1677. The root and lateral tubers are cut in slices and dried, 
in which form it is found in our market. It contains no tan- 
nin or gallic acid, which distinguishes it from the American or 
false columbo {Frasera Carolinensis), the latter being black- 
ened by the salts of iron. 

Properties. — Mild tonic and stomachic, without stimulating 
or astringent properties. One of the most useful vegetable 
tonics. Used for general debility, dyspepsia, chronic diar- 
rhoea and cholera infantum. 

preparations. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one-fourth to one drachm. 

TINCTURE OF COLUMBO. 

Fluid extract, f. gii. Dilute alcohol, f. 3xiv. Mix. Dose, 
one to two drachms. 

INFUSION OF COLUMBO. 

Fluid extract, one fluid ounce. Hot water, one pint. Mix. 
Dose, one to two fluid ounces. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 319 

COMFREY. 

SYMPHYTUM OFFICINALE. 

Common Names : Gum Plant, Healing Herb. 

Native of Europe. The Root. 

This plant is naturalized in this country. It is often culti- 
vated in gardens, and grows spontaneously in moist and rich 
soil, bearing flowers all summer. 

Properties. — Demulcent and slightly astringent and tonic. 
Used in pulmonary affections, bowel complaints and female de- 
bility. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract comfrey. Dose, one to two teaspoonfuls. 

Compound wine of comfrey. Fluid extract comfrey, f. fi. 
Fluid extract Solomon's seal, f. |i. Fluid extract unicorn root, 
f. p. Fluid extract chamomile, f. rss. Fluid extract columbo, 
f. 3SS. Fluid extract gentian compound, f. 3SS. Fluid extract 
cardamon, f. |ss. Fluid extract sassafras bark, f. 3SS. Alco- 
hol, f. 51V. Sherry, or native wine, four pints. Mix. Dose, 
half to two f. 3. A tonic used in diseases peculiar to females, 
called "Restorative Wine Bitters." 



CRAMP BARK. 

VIBURNUM OPULUS. 

Common Name : High Cranberry. 

Native of United States and Canada. The Bark. 

This shrub grows in low, moist lands, attaining the height of 
ten or twelve feet. It flowers in June, and is then quite orna- 
mental. The fruit resembles the common cranberry, is very 
acid, and is sometimes used for domestic purposes. It remains 
on the shrub during the cold months. 

Properties. — Anti-spasmodic, relieving cramps and spasms 
of all kinds. Is a component of the Mother's Relief. Said 
to be of great value in puerperal convulsions. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, half to one teaspoonful. 
Infusion. Fluid extract C. B., f. pi. Water, one pint. Mix. 
Dose, one to two fluid ounces, repeated every four hours. 



320 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

CRANESBILL. 

GERANIUM MACULATUM. 

Common Names : Wild Cranesbill, Dove's-foot, Crowfoot, 
Spotted Geranium, Alum Root. 

Native of United States. The Root. 

Grows in low grounds and open woods, flowering from April 
till June. 

Properties. — A powerful astringent. Used in dysentery, 
diarrhoea, cholera infantum, and in excessive mucous discharges 
of the bowels ; also as a gargle for sore mouth, sore throat and 
relaxation of the uvula ; also for prolapsus of the lower bowel. 
In domestic practice it is used in decoction. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, half to one teaspoonful. 

Tincture of cranesbill. Fluid extract, f. fii. Dilute Alco- 
hol, §xiv. Mix. Dose, one to four teaspoonfuls. 

Infusion of cranesbill. Fluid extract, f. ^ii. Hot water, one 
pint. Mix. Dose, one to two ounces, used as a gargle. 



CRAWLEY. 

CORALLORHIZA ODONTORHIZA. 

Common Names: Dragon's Claw, Coral Root. 

Native of the United States. The Root. 

This plant is found in woods, growing near the roots of the 
trees, and is distributed throughout the Northern and Middle 
States. It has no verdure, but bears flowers from July to Oc- 
tober. 

Properties. — Diaphoretic and sedative. Used in low types 
of fever and inflammatory diseases. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, half to one teaspoonful. 

TINCTURE OF CRAWLEY ROOT. 

Fluid extract, f. fii. Dilute alcohol, f. |xiv. Mix. Dose, 
one to two teaspoonfuls. 

INFUSION OF CRAWLEY ROOT. 

Fluid extract, f. |ii. Hot water, one pint. Mix. Dose, one 
to two tablespoonfuls. 

SYRUP OF CRAWLEY ROOT. 

Fluid extract, f. |ii. Simple syrup, f. §xiv. Mix. Dose, 
one to two tablespoonfuls. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 32 1 

CUBEBS. 

PIPER CUBEBA. 

Native of East Indies. The Fruit. 

A perennial climbing plant, growing in forests. The unripe 
berries are gathered and dried for the market. The taste is 
pungent and aromatic, leaving a sensation in the throat and 
fauces somewhat like that which is left by peppermint. The 
berries are often eaten by speakers and singers to clear the 
voice, and the power of the oil of cubebs forms the base of 
most pulmonary lozenges. 

Properties. — Gently stimulant, with a special action on the 
mucous tissues. Diuretic and expectorant. Used successfully 
in gonorrhoea, gleet, leucorrhoea, bronchial inflammation, 
coughs, colds, catarrh, and diseases of the kidneys. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, half to one teaspoonful. 
Etherial or alco-resinous extract. Dose, four to twenty 
drops. 

Extract cubebs and copaiva pills, four grains each. 



CULVER'S ROOT. 

LEPTANDRA VIRGINICA. 

Common Names : Culver's Physic, Tall Speedwell, Black Root. 

Native of the United States. The Root. 

Grows in limestone countries, in rich, moist places. It 
flowers in July and August. The root contains the resin oil 
called leptandrin, on which its virtues chiefly depend. 

Properties. — The fresh root is seldom used. The dried 
root is laxative, cholagogue and tonic, promoting the action of 
the liver. Used in all functional diseases of the liver, typhoid 
and bilious fevers, and dyspepsia. 

preparations. 

Fluid extract. Dose, half to one teaspoonful. 

Leptandrin. Dose, one-fourth to one grain. 

Pills of leptandrin, one grain each. 

SYRUP OF CULVER'S ROOT. 

Fluid extract C. R., f. fii. Simple syrup, f. ^xiv. Mix. 
Dose, one to three teaspoonfuls. 

COMPOUND LEPTANDRIN PILLS. 

Leptandrin, 3i. Podophyllin, 3i. Ex. hyoscyamus, 3ss. Mix. 
Make sixty pills. Dose for habitual constipation, one ; for 
liver obstruction, two. 



322 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

DANDELION ROOT. 

TARAXACUM DENS LEONIS. 

Dandelion grows spontaneously in most parts of the world, 
and flowers from April to November. 

Properties. — Tonic and laxative, with a tendency to act 
upon the liver. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one to three teaspoonfuls. 
Fluid extract compound. Dose, one to two teaspoonfuls. 
Solid extract. Dose, ten to thirty grains. 
Fluid extract dandelion and senna. Dose, one to two tea- 
spoonfuls. 

COMPOUND SYRUP OF DANDELION. 

Fluid extract dandelion, f. pi. Pipsissewa, checkerberry, 
uva ursi, angelica, each one fluid ounce. Simple syrup, f. §viii. 
Mix. Dose, one to two tablespoonfuls two or three times 
daily. For kidney complaints, gravel, strangury and inflam- 
mation of the bladder. 



DRAGON ROOT. 

ARUM TRIPHYLLUM. 



Common Names : Pepper Turnip, Jack-in-the-pulpit, Wake 
Robin, Indian Turnip. 

Native of the American Continent. The Root. 

This plant is found growing in swamps and moist places, 
flowering in May and June. The fresh root is extremely acrid, 
causing an intense prickly sensation upon the tongue, lips and 
fauces, which is relieved by washing the mouth with milk. 

Properties. — The dried root is expectorant, diaphoretic and 
stimulant. Recommended for cramp, whooping cough, asth- 
ma and bronchitis. 

preparations. 

Fluid extract. Dose, ten to fifteen drops. 
Syrup of dragon root. Fluid extract, f. fii. Syrup, f. pv. 
Mix. Dose, half to one teaspoonful. For coughs and colds. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 323 

DWARF ELDER. 

ARALIA HISPIDA. 

Common Names : Wild Elder, Brittle Stem. 

Native of United States. The Bark of the Root. 

A low shrub, growing in fields and along roadsides. Flow- 
ers from June to September. 

Properties. — Diuretic and alterative. Said to be valuable 
in dropsy, gravel and urinary disorders. 

PREPARATIONS. ' % ^< w ^<=-- 

Fluid extract. Dose, one to two teaspoonfuls. 
Infusion of dwarf elder. Fluid extract, f. fii. Hot water, 
one pint. Mix. Dose, two to four fluid ounces. 



ELDER FLOWERS. 

SAMBUCUS CANADENSIS. 

Common Names : Sweet Elder, Black Elder. 

Native of United States. The Flowers. 

A well-known shrub, growing in rich grounds in waste places. 
It flowers in June and July, in white umbel clusters, and bears 
black berries which ripen in September and October. 

Properties. — Diaphoretic, diuretic and laxative. Used in 
decoction for constipation with infants. 



ELECAMPANE. 

INULA HELENIUM. 

Native of Europe. The Root. 

Elecampane is domesticated in this country. It grows in 
pastures and along roadsides, flowering in August and Sep- 
tember. 

Properties. — Aromatic, stimulant, expectorant, emmena- 
gogue and diaphoretic. Used principally in pulmonary affec- 
tions. 

preparations. 

Fluid extract. Dose, half to one teaspoonful. 

Infusion. Fluid extract, f. 3H. Hot water, one pint. Mix. 
Dose, half to one fluid ounce. 

Syrup. Fluid extract, f. 5iv. Simple syrup, f. fxii. Mix. 
Dose, one to two teaspoonfuls. 



324 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

FEVER BUSH. 

BENZOIN ODORIFERUM. 

Common Names : Wild Allspice, Benjamin Bush, Spice Bush,. 
Spice Wood. 

Native of United States and Canada. The Bark. 

This shrub grows from five to eight feet high, and is found 
in damp woods and shady localities. It flowers in April, and 
bears bright crimson-colored berries, which ripen in autumn. 
The fruit is sometimes used in medicine. 

Properties. — Diaphoretic, diuretic, aromatic and anti-peri- 
odic. Used as a febrifuge in measles, chicken pox and small 
pox. Made in a decoction from the bark, and used with saf- 
ron. 



GOLDEN SEAL. 

HYDRASTIS CANADENSIS. 

Native of United States and Canada. The Root. 

This plant is found in rich, moist soils, in woods and in 
meadows. In May and June it bears a small white or rose- 
tinted blossom. 

Properties. — Laxative and a valuable tonic, and extensively 
used for congestion of mucous membranes. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, twenty to thirty drops. 

Hydrastin. Dose, one to five grains. 

Golden seal bitters. Fluid extract of G. S. and orange peel, 
aa f. 3ii. Prickly ash, |ss. Dilute alcohol, f. fxii. Water, 
f. pv. Sugar, two ounces. Mix. Dose, one-half to one wine- 
glassful. 



GOLD THREAD. 

COPTIS TRIFOLIA. 

Native of United States. The Root. 

This plant grows also in Greenland, Iceland and Siberia. It 
is found in dark, damp woods and moist meadows. The 
roots are of a bright golden color, and grow in long, slender 
fibres, like thread. The taste is intensely bitter. 

Properties. — A pure, bitter tonic, without astringency, re- 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 325 

sembling in its effects columbo and gentian. The infusion is 
in general use as a wash or gargle for ulceration of the mouth 
and fauces. 



GRAVEL PLANT. 

EPIGEA REPENS. 

Common Names : Trailing Arbutus, Winter Pink, Mountain 
Pink, Ground Laurel. 

Native of United States. The Leaves. 

A trailing plant, frequenting pine woods and growing around 
large rocks, where the soil is sandy, throughout the United 
States. It is one of the first plants to show its flowers in the 
spring, and they are much prized for their exquisite fragrance. 

Properties. — Diuretic and astringent. It has acquired rep- 
utation in gravel and all diseases of the urinary organs. It is 
considered by many superior to uva ursi or buchu in such dis- 
eases. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, half to one teaspoonful. 

INFUSION OF GRAVEL PLANT. 

Fluid extract, f. Ji. Hot water, one pint. Mix. Dose, one 
to two fluid ounces. 

COMPOUND INFUSION OF GRAVEL PLANT. 

Fluid extract gravel plant, f. |i. Fluid extract juniper ber- 
ries, f. §ii. Nitrate of potassa, 3i- Hot water, one pint. Mix. 
Dose, one to two fluid ounces, as a diuretic. In very painful 
cases, ten grains of hyoscyamus extract should be added. 



GUAIACUM. 

GUAIACUM OFFICINALIS. 

Native of the West Indies. The Wood and Resin. 

This tree grows from twenty to forty feet in height, and is 
distinguished for its hardness, which fits it for many mechani- 
cal purposes. It contains a large amount of resin, to which its 
medicinal qualities are due. 

Properties. — Stimulant, alterative and cathartic. Used for 
acute rheumatism, gout and uterine diseases. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose ten to twenty drops. Given in milk or 
syrup. 



326 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

HELLEBORE— WHITE. 

VERATRUM ALBUM. 

Native of Europe. The Root. 

A perennial herb, growing in the mountainous parts of Eu- 
rope. 

Properties. — In large doses a virulent poison. It is one of 
the best remedies for gout known. Its secret action lies in 
its ability to restore the lost action of the spinal nervous cen- 
tres. It is indicated after glandular obstructions are removed. 
It is indicated for the diseases dependent upon congestion of 
the brain, cerebellum, oblongata, cervical, cardiac, solar, re- 
nal, spermatic and sacral great nervous centres, including in- 
sanity, neuralgia, gout, rheumatism, inflamed eyes, nephritis, 
strangury, cystitis, nocturnal emissions, and pain in the sexual 
organs. 

PREPARATION. 

Tincture. — Veratrum, four ounces, in powder. Alcohol, 
one pint. Mix. Let saturate forty-eight hours, strain off and 
add enough more alcohol to the dregs to make one pint in 
both filterings. Used to medicate, Homoeopathic globules 
of the sugar of goat's milk, as follows : No. 1 Globules are 
recommended for this preparation. Fill a phial of these glob- 
ules, and then fill it with the tincture to cover the globules. 
Let them saturate one hour. Pour off the tincture and pour 
the globules onto a sheet of letter paper to dry, stirring them 
occasionally to prevent adhering. Dose, from five to twenty 
globules. 

For raving insanity, give twenty globnles every two hours 
until the patient is quiet. 

For gout, give five globules every quarter-hour until relieved 
of pain. 

For rheumatism, give five globules every quarter-hour until 
relieved of pain. 

For neuralgia, give five globules every quarter-hour until 
relieved of pain. 

For painful cerebellum, give five globules every hour until 
relieved of pain. 

For painful cerebrum, give five globules every hour until re- 
lieved of pain. 

For inflamed or over-sensitive eyes, give five globules every 
three-quarter hour until relieved.* 

*In inflamed eyes, painful to light, begin the treatment at eight, A. 
M., and continue it to four, A. M. ; then cease for four hours ; continue 
this daily until relief is given, which is in about three days. During this 
time keep the eyelids continually ointed with the white precipitate oint- 
ment. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 327 

For nephrites, give twelve globules once in twelve hours 
until relieved of pain. 

For strangury, give twenty globules once in five hours un- 
til relieved of pain. 

For cystitis, give ten globules once in eight hours until re- 
lieved of pain. 

For nocturnal emissions, give ten globules once in twelve 
hours until relieved of pain. 

For urethral pains, give five globules once in two hours un- 
til relieved of pain. 

Remembering to keep the liver gently open with one-half 
grain sugar-coated podophyllin pills, and the kidneys active 
with the diuretic under Gravel Plant, which see. 



HEMLOCK. 

ABIES CANADENSIS. 

Native of the United States. The Bark, Gum and Leaves. 

This is a beaatiful evergreen tree, sometimes attaining more 
than seventy feet in height. The bark is rich in tannin, and 
exudes a gum which is much used for strengthening plasters 
for external application to the spine. The leaves yield an es- 
sential oil which is used in liniments for congestion of the 
spine, and rheumatically enlarged joints. A decoction is 
made of the leaves, which is diaphoretic, and drank freely for 
colds. 



HENBANE. 

HYOSCYAMUS NIGER. 

Native of Europe. The Leaves. 

Henbane has become naturalized in the United States, and 
is cultivated for the market. It grows spontaneously about 
old buildings, beside fences, and in waste places. It blossoms 
from June to September. The whole plant is medicinal ; and 
the leaves are generally found in the market mixed with the 
capsules and seeds. 

Properties. — Powerful narcotic. In over-doses poisonous. 
In medicinal doses, anodyne and anti-spasmodic, allaying pain, 
and inducing sleep, and therefore rest. It acts like opium 
without producing constipation. 

Antidote. — Strong emetics, stimulants and vegetable acids. 



328 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, ten to twenty drops. 
Solid extract. Dose, one-half to two grains. 
Pills, sugar-coated, one grain each. 



HOPS. 

HUMULUS LUPULUS. 

This climbing plant is extensively cultivated in Europe and 
in the United States. Its cones or strobiles are the part used 
in medicine, but more extensively used in the manufacture of 
ale and beer, imparting a bitter and aromatic flavor to the fer- 
menting: liquid, and causing fermentation to cease at the proper 
time. Hops contains a peculiar resinous substance called 
flower of hops, which is known in medicine as Lupulin. It 
also contains a volatile oil to which its flavor is due. 

Properties. — Tonic, diuretic, sedative anodyne. Used as 
a febrifuge to relieve pain and induce sleep. 
preparations. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one-quarter to one teaspoonful. 

Solid extract. Dose, five to twenty grains. 

Alcoholic tincture. Dose, one-half to one teaspoonful di- 
luted. 

Decoction: Hops, a teacupful. Hot water, ^iv. Dose, 3ii 
every hour. 



HOREHOUND. 

MARRUBIUM VULGARE. 

Native of Europe. The Plant. 

Horehound is naturalized in this country. It grows in fields, 
waste grounds and by roadsides, flowering in July and August. 

Properties. — Bitter tonic and pectoral. Used mostly as a 
remedy for coughs and colds. 

preparations. 

Generally used in domestic practice in decoction. 

Fluid extract. Dose, half to one teaspoonful. 

Tincture. Fluid extract, f. |ii. Dilute alcohol, f. |xiv. Mix. 
Dose, four to six drachms. 

Infusion. Fluid extract, f. pi. Hot water, one pint. Mix. 
Dose, one tablespoonful. 

Syrup. Fluid extract, f. Jiv. Simple syrup, one pint. Dose, 
two to four teaspoonfuls. Used for colds and coughs. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 329 

HYDRANGEA. 

HYDRANGEA ARBORESCENS. 

Common Names : Seven Barks, Wild Hydrangea. 

Native of the United States. The Root. 

This is a beautiful shrub, found on hill-sides and near run- 
ning streams in the Southern and Middle States. Its flowers 
are considered a choice addition to bouquets. 

Properties. — Attention has been called to this plant as a 
remedy for stone in the bladder, especially when employed in 
the earlier stages of the disease. 

preparations. 

Fluid extract. Dose one to two teaspoonfuls. 

Tincture of H. Fluid extract, f. rii. Dilute alcohol, f. 5xiv. 
Mix. Dose, one to two drachms. 

Syrup of H. Fluid extract, f. fii. Simple syrup, f. gviii. 
Mix. Dose, two to four drachms. 



INDIAN HEMP— BLACK. 

APOCYNUM CANNABINUM. 

Common Name : Bitter Root. 

This plant resembles in its appearance and medicinal pro- 
perties the apocynum androsemifolium, another species of the 
same genus. They are both found growing upon light, sandy 
soil, on the borders of woods, from Maine to Florida. Both 
exude a milky juice, which becomes solid, like opium, when 
exposed to the sun and air. They both also yield a resinoid 
to which the name of apocynin has been given. It is of a 
dark color, a bitter, nauseous taste, with an odor similar to the 
root. 

Properties. — Emetic, cathartic, diaphoretic and diuretic. 
It is much used in dropsy, and also as a diaphoretic in inter- 
mittent fevers and pneumonic affections. 
preparations. 

The same as that of apocynum androsemifolium. (See Bit- 
ter Root.) 



IPECAC 

CEPH^ELIS IPECACUHANHA. 

Native of South America. The Root. 

Ipecac was first introduced into Europe in the year 1672, 



330 A.. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

being sold in Paris as a secret remedy for dysentery and other 
bowel complaints. Louis XIV. bestowed upon Dr. John Hel- 
vetius public honors and a large sum of money as a reward 
for making the remedy public. Ipecac is a plant growing in 
moist places, from one to three feet high. From December to 
February it bears small white flowers. 

Properties. — Emetic in large doses ; in small doses expec- 
torant and diaphoretic, and in minute doses tonic and stimu- 
lant, increasing the appetite and promoting digestion. It is 
peculiarly adapted to expel narcotic poisons from the stomach, 
and for all cases where an emetic is indicated, as it may be 
given in almost indefinite doses without injury to the patient. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract (as emetic). Dose, five drops to one tea- 
spoonful. 

Fluid extract (as expectorant). Dose, five to ten drops. 

Fluid extract ipecac and senna. Dose, four to forty drops. 

Tincture of ipecac. Fluid extract, f. §ii. Dilute alcohol, 
f. Jxiv. Mix. Dose as emetic, forty drops to one fluid ounce. 
Dilute with warm water. 

Wine of ipecac. Fluid extract, f. |i. Native or sherry wine, 
f. txiv. Alcohol, f. Ji. Mix. Dose as emetic, two teaspoon- 
fuls to one fluid ounce. Dose as expectorant, half to one tea- 
spoonful. 

Syrup of ipecac. Fluid extract, f. fi. Simple syrup, f. §xv. 
Mix. Dose, half to one teaspoonful. 



• • * 



JALAP. 

IPOM^EA JALAPA. 

Native of Mexico. The Root. 

Jalap grows in the vicinity of Xalapa, some six thousand feet 
above the ocean level. The roots are tubers varying from the 
size of a walnut to that of an orange. It is brought to market 
either whole or in slices. Perfect flowers were raised from this 
plant in 1827, by Dr. Cox, of Philadelphia, when its true char- 
acter was first known. 

Properties. — A drastic cathartic, operating quickly and 
sometimes painfully, producing copious watery discharges. Its' 
action is modified by combination with other cathartic reme- 
dies. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 33 1 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract jalap. Dose, half to one teaspoonful. 
Solid extract jalap. Used in combinations. 

TINCTURE OF JALAP AND SENNA. 

Fluid extract jalap, f. |i. Fluid extract senna, f. pii. Fluid 
extract cardamon compound, f. pi. Dilute alcohol, one pint. 
Powdered sugar, two ounces. Mix. Dose for an adult, half 
to one fluid ounce. 



JUNIPER BERRIES. 

JUNIPERUS COMMUNIS. 

Native of Europe. The Fruit. 

The common juniper is a shrub often growing to the height 
of twelve or fifteen feet, with numerous close branches. It 
flowers in May, but the berries, the part used medicinally, do 
not ripen until late in the following year. They have an aro- 
matic odor, a sweetish, terebinthinate taste, and owe their 
medicinal virtues to a volatile oil. The best are imported from 
the south of France and Italy. The juniper which grows in 
the United States is a different species (Juniperus Depussa), 
and the berries are inferior to the European. 

Properties. — Diuretic and gently stimulant. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one to two teaspoonfuls. 

ALCOHOLIC TINCTURE OF JUNIPER. 

Oil of juniper berries, f. p. Alcohol, one pint. Mix. Dose, 
one-half to one teaspoonful, and repeated three or four times 
per day, diluted in water, syrup or milk. 

COMPOUND SPIRITS OF JUNIPER. 

Fluid extract juniper, f. pi. Fluid extract lovage, f. p. Hol- 
land gin, one pint. Honey, pi. Mix. Successfully used for 
gravel, in doses of one fluid ounce three or four times daily. 



KOUSSO. 

BRAYERA ANTHELMINTICA. 

Common Names : Cossoo, Kosso. 
Native of Abyssi?iia. The Flowers. 
A tree growing about twenty feet high. The flowers which 



332 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

grow upon the tops of the trees have gained great reputation 
for the expulsion of the tape-worm. 

Properties. — Purgative and anthelmintic. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, two to four teaspoonfuls. 

Infusion of kousso. Fluid extract, f. fiv. Hot water, one 
pint. Mix. Dose, two to four tablespoonfuls. 

In taking kousso for the expulsion of tape-worm, the stom- 
ach and bowels should be first well cleansed by a gentle ca- 
thartic, and the medicine taken on an empty stomach in the 
morning. After its operation a mild cathartic is used. 



LICORICE. 

GLYCYRRHIZA GLABRA. 

Native of Southern Europe. The Root. 

This plant is cultivated in different parts of the European 
continent. A species of licorice is found growing abundantly 
on the banks of the Mississippi, but is inferior to the foreign. 

Properties. — Demulcent, emollient, well adapted to soothe 
irritations of the mucous membranes of the bowels and urinary 
passages. Generally used in combination with other medi- 
cines. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one to two teaspoonfuls. Used for 
quinine mixtures. Solid extract, used for combinations. 

INFUSION OF LICORICE. 

Fluid extract, f. ^ii. Hot water, one pint. Mix. Dose, one 
to two fluid ounces. A good demulcent for irritation of the 
bronchial passages. 



LOBELIA. 

LOBELIA INFLATA. 

Common Name : Wild or Indian Tobacco. 

Native of the United States. The Plant and Seeds. 

Grows in pastures and on roadsides, flowering from July to 
November. The upper part of the plant is often in bloom 
after the seed vessels of the lower part have ripened. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 333 

Properties. — Emetic, expectorant and diapnoretic. The 
author excludes the herb and only uses an alcoholic tincture 
made from the seeds. 

This is one of the most reliable and safe emetics that can 
be given, and by its alterative and anodyne properties it is 
precisely indicated in all cases of bilious intermittent and neu- 
ralgic fevers, and will leave the system in a better condition 
than if podophyllin were used to clear the liver, and opium 
used to allay the nervous irritability. By virtue of its stimu- 
lating effects upon the glandular system, it will arouse a slug- 
gish system into a higher state of activity, and expel from the 
circulation its impurities, very rapidly ; thereby it serves to 
prepare the circulating blood for more active nutrition. By 
virtue of this action and its expectorant properties, it enters 
as a prominent article into all our bronchial and consumptive 
remedies. It is also anti-siphilitic in the chronic stages of 
that disease. It is a specific in croup by giving the tincture 
3iii, diluted in water 3iiss. Dose, 3ss every half-hour until the 
phlegm is loose. At the same time the patient should take 
one grain of podophyllin, and apply a strong liniment on the 
back of the neck and trachea. 

TINCTURE OF LOBELIA SEED. 

Lobelia seed, two and one-half ounces. Pulverize them in 
an iron mortar. Alcohol, one pint. Let stand four days, filter 
and add as much more alcohol to the dregs as is lacking of the 
filtered tincture to make a pint. Dose as an emetic, 3i diluted 
in warm water f. §iv, and repeat every twenty minutes until it 
operates. 



SWEET FERN. 

COMPTONIA ASPLENIFOLIA. 

Native of United States. Tlie Leaves. 

Found in dry, sandy soils throughout the Northern States, 
bearing green flowers in May, the leaves appearing afterwards. 
Its peculiar aromatic fragrance renders it easily recognized. 

Properties. — Tonic, astringent and alterative. Recom- 
mended for putrid sore throat as a gargle, for rickets, and a 
drench for the black tongue in stock. Combined with extract 
of butternut bark, has proved a specific in that disease. Used 
in decoction in most cases. Fluid extract. Dose, one to two 
teaspoonfuls, diluted. 



334 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

SWEET FLAG. 

ACORUS CALAMUS. 

Native of United States, Europe and Asia. 7 he Root. 

Grows in damp places, as meadows and swamps, or by the 
sides of brooks and streams. Our native plant is considered 
the best. The roots are gathered in October and November, 
and dried by moderate heat. 

Properties. — A stimulant carminative. Used generally in 
combination with remedies of the same class. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one-half to one teaspoonful, diluted. 
Domestically used in decoction made from the root, for colic. 



TAG ALDER. 

ALNUS RUBRA. 

Common Names : Red Alder, Smooth Alder, Common Alder. 

Native of United States. The Bark. 

Found growing around the margin of swamps and meadows 
and upon the banks of rivers and brooks. It has numerous 
barren aments, from two to three inches long, attached to the 
small branches, like tags, which have given it the name of tag 
alder. Flowers in March and April. 

Properties. — Emetic, astringent and alterative. Useful in 
scrofula and secondary syphilis. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one to two teaspoonfuls. 

Infusion. Fluid extract, f. §i. Hot water, one pint. Mix. 
Dose, f. li to Jii. 



TANSY. 

tanacetum vulgare. 

Native of Europe. The Plant. 

Tansy has been introduced into this country, and is found 
growing by the road-sides and in old grounds. It is cultivated 
in some places for its essential oil, which is extracted by dis- 
tillation. Its golden-colored flowers appear in August. The 
whole plant has a strong odor and a bitter taste. 

Properties. — Diuretic, tonic, emmenagogue, and diapho- 
retic. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 335 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, twenty drops to one teaspoonful. 

Decoction. The herb, a handful ; hot water, one-half pint. 
Let come to boiling. Dose, one ounce, and repeat every hour. 

Used for tardy menstruation, also for weak loins of male or 
female. 

Compound tincture of tansy. Fluid extract tansy, two fluid 
ounces. 

Fluid extract asclepias incarnata, f. |i. 

Fluid extract unicorn root, f. 3SS. 

Fluid extract prickly ash bark f. ^ss. Diluted alcohol two 
pints. Mix. Used as a tonic and a vermifuge. Dose, one 
teaspoonful three or four times per day. 



THIMBLE WEED. 

RUDBECKIA LACINIATA. 

Common Names : Cone-Disk, Sun-Flower, Tall Cone-Flower. 

Native of United States. The Leaves. 

This plant grows in damp places, as low thickets, or by the 
side of ditches. 

Properties. — A valuable tonic and diuretic. Highly rec- 
ommended in urinary diseases, especially Bright's disease. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one to two teaspoonfuls. 



THOROUGHWORT. 

EUPATORIUM PERFOLIATUM. 

Common Names : Bone-set, Joe-pie. 

Native of United States. The Flower-tops and Leaves. 

Grows abundantly in low grounds throughout this country. 
Bears white umbel flowers that appear in August and Septem- 
ber. 

Properties. — Tonic, diaphoretic, and in large doses emetic 
and laxative. A favorite remedy for colds, accompanied with 
febrile symptoms. A pint bowl filled with the flowers and filled 
to cover with cold water over night, to drink off during the 



336 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

next day, and repeated daily, excluding all other drinks, has 
relieved many cases of dyspepsia that were troubled with ir- 
ritable lungs and in the first stage of consumptive decline 
which have come under the author's observation. It proved a 
success in his own case in early life, after his physician des- 
paired of his recovery ; he then, at the suggestion of an aged 
physician, suspended all other treatment, and followed this 
course for six months, at which time his health was fully re- 
covered, and has enjoyed fifty years of good health since. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Syrup of thoroughwort. Fluid extract of thoroughwort, §iv. 
Fluid extract cubebs, f.|i. Simple syrup, f. §vi. Mix. Dose, 
one to two teaspoonfuls repeated every one or two hours. For 
coughs or colds. Boneset Candy. Fluid extract boneset f, |ii. 
Molasses one pint. Mix, and boil to a candy. Horehound 
can be made in the same way. One and one-half pounds of 
refined sugar may be substituted for the molasses. Boil until 
one drop solidifies when cooled upon a plate. Then pour the 
candy into shallow dishes dusted with powdered sugar. 



UNICORN ROOT. 

ALETRIS FARINOSA. 

Common Names: Blazing Star, Star Grass. 

Native of United States. The Root. 

Unicorn is found from Canada to Louisiana growing in 
sunny glades on hill-sides bearing a cockade of white flowers 
about two feet high in June and July. 

Properties. — Tonic, diuretic and vermifuge. Used exten- 
sively in diseases of the uterine organs. It is one of the best 
remedies for chronic, spinal and rheumatic diseases that has 
been brought into use. It combines with road nettle, and 
makes one of the best specifics known for chronic spinal de- 
rangements, and fulfills every kind of a nervous tonic, and in- 
dicated in all chronic diseases of the lungs. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one-half to one teaspoonful. 

Syrup of unicorn root. Fluid extract, f. §ii. Simple syrup, 
f. Jxiv. Mix. Dose, one-half to one fluid ounce. 

Compound syrup of unicorn and road nettle. Fluid extract 
of unicorn, f. §ii. Fluid extract of road nettle, f. §ii. Simple 
syrup, f. ?iv. Mix. Dose, one teaspoonful every two to three 
hours, and even increased to double that quantity of dose if 
needed to support the system. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 337 

UVA URSI. 

ARCTOSTAPHYLOS UVA URSI. 

Common Names: Mountain Cranberry, Bearberry, Mount- 
ain Box. 

Native of Northern parts of Europe and America* The Leaves. 

A creeping shrubby evergreen, found growing in thick beds, 
upon dry, sandy ridges, flowering from June to September, 
and bearing dry, green berries, which ripen during the winter 
and become red. The leaves contain tonic and gallic acids, 
resin, and extractive, also a peculiar principle called ursin. 

Properties. — Astringent, tonic and diuretic. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, thirty to sixty drops. 

Solid extract. Dose, five to fifteen grains. 

Compound syrup of urva ursi. Fluid extracts of uva ursi, 
buchu, cubebs, gravel plant and lovage, aa f. |i. Dilute alco- 
hol, f. 3viii. Mix. Dose, two to four teaspoonfuls, repeated 
every four hours, for strangury or gravel. 



WAHOO. 

EUONYMUS ATRO-PURPUREUS. 

Common Names: Indian Arrow Wood, Spindle Tree, Burn- 
ing Bush. 

Native of United States. The Bark of the Root. 

Found growing upon the banks of overflowing streams in 
clusters from eight to twelve feet high, and bearing a four 
segmented purple berry that remains on the bush over winter. 

Properties. — In moderate doses it is tonic, alterative, laxa- 
tive and diuretic. In larger doses it is cathartic and emmen- 
agogue. By virtue of its containing three properties that fill 
three indications generally present in congestive diseases, it is 
superior to any one article we know of for bilious diseases. 
It is also indicated for asthma, bronchitis, cardiac and renal 
congestion. Generally enters into combination with other 
medicines. It is contra indicated in cases of female weakness 
and last stage of pregnancy. 

preparations. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one to two teaspoonfuls. 

Syrup of wahoo. Fluid extract, f. 5iv. Simple sprup, f. ^xii. 
Mix. Dose, one-half to one fluid ounce. Compound syrup 



338 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

of wahoo. Fluid extract wahoo, f. fii. Flui extract hops, 
|ii. Fluid extract ladies' slipper, f. ?ii. Salicin, 3i, and nitrate 
of potassa 3i. Dissolve the two last in warm water, 3H. 
Tincture of wintergreen, 3ii. Simple syrup f. |v. Mix. Dose, 
3ii four times per day. Indicated in cases of habitual consti- 
pation, very common with persons leading a sedentary life. 
In heart diseases, in systemic decline bordering on consump- 
tion, rheumatism, renal obstructions, Bright's disease, and all 
cases of defective nutrition by reason of impure blood. 



WATER ERINGO. 

ERYNGIUM AQUATICUM. 

Common Names : Button Snake Root, Button Snake Weed. 

Native of the United States. The Root. 

Frequents swamps and moist lands or springy places. It is 
a perennial herb, with many white fibrous roots, and warming 
to the mouth. Stalks three to four feet high bearing blue but- 
ton flowers that appear in September. 

Properties. — Stimulant and diuretic. It has gained a rep- 
utation as a spinal tonic in rheumatic cases. 

It is generally used in decoction. Eryngium root, two ounces 
steeped in one pint of boiling water. Dose, one ounce every 
hour until the patient begins to feel a little light-headed ; then 
make the time between doses two hours. Used in cases of 
chronic painful rheumatism. 



LOVAGE. 

LIGUSTICUM LEVISTICUM. 

Native of Europe. The Plant. 

This plant has been introduced into the United States, be- 
ing cultivated in gardens. It has a strong aromatic odor and 
a pleasant pungent taste, similar to angelica. 

Properties. — Aromatic, carminative and diaphoretic. Often 
used in combination with other drugs as a corrective, and for 
its flavor. 

preparations. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one to two teaspoonfuls. 
Domestically used in decoction. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 339 

MADDER. 

RUBIA TINCTORUM. 

Common Name: Dyer's Madder. 

Native of Southern Europe and the Levant. The Root. 

An herbaceous plant bearing small yellow flowers. It has a 
long cylindrical root, which is gathered in the third year of its 
growth, freed from its thin epidermis, and dried for the market. 

Properties. — Emmenagogue and diuretic, and mildly tonic. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, fifteen to thirty drops. 



MALE FERN. 

ASPIDIUM FILIX M S. 

Common Name : High Brake. 

The roots are from eight to twelve inches in length, and 
from one to two inches in diameter, twisted and tuberculous. 
The leaves start from the rhizomn, and grow from three to four 
feet high. 

Properties. — Anthelmintic. Has acquired a reputation for 
expelling the tape-worm. 

preparations. 

Fluid extract. Dose, half to one teaspoonful. 

Infusion of male fern. Fluid extract, f. -~\. Hot water, one 
pint. Mix. Dose, one to two ounces for tape-worm, and re- 
peat as advised. 



MARSH ROSEMARY. 



STATICE CAROLINIANA. 

Common Name : Sea Lavender. 

Native of United States. The Root. 

Marsh rosemary is common in the salt marshes on the At- 
lantic shores of the United States, bearing flowers from August 
to October. The root is fusiform, large, fleshy, brownish-red, 
with a very astringent taste. 

Properties. — Astringent. Has long been used as a domes- 
tic remedy for diarrhoea and dysentery; also as a gargle for 



34° A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

sore mouth and throat, and as an injection for diseases of the 
mucous membranes. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, half to one teaspoonful. 

Infusion. Fluid extract, f. |i. Hot water, f. Jxii. Mix. Dose, 
half to f. §ii. 

Gargle. Fluid extract, f. §ii. Water, f. fiv. Mix. For sore 
mouth. 

Decoction. Pulverized root, one ounce. Boil fifteen min- 
utes, strain off, and boil down to one ounce. Used with a 
swab to canker sores in the mouth and throat in cases of diph- 
theria and putrid throat. In these cases, if it is faithfully ap- 
plied, will relieve the canker directly without inducing smart- 
ing or pain. 



MANDRAKE. 

PODOPHYLLUM PELTATUM. 

Common Names : May Apple, Wild Mandrake. 

Native of United States. The Root. 

Grows abundantly in woods where the soil is rich. It sends 
up one round, smooth stem, which divides into two branches, 
each of which supports a large leaf. Each plant has one soli- 
tary white flower on a nodding peduncle inserted in the fork 
of the two branches, which produces the apple or fruit of the 
color and shape of a lemon, about two inches long. The rhi- 
zoma or root is about half the size of the finger, jointed, giving, 
off numerous fibers at the joints, black externally, yellowish- 
white internally, with an odor resembling ipecac. 

Properties. — The fresh root is an irritant poison when 
taken in over-doses, producing griping and bloody discharges. 
Administered in suitable doses, it is a sure and valuable cathar- 
tic, hydragogue, alterant, and in some cases sialagogue. Its 
medical properties are due principally to the resinoid contained 
in the root, to which the name of podophyllin has been given,, 
which when properly prepared is a light powder of a bright 
lemon color. 

This remedy is a specific for removing liver obstructions 
and to induce the secretion of healthy bile. It also increases 
the action of all the glands and absorbents in the system. It 
operates thus as a specific for every order of congestion and 
grade of fever. The administration of a dose of podophyllin 
should always be preceded by the use of a solution of nitrate 
of potassa, fifteen to twenty grains, in four ounces cold water. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 341 

Dose, 3iv every half-hour until it is all taken. After two doses 
of the solution have been taken, the podophyllin may be ad- 
ministered. This precaution should be used before adminis- 
tering any of the biliary cathartics, and is designed to first open 
the kidneys and stimulate them to depurate from the circula- 
tion the impurities that are inducing a suspension of nutrition 
and consequent fever. Unless this object is first effected, the 
danger lies in inducing inflammation of the membranes of the 
intestinal canal by the acridity of these impurities, when the 
liver is stimulated to do this depurative work and send its 
secreted impurities through the alimentary canal, to induce a 
typhoid diarrhcea. By this misjudgment in the treatment of 
fevers, a simple bilious fever may be augmented into the 
typhoid type. But by first proceeding to depurate these im- 
purities by the renal passages, the liver is enabled to secrete 
and send forward pure bile to render the blood sufficiently im- 
proved to restore active nutrition, and with it a suspension of 
febrile action. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Podophyllin. Dose as a cathartic, one-half to three grains. 

Podophyllin. Dose as an alterative, one-eighth to one-half 
grain. 

Sugar-coated pills of podophyllin. One-fourth, one-half 
and one grain each. 

Syiup of podophyllin. Podophyllin, ten grains. Alcohol, 
Jii. Fluid extract of ginger, f. rss. Simple syrup, f. |xii. Dis- 
solve the podophyllin in the alcohol, add the ginger, then the 
syrup, and mix well together. Dose, one to two teaspoonfuls. 
Used as a laxative. 



MOTHERWORT. 

LEONURUS CARDIACA. 

A foreign plant, naturalized in the United States. The Plant. 

It is found growing about old buildings and fences, bearing 
flowers from June to September. It has a peculiar minty odor, 
and a bitter, somewhat aromatic taste. 

Properties. — Nervine, anti-spasmodic and emmenagogue. 
It is universally in domestic use, as it can be relied upon to fill 
these indications. The herb is steeped and used ad libitum 
until the patient is relieved, there being no danger of an over- 
dose. 



342 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

MARJORAM. 

ORIGANUM VULGARE. 

Native of Europe and America. The Herb. 

A perennial plant found growing from a half to one foot high 
in limestone regions. The flowers are of a purple-white color, 
and the plant yields by distillation the volatile oil known as 
the oil of origanum, on which its virtues depend. 

Properties. — Stimulant, diaphoretic and emmenagogue. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one-half to one teaspoonful. 

Infusion of marjoram. Fluid extract, Si. Hot water, one 
pint. Dose, one to two fluid ounces as a diaphoretic. 

The oil is usually used in combination with other stimulants, 
as a liniment. 



ROAD NETTLE. 

URTICA DIOICA. 

Common Name : Stinging Nettle. 

The Root and Leaves. 

It grows by road-sides, waste places, in gardens and woods. 
Most people have felt its prickly sting. It has a fine aromatic 
flavor. 

Properties. — It is a good spinal tonic, and indicated in 
consumption and all chronic diseases of the spine. It is a 
remedy for diabetes by its healthy action upon the spinal and 
renal nervous centers. Indicated for tracheitis, bronchitis and 
asthma. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one-half to one tablespoonful. Used 
mostly in combination with other remedies. 



OPIUM AQUEOUS. 

A preparation of opium which produces less cerebral dis- 
tress and excitement than the alcoholic preparations, with less 
tendency to produce constipation. Strength the same as that 
of laudanum. 

Antidote for over-dose : First procure the speedy evacua- 
tion of the stomach by the use of an active emetic. If the 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 343 

poison has been taken in the liquid form, use the stomach 
pump. After the evacuation of the poison, give strong coffee. 
Stimulants of ammonia in proper doses have been recom- 
mended. Above all, keep the patient in constant exercise by 
every means possible until the sleepy effects of the drug have 
passed away. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Aqueous fluid extract. Dose, ten to forty drops. 

Deodorized tincture. Dose, ten to forty drops. 

Wine of aqueous opium. Fluid extract, f. |ii. Sherry or 
native wine, f. §xiii. Alcohol, f. §i. Mix. Dose, one to four 
teaspoonfuls. 



ORANGE PEEL. 

CITRUS AURANTIUM. 

Grows in tropical climes. The Rind of the Fruit. 
Properties. — Aromatic, tonic. Usually combined with tonic 
bitters, imparting an agreeable flavor. 
preparations. 
Fluid extract. Dose, one to two teaspoonfuls. 



PENNYROYAL. 

HEDEOMA PULEGIOIDES. 

Native of United States. The Plant. 

Found growing in old fields and dry pastures, from six to 
twelve inches high, bearing very small flowers of a light blue 
color, which perfume the air for some distance. The odor of 
pennyroyal is said to be particularly disagreeable to insects. 

Properties. — Stimulant, diaphoretic and emmenagogue. It 
yields by distillation an essential oil of a light yellow color. 
This oil is usually prepared in an alcoholic tincture of one 
ounce of the oil to one pint of alcohol. Dose, one drachm of 
the tincture diluted in four ounces of hot water. 



PEPPERMINT. 

MENTHA PIPERITA. 

Native of Europe and United States. 7 he Herb. 

This herb is too well known to need any description. The 



344 A - H - DAVIS' THEORY AND 

essence made from its essential oil has been more generally 
used than any other as a domestic carminative. 

Properties. — Diffusible stimulant and anti-spasmodic. Used 
in flatulent colic and to check nausea and vomiting. The in- 
halation of the gas arising from the warm oil is one of the best 
that can be used for bronchial inflammation and corizal blen- 
norrhea arising from a severe cold. A hot infusion is a pop- 
ular domestic remedy for a severe cold, taken the last thing 
before going to bed. 

Prepared and used the same as pennyroyal. 



PIPSISSEWA. 

CHIMAPHILA UMBELLATA. 

Common Names : Rheumatism Weed, Prince's Pine. 

Native of Northern latitudes. The Plant. 

This is an evergreen plant, with a perennial creeping root. 
The leaves are wedge-shaped, of a dark, shining, green color. 
The flowers are white, tinged with red, and exhale a pleasant 
odor. 

Properties. — Tonic, diuretic and astringent. Highly rec- 
ommended in dropsy attended with disordered state of the di- 
gestive organs. It is domestically used in decoction, a hand- 
ful of the plant for a day. 

preparations. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one-half to one teaspoonful. 



PLEURISY ROOT. 



ASCLEPIAS TUBEROSA. 

Common Names : Butterfly Plant, White Root. 

Native of United States. The Root. 

Found in gravelly soil, more commonly in the Southern 
States and on the western prairies. This species of asclepias 
has a long, fleshy, white, tuberous root, and can be recognized 
in the months of July and August by its clusters of beautiful 
orange-colored flowers. 

Properties. — Diuretic, diaphoretic and anti-spasmodic, re- 
lieving pleuritic congestion by the speedy aid it furnishes nu- 
trition. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 345 

PREPARATIONS. 

A decoction is made from one to two ounces of the dried 
root to one-half to one pint of the decoction, and drank as 
warm as the patient can bear, and repeat the use of it until 
the patient is relieved. Dose, two ounces every hour. No 
harm can come of over-dosing, consequently it can be taken 
at liberty until the patient is relieved. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one-half to two teaspoonfuls. 

Asclepidin. Dose, one to five grains. 

Infusion of pleurisy root. Fluid extract, f. p. Hot water, 
one pint. Mix. Dose, one to four fluid ounces. 



POKE ROOT. 

PHYTOLACCA DECANDRA. 

Common Names : Garget, Pigeon Berry, Scoke. 

Native of United States. The Root. > 

This plant grows from four to eight feet high, flowering in 
July and August and bearing late in autumn clusters of dark, 
purple berries. 

Properties.— Emetic, cathartic, alterative, and somewhat 
narcotic. It is a specific for tumid lymphatic and mammary 
glands. It has acquired a reputation as a remedy in rheuma- 
tism, scrofula and chronic syphilis. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, ten to thirty drops. 

Solid extract. Dose, two to four grains. 

Syrup of Poke Root. Fluid extract, f. Jii. Simple syrup, 
f. ?xiv. Mix. Dose, one to two teaspoonfuls three times daily. 

Poultice. Fluid extract, f. §ii. Hot water, f. ?ii. Mix. Add 
slippery elm, flax seed or rye meal sufficient to make a poul- 
tice. Used for caked breasts and lymphatic swellings. 



POME-GRANATE. 



PUNICA GRANATUM. 

Native of Asia. TJie Rind of the Fruit. 

This is a small tree growing in warm climates. It bears dark 



34^ A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

scarlet blossoms, in July and August, and yields an agreeable, 
slightly acid fruit. 

Properties. — Astringent and anthelmintic. Used for tape- 
worm. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, fifteen to thirty drops. 



POPLAR BARK. 

POPULUS TREMULOIDES. 

Common Names : White Poplar, A Tier can P p'-r, Aspen. 

Native of Lower Canada and Northern United States. The 
Bark. 

This tree grows from twenty to fifty feet high, with a diame- 
ter from eight to twelve inches. The leaves are agitated by 
the slightest breeze. The bark contains the two alkaloides, 
populin and salicin, on which its medicinal properties depend. 

Properties. — Tonic and febrifuge. Used in intermittents. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one-half to one teaspoonful. 
Inf sion. Fluid extract, f. f i. II ot water, one pint. Mix. 
Dose, one-half to two fluid ounces. 



PRICKLEY ASH. 

XANTHOXYLUM FRAXINEUM. 

Native of North America. The Bark and Berries. 

Common Names : Suter I erry, Toothache-tree, Yellow- 
wood. 

This shrub grows from eight to twelve feet high, in woods 
and on the banks of rivers, flowering in April and May, before 
the leaves appear. The leaves and fruit yield a pungent oil, 
the odor resembling that of lemon. The bark yields the oleo- 
resinous principle called xanthoxyllin. 

Properties. — Diuretic, stimulant, tonic and alterative. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, ten to thirty drops diluted. 
Xanthoxyllin. Dose, two to six grains. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 347 

PULSATILLA. 

ANEMONE-PULSATILLA ANEMONE-NEMOROSA. 

Common in Europe and the United States. The Plant. 

These species of anemone are analogous in properties, al- 
though anemone-pulsatilla is considered the mo e active. 
They bear slightly purplish flowers, in April and May. 

Properties. — In over-doses, poisonous but in homoeo- 
pathic doses it is used for hvsteria, painful menstruation and 
sterility, homoeopathic globules No. 2, (20). Dose, ten, three 
times per day. 



QUASSIA. 
picr^na excelsa, quassia amara. 

Native of the West India Islands, and Tropical America. 
The Wood. 

A tree which is often found growing in the Island of Jamai- 
ca, to the height of one hundred feet. 

Properties. — A purely bitter tonic, which invigorates the 
system without increasing the action of the heart. It is par- 
ticularly adapted to that debilitated state of the digestive or- 
g ns, which sometimes succeeds acute diseases. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one-half to one teaspoonful. 

Solid extract. Dose, two to five grains. 

The solid extract concentrates a greater amount of tonic 
power within a given weight than any other known extract of 
the simple bitters. It is also used in decoction. 



RED RASPBERRY. 



RUBUS STRIGOSUS. 

Native of the United States. The Leaves. 

The red raspberry grows wild in the Northern States and 
Canada. It is found growing by the road-side fences and bor- 
ders of fields. Several varieties have been produced by culti- 
vation, but the leaves of the wild raspberry are preferred for 
medicinal use. 



34$ A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

Properties. — Astringent and paturient. Used in diarrhoea, 
dysentery, cholera infantum and bowel complaints, also as a 
gargle for sore throat. Its pleasant flavor renders it a favorite 
remedy for small children. It is domestically used in a de- 
coction of the leaves. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, thirty to sixty drops diluted. 

Wash, for sore mouth or throat. Fluid extract, f. f i. Water, 
f. |ii. Honey, f. f i. Borax, 3ii. Dissolve the borax in the water 
and mix. 



RHUBARB. 

RHEUM. 

Native of Asia. The Root. 

Rhubarb is known in commerce as of two kinds, viz : India 
rhubarb and Turkey rhubarb, the latter commanding a much 
higher price than the former, and considered of much superior 
quality. 

Properties. — Cathartic, tonic, astringent and mildly diuret- 
ic. Its astringency is exerted after its cathartic effect is pro- 
duced, thus making it a very valuable remedy in bowel com- 
plaints. Its tonic power also makes it a valuable remedy for 
habitual constipation and dyspepsia. 

preparations. 

Fluid extract India rhubarb. Dose, one-half to two tea- 
spoonfuls. 

Solid extract India rhubarb. Dose, two to ten grains. 

Powder. Dose, one-fourth to one teaspoonful. 

Tincture of rhubarb compound. Fluid extract rhubarb, 
f. |i. Fluid extract licorice, f. |ii. Fluid extract ginger, 3iss. 
Fluid extract saffron, 3iss. Dilute alcohol, f. §xii. Mix. Dose, 
one-half to one fluid ounce. 



RUE. 

ruta graveolens. - 

Native of Southern Europe. The Leaves. 

Rue is an evergreen, shrubby plant, which has been for a 
long time cultivated in our gardens as a medicinal herb. It 
flowers in July and August. It should be gathered when the 
seed vessels are well developed, but before they are ripe. The 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 349 

whole plant has an unpleasant smell and an exceedingly bitter 
and acrid taste, due to the volatile oil which is the active 
medicinal part of the plant. 

Properties. — A powerful emmenagogue in large doses. In 
suitable doses used in amenorrhcea and as a vermifuge. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, ien to thirty drops. 

Tincture. Fluid extract, f. pi. Dilute alcohol, f. |xiv. Mix. 
Dose, 3iii. 

Compound mixture of rue. Fluid extract rue, f. fi. Fluid 
extract squill, 3SS. Alcoholic tincture of tolu, 3iv. Simple 
syrup, f. riiiss. Mix. Dose, one to two teaspoonfuls, morn- 
ing, noon and night. Used in amenorrhcea and for a vermi- 
fuge. It also improves the appetite. 

Rue plaster. Take finely pulverized rue and mix it with any 
soft ointment. Spread a plaster three inches in diameter, and 
apply it to the pit of the stomach of a child troubled with 
worms, and let it remain until the worms pass, which will gen- 
erally take three or four days. It will improve digestion if the 
^ase does not prove to be that of worms. 



SAFFRON. 

CROCUS SATIVUS. 



Native of Asia Minor. Cultivated in Europe and America, 
The Flowers. 

Saffron is cultivated in our gardens, and flowers in autumn. 
The flowers are gathered in the morning, just before they open, 
and are carefully dried. They have an aromatic odor, and 
color the saliva deep yellow when chewed, leaving a pleasant, 
aromatic, bitter taste in the mouth. 

Properties. — Diaphoretic. Long used for the red gum of 
infants, and to keep up a continued diaphoresis in cases of 
measles and small pox. It is most commonly used in decoc- 
tion. P> Saffron flowers 3ss. Boiling water, three-fourths of a 
teacupful. Dose for an infant, 3ss every hour. 

SHOP PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, ten to thirty drops. 

Syrup of saffron. Fluid extract, f. ?ii. Simple syrup, f. fxiv. 
Dose, one to two teaspoonfuls. A popular remedy in the first 
teething in children. Given in larger doses to adults. 



35° A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

SAGE. 

SALVIA OFFICINALIS. 

Native of Southern Europe. The Leaves. 

Sage is a perennial plant cultivated in our gardens. The 
flowers are blue, and appear in June and July, when the tops 
should be cut from the stems and carefully dried for use. 

Properties.— Diuretic, diaphoretic, and a diffusible stimu- 
lant. Much used in the form of "hot sage tea" to induce 
perspiration. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one to two teaspoonfuls, diluted. 
Infusion of sage. Fluid extract, f. ?i. Hot water, one pint. 
Mix. Dose, one to four fluid ounces, repeated as required. 



SARSAPARILLA. 

SMILAX OFFICINALIS. 



Native of South America. The Root. 

Properties. — Sarsaparilla is considered by many authors a 
valuable alterative. Used in eruptive and scrofulous diseases. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one-half to one teaspoonful. 

Solid extract. Dose, five to fifteen grains. 

Fluid extract of sarsaparilla and dandelion. Dose, one-half 
to one teaspoonful. 

Its greatest virtue consists in its power as an alterative in 
cases of secondary syphilis, and as an antidote for over-admin- 
istration of mercury. 



SARS A PARILLA— -AMERICAN. 

ARALIA NUDICAULIS. 

Used for the same purposes as the foreign, smilax officinalis. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 35 1 

SASSAFRAS BARK. 

LAURUS SASSAFRAS. 

Native of North America. The Bark of the Root. 

A tree growing from ten to thirty feet high in woods, flower- 
ing in May and June. The flowers, leaves and twigs are fra- 
grant, and impart a peculiar aromatic, agreeable taste. The 
bark of the root contains the larger proportion of the essential 
oil, on which the medicinal properties chiefly depend. 

Properties. — Aromatic, stimulant and diaphoretic. Used 
generally in combination with other medicines. The oil is a 
very active stimulant, and enters into combination with many 
of the liniments. 

Fluid extract. Dose, fifteen to thirty drops, diluted. 



SKULL-CAP. 

SCUTELLARIA LATERIFLORA. 



Common Names : Blue Skull-cap, Side Flowering Skull-cap, 
Mad Weed, Hoodwort. 

Native of United States. The Plant. 

Grows by the side of ditches, ponds and in damp places, 
bearing small blue flowers in July and August. 

Properties. — Nervine and anti-spasmodic. Often used in 
combination with valerian and hops. 
preparations. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one-half to one teaspoonful. 

Fluid extract compound. Dose, one-half to one teaspoonful. 

Infusion of skull-cap. Fluid extract, f. |i. Hot water, one 
pint. Mix. Dose, one wineglassful two or three times per day. 



SEA-WRACK. 

FUCUS VESICULOSUS. 



Common Names : Bladder Weed, Rock Weed, Twin Bladder, 
Shore Weed. 
Native of the Eastern Coast of North America. The Plant. 
This sea-weed grows upon the shore, clinging to rocks, from 



352 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

Canada to the Gulf of Mexico. It contains, iodine, and when 
burned yields kelp. 

Properties. — Sea-wrack has lately attained a reputation for 
reducing obesity \ also used for dyspepsia and as an alterative 
tonic. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one to two teaspoonfuls. 
Syrup of sea-wrack. Fluid extract, f. fii. Simple syrup, 
one pint. Dose, two to four tablespoonfuls. 



SENEKA. 

POLYGALA SENEGA. 

Common Name : Senaca Snake-Root. 
Native of United States. The Root. 

Found in various parts of the United States, but more abun- 
dant in the Southern and Western portion. It flowers in 
July. The root is crooked, wrinkled and marked with trans- 
verse figures. Its taste is like checkerberry, while it pricks 
the tonsillary glands like lobelia. 

Properties. — In large doses, emetic ; in small doses, expec- 
torant, diuretic and diaphoretic. Much used in diseases of the 
bronchial passages, pneumonia, humoral asthma and incipient 
croup. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, ten to twenty drops. 

Infusion. Fluid extract, |i. Hot water, one pint. Mix. Dose, 
one-half to f.§i. 

Syrup of Seneka. Fluid extract, Jiv. Simple syrup, |xii. 
Mix. Dose, one-half to one drachm. 

Expectorant mixture. Fluid extract of seneka, f. 5iv. Fluid 
extract of ipecac, 3ss. Paregoric, 3iii. Syrup of balsam, tolu, 
f. ~iv. Mix. Dose for an adult, 3i ; for children, ten to twenty 
drops repeated as- required. 



SENNA. 

CASSIA ACUTIFOLIO. 

Native of Southern Asia. The Leaves. 

Several species of the plant called cassia, are known by the 
name of senna, as cassia acutifoli *, cassia obovata, cassia 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 353 

elongata, and cassia lanceolata — all distinguished by the shape 
of their leaves. In commerce they are distinguished by the 
name of the port or country from which they are exported, as, 
Alexandria or Egyptian, Tripoli or Fezzan, Mecca or Arabian, 
and Bombay or India. The senna from Alexandria is consid- 
ered the best, with the exception of a new species lately in- 
troduced from Madras, called "Tinnevelly," from the name of 
the province in Hindostan, where it was first raised from seed 
procured near the Red Sea. Senna was first introduced as a 
medicine by the Arabians, as early as the ninth century. 

Properties. — A prompt, efficient and safe cathartic. It acts 
principally upon the small intestines. It is apt to cause grip- 
ing pains, which are modified by combining with it some cor- 
rective, as dandelion, hops, valerian, or hyoscyamus, or by 
combining it with a diffusible stimulant, as peppermint. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one to fourteaspoonfuls. 

Fluid extract of senna and dandelion. Dose, one to three 
teaspoonfuls. 

Fluid extract of senna and jalap. Dose, one to two tea- 
spoonfuls. 



SKUNK CABBAGE. 

SIMARUBRA OFFICINALIS. 

» 

Common Name : Meadow Cabbage. 

Native of United States. The Root. 

Properties. — Stimulant, anti-spasmodic and expectorant. 
It occasions nausea and vomiting, in large doses ; but in suita- 
ble doses it has been successfully used in whooping cough, 
asthma, hysteria and chronic rheumatism. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, ten to sixty drops. 
Syrup. Fluid extract, f. |ii. Simple syrup, f. |viii. Mix. 
Dose, 3ii to 3iii. 



SNAKE ROOT. 



ARISTOLOCHIA SERPENTARIA. 

Common Name : Virginia Snake Root. 
Native of the United States. The Root. 

A perennial plant, growing abundantly near the Alleghany 
mountains, bearing brownish-purple flowers in May or June. 



354 A - H - DAVIS' THEORY AND 

The root has a strong, aromatic smell, and a warm, some- 
what bitter, camphorous taste. 

Properties. — Stimulant, tonic and diaphoretic. Useful in 
typhoid fevers, and when combined with cinchona bark, has 
proved serviceable in intermittents. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, fifteen to thirty drops. 

Tincture. Fluid extract, f. §ii. Dilute Alcohol, f. Jxiv. 
Mix. Dose, one to two teaspoonfuls. 

Infusion. Fluid extract, f. |i. Hot water, one pint. Mix. 
Dose, one-half to one fluid ounce. 

Compound tincture of snake root. Sudorific mixture. Fluid 
extract snake root, f. fi. Fluid extract ipecac, f. fi. Fluid 
extract saffron, f. Ji. Aqueous extract opium, f. ?i. Tincture 
of camphor, f. §ii. Dilute alcohol, three pints. Mix. 

A powerful sudorific. Useful in cases where a copious pers- 
piration is required, or when it is desirable to allay nervous 
excitability, lessen pain and produce sleep. Dose, one tea- 
spoonful given in warm herb tea every hour until perspiration 
is produced. In other cases the dose may be from ten to 
sixty drops, according to the age and condition of the patient. 



SPEARMINT. 

MENTHA VIRIDIS. 

Native of Europe. Naturalized in the United States. The Herb. 

Cultivated in many places for the oil which it yields by dis- 
tillation. It also grows spontaneously in pastures, and by the 
side of small mountain streams. Its pale purple flowers ap- 
pear in July and August. 

Properties. — Stimulant, anti-spasmodic and carminative. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one to three teaspoonfuls. 
Infusion of spearmint. Fluid extract f. ^ii. Hot water, 
one pint. Mix. Dose, two to four fluid ounces, as a febrifuge. 



SPIKENARD. 

ARALIA RACEMOSA. 

Native of the United States. The Root. 

Grows in rich woodlands. It has a small, branching stem, 
three to four feet high. The root is large, fleshy, branching, 
with a strong aromatic odor. The flowers appear in July. 

Properties. — Aromatic and alterative. Used in pulmonary 
diseases. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 355 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one to teaspoonfuls. 

Compound syrup of spikenard. Fluid extract spikenard, 
yellow dock, burdock, aa f. 3V. Fluid extract sassafras, prick- 
ly ash, elder flowers, blue flag, tincture gum guaiacum, aa f. 
|iv. Dilute alcohol, two pints. Simple syrup, one and one-half 
gallons. Mix the fluid extracts with the syrup ; the tincture 
of guaiacum with the diluted alcohol, and then mix all togeth- 
er. This is an excellent alterative syrup. Nitrate or iodide 
of potassium mav be added, if desirable, and flavor to suit the 
taste. 



SQUAW VINE. 

MITCHELLA REPENS. 

Common Names : Winter Clover, Patridge Berry. 

Native of United States. The Whole Plant. 

A small e\ergreen, trailing plant, which bears scarlet, edible 
berries remaining during the winter, and affording food to 
birds and small animals during that season. Grows in woods 
around the roots of trees. 

Properties. — Diuretic, astringent and tonic. It has gained 
a reputation as a remedy in female weakness, and enters into 
the formula of " Mother's Relief." 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one to two teaspoonfuls. 

Mother's Relief. Fluid extract squaw vine, f. |ii. Fluid 
extract cramp bark, cypripedium, queen of the meadow and 
rhubarb, aa f. 3L Fluid extract unicorn, f. |ss. Simple syrup, 
f. rxviii. Mix and flavor to please the taste of the patient. 
Used by females to support them through the time of their 
pregnancy. It is an excellent remedy for hysteria and female 
weakness in general. Dose, one teaspoonful repeated for four 
doses per day. 



WORM SEED. 

CHENOPODIUM ANTHALMINTICUM. 

Common Name : Jerusalem Oak. 

Native of United States. The Seeds. 

Grows in waste places and about old buildings. The plant 
has a strong unpleasant odor, which is due to the essential oil 
contained more abundantly in the seeds. 

Properties. — Anthalmintic and anti-spasmodic. 



356 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, twenty to sixty drops. Oil of worm 
seed. Dose, one-fourth to one-half drachm. Taken in sweet- 
ened water to expel worms. 



YELLOW DOCK. 

RUMES CRISPUS. 

Common Names : Narrow Dock, Curled Dock. 

Native of Europe. Naturalized in this country The Root. 

This plant is distributed throughout the United States. 
There are several species of dock. This may be known by 
its long narrow lanceolate leaves, crisped at the edges, and 
its long yellow spindle-shaped root. 

Properties. — A valuable alterative, possessing in the con- 
centrated form of fluid extract, more remedial power than has 
usually been ascribed to it. In the class of diseases to which 
sarsaparilla is applicable, yellow dock will be found a valuable 
remedy. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one-half to one teaspoonful. 

Solid extract. Dose, four to eight grains. 

Ointment of yellow dock. Fluid extract, f. |ii. Lard, three 
ounces. Yellow wax, one ounce. Melt the lard and wax to- 
gether, add the extract and stir until cold. Used for diseases 
of the skin. 



YELLOW JESSAMINE. 

GELSEMINUM SEMPERVIRENS. 

Common Names : Wild Jessamine, Woodbine. 

Native of the Southern States. The Root, 

A climbing plant, extensively cultivated for its luxuriant foli- 
age, beautiful flowers, agreeable shade and perfume. 

Properties. — Has acquired a great reputation as a febrifuge, 
being said to subdue the most formidable and complicated 
fevers incident to our country and climate, as well as the more 
simple and mild. It is also said to possess control of the nerv- 
ous system, removing nervous irritability more completely than 
any other known agent. It should never be used except by 
direction of a physician. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 357 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, five to thirty drops. 

Tincture of yellow Jessamine. Fluid extract, two fluid 
ounces. Dilute alcohol, f. §xiv. Mix. Dose, one-half to one 
teaspoonful, repeated according to the nature of the disease. 
Used externally for rheumatism or neuralgic pains. 



YELLOW PARILLA. 

MENISPERMUM CANADENSE. 

Common Names : Moon-seed, Vine Maple. 

Native of United States. The Root. 

This plant is plentiful in the States and Canada, growing in 
woods and near streams. Its root has sometimes been mis- 
taken for sarsaparilla. 

Properties. — Tonic, laxative and alterative. It is a very 
good addition to laxative bitters. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one-fourth to one teaspoonful. 
Infusion of yellow parilla. Fluid extract, one fluid ounce. 
Hot water, one pint. Mix. Dose, two to four tablespoonfuls. 



WHITE WILLOW. 



SALIX ALBA. 

Native of Europe and America. The Bark. 

A well-known tree growing from twenty to fifty feet high, 
flowering from March to June. The bark is intensely bitter, and 
from which the well-known tonic called salicin is extracted, 
and used in all cases in the place of quinine — two and one-half 
grains of salicin equaling one grain of t uinine. Salicin is the 
preferable remedy b reason of its solvency in water. There 
is no danger of its being precipitated by any of the fluids in the 
system, serving in fevers to restore nutrition by enriching the 
blood. 

Properties. — A reliable tonic and anti-periodic, and gently 
diuretic, by acting as a solvent of albuminous concretions in 
the ducts of the kidneys. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Salicin. Dose, three to ten grains, and repeated every 
two to three hours. Indicated as an anti-periodic, and 



35^ A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

a specific for intermittent fevers. It is a cooling tonic 
that will not determine to the head, or increase the fre- 
quency of the pulse. It has also gained a reputation as a rem- 
edy in rheumatism and gout. Its best action is manifest when 
administeied directly after removing glandular obstructions. 



QUEEN OF THE MEADOW. 

EUPATORIUM PURPURIUM. 

The Root. 

Grows in spongy meadows five or six feet high, bearing pur- 
ple umbel clusters of flowers in August and September. 

Properties. — Diuretic, tonic, somewhat stimulant and as- 
tri gent. It has acquired a reputation for gravel, strangury, 
and all chronic diseases of the urinary organs. 

PREPARATIONS. 

Fluid extract. Dose, one-half to one teaspoonful. 

Diuretic compound. Fluid extract of queen of the meadow. 
Trailing arbutus, Marsh mallows, dwarf elder, aa f. |ss. Wa- 
ter, one pint. Holland gin, one pint. Sweeten with honey to 
suit the taste. Used in disorders of the urinary organs. Dose, 
wine-glassful three times per day. 



SPONGE. 

This article is a specific for the enlargement of the thyroid 
gland, called goiter, and for all the lymphatic glands. It is pre- 
pared by charring coarse, cheap sponge on an iron plate under 
an iron mortar. A tincture is made of this coal. 

Tinctu e of sponge coal. 3i. Alcohol, f. |i, or enough to 
make an ounce when filtered. Dose, two to five drops diluted 
every three hours. 



CAMPHOR GUM 



Is prepared in tincture, five ounces of the gum to one pint 
of alcohol. Camphor is a good diffusible stimulant, and is 
particularly indicated in cases of diarrhoea and dysentery in 
children. It is also a good diaphoretic, and indicated in high 
congestive fevers, such as diptheria and scarlatina. It is val- 
uable for convalescent cases of pneumonia, and enters into our 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 359 

diaphoretic powders. Dose of the tincture, one to five drops 
diluted. The tincture is an excellent external application to 
the neck and spine when congested from taking a severe cold. 



SWEET SPIRITS OF NITER 

Is a stimulating diuretic, and is indicated when a diuretic is 
needed, and the patient much debilitated. Dose, one-fourth 
to one drachm diluted, and repeated two hours apart. It will 
dissolve quinine, and enters into our anti-periodic tonic. 

Sweet spirits of niter, f. §ii. Quinine, twenty grains. Dose, 
3iss diluted, repeated every two to two and one-half hours. 
Used as an anti-periodic in ague and fever. 



NITRATE OF POTASSA. 



This is a cooling diuretic, and one of the best in fevers, cys- 
titis and strangury. It is a solvent of concrete albumen that 
is ever present obstructing the excretory ducts of the kidneys 
in ca*ses of congestive fevers. It is a solvent of the albumin- 
ous concretions that obstruct the capillary bile-ducts in the 
liver. It overcomes the lithic habit, by first clearing the re- 
nal ducts, and secondly supports the organs in their depura- 
tive work. It thus aids in restoring the blood to its normal 
quality for nutrition. Used from ten to twenty grains in solu- 
tion of cold water from four to eight ounces. Dose, 3iv every 
hour until it is all taken. Such a diuretic solution should pre- 
cede the administration of any biliary cathartic. 



OIL OF SWEET ALMONDS 

Is used to soothe and protect the membranes of ducts from 
irritating poisonous elements in the circulation. It also oper- 
ates as a soothing diuretic to protect the ureters, bladder and 
urethra in diseases of the lithic habit. 

Olive oil is used for the same indications for which the al- 
mond-oil is used, but the preference is given to the oil of sweet 
almonds. 



360 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

NUNQUAH. 

Common Name : Swamp Snake Root. 

Native of United States. The Plant and Root. 

Grows in rich bottom lands in shady woods from four to six 
inches high, has green, colt's foot-shaped leaves, with tme ser- 
rated edges. The whole plant and root has a strong camphor- 
ous, snake root, agreeable flavor. 

Properties. — It acts as a specific for spinal diseases. It has 
gained a reputation as a remedy in female weaknesses, as 
leucorrhoea, prolapsus, retension of the menses. It is used 
beneficially in gout and rheumatism, and all organic diseases 
dependent upon chronic spinal congestion at their nervous 
centres, consequently, useful in heart and lung diseases. 

PREPARATION. 

A fluid extract is made from one ounce of alcoholic fncture 
from one ounce of the herb. Dose, 3i> diluted, each four hours. 
In all diseases where it is indicated, the dose is about the 
same. 





» ^ ■ 

PULMONARY BALS. 


Tincture of Lobelia seed, 1. |i. 


a 


" Blood root. f. ri. 


a 


<• Tolu, f. 31. 


a 


" Anise, f. 3ii. 


t( 


" Opii, f. 3ii. 


Simple 


syrup, 0. iii. li. 



Mix, and shake well. 
Dose, from 3ss, to 3i. This formula can be relied on as an 
efficient expectorant to relieve coughs arising from colds, 
whooping cough, bronchitis, laryngitis, pneumonia. It is a pre- 
ventative for croup, useful in asthma, and dropsy of the chest, 
arising from pericarditis. The author has used it for thirty-five 
years. There is no danger of a child taking one-half f. 3 every 
fifteen minutes until an irritating croup is quieted, then given 
a dose as often as the cough inclines to return. 



BALSAMIC DIURETIC. 

3, Sweet spirits of niter, f. fii. 
Balsam of copaiva, f. |i 

Oil of sweet almonds, f. 5L 

Oil of juniper berries, 3i. 

T. Opium, 3is\ 

Podophyllin, grs. ii. • 

First cut the podoph llin in the sweet spirits of niter, then 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 36 1 

c^t the oil of juniper, next the oil of capaiva, and shake well; 
then add the oil of sweet almonds and T. of opii and shake 
well. Add simple syrup, O. ii. This preparation should be 
well shaken I efore pouring out to fill a phial or to take a dose, 
as it inclines to separate by standing. Dose, 3i, to be taken 
without further dilution. Used for diabetis, chronic inflam- 
mation of the kidneys, cystitis and gonorrhoea, also in chronic 
rheumatism. 



DIURETIC, 

I£ Extract hyoscyamus, grs. x. 

Nitrate of potass i, grs. xx. 

T. Wintergreen, 3i. 

Hot water, |i. 

Simple syrup, fi. 

Dissolve the extract and nitrate of potassa in the water, then 
add the simple syrup and wintergreen tincture, and add tinc- 
ture bloodroot, 3ss. Used for cystitis, uterine, an.i all neural- 
gic cases. Dose, 3i, every thirty minutes, diluted in cold 
water, 3SS. 



DIURETIC. 

To clear the ducts of the kidneys and to aid in depurating 
the circulation of impurities, prior to giving a dose of podo- 
phyllin to open the liver: 

fy Nitrate of potassa, grs. xv. 

Cold water, |iv. 

T. Wintergreen, m. x. 

Use |ss every half-hour until it is all taken. After taking 
two doses, give from two to three one-half grain sugar-coated 
podophyllin pills, according with the age of the patient. If it 
be a child that cannot take pills, give it in the powder in milk. 
Used in all febrile attacks to overcome the congestive symp- 
toms. 



DIAPHORETIC POWDERS, 
r^ Pulverized opium, 3i. 
Pulverized Ipecac, 3ii- 
Camphor gum, 3iv. 
Bi-carbonate of soda, |ii. 
First put the camphor gum into a mortar and pour two-thirds 



362 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

drachm of alcohol on the camphor gum to cut it enough to make 
it pulverizable. Rub it until it is a fine powder. Pulverize the 
soda separately. Mix first the opium and the ipecac thor- 
oughly, then add it to the camphor and stir it well, then add 
lastly the bi-carbonate of soda and rub it until it is thoroughly 
mixed and will show no white specks of soda unmixed. Dose, 
from two to five grains. Used in all febrile and painful dis- 
eases, to relieve pain and induce perspiration. It is the best 
fever powder in use, and also the best expectorant used in the 
form of powder. 



CHOLERA SPECIFIC. 



fy Tincture of prickly ash, bark of the root, or of the ber- 
ries, f. |iv. 

T. of capsicum, f. Jij. 

T. of gum myrrh f. §j. 

T. of camphor, 3j. 

Oil peppermint, 3ss. 

T. of opium, 3ij. Mix all together. 

This formula can be relied upon for prompt relief in cholera, 
cholera morbus, cholera infantum, chronic diarrhoea, and for 
dysentery. For Asiatic cholera, or cholera morbus, use one-third 
drachm in one-fourth tumbler of sweetened cold water, for a 
dose. Use such a dose every fifteen minutes until the vomiting 
and purging ceases, and the veins fill full at the hands. An ene- 
ma made with one-half drachm of it in four drachms of water, 
used up the bowels, will prevent or stop the cramp in fifteen 
minutes, and warm the extremities. For cholera infantum, use 
one-fourth drachm. Sweetened cold water, fiij. Give 3i every 
fifteen minutes. Also use an enema of the drops, one-eighth 
drachm in water 3iv. Use such an enema twice per day until 
the symptoms subside. For severe diarrhoea, use a cholera 
dose ever/ fluid passage of the bowels. For dysentery, use 
the following enema every time the painful tenesmus or bear- 
ing-down pain recurs : Cholera specific, one-half drachm. 
T. opium, one-half drachm. Olive oil, 3i. Water, 3iv. Also 
use for a dose, one-fourth drachm in cold sweetened water |ij, 
at every passage of the bowels. 



CHOLERA INFANTUM POWDERS. 

Made directly after the formula of the diaphoretic powders, 
with the exception of the omission of the ipecac, and an addi- 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 363 

tional quantity of bi-carbonate of soda to 31V. Then the dose 
will be safely used to nearly double that of the diaphoretic 
powders. Used for teething and chronic acid diarrhoeas of 
children. Dose, three grains in milk, and repeated as often as 
the bowels move. By the use of the recommended enema in 
such cases, the patient will recover very much more rapidly. 



CHOLERA MIXTURE. 



Tincture of cayenne, tincture of rhubarb, tincture of cam- 
phor, tincture of opium, tincture of spearmint, aa f. Jiss. Mix. 
Dose, thirty drops in a little water every hour until the disease 
is checked. 



HAMLIN'S CHOLERA MIXTURE— No. i. 

Tincture of rhubarb, f. ?i. Tincture of opium, f. rss. Spir- 
its of camphor. Mix. Dose, ten to twenty drops diluted, and 
repeated until the disease is checked. 

No. 2. — Tinctures of opium, capsicum, ginger, cardamon 
compound, aa 3SS. Mix. Dose as above. 



FOR DIARRHCEA. 



Fluid extract rhubarb, tincture of opium, spirits camphor, 
essence of spearmint, aa fss. Simple elixir, |i. Mix. Dose, 
one-half to one teaspoonful, and repeated every fluid passage 
of the bowels. 



ANODYNE. 



Fluid extract valerian, fluid extract of cayenne, aa |i. 
Aqueous fluid extract opium, 3SS. Spirits camphor, 3ii- Mix. 
Dose, fifteen to thirty drops, diluted. For colic cramp and 
severe pains. 



DIURETIC. 



Fluid extract uva ursi, |ii. Fluid extract squills, 3i. Fluid 
extract digitalis, 3ss. Nitrate potassa, 3i. Simple elixir, |ii. 
Mix. Dose, one-half to one teaspoonful. 



364 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

DIURETIC. 

Fluid extract pareira brava, |ii. Nitrate potassa, 3i. Sim- 
ple elixir, |ii. Mix. Dose one-half to one teaspoonful. 



FOR COUGH WITH HOARSENESS AND SORENESS OF 
THE LUNGS. 

Fluid extract cubebs, 3i. Fluid extract of ipecac, 3ss. Fluid 
extract cherry bark, 3ss. Simple syrup, giss. - Mix. Dose, 
one-half to one teaspoonful. To be shaken when used. 



FOR COUGH. 



Fluid extract bloodroot, 3ss. Fluid extract squills, 3ss. 
Fluid extract ipecac, 3ss. Aqueous extract of opium, gtt. xx. 
Simple elixir, §viii. Mix. Dose, one to two teaspoonfuls. 



COUGH CANDY. 



To ten pounds of melted sugar add the following mixture, 
and divide into sticks: Fluid extract of squills^ Fluid aqueous 
extract of opium, aa 3i. T. of tolu, 3SS. Fluid extract of ipecac, 
3ii. Oil of checkerberry, gtt. xiii. Oil sassafras, gtt. vi. Oil 
anise, gtt. iii. Mix. 



■+— 



SUDORIFIC, OR FEVER DROPS. 

Fluid extract of crawley, pleurisy root, skunk cabbage, aa 
|ss. Simple elixir, fviii. Mix. Dose, one-half to one tea- 
spoonful with hot balm or sage tea. 



LINIMENT FOR BURNS AND SCALDS. 

Linseed oil, unboiled, \ i. Lime water, ^ v - Mix. Apply 
to the burn freely with a feather, then cover with cotton- bat- 
ting. Renew the application every six hours. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 365 

LINIMENT. 

FOR SPRAINS, BRUISES, PAINS AND ACHES. 

Saltpetre, (nitrate potassa,) |i. Beef's gall, fresh, fiv. Fluid 
extract of opium, 5SS. Spirits camphor, riv. Aqua ammonia, 
31. Oil lavender, §ss. Alcohol, §vi. Mix. 



FOR CHILBLAINS. 



Tannin, 3iss. Fluid extract of arnica, 3ii. Glycerine, 3vi. 
Mix. 



SPINAL LINIMENT. 



Oil of hemlock boughs, gii. Oil of sassafras, 3ii. T. of 
capsicum, gil. Spirits of camphor, ?ii. Laudanum, 3iv. Oil 
lavender, 3ii. Spirits of turpentine, 3iii. Mix. 



GUTTA PERCHA PLASTER. 

Chloroform, 3iii. Gutta percha, 3i. Mix and dissolve. A 
coating for sore nipples, chapped or cracked hands or skin. 



FOR TOOTHACHE. 



Chloroform, 3vi. Fluid extract of aconite, 3ss. Alcohol, 
3iv. Morphine, grains, iv. Mix. Moisten with the solution 
cotton enough to fill the cavity of the tooth. 



TANNIN TOOTHACHE DROPS. 
Tannin, 3i. Chloroform, |i. Mix. Use as above. 



DISINFECTANT. 



Pure ground coffee, burned upon a hot shovel is an effectual 
and agreeable disinfectant of a sick room. 



366 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

PERFUMES. 

LILY OF THE VALLEY. 

Otto of rose, gtt. xx. Oil of neroli, gtt. xv. Oil bergamot, 
3ii. Honey, 3i. T. of musk, 3i. Essence of orris root, O. i. 
Mix and filter. 

JOCKEY CLUB. 

Essence tube rose, essence magnolia, essence jassmine, aa p. 
Otto of rose, 3ss. Oil of bergamot, T. of musk, aa |i. Al- 
cohol, deodorized, one quart. Mix and filter. 



WHITE PERCIPITATE OINTMENT. 

White percipitate, two ounces. Lard, one pint. Mix. For 
Winter use. For Summer use, take equal parts of mutton tal- 
low and lard and melt them together, and when sufficiently 
cool stir in the percipitate, which should be rubbed fine before 
putting it in. This can be scented with any perfume desira- 
ble. The lard should be sweet, neither burned nor rancid. 



DIETETIC. 

In treating diseases, we find much to encounter from nurses 
who know so little about the laws of dietetics as to be con- 
stantly impeding the progress of the recovery of the patient 
by the improper use of some injurious article of diet. Unless 
we provide against this difficulty by giving a consistent system 
of diet for the invalid, physicians cannot expect to be freed 
from the continuation of this embarrassment. In supporting 
nature while it is striving to regain its lost balances, the timely 
administration of consistent articles of diet is indispensable. 

Much judgment is required to determine the quality admiss- 
able, and the quantity demanded in very low cases. The diet 
should be regularly administered in such cases, every three 
hours. The quantity should be determined by the attending 
physician, who best comprehends the nature of the case. For 
a general idea touching this point, the patient will require very 
little nourishment while the system is laboring under a state of 
high febrile excitement in acute diseases. After the subsidence 
of the fever, the quantity should be such as to carefully im- 
prove the appetite rather than to diminish it by giving too 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 367 

much at a time. The diet must not be of any solid substance 
while the digestive apparatus is thus enfeebled. It should be 
prepared in the form of broth or gruel until the patient is con- 
valescent, when a more solid diet should be very carefully ap- 
proached ; otherwise, a fatal relapse may be the consequence. 



ARTICLES OF DIET ALLOWABLE WHILE UNDER 
TREATMENT FOR CHRONIC DISEASES. 

Water. — Pure cold water should have the preference to all 
other drinks. There is no disease where its free use in mod- 
erate quantities is not allowable. 

Gruels. — Made of oat meal, wheat flour, farina, rice flour, 
corn meal, corn starch, pearl barley, tapioca and arrow-root. 

Soup or Broth. — Made from beef, mutton or chicken, to 
which may be added rice or barley or any other farinaceous 
article ; also vegetable soup. 

Meats. — Beef, mutton, chickens, pigeons, turkeys, all kinds 
of tongue, venison and game of all kinds in its season. 

Fish. — Cod, rock-fish, perch, flounders, haddock, pike, 
trout, mackerel and herring. Salt fish should be well soaked 
in cold water before it is used. Oysters roasted in the shell, 
made into soup or raw, are not only nutritious but of easy 
digestion. 

Vegetables. — Potatoes, beets, green peas, all kinds of 
beans, when young and tender, carrots, turnips, spinach, cauli- 
flower, cabbage, and in some cases, asparagus. All kinds of 
vegetables ought to be well cooked ; potatoes are best when 
roasted. 

Puddings. — Made of arow root, rice, sago, tapioca, Indian 
meal, corn starch, farina, oat meal, barley flour, &c. Pud- 
dings should not be made too rich. Eggs, milk and sugar 
should be used sparingly. 

Bread and Cakes. — All kinds of light bread not recently 
baked, biscuits, sample cakes. 

Eggs. — Lightly dressed, either boiled, poached, or made 
up into custards. 

Fruits. — Baked, stewed, or preserved sub-acid apples or 
pears, whortleberries, blue-berries, peaches, oranges, plums, 



368 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

apricots, watermelons, muskmelons, &c. Also, some kinds of 
dried fruit, as dates, prunes, figs, or in fact any fruit not of too 
acid a quality. No fruit whatever, except perhaps peaches 
and blackberries, should be used in cases of bowel complaints. 

Milk. — Milk, either raw or boiled may be used, providing it 
agrees. The same may also be said of fresh buttermilk. 

The above list is given to convey an approximate idea of 
what is wholesome and will not disagree, under ordinary cir- 
cumstances with an invalid, provided it is taken in proper quan- 
tities and at regular intervals. Still, all such regulations are 
subject to considerable modification, for as it is frequently 
said, "What is one's meat is another's poison," so individual 
peculiarities must be studied and consulted. Whatever is 
known or found upon trial to disagree, should be scrupulously 
avoided. 

Regularity in the hours of meals should be observed. Too 
long fasting as well as too frequent eating is to be deprecated. 



ARTICLES FORBIDDEN UNLESS SPECIALLY ALLOW- 
ED BY THE ATTENDING PHYSICIAN. 

Beverages. — All kinds of liquors, coffee, green tea, and all 
acidulated drinks. (See " Diet during nursing.") 

Meats. — Pork, veal, sausage, kidneys, geese, ducks, mince- 
pies, and every kind of salted or fat meat. 

Soups. — All high-seasoned soups, such as turtle, mock-turtle, 
&c. 

Fish. — Crabs, lobsters, clams, and all kinds of fish not men- 
tioned in " Articles allowed." 

Vegetables. — Cucumbers, onions, radishes, parsnips, gar- 
lic, all kinds of pepper, pickles and salads of every description. 

Pastry of every description, whether boiled, baked, or fried. 

Spices and artificial sauces of every kind. All condiments, 
as catsup, vinegar or mustard. 

Rancid cheese and butter. 

All kinds of nuts and fruits not mentioned among the " Ar- 
ticles allowed." 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 369 

ARTICLES OF DIET CONSISTENT IN ACUTE DIS- 
EASES. 

Gruel. — Thin corn meal gruel is an excellent diet drink in 
many diseases, but especially in small-pox and the eruptive fe- 
vers, and in acute diseases of the respiratory apparatus. Put a 
pint of water on the fire, slightly seasoned with salt, and when 
boiling briskly, sprinkle in two tablespoonfuls of corn meal, 
stirring it continuously until done, usually about five minutes. 
It is best when warm, and should be made frequently. Oat 
meal gruel may be made in the same manner and used in sim- 
ilar cases. 

Toast and Water. — Cut a large slice of wheat bread, toast 
it evenly and nicely brown, and put it in a covered earthen- 
ware vessel and cover with boiling water. It will be ready for 
use in half an hour, and forms a very light and acceptable 
drink in acute diseases. 

Barley Water. — Wash clean two ounces of pearl barley ; 
put it in a vessel with a quart of water, and boil slowly to one 
pint. It may be seasoned to suit the fancy of the patient, with 
lemon-peel, catawba wine and sugar, spices, &c. 

Gum-Arabic Water. — To an ounce of gum-arabic, add a 
pint of boiling water and stir until dissolved. In many cases 
it is permissible to render it slightly acid with lemon, and to 
sweeten with loaf sugar. It is an excellent drink in acute dis- 
eases when the soothing influence of a demulcent is desired. 

Farina Gruel. — Heat a sufficient quantity of water, and 
when boiling sprinkle in a sufficient quantity of farina to give 
it the desired consistence. Sweeten it with loaf sugar, and if 
desirable, add a small portion of brandy, rye whiskey, or wine. 
It is an excellent light diet in acute diseases, and in the dis- 
eases of children. 

Tapioca. — Take three heaping tablespoonfuls of tapioca and 
wash it well in cold water. Drain it and pour on sufficient 
water to cover it, and let it soak for four hours. Now add as 
much more water and boil it until it looks quite clear, and 
flavor it to suit the taste of the patient, always having refer- 
ence to the character of the disease. Sago may be prepared 
in the same way. 

Sago, Mazina, or Tapioca Pudding. — Add three table- 
spoonfuls of sago, mazina, or tapioca to a pint of milk, and 
boil it until auite soft adding gradually three ounces of white 



37° A. H. DAVIS THEORY AND 

sugar. Now set it aside to cool, and having beat up three 
eggs, stir them by degrees into it. Flavor with nutmeg and 
bake in a deep dish. 

Egg and Milk. — Take a fresh egg and boil one minute ; 
break it into a tumbler and add half a teacupful of hot milk, 
and stir briskly until they are thoroughly mixed. Seasoned 
with salt this forms a most excellent, light and easily digested 
food in many forms of disease, but especially during conva- 
lescence. 

Egg Wine. — Break a fresh egg into a tumbler and beat it 
until smooth and thick. Now add a teaspoonful of sugar and 
3ii of Maderia wine, and one or two ounces of boiling water. 
This forms an excellent stimulant and restorative in cases 
where wine is indicated, and where this can be digested. 

Brandy and Egg. — Take a fresh egg, break it in a shallow 
dish, and beat it until smooth and thick. Now add a table- 
spoonful of brandy, and four tablespoonsful of boiling water, 
and mix thoroughly. This forms one of the most valuable 
preparations that can be used, in cases of great prostration, as 
it furnishes a concentrated article of food in a pleasant form, 
and at the same time the necessary stimulant. Give one-half 
at a time. 

Bran Gruel. — Take of new wheat bran one pint. Add six 
pints of boiling water, boil to four pints. Strain and add su- 
gar, syrup, honey, or aromatics to render it agreeable to the 
taste. It is demulcent and nutritious, easy of digestion, and 
useful in colds and febrile and inflammatory affections. 

Malt Gruel. — Take ground malt, one pint. Boiling water, 
three pints. Infuse the malt in the water for two hours. 
Strain and sweeten adding aromatics if desired. It is valuable 
in fevers and inflammations as a diluent, and is a mild, unirri- 
tating and nutritious article. 

Rice Gruel. — Take of ground rice half a teacupful, add 
water, two pints. Boil for one hour, strain, and add nutmeg, 
cinnamon, or wine and sugar to suit the taste. This forms an 
excellent diet drink in acute diseases, and in cases of great ex- 
haustion when stronger food cannot be taken. 

Panada. — Take two or three slices of dry wheat bread, toast 
it slightly and crumb it into a bowl. Season it with nutmeg, 
cinnamon, or other spice to suit the taste, and pour on it a 
pint of boiling water, and if not objectionable, a tablespoonful 
of best brandy or whiskey. It forms an excellent and pleasant 
diet for the weak and prostrate patient, and digests easily and 
quickly. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 37 I 

Flour Gruel. — Make a linen or muslin bag holding a 
pound of flour, fill it with wheat flour and boil for several 
hours or until it forms a hard mass. Of this, two or three ta- 
blespoonfuls may be grated into half a pint of new milk and 
the same of water, or into water alone if the milk is objection- 
able, and let it boil for a few minutes. It may be seasoned 
with any spice, and forms an excellent substitute for arrow- 
root, tapioca, or sago. It is a good diet in bowel complaints 
of children, chronic dysentery and diarrhoea, and in many 
weakened and irritated states of the stomach and bowels. 

Beef Tea. — Take of lean beef, freed from fat, a pound. 
Put it in a vessel over a slow fire and pour in it two pints of 
boiling water. Let it boil for half an hour, removing any scum 
that arises, add the necessary salt and pepper, and strain off 
the liquor before it gets cold. 

Another. — Take a nice beef-steak cut thin, half a pound- 
Put it on the gridiron over coals, and broil until each side is 
slightly roasted. Now place it in a tin vessel and pour on it 
half a pint of boiling water. Cover it and let it stand where 
it will keep warm for half an hour. 

I prefer the latter method of making beef tea, but either will 
give an excellent preparation, highly nutritious and easy of di- 
gestion. 

.Beef Essence. — Take of lean beef, without fat, cut it in 
small pieces, and put it in a stout glass bottle. Suspend it in a 
vessel of water and boil it four hours. Then strain off the liq- 
uor and season with salt. This furnishes the largest amount of 
nourishment in the smallest compass, and is employed in low 
forms of fever and other diseases attended with great prostra- 
tion. 

Mutton Broth. — Take two pounds of neck of mutton, cut 
it in pieces and cover it in the vessel with three pints of water. 
Boil it four hours. Strain off the liquor and season to the 
taste. It is an excellent preparation for the sick, especially in 
diseases of the bowels. 

Chicken Broth. — Take of the dark meat of a chicken, the 
wings, legs, thighs and neck, pour on them a pint of water, and 
boil gently for thirty minutes, seasoning with salt only. This 
broth is more stimulating than any of the others and should 
not be given when any febrile symptoms are present. 

Oyster Soup. — Take half a dozen oysters, cut out the gris- 
tle, and put them in a stew-pan with a teacupful of equal parts 
of milk and water. Boil for five minutes and strain off the liq- 
uor, seasoning with salt, and pepper if admissible. 



372 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 



FLUID EXTRACT. 



Fluid extracts of botanic remedies secure a uniformity of 
their strength and preservation. They are easy of transporta- 
tion and always ready for use. They have come so generally 
into use that every druggist keeps them. The rule apopted in 
their preparation is to make one fluid ounce of the extract 
from one ounce of the raw material. By observing this rule in 
domestic practice, a decoction can be made from any dried 
herb or plant, and by lef erring to the number of doses in each 
fluid ounce, determine how many doses their decoction con- 
tains by observing the weight of the raw material before steep- 
ing it. 

We offer these fluid extracts for family use as medicines, 
ready for use, that can be relied upon for uniformity of strength, 
and that will not suffer any loss by age. 



DILUTE ALCOHOL. 



Dilute alcohol signifies fifty per cent, or proof spirits. To 
reduce commercial, or eighty-five per cent, alcohol to that of 
proof, or fifty per cent. Rule. — To ten parts of alcohol add 
seven parts of water. Let it stand in a covered vessel in a cool 
place for half an hour or more before using. 



SIMPLE SYRUP. 



Simple syrup is made by dissolving one and one-half pounds 
of refined sugar by a gentle heat, until it boils, in one pint of 
water. 

In making tinctures, infusions and syrups according to the 
formulas in the preceeding pages, the use of Thayer's fluid 
extracts will ensure a reliable product. 



Drowning, Suffocation, Poisoning, &c. 



TREATMENT OF THE APPARENTLY DROWNED. 

Water extinguishes life as it does fire, simply by keeping off 
the air; therefore, restoring air to the lungs by inflation, is 
most to be depended on, and should be commenced the mo- 
ment the body is out of the water, and continued perseveringly 
as long as it retains any warmth, and while the limbs are flexi- 
ble. Let the water drain from the mouth, remove mucus, 
then press back the larynx, close both nostrils, and blow forci- 
bly your own breath into the lungs, through the corner of a 
handkerchief, which you have laid over the mouth. As soon 
as you can procure bellows, close the mouth and one nostril, 
and blow through the other, still pressing back the windpipe. 

Having distended the lungs fully, press on the chest so as to 
empty the lungs: do this alternately, imitating natural respira- 
tion. Remove the neckcloth, cut off the wet clothes, rub the 
body dry, apply dry heat in every possible way, as soon as you 
ca % n get the body into a house, carrying it on a hurdle or plank, 
with the head raised. If the glottis be spasmodically closed, 
you must use the tracheal tube to inflate with ; and if oxygen 
gas could be obtained it would be more efficient. Stimulants 
may be got into the stomach by means of the flexible tube, till 
the person can swallow ; and clysters of mustard with salt or 
brandy and water may be thrown up. Bleeding cautiously may 
relieve the congestion on the right side of the heart. Electric- 
ity may be tried, passing gentle shocks through the heart, the 
body being insulated by placing it on a shutter, supported by 
quart bottles perfectly dry on the outside. Tracheotomy may 
be performed if other means fail in distending the lungs. 



TREATMENT OF PERSONS SUFFOCATED 

BY CARBONIC ACID GAS J HYDROGEN OR NITROGEN GAS \ EXHALA- 
TIONS FROM DEPOSITORIES OF SOIL, ETC. 

If the body retains its heat, expose it to the air, and dash 
cold water over the head, neck, and breast. The lungs should 



374 A» H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 

be inflated, the nostrils stimulated, and if the veins of the neck 
appear full, some blood may be removed from them. If the 
temperature of the body be below the natural standard, heat 
must be applied instead of cold. 
Friction may be useful. 



TREATMENT OF PERSONS STRUCK BY LIGHTNING. 

Inflate the lungs as early as possible ; apply stimulants, more 
particularly gentle electrical shocks, passed through the chest, 
and along the spine ; keep up the temperature by external 
heat, and get warm cordials into the stomach by means of the 
flexible tube and syringe. 



TREATMENT OF PERSONS HANGED. 

Remove the ligature as soon as possible, and act as for a 
drowned person with the exception of opening the jugular vein, 
and removing, if possible, six or eight ounces of blood. Death 
is caused rather by suffocation than by apoplexy, therefore,, 
the lungs should be supplied with air without delay. 



TREATMENT OF PERSONS WHO HAVE BEEN EX- 
POSED TO INTENSE COLD. 

First use gentle friction with snow or iced water ; or, if these 
are not to be had, the cold bath may be used ; and whilst the 
person remains in it, small quantities of hot water must be added 
at intervals, so as to raise the heat very gradiu !y. The lungs 
to be inflated. Warm wine, or any other warm fluid to be giv- 
en, very cautiously at first, and solid food shouid be withheld 
for some hours after recovery. 



ANTIDOTES FOR POISONS. 

GENERAL DIRECTIONS. 

Proceed immediately to evacuate the stomach. Give large 
doses of warm water, and as fast as vomited give more. While 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 375 

the patient is drinking the water, speedily prepare an emetic, 
thus : one heaping teaspoonful of ground mustard ; one heap- 
ing teaspoonful of fine salt; one coffee-cupful of tepid water. 
Stir it up, and administer it. This is a speedy and handy emet- 
ic. As quick as the stomach is thoroughly evacuated, give 
strong coffee or the whites of two or three eggs, whichever can 
be most speedily procured. 



GENERAL ANTIDOTES FOR ACID POISONS. 

Drinks of alkalies, as chalk, magnesia, whiting and water, or 
soap and water, always remembering the rules given above. 



FOR ALKALINE POISONS. 

SUCH AS POTASH, SODA, AMMONIA, ETC. 

Vinegar and water, lemon juice, sour beer or cider, or sour 
fruit followed by olive, linseed, or any wholesome oil. 



SPECIAL DIRECTIONS FOR THE MOST COMMON 

POISONS. 

FOR ARSENIC, OR ITS PREPARATIONS. 

Empty the stomach by the pump, or emetic of salt and mus- 
tard. Give large draughts of new milk and egg, lime water and 
flour, or linseed tea to inviscate the arsenic. A full dose of 
linseed oil should be given, and the diet should be farinaceous. 



ANTIMONY OR ITS PREPARATIONS. 

Excite vomiting by tickling the throat with a feather, or the 
finger, and large draughts of mild fluids ; or allay vomiting by 
opium, according to the previous effects of the poison. The 
best antidotes are decoctions of astringent vegetables, as oak, 
cinchona, gall nuts, or strong tea. 



376 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 



COPPER AND ITS PREPARATIONS. 

Encourage vomiting. Large draughts of milk and water, 
whites of eggs stirred up with water and taken freely. Inflam- 
matory and nervous symptons to be subdued on general prin- 
ciples. 



SILVER, NITRATE OF. 



A tablespoonful of common salt dissolved in a pint of water, 
and a wine-glassful to be taken every two or three minutes, 
after which, mucilaginous drink and purgatives. 



LEAD AND ITS PREPARATIONS. 

Alum, or sulphate of magnesia, or sulphate of soda. Castor 
oil, with or without opium, assisted by frequent emollient clys- 
ters and the warm bath. 



ZINC AND ITS PREPARATIONS. 

Assist vomiting by large draughts of warm water. Particular 
symptoms to be met by appropriate remedies. Milk and albu- 
men may be drank freely. 



MERCURY AND ITS PREPARATIONS. 

Whites of eggs mixed with water, and one to be given every 
two or three minutes to procure vomiting and decompose the 
poison. Milk in large quantities, gum water, linseed tea, and 
wheat flour and water. Inflammatory consequences should be 
anticipated, and cared for by usual remedies. The moist per- 
sulphuret of iron is an antidote. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 377 

MINERAL ACIDS. 

SULPHURIC, NITRIC, MURIATIC. 

Mix an ounce of calcined magnesia with a quart of water, 
and give a glassful every two minutes. Soap, or chalk and 
water may be used until the magnesia is procured. Vomiting 
should be excited by tickling the throat. Diluents may be tak- 
en until the poison is got rid of, but the return to solid food 
must be very gradual. Inflammatory and other consequences 
to be treated by the usual remedies. 



OXALIC ACID. 



Emetics. Chalk or magnesia made into cream with water. 
Lime water and oil may be given. During recovery, warmth, 
stimulants, rhubarb and magnesia. 



NARCOTICS. 



OPIUJM, MORPHIA, BELLADONNA, ATROPIA, HENBANE, STRAMONIUM. 

CONIUM. 

The stomach to be effectually evacuated, by pump or an 
emetic of lobelia or ipecac, and repeating it every quartei of an 
hour till the full effect is produced. These means may be as- 
sisted by tickling the throat with a feather, or the finger. Large 
and strong clysters of soap dissolved in water, or salt and gru- 
el, should be speedily administered, to clear the bowels and 
assist in getting rid of the poison, and active purgatives may 
be given after the vomiting has ceased. When as much as 
possible of the poison has been expelled, the patient may drink 
strong, hot infusion of coffee. If the drowsiness, which is 
sometimes extreme, and the insensibility, bordering on apo- 
plexy, be not remedied by these means and by the tepid bath, 
blood may be taken from the jugular vein, blisters may be ap- 
plied to the neck and legs, and the attention roused by every 
means possible. During the opium stupor keep the patient 
walking up and down between two assistants. If the heat de- 
clines, warmth and friction must be perseveringly used. It is 
desirable that but little fluid of any kind should be given, as it 
promotes the diffusion and absorption of the poison, for which 
no special antidote is at present known. 



378 A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 



ANIMAL POISONS. 

POISONOUS FISH, STALE FISH, MUSSELS, ETC. 

Emetics. Large draughts of warm water. After full vomit- 
ing, active purgatives. Give vinegar and water, and sponge 
the body with the same. The after treatment must be accord- 
ing to the symptoms. 



VENOMOUS INSECTS. 



SPIDER, SCORPION, HORNET, WASP, BEE, GNAT, GAD FLY. 

Hartshorn, or hartshorn and oil applied to the part, or a rag 
moistened with the same, or salt and water, until the pain 
ceases. A few drops of hartshorn (aqua ammonia) may be 
given in water, or a glass or two of wine may be taken. The 
sting may be removed by pressing over it the barrel of a small 
watch-key. 



POISONOUS SERPENTS, RABID DOGS. 

Apply a tight ligature above the bite. Remove the bitten 
part with the knife, letting it bleed after being well washed 
with warm water. Cauterize with red or white hot iron or 
lunar caustic, then cover with lint dipped in volatile liniment 
(hartshorn and olive oil). Remove the ligature if much inflam- 
mation ensues. Induce perspiration, keep the patient warm in 
bed, and give whiskey occasionally. The after treatment must 
be governed by the symptoms. There is no known specific 
treatment for Hydrophobia. 



TABLES. 



APOTHECARIES' FLUID MEASURE. 

IN GENERAL USE IN THE U. S. 

Sixty minims or drops make one fluid drachm (f. 3i). 

Eight fluid drachms make one fluid ounce (f. §i). 

Sixteen fluid ounces make one pint (o. i). 

Eight pints make one gallon (c. i). 

In practice, the letter "f " is generally omitted from the sign. 

Also the letters " ch," in the word drachm are often omitted. 

APPROXIMATE MEASURES. 

The following rule, although not exact, is considered safe 
for general domestic practice : — 

Sixty drops equal one teaspoonful, or one fluid drachm. 

One teaspoonful equals one fluid drachm, or sixty drops. 

Four teaspoonfuls equal one tablespoonful, or half a fluid 
ounce. 

Half a fluid ounce equals one tablespoonful, or four tea- 
spoonfuls. 

Two tablespoonfuls equal one fluid ounce, or eight teaspoon- 
fuls. 

One fluid ounce equals two tablespoonfuls. 

A teacupful equals four fluid ounces. 

A wine-glassful equals one-half gill, or two fluid ounces. 

APOTHECARIES' WEIGHTS. 

Twenty grains (gr. xx.) make one scruple (3 i). 
Three scrupels make one drachm (3i). 
Eight drachms make one ounce (3 i). 
Twelve ounces make one pound (lb i). 

The Troy pound contains 5760 grains. The avoirdupois 
pound contains 7000 grains. To make the avoirdupois ounce 
equal the Troy, add 42^ grains. To reduce the avoirdupois 
pound to Troy, deduct 1240 grains. 



38o 



A. H. DAVIS' THEORY AND 



TABLE OF SIGNS AND ABBREVIATIONS. 



3 


Recipe. 


Take. 


Collyr. 


Collyrum. 


An eye-water. 


aa 


Ana. 


Of each. 


Cong. 


Congius vel 


A gallon or gal- 


lb 


Libra vel librae. 


A pound or 




congii. 


lons. 






pounds. 


Decoct, 


Decoctum. 


A. decoction. 


I 


Uncia vel unciae. 


An ounce or 


Ft. 


Fiat. 


Make. 






ounces. 


Garg. 


Gargarysma. 


A gargle. 


3 


Drachma vel 


A drachm or 


Gr. 


Granum vel 


A graia or 




Drachmae. 


drachms. 




grana. 


grains. 


^ 


Scrupulus vel 


A scruple or 


Gtt. 


Gutta vel guttas. 


A drop or drops. 




scrupuli. 


scruples. 


Haust. 


Haustus. 


A draught. 





Octarius vel oc- 


A pint or pints. 


Infus. 


Infusum. 


An infusion. 




tarii. 




M. 


Misce. 


Mix. 


f! 


Fliiiduncia vel 


A fluid ounce or 


Mass. 


Massa. 


A mass. 




fluiduncise. 


fluid ounces. 


Mist. 


Mistura. 


A mixture. 


f3 


Fluidrachma vel 


A fluidrachm or 


Pil. 


Pilula vel 


A pill or pills. 




fluidrachmas. 


fluidraehms. 




pilulae. 




iri 


Minimum vel 


A minim or 


Pulv. 


Pulvis vel pul- 


A powder or 




minima. 


minims. 




veres. 


powders. 


Chart 


Chartula vel 


A small paper 


Q.S. 


Quantum suffi- 


A sufficient 




chartulse. 


or papers. 




cit. 


quantity. 


Coch. 


Cochlear vel 


A spoonful or 


S. 


Signa. 


Write. 




cochlearia. 


spoonsfuls. 


Ss. 


Semis. 


A half. 



GAUBIUS' TABLE, 



OR PROPORTIONAL DOSES ACCORDING TO AGE. 



For an adult suppose the dose to be I or I dram. 

Under I year will require I-I2 or 5 grains. 



" 


2 years 


« << 


1-8 ' 


< 8 " 


«( 


3 " 


" " 


1-6 


'10 " 


11 


a " 


(( cc 


i-4 


'15 " 


" 


7 "• 


(1 « 


1-3 


4 1 scruple. 


" 


14 " 


" 


1-2 


' 1-2 dram. 


(( 


20 " 


(« <( 


2-3 


1 2 scruples 


From 21 to 60 the full dose, or 


1 or 1 dram 


Above this age, 


an inverse 


gradation 


must be observed. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 



38l 



Henry Thayer & Co., 

Cambridgeport, Mass., 

MANUFACTURE FLUID and SOLID EXTRACTS THAT 

CAN BE RELIED UPON FOR PURITY AND 

UNIFORMITY OF STRENGTH; 

ALSO 

stto--A.:r coated dpzlls. 



For the convenience of persons using this medical work, 
a list of houses are here given who are Thayer & Co.'s Whole- 
sale Agents for the sale of their remedies and where every 
remedy mentioned in this work can be obtained : 



Theodore Ricksecker, General Agent, 146 & 
148 William Street, New York. 

H. A. Hurlbut & Co., Agents for the North- 
West, 75 & 77 Randolph Street, Chicago, 
Illinois. 

Carter, Harris & Hawley, Boston, Mass. 

Cutler Bros. & Co., Boston, Mass. 

Geo. C. Goodwin & Co., Boston, Mass. 

Gilman Bros , Boston, Mass. 

Rust Bros., & Bird, Boston, Mass. 

Geo. W. Swett, Boston, Mass. 

Smith. Doolittle & Smith, Boston, Mass. 

Weeks & Potter, Boston, Mass. 

J. W. Perkins & Co., Portland, Me. 

W. F. Phillips & Co., Pordand, Me. 

W. L. Alden & Co., Bangor, Me. 

Wells, Richardson & Co., Burlington, Vt. 

E. A. Whittlesey, New Haven, Ct. 

Wm. B. Blanding, Providence, R. I. 

Chambers. Calder & Co., Providence, R. I. 

Geo L. Claflin & Co., Providence, R. I. 

Carleton & Hovey. Lowell, Mass. 

C. M. Lyman, Buffalo. N. Y. 

Luce & Plumb, Utica. N. Y. 

Robinson & Church, Troy, N. Y. 

C. W. Snow & Co., Syracuse, N. Y. 

John L. Thompson, Sons & Co. Troy, N.Y. 

J. S. Frizell & Co., Dayton, Ohio. 

R. Macready & Co., Cincinnati, Ohio. 

J. F. Marquardt, Tiffin. Ohio 

Leich & Lemcke, Evansville, Ind. 

Emmert & Burre.l, Freeport, HI. 

Fuller & Fuller, Chicago, 111. 

Wm. V. Marmon, Bloomington, 111. 



Singer & Wheeler, Peoria, 111. 
Sommer, Lynds & Co., Quincy, 111. 
Theodore Egersdorff, Leavenworth, Kan. 
T. J. Eaton, Kansas City, Mo. 
Junkermann & Haas, Dubuque, Iowa. 

D. C. Meseroll, Jackson, Mich. 
Richardson & Co., St. Louis, Mo. 

C. P. Squires & Co., Burlington, Iowa. 
J. L. Taylor & Co., Ottumwa. Iowa. 
W. H. Torbert & Co., Dubuque, Iowa. 
Wilkinson, Bartlett & Co., Keokuk, Iowa. 
C. H. Ward & Co., DesMoines, Iowa. 
Greene & Button Co., Milwaukee, Wis 

E. B. Hemstreet, Janesville, Wis. 
Kalk & Kent, Fond du Lac, Wis. 
A. A. Pardee & Bro., Madison, Wis. 
Swift & Dodds, Detroit, Mich. 
Hodge, Davis & Co., Portland, Oregon. 
C. F. Goodman, Omaha, Neb. 
Redington & Co , San Francisco, Cal. 

Jas. G. Steele & Co., San Francisso, Cal. 

Wm. M. Hickman, Stockton, Cal. 

Alford, Newhouse & Co., Louisville, Ky, 

Demoville & Co., Nashville, Tenn. 

H. C. Kirk & Co., Sacramento, Cal. 

W. N. Wilkerson & Co., Memphis, Tenn. 

Barrett & Land, Augusta, Ga. 

Geo. Coster & Co., Mobile, Ala. 

E. deLanzac, New Orleans, La. 

G. R. Finlay & Co., New Orleans, La. 

E.J, Hart & Co., New Orleans, La. 

Hunt, Rankin & Lamar, Atlanta, Ga. 

Geo. Hughes & Bro., Jacksonville, Fla. 

Thompson, Schott & Co., Galveston, Tex. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 



383 




DR. A. H. DAVIS' 

Improved Theoey and Practice of Medicine 



IS NOW IN PRESS. 



This work is written in plain English language and designed 
for family use. The author's discovery of the laws and uses 
of the nervous system sheds a triumphal light upon the laws 
of health and all the systemic derangements, thus rendering 
every disease so plain, and the mode of successful treatment so 
clear, as to enable parents to treat their families successfully. 
This work gives a minute description of every organ and vessel 
comprising the human system, and furnishes much new light of 
great interest upon systemic laws, important to a full compre- 
hension of the great number of its derangements. The work 
contains a full catalogue of diseases, which are often so minutely 
described that one can not fail to comprehend the important 
points in the case. The causes of disease and indications of 
cure, much of which are original and interesting, based, as they 
are, upon the causes affecting general or local nutrition. The 
work contains an extensive Materia Medica, each article of 
which is historically described and its medical properties given, 
the best and most reliable preparations of which are put up 
for use in the form of fluid extracts, of uniform strength, that 
will keep for all time, and free from all adulteration, ready for 
use or for combination, as recommended in the formulas ; 
each of which has the quantity of dose carefully given, and 
in what cases indicated. The unvaried success that has attend- 
ed the author's practice in the treatment of acute congestive 
fevers and severe organic derangements, for the last twenty- 
five years, is wholly due to the light of these discovered sys- 
temic laws herein published as contributions to medical science. 
The work has been condensed so as to come within the means 
of all. No family can afford to be without a copy. Octavo. 
Bound in cloth, and sent, postage free, upon the receipt of a 
postal order, for $2.50. Address 

Dr. A. H. DAVIS, 

Janesville, Wisconsin, 

Office, North Main street, by the "Gazette" office. P.O.Box 1474. 



